RPP-SPEC-60023 Rev.07 2/14/2018 - 2:57 PM 1 of 317
Release Stamp DOCUMENT RELEASE AND CHANGE FORM
Prepared For the U.S. Department of Energy, Assistant Secretary for Environmental Management By Washington River Protection Solutions, LLC., PO Box 850, Richland, WA 99352 Contractor For U.S. Department of Energy, Office of River Protection, under Contract DE-AC27-08RV14800 TRADEMARK DISCLAIMER: Reference herein to any specific commercial product, process, or service by trade name, trademark, DATE: manufacturer, or otherwise, does not necessarily constitute or imply its endorsement, recommendation, or favoring by the United States government or any agency thereof or its contractors or subcontractors. Printed in the United States of America. 1. Doc No: RPP-SPEC-60023 Rev. 07 Feb 14, 2018
2. Title: Construction Specification for A/AX-Farm Waste Retrieval Project 3. Project Number: ☐ N/A 4. Design Verification Required: T2R02 ☐ Yes ☒ No 5. USQ Number: ☒ N/A 6. PrHA Number Rev. ☐ N/A Clearance Review Restriction Type: N/A-8 PRHA-02038 00 public PRHA-02039 00 PRHA-02040 00 PRHA-02041 00 PRHA-02042 00 PRHA-02043 00 PRHA-02044 00 PRHA-02045 00 FORFO PRHA-02046 00 OORPRHA-02047P 00 7. Approvals TitleR NameNam Signature Date Clearance ReviewAAA AARDAL,DALDA JANIS D AARDAL, JANIS D 02/14/2018 Design Authority WITHERSPOON,INFORMATONINTHERSPTHERS JP P WITHERSPOON, JP P 02/14/2018 Checker HAGENSEN,AGENSEN,NF ALAN R HAGENSEN, ALAN R 02/14/2018 Document Control Approval HOOD,OD,, EVAN HOOD, EVAN 02/14/2018 Originator QUAM, PAULFO R QUAM, PAUL R 02/14/2018 Other Approver DAHL, MEGANEGANOORAN M DAHL, MEGAN M 02/14/2018 Other Approver SNYDER, JOSHUAOSHUASHUA J SNYDER, JOSHUA J 02/14/2018 Other Approver BRYDEN, MICHAELHAELAELRM J BRYDEN, MICHAEL J 02/14/2018 Other Approver NELSON, RICK E NELSON, RICK E 02/14/2018 PrHA Lead SMITH, RYAN D MA SMITH, RYAN D 02/14/2018 Responsible Engineering Manager HANSON, CARL E HANSON, CARL E 02/14/2018 USQ Evaluator SMITH, RYAN D AT SMITH, RYAN D 02/14/2018 8. Description of Change and Justification TO Problem: RPP-SPEC-60023 Cathodic Protection for Underground and Submerged Pipingping (13 447 13.13) specifies the use of the pin brazing method to mechanically connect conductors to old and new pipelines. The associated drawings specify theth use of exothermic or "cadwelds" to attach conductors to the pipelines. Similarly, the cathodic protection DA prefers the use of exothermic welds.ds.s. In additaddaddition, details regarding the anode junction boxes were unclear.
Solution: Remove reference to pin brazing for conductor to pipeline attachments, and replace withONLYh exothermicexothermexother weld instructions and specifications. Update anode junction box specifications.
Testing/Analysis: Exothermic welds have been used to connect cathodic protection conductors to pipelinesnes for manmany years on site. The exothermic weld methodology and execution is well understood and adequate for use.
Other minor changes on this revision that do not require testing or analysis include the following: * Sections 40 05 13 and 40 24 10: Clarified piping section by adding Paragraph 3.2.F.8 (and Paragraph 3.2.F.9, respectively) to specify 2-hole position flange orientation. * Section 40 05 13: Clarified Fittings specification in Paragraph 3.5.B Components List to include ASTM A403 for butt weld fittings. * Section 09 91 00: Sherwin Williams has replaced Zinc Clad II with Zinc Clad IV as an equivalent product. * Section 31 23 00: Clarified backfill section to specifically require the preparation of a backfill permit. At Paragraphs 3.7, 3.8, 3.9, and 3.10 added a statement to say that the subcontractor shall prepare the backfill permit and obtain approval prior to commencing. * Throughout: Correct the paragraph number references to the 2016 revision of ACI 301. * Section 40 42 00: Removed the unnecessary requirement in Paragraph 2.2.B.2 that roll jacketing be in compliance with ASTM 1767. * Section 05 50 00: Add additional torques for larger sizes to table in Paragraph 3.3.D.
Note - This revision does not modify any sections in which the PE stamp applies to. The stamp on record in revision 4 is still valid.
Design checks were performed in accordance with ARES Quality Assurance Procedures (QAP). Because of the nature of the change a graded approach was applied and design verification was not performed as allowed by ARES QAP 3.5, Design Verification.
9. TBDs or Holds ☒ N/A
1 SPF-001 (Rev.D1) RPP-SPEC-60023 Rev.07 2/14/2018 - 2:57 PM 2 of 317
DOCUMENT RELEASE AND CHANGE FORM Doc No: RPP-SPEC-60023 Rev. 07
10. Related Structures, Systems, and Components a. Related Building/Facilities ☐ N/A b. Related Systems ☐ N/A c. Related Equipment ID Nos. (EIN) ☐ N/A 241-A 241-EDS A285-PA-V-049 241-A-285 241-PA A285-RW-BFP-001 241-AX 241-RC A285-RW-V-017 241-RW A285-RW-V-018 241-WT 11. Impacted Documents – Engineering ☒ N/A Document Number Rev. Title
12. Impacted Documents (Outside SPF): N/A 13. Related Documents ☐ N/A Document Number Rev. Title 58776-005-RFI-006 00 RFI - Lead Times: Aloyco Valves (Eng Review Nec, RPP-SPEC-60023 R3, DCN-TBD & Clarif Only) DCN-713162 00 Changeha Valve from Aloyco to Powell for A285 Water System RPP-CALC-60167 01241 241-AX-AXA Farm Buried & Above Grade Water and Chemical Piping ASME B31.3 and B31.9 Analysis RPP-CALC-60217 00FORFFO241 241-A-285-A-28 Air and Water Service Building ASME Piping Analysis TOC-MT-00070 00A OR and AXAX-Farm-Fa Infrastructure Upgrades and AX-Farm Retrieval Equipment Removal/Installation Design Support 14. Distribution R Name Organization ATKINS, LARRY BINFORMIIN CONSTRUCTION & COMMISSIONING BRYDEN, MICHAEL JNF C-FARM RETRIEVAL ENGRNG COOK, SHAUN M HOPKINS, GARY PFO R&C CONSTRUCTION HULL, KEVIN JOOR ELECTRICAL/AREA/242A-EVAP ENG PARKMAN, DAVID B MARS-BASED RETRIEVAL ENGRNG STEPHENS, RANDALL F RMATONRM WHITE, JEREMEY C PROJECTSP WORK PACKAGE PLANNING WIKSTRAND, CHRIS BMMA CONSTRUCTIONCON & COMMISSIONING WITHERSPOON, JP P A/AX RETRIEVALR ENGRNG
ONLY
2 SPF-001 (Rev.D1) RPP-SPEC-60023 Rev.07 2/14/2018 - 2:57 PM 3 of 317
RPP-SPEC-60023
Revision 7
CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION FOR A/AX-FARMS WASTE RETRIEVAL PROJECT FOR
Prepared by INFORMATON PR Quam Washington River Protection Solutions,lutions,utions, LLLLC
Date Published February 2018
ONLY
Prepared for the U.S. Department of Energy Office of River Protection
Contract No. DE-AC27-08RV14800
Approved for Public Release; Further Dissemination Unlimited A-6007-231 (REV 0) RPP-SPEC-60023 Rev.07 2/14/2018 - 2:57 PM 4 of 317
RPP-SPEC-60023, Rev. 7
CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION FOR A/AX-FARMS WASTE RETRIEVAL PROJECT
FOR
February 2018 INFORMATON
ppreparedrep by
ARES CorporationCorporaCorpor Energy Servicesvices DiviDivision 1100 Jadwin Avenue,nue, Suite 400 Richland, Washingtononn 99352 (509) 946-3300 ONLY
prepared for
Washington River Protection Solutions, LLC RPP-SPEC-60023 Rev.07 2/14/2018 - 2:57 PM 5 of 317
RPP-SPEC-60023, Rev. 7
TABLE OF CONTENTS No. of Section Pages
Title Pages 2 Table of Contents 2
DIVISION 01 – GENERAL REQUIREMENTS Division 01 Sections are under separate cover – see WRPS Statement of Work (SOW)
DIVISION 02 – EXISTING CONDITIONS Section 02 41 00 Demolition 3
DIVISION 03 – CONCRETEFORONCRE Section 03 15 00Post Post-Installedos - Concrete Anchor Bolts 3 Section 03 30 00 ConcreteConcretConcre 18
DIVISION 05 – METALS INFORMATON Section 05 50 00 Metal FabricationsFabricatio 8 Section 05 53 00 Metal Gratingstingsings 5
DIVISION 06 – WOOD, PLASTICS, AND COMPOSITESCO Section 06 10 00 Carpentry 10
DIVISION 07 – THERMAL AND MOISTUREE PROTECTIONPROT Section 07 92 00 Joint Sealants 5
DIVISION 09 – FINISHES Section 09 91 00 Painting 6 Section 09 96 00 High-Performance CoatingsONLY 7
DIVISION 13 – SPECIAL CONSTRUCTION Section 13 34 19 Metal Building Systems 39 Section 13 47 13.13 Cathodic Protection for Underground and Submergedgedge PipingP 10
DIVISION 22 – PLUMBING Section 22 15 00 Compressed Air Piping 10
DIVISION 23 – HVAC Section 23 31 01 Tank Ventilation Ducting 3 Section 23 31 13 Air Compressor Metal Ducts 4
ii RPP-SPEC-60023 Rev.07 2/14/2018 - 2:57 PM 6 of 317
RPP-SPEC-60023, Rev. 7
No. of Section Pages
DIVISION 26 – ELECTRICAL Section 26 05 19 Low Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and Cables 15 Section 26 05 26 Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems 9 Section 26 05 29 Hangers and Supports for Electrical Systems 6 Section 26 05 33 Raceways and Boxes for Electrical Systems 14 Section 26 05 53 Identification for Electrical Systems 8 Section 26 10 00 Medium Voltage Electrical Distribution 12 Section 26 22 13 Low Voltage Distribution Transformers 5 Section 26 24 13 Switchboards 4 Section 26 24 16 Panelboards 5 Section 26 27 26FOR WiringW Devices 5 Section 26 28 16 EnclosedEnc Switches and Circuit Breakers 4 Section 26 51 00 Interior Lighting 3 Section 26 56 00ExteriorExterio Lighting 6 INFORMATON DIVISION 31 – EARTHWORKRK Section 31 23 00 Excavationon and FilFiFill 18
DIVISION 33 – UTILITIES Section 33 10 00 Water Utilities 15
DIVISION 40 – PROCESS INTEGRATION Section 40 05 13 Process Piping 17 Section 40 05 22 Hose-in-Hose Transfer Line SySSystemstem InIInstallation 8 Section 40 24 10 Chemical Piping 15 Section 40 41 00 Process Piping and Equipment Heatatt TracTracingngg 5 Section 40 42 00 Process Piping and Equipment InsulationionONLYn 7
iii RPP-SPEC-60023 Rev.07 2/14/2018 - 2:57 PM 7 of 317
RPP-SPEC-60023, Rev. 7
CERTIFICATION I certify that the indicated sections of this Specification were prepared by me or under my supervision and that I am a registered architect/professional engineer under the laws of the State of Washington.
FOR
INFORMATON
Civil
Section 33 10 00 – UtilitiesUtilitie
ONLY
iv RPP-SPEC-60023 Rev.07 2/14/2018 - 2:57 PM 8 of 317
RPP-SPEC-60023, Rev. 7
SECTION 02 41 00
DEMOLITION
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS / CODES AND STANDARDS
Drawings and general provisions of the Contract Statement of Work, including Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
The following documents and others referenced therein, form part of the Contract to the extent designatednate in this Section. Referenced documents are those current as of the date of this SectionFORtion unlununless otherwise indicated.
A. Code off Federal Regulations (CFR) 29 CFR Partt1t 1910.94910.94INFORMATON Occupational Health and Environmental Control, Subpart G, U.S. Department of Labor, Occupational Safety and Health Administration (OSHA)
29 CFR Part 1926SafSa Safety and Health Regulations for Construction
B. Hanford Documents
TFC-ESHQ-S-STD-30 Implementationlementatiomentati of DOE-0344, Excavating, Trenching,hing,ng, and SShoring
C. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA)PA)A)
NFPA 70, 2014®1 National ElectricallONLY Code®1(NEC1 ®1)
NFPA 70E®1 Standard for Electrical SafetySafetafety in the Workplace
D. Washington Administrative Code (WAC)
Title 173, Department of Ecology, Chapter 173-303, Dangerous Waste Regulations.
1.2 SUBMITTALS
Not Used.
1 NFPA 70, National Electrical Code, NEC, and NFPA 70E are registered trademarks of the National Fire Protection Association, Quincy, Massachusetts.
02 41 00 – 1 RPP-SPEC-60023 Rev.07 2/14/2018 - 2:57 PM 9 of 317
RPP-SPEC-60023, Rev. 7
1.3 PERMITS
A. Permits are addressed by TOC work control process.
1. Deleted.
2. Deleted.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
Not Used.
PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATIONFORATIONATIO A. Before beginninbeginning cutting or demolition, survey existing work and examine the Drawingss and SpSSpecifications to determine extent of work. Coordinate work of this Section wwithINFORMATONh otherotheoth work. B. Determine if any ttypeype of chchemicals, gases, flammable materials, or other dangerous materials haveve bebeen used in pipes or other equipment based on job hazard evaluation or Excavationxcavation Permit. Control hazards associated with these materials prior to demolitionion per theth work control process.
3.2 PREPARATION
A. Personnel Protection: Provide safeguards,uards,ards, incinclincluding warning signs, barricades, and temporary closures required for protectiontectionection oof construction personnel and others during demolition and removal operations.rations.ations.
B. Ensure that structural elements are not overloadededONLYd as a reresresult of cutting, removal, or demolition. Construct and maintain shoring, bracing,acing,cing, and supports as required.
C. Disconnect existing utility services specified by Washingtongton RivRiver Protection Solutions (WRPS) Engineering Change Notice (ECN) or MMissionissioi Support Alliance Engineering Change Request (ECR). If no direction is included in an ECN or ECR, proceed as directed by the work control process.
3.3 PERFORMANCE
A. Control amount of dust resulting from demolition to prevent spread of dust and to avoid creation of dust in surrounding area. Do not use water if ice, flooding, or pollution could occur. Follow requirements of state Waste Discharge Permit ST4511.
02 41 00 – 2 RPP-SPEC-60023 Rev.07 2/14/2018 - 2:57 PM 10 of 317
RPP-SPEC-60023, Rev. 7
B. Demolition Operations.
1. Remove equipment from tanks in accordance with applicable Work Packages, ECNs, and required work controls, such as Radiological Work Permit (RWP).
2. Dispose of debris in accordance with Contract Statement of Work requirements.
END OF SECTION 02 41 00 FOR
INFORMATON
ONLY
02 41 00 – 3 RPP-SPEC-60023 Rev.07 2/14/2018 - 2:57 PM 11 of 317
RPP-SPEC-60023, Rev. 7
SECTION 03 15 00
POST-INSTALLED CONCRETE ANCHOR BOLTS
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS / CODES AND STANDARDS
Drawings and general provisions of the Contract Statement of Work, including Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
The following documents and others referenced therein, form part of the Contract to the extent designatednate in this Section. Referenced documents are those current as of the date of this SectionFORtion unlununless otherwise indicated.
A. Hanfordrd DocumDocuments TFC-ENG-STD-06STDINFORMATON-06 Design Loads for Tank Farm Facilities B. International Codedee CounciCouncil (ICC)
ESR-1917H Hilti®2 Kwik Bolt TZ Carbon and Stainless Steel AnchAncAnchors in Concrete
ESR-1546 Hilti HDAHD Carbon Steel and Stainless Steel Undercutdercutrcut AnchorsAn for Cracked and Uncracked Concreteetee
IBC Internationall BuildinBuilding Code
1.2 SUBMITTALS ONLY
A. See the Contract Statement of Work for the submittall process.process.
B. Approval Required
1. Training Records (Paragraph 1.3.A): 5 days before installation.
2. Special Inspection Qualifications (Paragraph 1.3.C): 5 days before start of installation.
3. Deleted.
C. Deleted.
1. Deleted.
2 Hilti is a registered trademark of Hilti Corporation, Schaan, Liechtenstein.
03 15 00 – 1 RPP-SPEC-60023 Rev.07 2/14/2018 - 2:57 PM 12 of 317
RPP-SPEC-60023, Rev. 7
1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Contractor shall train post-installed anchor installers. Installers shall be trained to the anchor manufacturer’s installation instructions, design document requirements, and the anchor installation report. Contractor shall deliver installer training records to the Company.
B. Misrepresented Products: See the Contract Statement of Work for required measures to prevent use of misrepresented products.
C. Post-Installed Anchor Special Inspector Qualifications.
1. Two years’ experience in concrete inspection and/or certification from AAmerican Concrete Institute, ICC, International Conference of Building FOROffiOfficials, or other recognized concrete inspection agency to be provided byby the TankT Operations Contractor (TOC). 1.4 DELIVERY, STORAGE,ORARAINFORMATONGE, AND HANDLING A. See Contract Statementatement oof Work for general requirements.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 SUBSTITUTES
A. See Contract Statement of Workk for substsubstitution approvals.
2.2 MATERIALS
A. Post-installed anchors (PC-2, PC-1, and PC-0):C--0): InIndustry standard wedge-type having a published evaluation report (by ICC EvEEvaluationONLYaluatioaluati Services, Inc.), with anchor descriptions, tables of allowable tension andnd shearshea loads (including seismic and wind qualifications), and test findings.
B. Hilti Corporation or approved equal:
1. Kwik Bolt TZ Expansion Anchor.
2. HDA Metric Undercut Anchor.
C. Anchors located in dry, interior locations may be carbon steel. Anchors located in wet or potentially wet interior locations (e.g., water building installations) and exterior locations shall be stainless steel.
D. Anchorage must be designed to TFC-ENG-STD-06.
03 15 00 – 2 RPP-SPEC-60023 Rev.07 2/14/2018 - 2:57 PM 13 of 317
RPP-SPEC-60023, Rev. 7
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine areas where expansion anchors are to be installed and notify the Company, in writing, of conditions detrimental to proper and timely completion of work. Do not proceed with work until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2 PREPARATION
A. For expansion anchors larger than 3/8 in., locate rebar by scanning before drilling. For expansion anchors 3/8 in. or smaller, avoid cutting rebar by using a drill with a concealed-metalFORcea detector shutoff. B. Do not install anchors in concrete prior to 28 days after concrete placement unless it can bee shown bby testing that the concrete design strength has been obtained.
3.3 INSTALLATION INFORMATON
A. Expansion AnchorrrI IInstallationnstallat
1. Install anchors shownhown on the Drawings in accordance with training.
2. Notify the TOC Constructionstructiontruction RepresentativeR if reinforcing steel is encountered when drilling.ng.g.
3.4 FIELD INSPECTIONS AND TESTS
A. Special Inspection is required for all anchororr bolt ininstallations. This shall be done in accordance with Section 4 of the applicablee ICIICCONLYC EEvaluationv Report. The special inspector shall be on the jobsite during anchornchorchor instininstallation to verify anchor type, anchor dimensions, hole dimensions, hole cleaninganingning procproprocedures, anchor spacing, edge distances, drill bit size, anchor embedmentent and tigttightening torque. Complete inspections shall be documented by the inspectortor on ExpansionEx Anchor Installation Report (Form A-6004-239) (or Company-approvedved equivalent) and documented in the work package.
B. Installation Reports (Paragraph 3.4.A): Within 10 days after work is complete (Expansion Anchor Installation Report [Form A-6004-239]).
END OF SECTION 03 15 00
03 15 00 – 3 RPP-SPEC-60023 Rev.07 2/14/2018 - 2:57 PM 14 of 317
RPP-SPEC-60023, Rev. 7
SECTION 03 30 00
CONCRETE
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 SCOPE OF WORK
A. Formwork.
B. Reinforcement. C. Cast-In-PlaceFORn Items. D. Mixturexture DesiDesDesign.
E. Placementntt ProceProc Procedures.
F. Cast-in-Place ConcreteConcrete.INFORMATON
G. Pre-Cast Concrete.
H. Finishes for pre-engineeredredd metal bbuildings.
I. Concrete Test Cylinders.
J. Grout Test Blocks.
1.2 RELATED SECTIONS
A. Section 05 53 00, “Metal Gratings.” ONLY
B. Section 09 96 00, “High-Performance Coatings.”
C. Section 13 34 19, “Metal Building Systems.”
D. Section 31 23 00, “Excavation and Fill.”
1.3 RELATED DOCUMENTS, CODES, AND STANDARDS
Drawings and general provisions of the Contract Statement of Work, including Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
The following documents and others referenced therein, form part of the Contract to the extent designated in this Section. Referenced documents are those current as of the date of this Section unless otherwise indicated.
03 30 00 – 1 RPP-SPEC-60023 Rev.07 2/14/2018 - 2:57 PM 15 of 317
RPP-SPEC-60023, Rev. 7
A. American Concrete Institute (ACI)
ACI 117 Tolerances for Concrete Construction and Materials
ACI 237R Self-Consolidating Concrete
ACI 301 Structural Concrete for Buildings
ACI 305R Guide to Hot Weather Concreting
ACI 306.1 Standard Specification for Cold Weather Concreting ACIFOR 3080 Standard Practice for Curing Concrete ACII 31515 Details and Detailing of Concrete Reinforcement
ACI 318 Building Code Requirements for Structural INFORMATONConcrete and Commentary ACI 347 Recommended Practice for Concrete Formwork
ACI CP-1 TechnicalTe Workbook for ACI Certification of ConcConConcrete Field Testing Technician-Grade 1
B. ASTM International (ASTM)
ASTM A36 Standardard SpecificationSpecif for Carbon Structural Steel
ASTM A108 Standard Specificationpecificatiopecificati for Steel Bar, Carbon and Alloy, Cold-FinishednishishONLYd ASTM A185 Standard Specificationion for StSteel Welded Wire Reinforcement, Plain, forr ConcrConcreConcrete
ASTM A615 Standard Specification for DeformDeformedefo and Plain Billet-Steel Bars for Concrete Reinforcement
ASTM A853 Standard Specification for Steel Wire, Carbon, for General Use
ASTM C31 Standard Practice for Making and Curing Concrete Test Specimens in the Field
ASTM C33 Standard Specification for Concrete Aggregates
ASTM C39 Standard Test Method for Compressive Strength of Cylindrical Concrete Specimens
03 30 00 – 2 RPP-SPEC-60023 Rev.07 2/14/2018 - 2:57 PM 16 of 317
RPP-SPEC-60023, Rev. 7
ASTM C94 Standard Specification for Ready-Mixed Concrete
ASTM C143 Standard Test Method for Slump of Hydraulic Cement Concrete
ASTM C150 Standard Specification for Portland Cement
ASTM C172 Standard Practice for Sampling Freshly Mixed Concrete
ASTM C231 Standard Test Method for Air Content of Freshly Mixed Concrete by the Pressure Method
ASTMM C260C Standard Specification for Air-Entraining FOR Admixtures for Concrete
ASTM C404 Standard Specification for Aggregates for Masonry INFORMATONGrout ASTM C476 Standard Specification for Grout for Masonry
ASTM C1077 Standard Practice for Agencies Testing Concrete andan Concrete Aggregates for Use in Construction and CrCriteria for Testing Agency Evaluation
ASTM C1093 Standardtandardandard PracticePr for Accreditation of Testing Agenciesnciescies for MasonryM
ASTM C1107 Standard SpecificationSpecificatSpecific for Packaged Dry, Hydraulic-Cementementment GGrout (Nonshrink) ONLY ASTM D1751 Standard Specificationationtion for PPreformed Expansion Joint Filler for Concreteetete PavinPaving and Structural Construction (Nonextrudingding and RResilient Bituminous Types)
ASTM F593 Standard Specification for Stainless Steel Bolts, Hex Cap Screws, and Studs
ASTM F594 Standard Specification for Stainless Steel Nuts
C. Concrete Reinforcing Steel Institute (CRSI)
Manual of Standard Practice
D. National Ready Mixed Concrete Association (NRMCA)
QC Manual – Section 3 Certification of Ready Mixed Concrete Production Facilities
03 30 00 – 3 RPP-SPEC-60023 Rev.07 2/14/2018 - 2:57 PM 17 of 317
RPP-SPEC-60023, Rev. 7
E. American Welding Society (AWS)
AWS D1.1, 2010 Structural Welding Code-Steel
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. See Contract Statement of Work for submittal procedures.
B. Approval Required.
1. Concrete Data: Before mixing, submit concrete materials, mix design, and mix proportions, in accordance with ACI 301. Identify each material to be used in concrete, including amount, by weight, to be utilized in each cubic FORyyard of plastic mix. 2. ReinforcementReinfo Shop Drawings: Prior to fabrication of reinforcement, submit plpplacement drawings that detail fabrication, bending, and placement.acemenaceme t. Include bars sizes, lengths, material, grade, bar schedules, stirrup INFORMATONspacingspacing, bent bar diagrams, bar arrangement, splices and laps, mechanicalicalcal conneconnections, tie spacing, hoop spacing, and supports for concrete reinforcement.inforcem
3. Setting drawings,s, diagramdiagrams, templates and instructions: Prior to fabrication, submit informatiinformationnformati for installation of anchorages, such as concrete inserts, anchoror bolts andan miscellaneous items having integral anchors, to be embedded in concreconcrete.
4. Certificate of Compliance: Provideovide CertificateCer of Compliance for cast-in- place anchors indicating they meetet the requirementsrequ of this Specification. 5. Concrete Placement drawings: Prior to settingONLYetting oof forms, submit placement drawings indicating planned placement sequenceequencequence anand locations of any planned joints, including those not shown onn the ConContContract drawings.
6. Concrete curing procedure: Before mixing, submitit a descdescription of materials and methods of curing, in accordance with AACI 301, Section 5.3.6.
7. Cold Weather Concreting Procedures: Before placement and if concrete will be placed during cold weather, submit procedures meeting requirements of ACI 301, Sections 4.2.2.5 and 5.3.2.1.b, and ACI 306.1.
8. Hot Weather Concreting Procedures: Before placement and if concrete will be placed during hot weather, submit procedures meeting requirements of ACI 301, Sections 4.2.2.5 and 5.3.2.1.c, and ACI 305R.
9. Product data of non-shrink grout.
03 30 00 – 4 RPP-SPEC-60023 Rev.07 2/14/2018 - 2:57 PM 18 of 317
RPP-SPEC-60023, Rev. 7
10. Submittals shall include the documentation listed in Paragraph 1.5.
11. Self-Consolidating Grout Data: Before mixing, submit grout materials, mix design, and mix proportions in accordance with ASTM C476. Identify each material to be used in grout, including amount, by weight, to be utilized in each cubic yard of plastic mix. Curing shall be performed in accordance with ACI 301, Section 5.3.6.
C. Deleted.
1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Deleted.
B. CertificationrtificatioFOR of Concrete Production Facility: The concrete supplier shall be certifiedfieded accoraccording to NRMCA’s “Certification of Ready Mixed Concrete Productiontion FacilFaciFacilities,” with compliance to ASTM C94 requirements for productionn facifacilfacilitiesINFORMATONties and equipment. C. Qualification off Concrete Inspection/Testing Laboratory: The laboratory including equipment,nt, personpersonnel, and procedures shall meet the requirements of ASTM C1077 and shallalll be currcurrently accredited by an independently recognized authority.
D. Concrete/Grout Placement Checklisthecklist (A(Attachment 1): The preplacement portion of the Concrete/Grout Placement Checklisthecklist shallshs be signed off prior to any concrete or grout placement. The Concrete/GroutGrout PlaPlacement Checklist shall include inspection of the following items priorr too placinplacing concrete or grout; forms, re-bar, subgrade, embedments, and other items thathat mayy nneed inspection.
E. Trip Ticket: Document that comes with the concretecreteONLYrete deldelivery that it meets specifications. “Trip Tickets” shall contain informationmation lislisted in ASTM C94, Paragraphs 14.1.1 through 14.1.10, and water/cementnt ratio.
F. Deliverable Documentation: The following documents andnd recorrecords, required by this Section, shall be delivered to Construction Document Controlon in accordance with Contract Documents.
Document Paragraph
Supplier Certification 1.5.B
Laboratory Qualifications 1.5.C
Inspection Personnel Qualification Records 1.6.A
Concrete Test Results 3.7.D
03 30 00 – 5 RPP-SPEC-60023 Rev.07 2/14/2018 - 2:57 PM 19 of 317
RPP-SPEC-60023, Rev. 7
Grout Test Results 3.7.F
G. Perform work in accordance with the applicable sections of ACI 117, ACI 301, ACI 318, and ASTM C476.
H. Suspect and Misrepresented Products: See Contract Statement of Work for required measures to prevent use of misrepresented products.
I. Trip Ticket: The Trip Ticket is provided with the concrete delivery and shall contain information listed in ASTM C94, Paragraphs 14.1.1 through 14.1.10, and water/cement ratio.
J. Qualification of Grout Inspection/Testing Laboratory: The laboratory including equipment,pmenpme personnel, and procedures shall meet the requirements of ASTM C1093FOR093 and shall be currently accredited by an independently recognized authority.orityity. 1.6 QUALIFICATIONONN OFOINFORMATONF CONCRETE/GROUTC INSPECTORS A. Personnel performingrming fielfiefield testing of concrete shall be ACI Concrete Field Testing Technicians,ns, Grade 1, who have received formal certification in accordance with ACI CP-1CP-1 or equivalent.e Equivalent certification programs shall include requirements forr written aand performance examination as stipulated in ACI 301, Section 1.6.2.
B. Deleted.
1.7 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLINGNG A. See the Contract Statement of Work for generalneral ONLYrerequirements.qu B. Steel reinforcement: Deliver, store, and handle steelteel reinforeinforcement to prevent bending and damage.
C. Waterstops: Store waterstops under cover to protect fromm moistumoisture dirt, oil, sunlight, and other contaminants.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 SUBSTITUTION
A. See the Contract Statement of Work for substitution approvals.
2.2 MATERIALS
A. Cast-In-Place Concrete
1. Cement: ASTM C150, Type II (low alkali).
03 30 00 – 6 RPP-SPEC-60023 Rev.07 2/14/2018 - 2:57 PM 20 of 317
RPP-SPEC-60023, Rev. 7
2. Aggregates: ASTM C33, 3/4-in. maximum size. Fine aggregate: free of materials with deleterious reactivity to alkali in cement.
3. Air-entraining admixture: ASTM C260.
4. Properties (if not specified by design):
a. Minimum allowable compressive strength: 4500 lb/in2 at 28 days, or as required by design documents.
b. Slump: In accordance with ACI 301, Section 4.2.2.2.
c. Air content: In accordance with ACI 301, Section 4.2.2.4.
FORd.d Proportions: In accordance with ACI 301, Section 4.2.3, and ASTM C94.
e.T Timem of discharge: In accordance with ASTM C94, Section 12 INFORMATONand ACAACI 301, Section 4.1.2.12. 5. Measuring,g,, Mixing, and Delivery: In accordance with ASTM C94.
B. Pre-Cast Concrete
1. Cement: ASTM C150,50, TyTypeype III (low alkali).
2. Aggregates: ASTM C33, 3/4-in.3/44-in.. maximumm size. Fine aggregate: free of materials with deleterious reactivityactivitctivity to alkali in cement.
3. Air-entraining admixture: ASTM C260C260.260.
4. Properties (if not specified by design): ONLY
a. Minimum allowable compressive strength:ngth:gth: 44,500,5 lb/in2 at 28 days, or as required by design documents.
b. Slump: In accordance with ACI 237R.
c. Air content: In accordance with ACI 237R.
d. Proportions: In accordance with ACI 237R, and ASTM C94.
e. Time of discharge: In accordance with ASTM C94, Section 12 and ACI 237R.
5. Measuring, Mixing, and Delivery: In accordance with ASTM C94.
03 30 00 – 7 RPP-SPEC-60023 Rev.07 2/14/2018 - 2:57 PM 21 of 317
RPP-SPEC-60023, Rev. 7
C. Controlled Density Fill (CDF): Portland cement based, minimum compressive strength of 100 psi at 28 days, maximum compressive strength of 300 psi at 28 days.
D. Reinforcing Steel
1. Steel bars: ASTM A615, deformed, Grade 60.
2. Tie wire: ASTM A853 carbon steel, 16-gage minimum, annealed.
3. Welded Steel Wire Fabric: ASTM A185 plain type in flat sheets.
E. Joint Dowel Bars: ASTM A615, Grade 60, plain-steel bars, cut true to length withFOR endsend square and free of burrs. F. Non-shrinkshrinkhrink GGrout 1. In accordaccoraccordanceINFORMATONn with ASTM C1107. 2. Minimumum strengtstrength of fluid grout, 4,000 psi at 1 day, 5,000 psi at 3 days, and 9,000 psi at 28 ddays.
G. Embedded Plates: See Section 050 50 00, “Metal Fabrications.”
H. Headed Weld Stud Anchors: ASTM A108, Grades 1015 through 1020, headed- stud type, cold-finished carbon steel; AWSAW D1.1/D1.1M, Type B.
I. Cast-In-Place Anchors: ASTM F5933 CW2 ththreaded rods with ASTM F594 nuts.
J. Post-Installed Anchors: See Section 03 15 00, ““Post-InstalledPo Concrete Anchor Bolts.” ONLY K. Expansion joint filler: ASTM D1751; asphalt impregnatedregnated ffiberboard or felt, 1/2-in. thick.
L. Joint sealants: See Section 07 92 00, “Joint Sealants.”
M. Forms: Wood, steel, plywood or Masonite Corporation “Concrete Form Presdwood,” as required for various specified finishes.
1. Form facing panels shall provide continuous, true, and smooth concrete surfaces.
2. Form release agent: Commercially formulated form-release agent that will not bond with, stain, or adversely affect concrete surfaces and will not impair subsequent treatments of concrete surfaces.
N. Bonding Agent: Polymer resin emulsion appropriate for bonding fresh concrete to existing set concrete.
03 30 00 – 8 RPP-SPEC-60023 Rev.07 2/14/2018 - 2:57 PM 22 of 317
RPP-SPEC-60023, Rev. 7
O. Special Coatings: See Section 09 96 00, “High-Performance Coatings,” for concrete coating. Extent of coating shall be as shown on Drawings.
P. Waterstops: Self-expanding Butyl Strip, manufactured rectangular or trapezoidal strip, butyl rubber with sodium bentonite or other hydrophilic polymers, for adhesive bonding to concrete, 3/4 by 1 in.
Q. Self-Consolidating Grout for use in Grout Boxes
1. In accordance with ASTM C476.
2. Aggregate: ASTM C404, Fine, Size No. 2, Natural or Manufactured. 3.FORP Properties (if not specified by design): a.a Minimum strength of grout, 3,000 psi at 28 days. b.INFORMATONM Maximumax unit weight of grout, 140 pcf (Ref. RPP-CALC-61007). 2.3 FABRICATING REINFORCEMENTINFORC
A. Fabricate steel reinforcementorcementemen according to CRSI’s “Manual of Standard Practice.”
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 PREPARATION
A. Form Construction
1. Install formwork in accordance withithth ACI 3301, Section 2.3 to support vertical, lateral, and construction loadsdssth ththatat migmight be applied, until structure can support such loads. ONLY
2. Construct formwork such that interior shape andnd rigiditrigidity of finished concrete will meet requirements of the Drawingss and appapproved shop drawings within tolerances specified in ACI 117, Sectionectionect 4.
3. Prepare form surfaces in accordance with ACI 301, Section 2 using specified form coating materials, or as described below.
4. Forms for surfaces which will be permanently concealed from view may be saturated with water, before placing concrete, instead of other treatment. In freezing weather, forms shall be treated with oil or stearate.
5. Clean forms of foreign material before placing concrete.
B. Prepare setting drawings, diagrams, templates, and instructions for installation of anchorages, such as concrete inserts, anchor bolts and miscellaneous items having integral anchors, to be embedded in concrete.
03 30 00 – 9 RPP-SPEC-60023 Rev.07 2/14/2018 - 2:57 PM 23 of 317
RPP-SPEC-60023, Rev. 7
C. Clean grout boxes of foreign material and remove free liquids within grout box prior to placement of contaminated equipment. Maintain cleanliness until self- consolidating grout placement.
3.2 EMBEDDED ITEMS
A. Prepare setting drawings, diagrams, templates, and instructions for installation of anchorages, such as concrete inserts, anchor bolts, and miscellaneous items having integral anchors, to be embedded in concrete.
B. Place and secure anchorage devices and other embedded items as required for adjoining work that is attached to or supported by cast-in-place concrete. All embedded items shall be securely supported to prevent displacement during concreteFORcrete placement and finishing. C. Verifyfyy that anchors,anc plates, reinforcement, and other items to be cast into concrete are accuratelyurately plpplaced, positioned securely, and will not cause hardship in placing concrete. DocumentDocuo INFORMATONmentmen inspection on Concrete/Grout Placement Checklist. 3.3 INSTALLATION
A. Reinforcing Steel
1. Fabricate and place barsars to ddimensions shown on Contract drawings, within tolerances shownwn in ACI 117, Sections 2.1 and 2.2.
2. Place as shown on Drawings,gs,s, within ttolerances specified in ACI 117, Section 2.2 and ACI 301, Sectionion 3.3.2.3.3.2 3. Tie to prevent displacement during placemplacementONLYent of concrete. 4. Do not force into concrete after initial sett has starstartstarted.
5. Provide concrete cover for reinforcement protectionectionction peper dimensions given in ACI 301, Section 3.3, except where shown otherwiseerwise ono Contract drawings or approved shop drawings.
6. Reinforcement shall be supported and fastened together to prevent displacement by construction loads, or placement of concrete beyond specified tolerances. Reinforcement supported from ground shall rest on precast, square concrete blocks, with a minimum surface area of 4 in2 and having a compressive strength equal to specified compressive strength of concrete being placed.
B. Concrete
1. Concrete Placing:
03 30 00 – 10 RPP-SPEC-60023 Rev.07 2/14/2018 - 2:57 PM 24 of 317
RPP-SPEC-60023, Rev. 7
a. Contractor shall use a Concrete/Grout Placement Checklist. Checklist shall be reviewed with the TOC Construction Representative prior to placing concrete. At a minimum, the checklist shall include:
i. Formwork placement.
ii. Earth compaction.
iii. Reinforcement placement.
iv. Embedded items. FOR v. Bonding electrode. vi. Concrete Mix. INFORMATONvivvii. Testing Requirements. viii. WeatherW conditions including proper weather mitigation requirequirements.
ix.Approval oof all preplacement submittals prior to placment.
x. Availabilityabilityy of associated materials and labor.
xi. Identificationon of sectsectisections of structure to be placed.
Note: Use separate checklistcklistklist for eeach day and each concrete mix.
b. Verify that anchors, plates, reinforcement,infornfo ceme and other items to be cast into concrete are accurately placed,ONLYlaced, positionedppo securely, and will not cause hardship in placing concrete,oncrete, aand that required inspections have been performed. Documentcumentument ininspection on a Concrete/Grout Placement Checklist.
c. Deleted.
d. For each truck load, collect Trip Ticket.
e. Discharge concrete rinsate at Company-approved location.
f. Place in accordance with ACI 301, Section 5.3. Do not drop more than 5 ft.
g. Temper only as permitted in ACI 301, Section 4.3.
2. Before test sampling and placing concrete, water may be added at Project site, subject to limitations of ACI 301, Section 4.3.
03 30 00 – 11 RPP-SPEC-60023 Rev.07 2/14/2018 - 2:57 PM 25 of 317
RPP-SPEC-60023, Rev. 7
a. Addition of water shall be in accordance with ASTM C94.
b. Do not add water to concrete after adding high-range, water- reducing admixtures to mixture.
3. Before test sampling and placing concrete, trip ticket shall be reviewed by the Testing Agency’s field inspector. After depositing concrete, trip ticket shall be retained in the work package or fabrication plan.
4. Cold Weather Placement: Comply with ACI 301 and ACI 306.1 and as follows.
a. Protect concrete work from physical damage or reduced strength that could be caused by frost, freezing actions, or low FOR temperatures.
b.b W When average high and low temperature is expected to fall below 440°F,0F maintain delivered concrete mixture temperature within the INFORMATONtemperatemperature range required by ACI 301.
c. Do not use frfrozen materials containing ice or snow. Do not place concreteetee on frozfrozen subgrade or on subgrade containing frozen materials.
5. Hot Weather Placement:nt: CompComply with ACI 301 and ACI 305R and as follows:
a. Maintain concrete temperatureperature bbelow 90°F at time of placement. Chilled mixing water or choppedhopped iceic may be used to control temperature, provided water equivaequivequivalentlen of ice is calculated to total amount of mixing water. Using liquidONLYiquidquid ninitnitrogen to cool concrete is Contractor’s option.
b. Fog-spray forms, steel reinforcement, andnd subgradesubgradsubg just before placing concrete. Keep subgrade uniformlyy moist without standing water, soft spots, or dry areas.
6. Place nonshrink grout where shown on Contract drawings, in accordance with manufacturer’s recommendations.
7. Placing concrete against subgrade/base material: Place on or against firm, damp surfaces free of frost, ice, and free water. Obtain required earth compaction in accordance with Section 31 23 00, “Excavation and Fill,” before concrete placement. Dampen earth surfaces to receive fresh concrete.
8. Consolidation: Consolidate concrete in accordance with ACI 301, Section 5.3.2.5.
03 30 00 – 12 RPP-SPEC-60023 Rev.07 2/14/2018 - 2:57 PM 26 of 317
RPP-SPEC-60023, Rev. 7
a. Consolidate concrete during placement operations so concrete is thoroughly worked around reinforcement and other embedded items and into corners.
b. Maintain reinforcement in position on chairs during concrete placement.
c. Screed slab surfaces with a straightedge and strike off to correct elevations.
d. Slope surfaces uniformly to drains/trenches where required.
9. Form Removal and Concrete Repair
FORa. Form removal: Remove in accordance with ACI 301, Sections 2.3.2 and 2.3.4.
b. CutCut back form ties and examine concrete surfaces for defects. INFORMATONRepair only after permission for patching is given by the TOC ConstructiConstruction Representative.
c. Place concretencrete rrepair mortar within 1 hour after mixing. Do not re- temper mortar.
d. Repair surfacee defects in accordance with ACI 301, Section 5.3.7. Cure concrete repairspairs same as new concrete.
10. Concrete Finishes and Tolerancesnces
a. Measuring for tolerances shallall be pepperformed in accordance with ACI 301, Section 5.3.4.3. ONLY b. Formed surfaces: Start finishing followinglowingowing ccoconcrete repair and complete within 96 hours after forms haveave been removed. Finish in accordance with ACI 301 Section 5.3.3.
i. Surfaces exposed to earth backfill; Rough form finish.
ii. Exterior surfaces exposed to weather.
iii. Repair and patch tie holes and defects.
iv. Remove fins and other projections that exceed specified limits on formed-surface irregularities.
v. Surfaces to receive special protective coating (ACI 301, Section 5.3.3.4.b).
03 30 00 – 13 RPP-SPEC-60023 Rev.07 2/14/2018 - 2:57 PM 27 of 317
RPP-SPEC-60023, Rev. 7
c. Unformed surfaces: Finish in accordance with ACI 301, Section 5.3.4.
i. Exterior equipment slabs subject to foot traffic.
C. Self-Consolidating Grout for use in Grout Boxes to be placed in accordance with ASTM C476, using the Concrete/Grout Placement Checklist.
3.4 FINISHING FLOORS AND SLABS
A. General: Comply with ACI 302.1R recommendations for screeding, re-straightening, and finishing operations for concrete surfaces. Do not wet concrete surfaces.
B. FloatoatFORat FinishFinish: Consolidate surface with power-driven floats or by hand floating if area is small oor inaccessible to power-driven floats. Re-straighten, cut down high spots, andnd fill lowlo spots.
1. Apply floatINFORMATON finishfinf to surfaces to receive trowel finish.
C. Trowel Finish: Afterfter applyingapply float finish, apply first troweling and consolidate concrete by hand- or powerpower-drivenower-dridr trowel. Continue troweling passes and re- straighten until surface is free of trowel marks and is uniform in texture and appearance. Grind smoothh anynyy surfacesurfa defects that would telegraph through applied coatings.
D. Broom Finish: Apply a broom finishshh to exteexterior concrete platforms, steps, ramps, and elsewhere as indicated. 3.5 JOINTS ONLY A. Contraction Joints in Slabs-on-Grade: Form weakened-planeakenedkened-pla contraction joints, sectioning concrete into areas as indicated. Constructionuctionction coconcontraction joints for a depth equal to at least one-fourth of concrete thicknesss as followfollofollows:
1. Sawed Joints: Form contraction joints with power sawsaw equipped with shatter-proof abrasive or diamond-rimmed blades. Cut 1/8-in. wide joints into concrete when cutting action will not tear, abrade, or otherwise damage surface and before concrete develops random contraction cracks. Maximum 12 hours after placement.
3.6 CONCRETE PROTECTION AND CURING
A. General: Protect freshly placed concrete from premature drying and excessive cold or hot temperatures. Comply with ACI 306.1 for cold-weather and ACI 301 for hot-weather protection during curing.
03 30 00 – 14 RPP-SPEC-60023 Rev.07 2/14/2018 - 2:57 PM 28 of 317
RPP-SPEC-60023, Rev. 7
B. Cure concrete in accordance with ACI 301, Section 5.3.6. Clear curing compounds shall be tinted or applied to surfaces marked to show extent of spraying.
C. Do not use curing compound on surfaces to receive special protective coating.
D. Protect concrete during adverse weather conditions in accordance with ACI 301, Section 1.8.
E. Protect concrete from mechanical damage in accordance with ACI 301, Section 1.8.
F. Making and curing of field test cylinders shall be performed in accordance with ASTMM C31.C Test cylinders shall be stored in or on the structure as near to the pointFORnt of depdeposit of the concrete represented as possible. Protect all surfaces of the test cylindersylindersers fromf the elements as near as possible the same way as the formed work. Provide tththe test cylinders with the same temperature and moisture environmentntt aasINFORMATON thehe structural work. 3.7 FIELD INSPECTIONSNSS ANANDD TTESTS
A. Sample and test concreteretete in accordanceacc with ACI 301, Sections 1.6.4.2 (d), (e), and (f), (g), and (h). Recordcord resulresu results. Engage a qualified independent testing agency to perform material evaluationevaluatio tests.
B. Engage a special inspector and qualifiedualified independentin testing agency to perform field material evaluation tests and inspections,nspections and prepare testing and inspection reports. C. Inspections: ONLY 1. Steel reinforcement placement.
2. Headed bolts and studs.
3. Verification of use of required concrete design mixture.ure
4. Concrete placement, including conveying and depositing.
5. Curing procedures and maintenance of curing temperature.
D. Concrete Tests:
1. Testing of concrete samples of fresh concrete shall be obtained according to ACI 301, Section 1.6.4.2.d and ASTM C172.
2. Testing shall be performed according to ACI 301, Sections 1.6.3.2.(d) and (e). Record results.
03 30 00 – 15 RPP-SPEC-60023 Rev.07 2/14/2018 - 2:57 PM 29 of 317
RPP-SPEC-60023, Rev. 7
E. Provide nonshrink grout block molds onsite. Non-shrink grout blocks shall test equal to or greater than minimum strength specified.
F. Provide self-consolidating grout block molds onsite. Self-consolidating grout blocks shall test equal to or greater than minimum strength specified.
END OF SECTION 03 30 00
FOR
INFORMATON
ONLY
03 30 00 – 16 RPP-SPEC-60023 Rev.07 2/14/2018 - 2:57 PM 30 of 317
RPP-SPEC-60023, Rev. 7
SECTION 03 30 00 – ATTACHMENT 1 Placement No.: CONCRETE/GROUT PLACEMENT CHECKLIST PART A – REQUIREMENTS Project: Work Plan: Work Step: Planned Placement Date: Total Cubic Yards:
Description of Placement:
Mix Design No.: Psi Required: Aggregate Size: Prepared By/Date:
Testing Requirements: Bonding Agent: Curing Compound:
FORFFO PART B – PREPLACEMENT Craft Release QC Inspection Description: R (Sign/Date): (Sign/Date): Layout INFORMATONIN Excavation/Compaction NF Formwork (Material, Location, Alignment) FO Testing Agency Notified and Scheduled OR Embeds (Material, Location, Alignment, Stability) M Reinforcement (Size, Quality, Bends, Lap, Length, Spacing, Cover, Stability, Cleanliness) TO Joints (Materials, Location, Prep, Dowel/Tie) N Piping ONLYOON Electrical NL Cleanup LY Placing and Curing Equipment Y Preplacement Submittals Approval Weather/Temperature Considerations Other PART C – PLACEMENT Placement Approved – Supt.: Date: Placement Approved – TOC Representative: Date:
Actual Placement Trip Ticket No.: Actual Cubic Yards Placed: Date: Time:
Comments:
END OF ATTACHMENT 1
03 30 00 – Att. 1-1 RPP-SPEC-60023 Rev.07 2/14/2018 - 2:57 PM 31 of 317
RPP-SPEC-60023, Rev. 7
SECTION 05 50 00
METAL FABRICATIONS
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS / CODES AND STANDARDS
Drawings and general provisions of the Contract Statement of Work, including Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
The following documents and others referenced therein, form part of the Contract to the extent designatednate in this Section. Referenced documents are those current as of the date of this SectionFORtion unlessunlun otherwise indicated.
A. Americancan SocieSociety of Mechanical Engineers (ASME) B&PVC, 2013131 INFORMATON Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code Section IX Qualification Standard for Welding and Brazing Procedures, Welders, Brazers, and Welding and Brazing Operations
B. American Society for Nondestructiveestructivestructive Testing (ASNT)
ASNT SNT-TC-1A Personnelsonnelnnel QuQualifications and Certification in Nondestructivestructivetructive TTesting
C. ASTM International (ASTM)
ASTM A36 Standard SpecificationationONLYtion for CarbonC Structural Steel
ASTM A53 Standard Specification foror Pipe, Steel, Black and Hot-Dipped, Zinc-Coated,, Welded and Seamless
ASTM A106 Standard Specification for Seamless Carbon Steel Pipe for High-Temperature Service
ASTM A240 Standard Specification for Chromium and Chromium-Nickel Stainless Steel Plate, Sheet, and Strip for Pressure Vessels and for General Applications
ASTM A276 Standard Specification for Stainless Steel Bars and Shapes
05 50 00 – 1 RPP-SPEC-60023 Rev.07 2/14/2018 - 2:57 PM 32 of 317
RPP-SPEC-60023, Rev. 7
ASTM A312 Standard Specification for Seamless, Welded, and Heavily Cold Worked Austenitic Stainless Steel Pipes
ASTM A325 Standard Specification for Structural Bolts, Steel, Heat Treated, 120/105 ksi Minimum Tensile Strength
ASTM A500 Standard Specification for Cold-Formed Welded and Seamless Carbon Steel Structural Tubing in Rounds and Shapes
ASTM A563 Standard Specification for Carbon and Alloy Steel FOR Nuts ASTMM A653A65 Standard Specification for Steel Sheet, Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) or Zinc-Iron Alloy-Coated INFORMATON(Galvannealed) by the Hot-Dip Process ASTM A992 Standard Specification for Structural Steel Shapes
ASTM F844 StandardS Specification for Washers, Steel, Plain (Fla(Flat), Unhardened for General Use
D. American Welding Society (AWS)AWS)
AWS D1.1, 2010 Structuralcturalural WeldingWel Code – Steel
AWS D1.3, 2008 Structural Welding CodeC – Sheet Steel AWS D1.6, 2007 Structural Weldingdini gONLY Code – Stainless Steel AWS QC1 Certification of Weldingdingng InspectorsInspe
E. Hanford Documents
TFC-ENG-STD-06 Design Loads for Tank Farm Facilities
TFC-ENG-STD-22 Piping, Jumpers, and Valves
1.2 SUBMITTALS
A. See the Contract Statement of Work for submittal procedures.
B. Approval Required
1. Welding personnel qualifications: 5 days before start of fabrication, submit welder qualification as required by Paragraph 1.3.B.1.
05 50 00 – 2 RPP-SPEC-60023 Rev.07 2/14/2018 - 2:57 PM 33 of 317
RPP-SPEC-60023, Rev. 7
2. Welding procedure qualifications: 5 days before first use, submit welding procedures as required by Paragraph 1.3.B.1.
3. Examination personnel qualifications: 5 days before first use, submit examination personnel qualification as required by Paragraph 1.3.B.2.
4. Examination procedures: 5 days before start of fabrication, submit examination procedures as required by Paragraph 1.3.B.3.
5. Carbon Steel Weld Examination as required by Paragraph 3.5.A.1.
6. Sheet Steel Weld Examination as required by Paragraph 3.5.A.2. 7.FOR StainlessS Steel Weld Examination as required by Paragraph 3.5.A.3. 8. Weld ExaminationsE (PT, MT) as required by Paragraph 3.5.A.4. C. Approval Not INFORMATONRequired:ReR qu None. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCENCE
A. Misrepresented Products:ducts:ts: SeSee the Contract Statement of Work for required measures to prevent usee of misremisrepresented products.
B. Qualifications of Welding Personnelersonnel aand Procedures
1. Personnel and procedures forr weldinwelding structural steel shall be qualified in accordance with AWS D1.1 foror steel structures,sts AWS D1.3 for sheet steel, and AWS D1.6 for stainless steelel before wwelding. Qualification of welding personnel and procedures inn accordanceaccor with ASME B&PVC, Section IX may be substituted for componentsmpomp ONLYnents weldedw in accordance with AWS D1.1, D1.3, and D1.6. Maintain copyopypy of weldingwew procedure specifications, procedure qualification records,rds,ds, and wwelder performance qualification test results and renewal of qualificationcation dodocumentation at jobsite. Where stainless steel materials are weldededd to carbcarbon steel, AWS D1.1 procedures shall govern, unless ASME B&PB&PVC, Section IX was substituted.
2. Qualification of examination personnel: Maintain copies of examination personnel certifications and written examination performance procedures at jobsite.
a. Personnel performing visual examinations shall be Certified Welding Inspectors (CWIs) who have received certification (current or previous certification) in accordance with AWS QC1.
b. Personnel performing other nondestructive examinations (NDE) shall be certified in accordance with approved procedure, which
05 50 00 – 3 RPP-SPEC-60023 Rev.07 2/14/2018 - 2:57 PM 34 of 317
RPP-SPEC-60023, Rev. 7
shall meet the requirements of ASNT SNT-TC-1A. Use Level II or III personnel to interpret results.
3. Examination procedures: Examination procedures shall be in accordance with AWS D1.1, AWS D1.3, AWS D1.6, as applicable, and this Specification. Maintain copies of examination procedures at jobsite.
1.4 PERMITS
A. Permits are addressed by TOC work control process.
B. Deleted. 1.5 DELIVERY,FORY, STORAGE,S AND HANDLING A. See thee ContrContract Statement of Work for general requirements. PART 2 PRODUCTS INFORMATON 2.1 SUBSTITUTES
A. See the Contract Statementtementment ofo Work for substitution approvals.
2.2 MATERIALS
Use the following materials unless otherwiseerwise shownsho on Contract drawings:
A. Rolled Steel Shapes, Plates, and Bars:s: ASTM A36 or ASTM A992, Gr. 50.
B. Stainless Steel Shapes and Bars: ASTM AA276,276, TyType 304L.
C. Stainless Steel Plate, Sheet: ASTM A240, TypeONLY 304, 30430304L.
D. Stainless Steel Pipe: ASTM A312, Grade TP 304L (SMLS).(SMLS)
E. Steel Pipe: ASTM A53 (black) Type E or S, Grade B or ASTMSTM A106 Grade B, standard weight, Schedule 40.
F. Steel Tubing: ASTM A500, Grade B.
G. Sheet Steel: ASTM A653
H. Fasteners
1. Bolts
a. ASTM A325.
05 50 00 – 4 RPP-SPEC-60023 Rev.07 2/14/2018 - 2:57 PM 35 of 317
RPP-SPEC-60023, Rev. 7
2. Nuts
a. ASTM A563, Grade C, plain, heavy hex.
3. Washers: ASTM F436 Type 1, plain.
4. Expansion Anchor Installations: See Section 03 15 00, “Post-Installed Concrete Anchor Bolts.”
5. Weld studs: Nelson Stud Welding Co. Type H4L or approved substitute.
I. Welding Electrodes/Filler Metal: 1.FOR Carbon steel – Matching filler metal with Fu = 70,000 psi. 2.S Stainlesstainltain steel – E308/ER308 or E309/ER309.
J. Nonshrinknkk GroutGrouGrout: See Section 03 30 00, “Concrete.” INFORMATON K. Special Protectivetive CoatiCoating: See Section 09 91 00, “Painting.”
L. Zinc-rich Coating: Sherwinerwin WWilliams®3 “Zinc Clad®3 200,” or ZRC Products Company “Z.R.C.®4“
M. Supports: Channels, channelell spring nnuts, bolts, and fittings for any one support type shall be galvanized and fromom the samsame manufacturer. Cooper B-Line®5 channels and fittings, or approved substitutesubstitute.ubstitut
1. Channels: 1 5/8-in. wide by 1 5/8-in.5/88-in.n. deep,deede or as shown on Drawings. 2. Channel spring nuts: Manufacturer’s stanstastandard.ONLYdard 3. Bolts (for use with channel spring nuts): ManufactuManufacturer’s standard.
4. Support Clamps (for rigid steel conduit): Manufacturer’sfacturer’s standard.
2.3 FABRICATION
A. General
1. Verify measurements, including field measurements, before fabrication. Provide miscellaneous bolts and anchors, supports, braces, and connections necessary for completion of metal fabrications. Cut, reinforce, drill, and tap metal fabrications shown to receive finish hardware and similar items. Weld or bolt connections as shown on the Drawings.
3 Sherwin-Williams and Zinc Clad are registered trademarks of Swimc, Inc., Newark, Delaware. 4 Z.R.C. is a registered trademark of Norfolk Corporation, Marshfield, Massachusetts. 5 B-Line is a registered trademark of Cooper Technologies Company, Houston, Texas.
05 50 00 – 5 RPP-SPEC-60023 Rev.07 2/14/2018 - 2:57 PM 36 of 317
RPP-SPEC-60023, Rev. 7
2. Perform welding of steel connections in accordance with AWS D1.1, sheet steel in accordance with AWS D1.3, and stainless steel in accordance with AWS D1.6.
B. Miscellaneous Steel Items: Supply required clips, frames, equipment supports, and other fabrications not shown on the Drawings. Fabricate parts from standard structural sections or shapes, to sizes required. Wherever miscellaneous parts are exposed, grind edges, corners, and rough cuts smooth and free of snags. Shop paint parts except those to be embedded in concrete, or those that require other specific finishes.
C. Finishes
1.P Prime ferrous metal in accordance with Section 09 91 00, “Painting.” Do FORnot ccoat members to be embedded in concrete, surfaces and edges to be field wewelded, or items to be galvanized. Shop paint may extend into embeddeembeddedmbedde areas where impractical to remove.
2. Touch INFORMATONup damageddama zinc surfaces with zinc-rich coating. Apply in accordancencee with mmanufacturer’s instructions.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine areas where metal fabricationsications arare to be installed and notify TOC Construction Representative in writingtinging of conconditions detrimental to proper and timely completion of work. Do not proceedoceedeed withwit work until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2 PREPARATION ONLY
A. Prepare setting drawings, diagrams, templates, and instructioninstructionsnstructi for installation of anchorages, such as concrete inserts, anchor bolts, and miscellanmiscellmiscellaneous items having integral anchors, to be embedded in concrete. Coordinateordinate with TOC Construction Representative for delivery of items to Site.
3.3 INSTALLATION
A. Expansion Anchor Installation: See Section 03 15 00, “Post-Installed Concrete Anchor Bolts.”
B. Install metal fabrications plumb, level, or as shown on the Drawings.
C. Make field connections as neatly as possible with joints flush and smooth. Grind smooth exposed field welds, as required per design, before field painting. Repair welds in galvanized work with 2 coats of zinc-rich coating.
05 50 00 – 6 RPP-SPEC-60023 Rev.07 2/14/2018 - 2:57 PM 37 of 317
RPP-SPEC-60023, Rev. 7
D. Assemble and install interchangeable channel supports in accordance with manufacturer’s recommendations. Torque bolts used with channel spring nuts in support channels and clamps per manufacturer instructions (B-Line torque requirements shown).
Bolt size, inches Torque, ft-lb 1/4 6 – 9 5/16 11 – 17 3/8 19 – 30 1/2 50 – 75 5/8 65 – 90 3/4 and larger 75 – 110
Unlesss sspecified on the design drawings, torque the bolts in accordance with Tank FarmrmFOR maintenancemain procedure 2-MISC-049 Bolt Torquing Guidelines.
E. Weld Studs: Installation,Insn testing and welder qualification shall be in accordance with the manufacturers’manufa tu written instructions, and AWS D1.1, Section 7 for carbon steel and AWSW INFORMATOND1.6, SectionS 7 for stainless steel.
3.4 APPLICATION
A. After installation has beeneen complcompcompleted, clean and paint connections with primer. Touch-up shop prime coat whereverwherev damaged. Repair breaks in galvanized coating with zinc-rich coating.g
3.5 FIELD INSPECTIONS AND TESTS
A. Weld Examination 1. Perform visual examination of carbonnste ststeelONLYel wewelwelds in accordance with AWS D1.1, Sections 6.5.5 and 6.9 (staticallycallally loadedloadeload structures). Record examination results and include in work packageckagekage or ffabrication document as applicable. 2. Perform visual examination for sheet steel in accordancedancedan with AWS D1.3, Section 6.1. Record examination results and include in work package or fabrication document as applicable. 3. Perform visual examination of stainless steel welds in accordance with AWS D1.6, Section 6.28.1 (statically loaded structures). Record examination results and include in work package or fabrication document as applicable. 4. Perform magnetic particle examination (MT) where shown on the Drawings in accordance with AWS D1.1, Sections 6.12 and 6.10, respectively. Perform liquid penetrant (PT) examination where shown on the Drawings in accordance with AWS D1.6, Section 6.28.4 (statically loaded). Record examination results results and include in work package or fabrication document as applicable.
05 50 00 – 7 RPP-SPEC-60023 Rev.07 2/14/2018 - 2:57 PM 38 of 317
RPP-SPEC-60023, Rev. 7
END OF SECTION 05 50 00
FOR
INFORMATON
ONLY
05 50 00 – 8 RPP-SPEC-60023 Rev.07 2/14/2018 - 2:57 PM 39 of 317
RPP-SPEC-60023, Rev. 7
SECTION 05 53 00
METAL GRATINGS
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY OF WORK
A. Section Includes:
1. Labor, materials, equipment as shown on the Drawings, and specified herein, to furnish and install metal bar gratings. 1.2 REFERENCESNCESFOR Drawings andd general pprovisions of the Contract Statement of Work, including Division 01 Specificationcificatioificatio Sections, apply to this Section. INFORMATON The following documentsents and oothers referenced therein, form part of the Contract to the extent designated in this Section. RReferenced documents are those current as of the date of this Section unless otherwisewisee indicindiindicated.
A. American National Standardsards InstitInstInstitute (ANSI)/National Association of Architectural Metal Manufacturerscturers (N(NAAMM)
ANSI/NAAMM MBG 531 Metaltal Bar GratingGrGra Manual
ANSI/NAAMM MBG 532 Heavy-Dutyutytyy MetalMeta Bar Grating Manual
ANSI/NAAMM MBG 531 Steel, Stainlesss SteelSteel and Aluminum Gratings and Stair Treads ONLY
B. American Society of Testing and Materials (ASTM)
ASTM A36 Standard Specification for Carbonarb Structural Steel
ASTM A510 Standard Specification for General Requirements for Wire Rods and Coarse Round Wire, Carbon Steel, and Alloy Steel
ASTM A653 Standard Specification for Steel Sheet, Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) or Zinc-Iron Alloy-Coated (Galvannealed) by the Hot-Dip Process
ASTM A780 Standard Practice for Repair of Damages and Uncoated Areas of Hot-Dip Galvanized Coatings
05 53 00 – 1 RPP-SPEC-60023 Rev.07 2/14/2018 - 2:57 PM 40 of 317
RPP-SPEC-60023, Rev. 7
ASTM A1011 Standard Specification for Steel, Sheet and Strip, Hot-Rolled, Carbon, Structural, High-Strength Low-Alloy, High-Strength Low-Alloy with Improved Formability, and Ultra-High Strength
ASTM A1018 Standard Specification for Steel, Sheet and Strip, Heavy-Thickness Coils, Hot-Rolled, Carbon, Commercial, Drawing, Structural, High-Strength Low-Alloy, High-Strength Low-Alloy with Improved Formability, and Ultra-High Strength
ASTM B633 Standard Specification for Electrodeposited Coatings of Zinc on Iron and Steel
ASTMFORTM F1941F19 Standard Specification for Electrodeposited Coatings on Threaded Fasteners [Unified Inch Screw Threads (UN/UNR)]
C. Master PaintersINFORMATONs InstitutInstituInstitute (MPI)
Architectural Painting Specification Manual
D. Steel Structures Paintingg Council (SSPC)
Paint Specification No. 20Zinc Zinc-Rich-RichRic Primers (Type I, “Inorganic,” and Typepe II,”Organic”)II,”Org
1.3 SUBMITTALS A. See Contract Statement of Work for submittalttaltal proprocprocedures.ONLYed B. Product Data for approval: For the following:
1. Manufacturer’s specifications, load tables, anchorhor detadetaildetails, and standard installation details.
1.4 DEFINITIONS
Not used.
1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Metal Bar Grating Standards: Comply with ANSI/NAAMM MBG 531 and ANSI/NAAMM MBG 532 (or ANSI/NAAMM MBG 531) or as specified in design.
1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING
A. See the Contract Statement of Work for additional general requirements.
05 53 00 – 2 RPP-SPEC-60023 Rev.07 2/14/2018 - 2:57 PM 41 of 317
RPP-SPEC-60023, Rev. 7
1.7 PERMITS
A. Permits are addressed by TOC work control process.
1.8 SITE CONDITIONS
Not used.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 FERROUS METALS
A. Recycled Content of Steel Products: Provide products with average recycled contentnt of steel products so post-consumer recycled content plus one-half of pre- consumernsumerFOR recycledr content is not less than 25 percent.
Note: No documdocumentation is required since the U.S. Green Building Council allows a defaultINFORMATON valvavalue of 25 percent to be used for steel without documentation. B. Steel Plates, Shapes,hapes,apes, and Bars: ASTM A36.
C. Steel Bars for Bar Gratings:ratings:ings: ASTMA A36 or Steel Strip, ASTM A1011 or ASTM A1018.
D. Wire Rod for Bar Grating Crossbars:ossbars: AASTM A510.
E. Uncoated Steel Sheet: ASTM A1011,011,1, StruStrucStructural Steel, Grade 30.
F. Galvanized-Steel Sheet: ASTM A653, StructuralStructur Quality, Grade 33, with G90 coating.
2.2 FASTENERS ONLY
A. General: Unless otherwise indicated by design, provideidede zinc-platedzinzinc-p fasteners with coating complying with ASTM B633 or ASTM F1941, Class Fe/Fe/Zn 5. Fasteners shall be self-drilling, self-tapping structural fasteners.
2.3 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS
A. Universal Shop Primer5: Fast-curing, lead- and chromate-free, universal modified-alkyd primer complying with MPI #79 and compatible with topcoat. Primer is not to be used for galvanized steel.
B. Galvanizing Repair Paint: High-zinc-dust-content paint complying with SSPC- Paint 20.
05 53 00 – 3 RPP-SPEC-60023 Rev.07 2/14/2018 - 2:57 PM 42 of 317
RPP-SPEC-60023, Rev. 7
2.4 FABRICATION
A. Cut, drill, and punch material cleanly and accurately. Remove burrs and ease edges to a radius of approximately 1/32 in. unless otherwise indicated by design. Remove sharp or rough areas on exposed surfaces.
B. Form from materials of size, thickness, and shapes indicated, but not less than that needed to support indicated loads.
C. Fit exposed connections accurately together to form hairline joints.
2.5 METAL BAR GRATINGS A. WeldedFORded Steel Grating: 1.Bearin Bearing Bar Spacing, Depth, and Thickness: As Shown. 2. CrossbarrossbarINFORMATON Spacing:Sp As Shown. 3. Traffic Surface: Plain.
4. Loading: At a uniforuniform load of 100 pounds per square foot, deflection shall not exceeddd1/4 1/4 in. overovo the required span.
5. Steel Finish: Hot-dipp galvanizgalvanigalvanized.
B. Grating Sections: All grating shallll be bandbanded. Fabricate with banding bars attached by welding to entire perimeterterer of eaceach section. Include anchors and fasteners of type indicated or, if not indicated,icated,cated, asa recommended by manufacturer for attaching to supports.
C. Fabricate cutouts in grating sections for penetrationsONLYionsons indicindindicated. Arrange cutouts to permit grating removal without disturbing items penetratinpenetratipenetrating grating.
1. Edge-band openings in grating that interrupt fourr or more bearing bars with bars of same size and material as bearing bars.
D. Do not notch bearing bars at supports to maintain elevation.
2.6 STEEL FINISHES
A. The finish galvanizing of gratings, frames, and supports shall be applied after the required fabrication of assembly is complete.
05 53 00 – 4 RPP-SPEC-60023 Rev.07 2/14/2018 - 2:57 PM 43 of 317
RPP-SPEC-60023, Rev. 7
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. The grating shall be received at the job site by the Contractor, unloaded, and protected from damage prior to the requirement for it to be installed.
B. Cutting, fitting, and placement: Perform cutting, drilling, and fitting as required for installing gratings. Set units accurately in location, alignment, and elevation; measured from established lines and levels.
C. Install gratings to comply with recommendations of referenced metal bar grating standards that apply to grating types and bar sizes indicated, including installation clearancesFORance and standard anchoring details. D. All gratingating shashall be removable. Attach removable units to supporting members with typepe and sizesisiz of clips and fasteners indicated.
E. Fit exposed connectionsINFORMATONnnection accurately together to form hairline joints.
3.2 ADJUSTING AND CLEANINGEANING
A. Galvanized surfaces: Clean field welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas and repair galvanizing to complyomplyy wwith ASTM A780.
END OF SECTIONONN 05 5 53 00
ONLY
05 53 00 – 5 RPP-SPEC-60023 Rev.07 2/14/2018 - 2:57 PM 44 of 317
RPP-SPEC-60023, Rev. 7
SECTION 06 10 00
CARPENTRY
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 SCOPE OF WORK
A. Material and fabrication requirements for temporary work platforms for use in Tank Farms.
1.2 RELATED DOCUMENTS / CODES AND STANDARDS Drawings andFOR gegengeneral provisions of the Contract Statement of Work, including Division 011 SpecificationSpecificapecifi Sections, apply to this Section.
The following documentsocumentcumen and others referenced therein, form part of the Contract to the extent designated innthnt thisINFORMATONis SecSectSection. Referenced documents are those current as of the date of this Section unless otherwise indicated.
A. American Society off MechanMechaniMechanical Engineers (ASME)
ASME B18.2.1 SquareSquarSqu and Hex Bolts and Screws – Inch Series
ASME B18.6.1 Wood ScrewsScre (Inch Series)
B. ASTM International (ASTM)
ASTM A53 Standard Specificationpecificatiopecificati for Pipe, Steel, Black and Hot-Dipped, Zincincnc ONLYCoateCCoated, Welded and Seamless ASTM A153 Standard Specificationion for ZinZinc-Coating (Hot-Dip) on Iron and Steel Hardwarewareare
ASTM A307 Standard Specification for Carbonarb Steel Bolts and Studs, 60,000 PSI Tensile Strength
ASTM A563 Standard Specification for Carbon and Alloy Steel Nuts
ASTM D5055 Standard Specification for Establishing and Monitoring Structural Capacities of Prefabricated Wood I-Joists
ASTM E84 Standard Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials
06 10 00 – 1 RPP-SPEC-60023 Rev.07 2/14/2018 - 2:57 PM 45 of 317
RPP-SPEC-60023, Rev. 7
ASTM F1667 Standard Specification for Driven Fasteners: Nails, Spikes, and Staples
C. APA-The Engineered Wood Association
Engineered Wood Construction Guide
D. Hanford Documents
DOE/RL-92-36 Hanford Site Hoisting and Rigging Manual
RPP-RPT-47003 Temporary Structures Wind Tie-Down Guide E. InternationalFORat Code Council (ICC) IBCC Table 1607.1 and Chapter 23, Wood
1.3 SUBMITTALS INFORMATON Not Used.
1.4 DELIVERY, STORAGE, ANDAND HANDLINGHHA
A. Deliver products bundledd or crated to provide adequate protection during transit and job storage, with requirededd grade mmarks clearly identifiable. Inspect wood products for damage upon delivery.very. RemoveRem and replace damaged materials.
B. Keep materials under cover and dry. Protect fromf weather and contact with damp or wet surfaces. Stack lumber, plywood,d, and othotother panels. Provide for air circulation within and around stacks, and undernder temtemporary coverings.
C. Protect sheet materials during handling to preventntONLYt breakingbreakinbreaki of corners and damage to surfaces.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 LUMBER
A. Lumber shall consist of Douglas fir No. 2 (or better) structural joists and planks.
B. Lumber shall be exterior type for use in exterior locations.
C. All wood shall be fire-retardant-treated per IBC, Section 2303.2 or shall be treated with post treatment, exterior, clear drying, Class A fire retardant.
06 10 00 – 2 RPP-SPEC-60023 Rev.07 2/14/2018 - 2:57 PM 46 of 317
RPP-SPEC-60023, Rev. 7
2.2 FASTENERS
A. Provide fasteners of size and type indicated (Paragraph 3.1.D) that comply with requirements specified in this specification or manufacturer’s instructions.
B. Provide fasteners with hot-dip, zinc-coating per ASTM A153.
C. Nails, Wire, Brads, and Staples: ASTM F1667.
D. Wood Screws: ASME B18.6.1.
E. Lag Bolts: ASME B18.2.1.
F. Bolts:: SteelS bolts complying with ASTM A307, Grade A, with ASTM A563 hex nutsFORs and, wherew indicated, flat washers.
G. Metal framing fittings:fif Simpson Strong-Tie®6 or similar. Fittings shall have a minimumm G90INFORMATON zzincnc galvanized coating. H. Post bases: Simpsonmpson Strong-TieStro AB/ABA/ABE/ABU Adjustable and Standoff Post Bases or similar.ilar.lar. PostPo bases shall have a minimum G90 zinc galvanized coating.
2.3 PLATFORM GRATING ANDSTAIR TTREADS
A. Platform decking and stair treadsds shall be pultruded fiberglass reinforced plastic (FRP) with slip resistant walking surface,rface, ssisize I-6010 minimum. Color shall be gray or yellow.
B. FRP grating and stair treads shall be flame retardanretardaretardant in accordance ASTM E84 with a Class 1 flame spread index of less thann25 25.2 ONLY C. Clips shall be stainless steel and of appropriate typee for use wwith pultruded FRP grating and stair treads.
2.4 PIPE
A. Pipe shall be ASTM A53, Grade B.
2.5 CONCRETE BLOCKS
A. Concrete blocks in this section must meet the requirements of DOE/RL-92-36.
B. Pier blocks shall be standard concrete precast type.
C. Ecology blocks shall be standard concrete precast type, minimum 2 ft x 2 ft x 3 ft (~1800 lb).
6 Simpson Strong-Tie is a registered trademark of Simpson Strong-Tie Company, Inc. Pleasanton, California.
06 10 00 – 3 RPP-SPEC-60023 Rev.07 2/14/2018 - 2:57 PM 47 of 317
RPP-SPEC-60023, Rev. 7
2.6 WIRE ROPE AND HARDWARE
A. Wire rope and hardware in this section must meet the requirements of DOE/RL-92-36.
B. Wire rope shall be 3/8-in. IPS independent wire rope core (IWRC).
C. Turnbuckle shall be drop forged, hot dipped galvanized, jaw & jaw type, with a minimum allowable working load limit of 2,000 lbs.
D. Anchor shackles shall be screw pin type, galvanized, forged heat treated with allow pin, with a minimum allowable working load limit of 2,000 lbs.
E. Thimblesble shall be heavy duty, galvanized thimbles, sized to fit wire rope.
F. Eye boltslts shalshall be forged steel, hot dipped galvanized after threading (UNC), with hot dippedped galvagalvanized, heavy-hex nuts, with a minimum allowable load limit of 2,000 lbs. Use INFORMATON33/4-in.4- diameter shaft maximum. PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION, GENERALRAAL
A. Platform must be erected, altered, an and dismantled by, or under the supervision of qualified personnel.
B. Discard units of material with defectsectsts that iimimpair quality of rough carpentry and that are too small to use.
C. Set rough carpentry to required levels and lines,ines, wwith members plumb, true to line, cut, and fitted. ONLY D. Securely assemble rough carpentry work and attachh to substrsubstsubstrate by anchoring and fastening in accordance with IBC Table 2304.9.1, Fasteningsteningtening ScSSchedule.
E. Install framing members of size and at spacing indicated.
F. Do not splice structural members between supports.
G. The spacing between uprights must not exceed 8 ft.
H. Each upright must be continuous (no butt joints with splice plates).
I. Adjacent uprights must be connected with horizontal bearers/ledgers to ensure that the unbraced vertical length of an upright does not exceed 8 ft.
J. For two story platforms or platforms with floor heights greater than 4 ft, the platform must be supported in two directions by a system of diagonal cross braces secured to the upright as close to the bearers/ledgers as possible.
06 10 00 – 4 RPP-SPEC-60023 Rev.07 2/14/2018 - 2:57 PM 48 of 317
RPP-SPEC-60023, Rev. 7
K. The maximum floor height for any platform is 16 ft above grade.
L. Install/apply all materials and equipment per manufacturer’s instructions.
M. The overall length or width of any single level on a platform may not exceed 16 ft.
3.2 DIMENSIONS
A. Member must have minimum nominal dimensions as follows:
1. Uprights: FORa. 4 in. x 4 in. for uprights up to 8-ft maximum floor height. b. 6 in. x 6 in. for uprights between 8-ft and 16-ft maximum floor hheight. 2. Ledgers/Bearers:gerge INFORMATONs/Beares/Bea 2 in. x 12 in., 8-ft maximum span. 3. Joists:
a. 2 in. x 6 in., 8-ft8-ft maximumm unsupported length.
b. 2 in. x 10 in., 12-ft12-ft maximummaxma unsupported length.
c. 2 in. x 12 in.:
i. With 16-in. spacingcingng or less,les 16-ft maximum unsupported length.
ii. With spacing up to 24”, 14-ftONLY4-ft maxmaximum unsupported length.
4. Braces: 1 in. x 6 in. or 2 in. x 4 in.
5. Guardrail (top rail): The top rail shall consist of two members. 2 in. x 4 in. member, flush with the top of the vertical posts, 2 in. side up, with 2 in. x 6 in. member fastened to the top of each perimeter post and resting on the 2 in. x 4 in. top rail member, 6 in. side up.
6. Guardrail (intermediate rail): 2 in. x 4 in. Intermediate rail shall be fastened to posts on interior side of deck such that the platform worker loads will not create pullout loading on the fasteners.
7. Handrail: See STAIR FRAMING, Paragraph 3.4.
8. Toeboards: 1 in. x 4 in. (minimum).
06 10 00 – 5 RPP-SPEC-60023 Rev.07 2/14/2018 - 2:57 PM 49 of 317
RPP-SPEC-60023, Rev. 7
3.3 FLOOR JOIST FRAMING
A. Install floor joists with crown edge up and support ends of each member with not less than 1 1/2 in. of bearing on wood. Attach floor joists as follows:
1. Where supported on wood members, by toe nailing or by using metal framing anchors/hangers.
2. Where framed into wood supporting members, by using wood ledgers or, by using metal joist hangers.
B. Do not notch in middle third of joists; limit notches to 1/6 depth of joist, 1/3 at ends. Do not bore holes larger than 1/3 depth of joist; do not locate closer than 2 in. FORfromom top or bottom. C. Providevidee solid bblocking of 2-in. nominal thickness by depth of joist at ends of joists unlessnless nailednailnai to header or band.
D. Lap members framingINFORMATON from opposite sides of beams, girders, or partitions not less than 4 in. or securelycurelyurelyy tie opposingo members together. Provide solid blocking of 2-in. nominal thicknesskness byy ddepth of joist over supports.
E. Provide bridging betweenen jojoistsists ofo type indicated below, at intervals of 96-in. o.c.
1. Form diagonal wood bridging ffrom bevel cut 1 by 3-in. nominal size lumber, double-crossed and nailed both ends to joists.
F. Joists shall be spaced a maximum of 24-in.24-in. o.co.c.
3.4 STAIR FRAMING ONLY A. Construct stairs as opposed to ladders or ramps foror workworker safety, decreased wind loading, and to minimize interference with surroundingdinging equiequipequipment.
B. Provide stair framing members of size, space, and configurationguration iindicated or, if not otherwise indicated, to comply with the following requirements:rem
1. Stringer Size: 2 by 12-in. nominal size minimum.
2. Notching: Notch stringers to receive treads, risers, and supports; leave at least 3 1/2 in. of effective depth.
3. Stringer Spacing: Two stringers for stair widths up to 24 in. Three stringers for stair width between 24 in. and 36 in. Four stringers for stair width between 36 in. and 48 in.
06 10 00 – 6 RPP-SPEC-60023 Rev.07 2/14/2018 - 2:57 PM 50 of 317
RPP-SPEC-60023, Rev. 7
C. Provide stair framing that does not exceed the following variations between treads and risers within each flight:
1. Adjacent treads and risers: 3/16 in.
2. Between largest and smallest treads and risers: 3/8 in.
D. Stair treads shall be a minimum of 10 in. deep.
E. Stairways shall have a minimum clear width of 22 in.
F. Stairs shall be installed at angles to the horizontal of between 30 and 50 degrees. Any uniform combination of rise/tread dimensions may be used that will result in a stairwayFORrwa at an angle to the horizontal within the permissible range. G. All treadsads shashall be reasonably slip-resistant and the nosings shall be of non-slip finish. Rise heigheiheight and tread width shall be uniform (within tolerances provided above) throughoutroughout aany flight of stairs including any foundation structure used as one or more treadseadsINFORMATON ofo the stairs.
H. Stairway platformss shall be no less than the width of a stairway and a minimum of 30 in. in length measuredureded in theth direction of travel.
I. Vertical clearance above anynyy stair trtread to an overhead obstruction shall be at least 7 ft measured from the leadingeading ededge of the tread.
J. Handrails
1. Standard handrails shall be providedidedded on ththe open sides of all exposed stairways and stair platforms. Handrailsdrailsrails shallsh be provided on at least one side of closed stairways preferably on thetheONLY right sides descending. 2. Handrail shall consist of a lengthwise memberberer mountedmountmoun directly on a wall or partition by means of brackets attached to thehee lower sside of the handrail so as to offer no obstruction to a smooth surface along the top and both sides of the handrail.
3. The handrail members shall be of rounded or other section that will furnish an adequate handhold for anyone grasping it to avoid falling. Handrails shall be graspable and shall have a diameter of at least 1.25 in. and not greater than 2 in. If the handrail is not circular, it shall have a perimeter dimension of at least 4 in and not greater than 6.25 in. with a maximum cross section dimension of 2.25 in. Edges shall have a minimum radius of 0.01 in.
4. The ends of the handrail should be turned in to the supporting frame or otherwise arranged so as not to constitute a projection hazard.
06 10 00 – 7 RPP-SPEC-60023 Rev.07 2/14/2018 - 2:57 PM 51 of 317
RPP-SPEC-60023, Rev. 7
5. The height of handrails shall not be more than 34 in. nor less than 30 in. from upper surface of handrail to surface of tread in line with face of riser or to surface of ramp.
6. The mounting of handrails shall be such that the completed structure is capable of withstanding a load of at least 200 lbs applied in any direction at any point on the rail.
7. All handrails shall be provided with a clearance of not less than 1.5 in. between the handrail and any other object.
3.5 GUARDRAILS
A. A workork pplatform 30 in. or more above grade level must have 42-in. guardrails aroundFORund all pparts of the platform (except stair opening).
B. Regardlessless of height,he open-sided platforms above or adjacent to dangerous equipmentt shallhalINFORMATON be guardedg with a standard railing and toe board. C. A standard guardrailrdraildrail shallshal consist of top rail, intermediate rail, and posts, and shall have a vertical heightght of 42-in.42 nominal from upper surface of top rail to top of platform walking surface.facece. The top rail shall be smooth-surfaced throughout the length of the railing. Thehee intermintermeintermediate rail shall be approximately halfway between the top rail and thee platformplatform. The ends of the rails shall not overhang the terminal posts except where suchuchch overhoverhang does not constitute a projection hazard. The perimeter upright postsosts shall bbe incorporated into the guardrail.
D. The guardrail members shall be of roundedndedded or otoother section that will furnish an adequate handhold for anyone grasping itt to avoid falling.
E. Toe boards shall be provided wherever, beneathh ONLYthehe open sides,
1. Person can pass,
2. There is moving machinery, or
3. There is equipment with which falling materials could create a hazard.
F. A standard toe board shall be 4-in. minimum in vertical height from its top edge to the platform walking surface. It shall be securely fastened in place and with not more than 1/4-in. clearance above floor level.
06 10 00 – 8 RPP-SPEC-60023 Rev.07 2/14/2018 - 2:57 PM 52 of 317
RPP-SPEC-60023, Rev. 7
3.6 OPENINGS IN THE WORK PLATFORM AREA
A. Openings in the work platform area may not exceed a diameter greater than 6 in. more than the diameter of the riser which protrudes through the platform area.
B. All other openings may not exceed 11 in. x 17 in. unless fall protection (gated if necessary) is constructed to surround the hole.
C. Openings in the floor which are not in use shall be covered with grating (I-6010) or board sufficient to support the designated live loads. The temporary floor cover must be conspicuously covered and shall not exceed 3/4 in. over the surrounding floor height in order to prevent a tripping hazard.
3.7 MISCELLANEOUSANE COMPONENTS
A. The structureructur base must consist of gravel (min. 3-in. deep) which extends at least 12 in. beyondbeyeyond theth perimeter of the structure in all directions.
B. All upright postsstsINFORMATON must be set on a pier block (12-in. x 12-in. min. base) using a post base.
C. Install fiberglass reinforcedforcedrced plaplastic (FRP) materials in accordance with the manufacturer’s instructionsons using recommended clips. Hold-down clips shall be provided and spaced at a maximumximum ofo 4 ft apart with a minimum of four per piece of grating, or as recommendedd byby the mmanufacturer. After fabrication, all cut ends, holes, and abrasions of FRPP grating shall be sealed in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions, using a resin comcomparable to the grating resin.
D. Existing equipment. 1. Install the platform such that there is sufficientfficientONLYcient clearancec between the platform and the equipment such that the equipmenequipment is accessible for modification, repair, adjustment, etc.
2. Existing equipment insulation may be removed providedrovided that after the platform structure is installed, the insulation is reinstalledall or an equivalent form of insulation is provided by the platform structure.
3. Care shall be taken to ensure that installation, removal, or regular use of the platform structure will not interfere or cause damage to the existing equipment.
E. Tie-Downs
1. Tie-downs shall be used at a minimum of four opposite corners of all structures that have a total height to width ratio (overall width – short side) greater than 1.
06 10 00 – 9 RPP-SPEC-60023 Rev.07 2/14/2018 - 2:57 PM 53 of 317
RPP-SPEC-60023, Rev. 7
2. Tie-downs for temporary structures should follow RPP-RPT-47003.
3. Tie-downs shall consist of wire rope, turnbuckles, and anchor shackles.
4. Tie-downs shall be connected to corner post eye-bolts and to ecology blocks.
5. Eye-bolts shall be located as close as possible to, but lower than, the top floor rim joist.
6. Eye-bolts shall be placed through the center of the post, using washers and nuts as recommended by manufacturer. 7.FORE Ecology blocks shall be placed: a.a Minimizing interference with surrounding equipment. b.INFORMATON MinimizingMin interference with facility activities. c.As clcloseose tto the platform as possible.
d. Usingone ne ecologyecoecol block per tie-down.
3.8 ALLOWABLE LIVE LOADS
A. The allowable live loads are as follows:follows
1. Platform floor live load – 60 psf. On eevery platform assembly the allowable floor live load shall bee applied in a conspicuous place. Such markings shall not be removed or defaced.efaced.
2. Stair live load. ONLY
a. 100 psf.
b. 300 lb concentrated load at center of tread.
3. Handrail live load
a. 50 plf applied at any direction at the top handrail.
b. 200 lb at any point at top of rail or stanchion.
END OF SECTION 06 10 00
06 10 00 – 10 RPP-SPEC-60023 Rev.07 2/14/2018 - 2:57 PM 54 of 317
RPP-SPEC-60023, Rev. 7
SECTION 07 92 00
JOINT SEALANTS
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 SCOPE OF WORK
A. Clean and prepare joint surfaces.
B. Sealant and backing materials. 1.2 REFERENCESFORE The followingwinging documdocudocuments and others referenced therein, form part of the Contract to the extent designatedatedted in thisthi Section. Referenced documents are those current as of the date of this Section unlessnless othootherwise indicated. INFORMATON A. Code of Federalal RegulatRegulations (CFR)
Title 40, Protectionn off National Volatile Organic Compound Emission Environment – Part 599 SStandards for Consumer and Commercial Products
B. ASTM International (ASTM)M))
ASTM C920 Elastomericstomericmeric JointJ Sealants
ASTM C1330 Standard SpecificationSpecificaSpecific for Cylindrical Sealant Backing Usee with CCoCold Liquid Applied Sealants
ASTM D6690 Standard SpecificationationONLYtion for JJoint and Crack Sealants, Hot Applied for Concretencrete and Asphalt Pavements
ASTM D994 Standard Specification forr PreformPreformed Expansion Joint Filler for Concrete (Bituminousuminum Type)
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit the following in accordance with the Contract Statement of Work.
B. Approval Required
1. Catalog Data: Unless specified on the design media, submit Manufacturer’s data sheets on each product to be used, including, preparation instructions and recommendations, storage and handling requirements and recommendations, as well as installation methods.
07 92 00 – 1 RPP-SPEC-60023 Rev.07 2/14/2018 - 2:57 PM 55 of 317
RPP-SPEC-60023, Rev. 7
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Installer qualifications: Trained and/or experienced in the application of the use of sealants to be used.
B. Source limitations: Obtain each type of joint sealant through one source from a single manufacturer.
1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Comply with the Contract Statement of Work.
B. Store products in manufacturer’s unopened packaging, with labels intact, until readyFORy forfo installation. C. Storee productsproduct off ground; if stored on roof, do not exceed structural capacity of deck. D. Store materialslsINFORMATON at minmminimum of 68°F for at least 24 hours prior to installation, regardless of temperaturemperature at location.
E. Do not allow materialsals to freezfreeze prior to application.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 PRODUCT OPTIONS AND SUBSTITUTIONSITUTIONTUTIO
A. See the Contract Statement of Work foror substitutionsubstitsubsti approvals.
2.2 MATERIALS
A. General: – Provide interior sealants and sealant ONLYprimers tthat comply with the following limits for volatile organic compound contentntent whenwhe calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24):
1. Sealants: 250 g/L.
2. Sealant Primers for Nonporous Substrates: 250 g/L.
3. Sealant Primers for Porous Substrates: 775 g/L.
B. Sealant: Polysulphide base, single component, chemical curing; capable of being continuously immersed in water, withstand movement up to 20 percent of joint width and being satisfactorily applied throughout a temperature range to 40 – 80°F; Shore A hardness of 15 minimum and 50 maximum; nonstaining and nonbleeding.
C. Sealant: Polysulphide base, two component, chemical curing; self-leveling type for application in horizontal joints or nonsagging type for application in vertical
07 92 00 – 2 RPP-SPEC-60023 Rev.07 2/14/2018 - 2:57 PM 56 of 317
RPP-SPEC-60023, Rev. 7
joints; uniform, homogeneous, and free from lumps, skins, and coarse particles when mixed; capable of being continuously immersed in water, withstanding movement up to 25 percent of joint width and being satisfactorily applied throughout a temperature range of 40 – 80°F; shore A hardness of 15 minimum and 50 maximum; nonstaining and nonbleeding.
D. Sealant: Silicone base, single component, solvent curing; capable of withstanding movement of up to 25 percent of joint width and being satisfactorily applied throughout a temperature range of 40 – 80°F; shore A hardness of 50 maximum; nonstaining.
E. Sealant: Silicone base, single component, chemical curing; capable of withstanding movement of up to 50 percent of joint width and being satisfactorily appliedFORlied ththroughout a temperature range of 40 – 80°F; shore A hardness of 50 maximum;ximum; nnonstaining.
F. Sealant: PolyurethanePolyyureur base, multi-component, chemical curing; self-leveling type for applicationtiono inn horhohorizontal joints or nonsagging type for application in vertical joints; capableINFORMATON of being continuously immersed in water, withstanding movement of up to 25 percententt of joinjoint width and being satisfactorily applied throughout a temperature range of 40 – 80 80°F; uniform, homogeneous, and free from lumps, skins, and coarse particlesclesles when mixed; shore A hardness of 15 minimum and 50 maximum; nonstaining; nonbleedinnonbleeding.onbleedi
G. Sealant: Polyurethane base, singlengle component,compcom chemical curing; self-leveling type for application in horizontal joints or nonsaggingn type for application in vertical joints; capable of being continuouslyinuouslynuouslyy immersedi in water, withstanding movement of up to 25 percent of joint widthidth and being satisfactorily applied throughout a temperature range of 40 – 80°F;°F;F; shorshore A hardness of 15 minimum and 50 maximum; nonstaining; nonbleeding offu uupONLYp to 252 percent of joint width and being satisfactorily applied throughout a temperatureatureture ranrangrange of 40 – 80°F; shore A hardness of 50 maximum; nonstaining.
H. Use either of the following for a concrete sealant.
1. Sealant: Hot poured, synthetic rubber or polymer-based asphalt, in accordance with ASTM D6690 or equal.
2. Sealant: Cold-applied, two-part liquid neoprene, or equal.
2.3 ACCESSORIES
A. Primer: Non-staining type, recommended by sealant manufacturer to suit application.
B. Joint Cleaner: Noncorrosive and non-staining type, recommended by sealant manufacturer; compatible with joint-forming materials.
07 92 00 – 3 RPP-SPEC-60023 Rev.07 2/14/2018 - 2:57 PM 57 of 317
RPP-SPEC-60023, Rev. 7
C. Joint Filler: ASTM C1330 or ASTM D994; round, type as recommended by sealant manufacturer; oversized 30 to 50 percent.
D. Bond Breaker: Pressure-sensitive tape recommended by sealant manufacturer to suit application.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Prior to installation, ensure that joint dimensions and physical and environmental conditions are suitable for application of joint sealers.
B. By beginningegin the Work of this Section, Subcontractor warrants it has examined anddFOR verified that existing conditions are in accordance with provisions of Paragraphgraphaph 3.13.1.A. 3.2 PREPARATIONN INFORMATON A. Clean, prepare, and size jjoints in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions. Remove any loosee materials and other foreign matter that might impair adhesion of sealant.
B. Verify that joint-shaping materials anda release tapes are compatible with sealant.
C. Examine joint dimensions and sizeizeze matermaterimaterials to achieve required width/depth ratios.
D. To allow sealants to perform properly, usese joint fifiller to achieve required joint depths. ONLY E. Use bond breaker where required.
F. Before applying coating system or filler to concrete surfaces,urfaces,rfaces, ppeperform a plastic sheet test in accordance with Section 09 91 00, “Painting.””
3.3 INSTALLATION
A. Install sealant per manufacturer’s instructions within specified shelf life.
B. Apply sealant within recommended temperature ranges. Consult manufacturer when sealant cannot be applied within recommended temperature ranges.
C. Tool Joints as indicated on Drawings.
D. Joints: Free of air pockets, foreign embedded matter, ridges, and sags.
E. Coverage: Replace sealants that fail because of loss of cohesion or adhesion onto surfaces applied or that do not cure. If the sealant can be detached from a surface
07 92 00 – 4 RPP-SPEC-60023 Rev.07 2/14/2018 - 2:57 PM 58 of 317
RPP-SPEC-60023, Rev. 7
by rubbing the surface contact point with a finger, than the surface adhesion is inadequate.
F. Follow manufacturer’s recommended cure time before painting or overcoating.
END OF SECTION 07 92 00
FOR
INFORMATON
ONLY
07 92 00 – 5 RPP-SPEC-60023 Rev.07 2/14/2018 - 2:57 PM 59 of 317
RPP-SPEC-60023, Rev. 7
SECTION 09 91 00
PAINTING
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS / CODES AND STANDARDS
Drawings and general provisions of the Contract Statement of Work, including Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
The following documents and others referenced therein, form part of the Contract to the extent designated in this Section. Referenced documents are those current as of the date of this SectionFORn uunless otherwise indicated. A. ASTMTM InternationalInternnter (ASTM) ASTM D42584258INFORMATON Surface Cleaning Concrete for Coating ASTM D4263 Test Method for Indicating Moisture Content in Concrete by the Plastic Sheet Method
B. Sherwin-Williams®7
MACROPOXY®MACROMACR 646Fast Cure Epoxy Product Sheetheet 4.5.34.5.3.
Zinc Clad®7lad®ad®7IV IV (85) Organic Zinc-Rich Coating.
SEAGUARD®7D®®7 MP Multi-Purpose Epoxy Primer Product Sheet 9.369.36.3 ONLY C. Steel Structures Painting Council (SSPC)
SSPC SP 3 Power Tool Cleaning
SSPC-SP 7/NACE No. 4 Brush-Off Blast Off Cleaning
SSPC-SP 10/NACE No. 2 Near White Blast Cleaning
1.2 SUBMITTALS
A. See the Contract Statement of Work for submittal procedures.
B. Approval Required
7 Sherwin-Williams, MACRPOXY, SEAGUARD, and Zinc Clad are registered trademarks of Swimc, Inc., Newark, Delaware.
09 91 00 – 1 RPP-SPEC-60023 Rev.07 2/14/2018 - 2:57 PM 60 of 317
RPP-SPEC-60023, Rev. 7
1. List of materials: Unless specified on the design media, before delivery, submit complete list of materials, colors, and location to be used. List shall enumerate percentage of volatile and nonvolatile materials and percentage of component parts of each type of material and the conversion factors to determine dry film thickness from applied wet film thickness.
2. Dry film thickness test results as required by Paragraph 3.6.A.
C. Approval Not Required: None.
1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. See Division 01 – General Requirements.
1.4 DELIVERY,RY,FOR STORAGE,STO AND HANDLING
A. See thee ContracContract Statement of Work for general requirements. Store materials indoors. INFORMATON 1.5 PROJECT CONDITIONSIONSONS
A. General: Ensure thatt surfacesurfaces are dry and have attained required temperatures and conditions before startingng work oor continuing previously started work.
B. Weather: No exterior work shall be peperformed on unprotected surfaces if rain or moisture from other sources is presentresent or expected before applied finishes can dry or attain proper cure.
C. Dust: No finishes shall be applied if duststt is beinbeing generated at worksite. D. Temperature ONLY 1. Unless recommended otherwise by paint manufacturer,anufacturenufactur apply coatings when the following temperatures exist.
Ambient Surface Coating Temperature Temperature
Epoxy As recommended by manufacturer
2. If necessary, provide temporary heat until specified temperatures exist for required time periods. Maintain temporary heat for 24 hours after paint application.
E. Humidity: Follow manufacturer’s directions for extremes.
F. Ventilation: Provide ventilation recommended for extremes.
09 91 00 – 2 RPP-SPEC-60023 Rev.07 2/14/2018 - 2:57 PM 61 of 317
RPP-SPEC-60023, Rev. 7
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 SUBSTITUTIONS
A. See the Contract Statement of Work for substitution approvals.
2.2 MATERIALS
A. Deleted.
B. Deleted.
C. Furnish Sherwin-Williams MACROPOXY 646 Fast Cure Epoxy, Part A (B58-600)FOR60 and Part B (B58V600). D. Furnishnishh SherSheSherwin-Williams ZINC CLAD IV Coating, Part U (B69A8) and Part V (B69V8).8). E. Furnish Sherwin-WilliamsrwINFORMATONn-WilWi SEAGUARD MP Multi-Purpose Epoxy Primer, Part A (N12Y200) andd Part B (N12V200).(N
F. Furnish appropriate applicatorapplicatorsplicato per manufacturer’s recommendations.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine surfaces scheduled to receiveve coatingcoatings for conditions that will adversely affect execution, permanence, and qualityityy of woworwork, and which cannot be corrected through specified preparation.
B. Report in writing to TOC Construction RepresentativentativeONLYtative coc conditions that may affect proper application of finish. Correct unsuitable conditionsnditions bbefore beginning surface preparation or coating application.
3.2 PREPARATION
A. Protection
1. Provide and install drop cloths, shields, and other protective devices to protect surfaces adjacent to areas being painted. Keep spatter, smears, droppings, and over-run of paint materials to a minimum and remove as painting work progresses.
2. Promptly remove spills, splashes and splatter. Use removal methods which do not damage surfaces being cleaned/painted.
3. Repair or replace surfaces damaged by painting work as directed by TOC Construction Representative.
09 91 00 – 3 RPP-SPEC-60023 Rev.07 2/14/2018 - 2:57 PM 62 of 317
RPP-SPEC-60023, Rev. 7
4. Remove electrical outlet and switch plates, mechanical diffusers, escutcheons, registers, surface hardware, fittings, fastening, and similar items before starting work.
B. New Surface Preparation
1. Deleted.
2. Carbon Steel
a. Prepare surfaces for scheduled finish sytems in accordance with SSPC-SP 10/NACE No. 2.
3.S Stainless Steel
a.a Prepare surfaces for scheduled finish sytems in accordance with SSSPC-SP 7/ NACE No. 4 4. Obtaini INFORMATONwrittenwritte approval from TOC Construction Representative before using dryryy or liquidliqui abrasive blasting.
C. Deleted.
D. Old Surface Prepration
1. Prepare touch up area foror schedulscheduled touch-up system in accordance with SSPC-SP 3.
3.3 APPLICATION A. Perform work in accordance with manufacturer’srer’er’ONLY instrinstructions and this Section. 3.4 CLEANING
A. Furnish and maintain at Site, closed metal containers forr disposal of waste materials. Collect materials spotted or soaked with paint, oil,il or solvents and place in containers.
B. At completion of coating work, remove materials, containers, rags, cloths, brushes, tools, and equipment from site.
3.5 SCHEDULES
A. Paint and Finish
1. Carbon Steel: Light and ordinary exposures (not galvanized)
09 91 00 – 4 RPP-SPEC-60023 Rev.07 2/14/2018 - 2:57 PM 63 of 317
RPP-SPEC-60023, Rev. 7
a. Primer: Sherwin-Williams ZINC CLAD. Shop apply 1 coat. Coat should be 3 mils in thickness. Apply per manufacturer’s instuctions.
b. Top Coat: Sherwin-Williams MACROPOXY 646. Field apply 2 coats. Coats should be 5-6 mils in thickness. Apply per manufacturer’s instructions.
2. Stainless Steel indoors
a. Primer: Sherwin-Williams SEAGUARD MP. Shop apply 1 coat. Coat should be 2-3 mils in thickness. Apply per manufacturer’s instuctions.
FORb. Top Coat: Sherwin-Williams MACROPOXY 646. Field apply 2 coats. Coats should be 5-6 mils in thickness. Apply per mmanufacturer’s instructions.
3. Touch-UpINFORMATONUp
a. Sherwin-Williamserwinrwin-Wil MACROPOXY 646. Field apply 2 coats. Coats shouldhould be 5-6 mils in thickness. Apply per manufacturer’s instructions.ons.ns.
4. Stainless Steel Pre-fabricatedbricated HHeat-Traced and Insulated Pipe Spools for Above Grade Piping Runsns as SpecSpecified on the Drawings
a. Sherwin-Williams SEAGUARDAGUARD MP. Shop apply 2 coats. Coats should be 5-6 mils in thickness.kness. 5. Stainless Steel outdoors, above and belowl wONLY gradegrad a. Sherwin-Williams SEAGUARD MP.P. Field applyaap 2 coats. Coats should be 5-6 mils in thickness.
3.6 DELETED.
3.7 DELETED.
3.8 DELETED.
3.9 FIELD INSPECTIONS AND TESTS
A. Measure the Wet Film Thickness (WFT) of each coat of material with a notched WFT gage (Nordson®8 790-015) at a minimum of five evenly spaced points for each 100 ft2 of surface area or portion thereof to verify the application will
8 Nordson is a registered trademark of Nordson Corporation, Westlake, Ohio.
09 91 00 – 5 RPP-SPEC-60023 Rev.07 2/14/2018 - 2:57 PM 64 of 317
RPP-SPEC-60023, Rev. 7
provide the specified minimum dry film thickness. Document results in work package or fabrication documentation.
B. Inspection and testing will be performed by Quality Control Inspector.
C. Deleted.
END OF SECTION 09 91 00
FOR
INFORMATON
ONLY
09 91 00 – 6 RPP-SPEC-60023 Rev.07 2/14/2018 - 2:57 PM 65 of 317
RPP-SPEC-60023, Rev. 7
SECTION 09 96 00
HIGH-PERFORMANCE COATINGS
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY OF WORK
A. Section includes surface preparation and application of high-performance coating systems on concrete substrates, vertical and horizontal surfaces.
1.2 REFERENCES Drawings andFOR generalgegen provisions of the Contract Statement of Work, including Division 011 SpecificationSpecificapecifi Sections, apply to this Section.
The following documentsocumentcumen and others referenced therein, form part of the Contract to the extent designated innthnt thisINFORMATONis SecSectSection. Referenced documents are those current as of the date of this Section unless otherwise indicated.
A. American Standard for TestiTestinTesting and Materials (ASTM)
ASTM D4258 SurfaceSurfaSurf Cleaning Concrete for Coating
B. Master Painters Institute (MPI)
Architecturalectural PaPainting Specification Manual
C. Steel Structures Painting Council (SSPC)
SSPC SP 3 Power Tool CleaningingONLYng
SSPC SP 6 Commercial Blast Cleaninganing
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. See Contract Statement of Work for submittal procedures.
B. Approval Required
1. Product Data: Before delivery, for each type of product indicated. Include preparation requirements and application instructions.
2. Deleted.
3. Unless specified by design media, submit complete list of colors.
4. Deleted.
09 96 00 – 1 RPP-SPEC-60023 Rev.07 2/14/2018 - 2:57 PM 66 of 317
RPP-SPEC-60023, Rev. 7
C. Informational Submittals:
1. Field Quality Control inspection and test reports. See Paragraph 1.5.B.
1.4 DEFINITIONS
Not used.
1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Use manufacturers and products listed in MPI Architectural Painting Specification Manual, approved product list.
B. Deliverableera Documentation: The following documents and records, required by thissFOR Section,SectionSectio shall be included in the work package or fabrication document as applicapable.licapableapable. R DocumentocumenocumeINFORMATONI Paragraph Containerner InspecInspection Results 3.5.A
Film Thicknessess ResulResuResults 3.5.B
1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLINGHANDL
A. See the Contract Statement of Work for aadditional general requirements
B. Deliver materials in manufacturer’s original, u unopened containers.
C. Storage: Maintain materials in clean and dryy condcondition. Follow manufacturer’s instructions. ONLY D. Remove rags and waste from storage areas daily.
E. Obtain inspection and acceptance by Quality Control Inspectionnspectionspection bbefore opening containers or removing labels. See Paragraph 3.5.A.
1.7 PERMITS
A. Permits are addressed by TOC work control process.
1.8 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Apply coatings in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions.
B. Ventilation: Provide during and after application to meet applicable safety and health regulations.
09 96 00 – 2 RPP-SPEC-60023 Rev.07 2/14/2018 - 2:57 PM 67 of 317
RPP-SPEC-60023, Rev. 7
1.9 EXTRA MATERIAL
Not used.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 SUBSTITUTES
See the Contract Statement of Work for substitution approvals.
2.2 MANUFACTURERS
A. Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering productsucts that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, theFOR followifollowing:
1. CloverdaleCloverdaCloverd Paint. 2. PPG ArchitecturalAINFORMATONrchitectrchite Finishes, Inc. 3. Sherwin-Williams®Williams®9 Company (The).
2.3 HIGH-PERFORMANCE COATINGS,OATING GENERAL
A. MPI Standards: Provide productsoductsducts ththat comply with MPI standards indicated and are listed in “MPI Approved Productsroducts LList.”
B. Material Compatibility:
1. Provide materials for use within eachach coatincoaticoating system that are compatible with one another and substrates indicated.atedtedONLY 2. Provide products of same manufacturer forr each coacoat in a coating system.
C. Coating Chemistry: Provide materials that are chloride and PCB free.
2.4 BLOCK FILLERS/SEALER
A. Concrete filler/sealer, Epoxy: MPI #116.
1. Cloverdale Paint; High Performance, Epoxy block Filler, 83065.
2. PPG; Aquapon®10, Epoxy Block Filler, 97-685.
3. Sherwin-Williams; KEM CATI-COAT®9 HS Epoxy Filler/Sealer, B42 Series.
9 Sherwin-Williams, KEM CATI-COAT, and Tile Clad are registered trademarks of Swimc, Inc., Newark, Delaware. 10 Aquapon is a registered trademark of PPG Architectural Finishes, Inc., Pittsburgh, Pennsylvania.
09 96 00 – 3 RPP-SPEC-60023 Rev.07 2/14/2018 - 2:57 PM 68 of 317
RPP-SPEC-60023, Rev. 7
2.5 EPOXY COATINGS
A. Epoxy, Gloss: MPI #77.
1. Cloverdale Paint; High Performance, ClovaCoat 300, 83300.
2. PPG; Aquapon 35, Aquapon 35 Polyamide-Epoxy Gloss, 95 Series.
3. Sherwin-Williams; Tile-Clad®9 HS Epoxy, B62WZ111/B60VX70.
B. Chemical Unloading Concrete Pad Coating.
1. KCC Containment Linings; Elasti-Liner V. 2.FORKCK KCC Containment Linings; E 3.3 Epoxy Based Primer. 3.Epox Epoxyy SScratch Coat. 2.6 SLIP RESISTANTTST SURFACEINFORMATONURFA ADDITIVE A. Paint Finish Coatt AdmixtAdmixtuAdmixture.
1. Rust-Oleum; EpoxyEpoxpoxy Shield,Shie Aluminum Oxide Powder.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine surfaces scheduled to receivee coatingsoatings and conditions, with Applicator present, for compliance with requirementss and for conditions that will adversely affect execution, permanence, and quality off WoWorWork,k, anand which cannot be corrected through specified preparation. ONLY
3.2 PREPARATION
A. Before application, sweep and dust space or area to receiveve coacoaticoating.
B. Comply with manufacturer’s written instructions and recommendations in “MPI Architectural Painting Specification Manual” applicable to substrates indicated.
C. Fill holes, cracks, recessed pockets, in concrete with manufacturer’s recommended materials compatible with concrete substrate to produce even surface for application of systems and to prevent entrapment of process-related contaminates; fill material(s) shall be cementitious-based unless otherwise approved.
1. A polymer concrete consisting of a mixture of specified filler and concrete surfacers formulated in accordance with manufacturer’s recommendations or a similar premixed product may be used to repair gravel pockets, large
09 96 00 – 4 RPP-SPEC-60023 Rev.07 2/14/2018 - 2:57 PM 69 of 317
RPP-SPEC-60023, Rev. 7
shrinkage cracks, etc. Coating system application may be initiated after polymer concrete manufacturer’s recommended curing time. Polymer concrete shall be compatible with coating system being applied.
2. Apply specified filler and concrete surfacers in accordance with manufacturer’s recommendations.
D. Remove or protect hardware, covers, plates, and similar items already in place that are not to be painted.
1. After completing painting operations, use workers skilled in the trades involved to reinstall items that were removed. Remove surface-applied protection.
E. ConcreteFORncrete SuSubstrates:
1.Remove rrelease agents, curing compounds, efflorescence, and chalk.
2. Do not INFORMATONcoat surfacessur if moisture content or alkalinity of surfaces to be coated exceedsxceeds ththat permitted in manufacturer’s written instructions.
3. Concrete shallll be allowallowed to cure at least 14 days before coating is applied; maximumum moistumoisture content of concrete, when measured with an electronic moisture meter shallshs be in accordance with manufacturer’s written instructions.
F. Clean concrete surfaces of laitance,, oil, stainstains, dust, and other foreign material.
1. Where laitance has not been removed,oved, treatreat concrete with uniform application of 1 part 10% solution muriaticmuriati acacid and 3 parts water or 5% solution of trisodium phosphate. ONLY 2. When solution ceases to foam, rinse concretee surface thoroughly with clean water while scrubbing with stiff bristle brush.rush. RemReRemove and dispose of waste solution in accordance Contract Statementnt of WoWork. Allow treated area to thoroughly dry.
3. As an alternative to 1. and 2. above, remove laitance and prepare surface in accordance with SSPC SP 3 or SP 6. Clean surfaces in accordance with ASTM D4258.
G. Protection
1. Provide and install drop cloths, shields, and other protective devices to protect surfaces adjacent to areas being coated. Keep spatter, smears, droppings, and over-run of coating materials to minimum and remove as coating work progresses.
09 96 00 – 5 RPP-SPEC-60023 Rev.07 2/14/2018 - 2:57 PM 70 of 317
RPP-SPEC-60023, Rev. 7
3.3 APPLICATION
A. Apply coating materials in accordance with manufacturer’s written instructions and recommendations in “MPI Architectural Painting Specification Manual.”
1. Use applicators and equipment recommended by manufacturer using techniques suited for coating and substrate indicated.
B. If undercoats or other conditions show through final coat, apply additional coats until cured film has a uniform coating finish, color, and appearance.
C. Apply coatings to produce surface films without cloudiness, spotting, holidays, laps, brush marks, runs, sags, or other surface imperfections.
D. ChemicalFORemical UUnloading Concrete Pad Coating:
1.Prepare cconcrete surface with brush blast. 2. Apply E3.3INFORMATON Primer,PrP 3 – 5 wet mils. 3. Apply Epoxyoxyxy ScratchScratc Coat to imperfections and defects for smooth surface.
4. Apply Elasti-Liner V.
a. Apply Elasti-Linerner V basecoat,base 20 wet mils.
b. Apply Elasti-Liner V topcoat,opcoat, 2-402 wet mil coats.
c. Allow for a tack free cure betweentween coats.
5. Final dry film thickness is 40 mils dry. ONLY
3.4 SLIP RESISTANT SURFACE ADDITIVE
A. Mix slip-resistive surface additive into the final topcoat at rateate rerecommended by the additive manufacturer.
1. Install at location indicated on Drawings to receive surface treatment.
3.5 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Inspect special protective coating containers to ensure material complies with Specification requirements and manufacturer’s recommendations. Document container inspection results in work package or fabrication document as applicable.
09 96 00 – 6 RPP-SPEC-60023 Rev.07 2/14/2018 - 2:57 PM 71 of 317
RPP-SPEC-60023, Rev. 7
B. Dry Film Thickness Testing: Inspect and test coatings for dry film thickness.
1. Contractor shall touch up and restore coated surfaces damaged by testing.
2. If test results show that dry film thickness of applied coating does not comply with coating manufacturer’s written recommendations, Contractor shall pay for additional coats as needed to provide dry film thickness that complies with coating manufacturer’s written recommendations.
3. Document dry film thickness measurements in work package or fabrication document as applicable.
3.6 CLEANING
A. FurnishrnishFOR and maintain at Site, closed metal containers for disposal of waste materials.erials.als. PlaPlace materials spotted or soaked with paint, oil, or solvents in containers.ers. RemRemove flammable waste from jobsite daily.
B. Thoroughly cleaneanINFORMATON brusbrushes, rollers, spatulas, other tools, and spray equipment after each use. Cleanedned tools aand equipment shall contain no oils, thinners, and other residue.
C. Remove empty cans fromm site at end of each shift.
D. At completion of coating work,rk,k, remove materials, containers, rags, cloths, brushes, tools, and equipment fromom site. RReport all spills immediately.
E. After completing coating application, clean spaspspattered surfaces. Remove spattered coating by washing, scraping, or other methods.ethods. DDo not scratch or damage adjacent finished surfaces. ONLY F. Protect work of other trades against damage fromm coating application.
G. At completion of construction activities of other trades,, touch up and restore damaged or defaced coated surfaces.
3.7 INTERIOR HIGH-PERFORMANCE COATING SCHEDULE
A. Concrete Substrates: Vertical and Horizontal Surfaces:
1. Epoxy System:
a. Prime Coat: Epoxy Filler/Sealer, MPI #116.
b. Intermediate Coat: Epoxy, gloss, MPI #77.
c. Topcoat: Epoxy gloss, MPI #77.
END OF SECTION 09 96 00
09 96 00 – 7 RPP-SPEC-60023 Rev.07 2/14/2018 - 2:57 PM 72 of 317
RPP-SPEC-60023, Rev. 7
SECTION 13 34 19
METAL BUILDING SYSTEMS
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY OF WORK
A. The Contractor shall furnish all necessary labor, materials, equipment, and services to furnish and erect pre-engineered metal buildings, including foundation, electrical, and ventilation as indicated on the drawings and described herein. The intent of this Specification is to provide a single source responsibility for thehe design,d manufacture, erecting, warrant, and testing of the complete buildingFORlding systems.sy The building will house miscellaneous process heating and compressedpressedessed aiair equipment. Work under this Section includes the following: 1. Pre-engineerede-enginengiINFORMATONee structural steel framework. 2. Wall framingaminming and girts.
3. Roof framingg andnd purlipurlins.
4. Exterior roof panels.ls.l
5. Miscellaneous roof-mountedunted suppsupports for Buyers Equipment.
6. Exterior metal wall panels.
7. Gutters and downspouts.
8. Partial height interior liner panels. ONLY
9. Standard accessories and trim for pre-engineeredered metal building including eave trim, ridge trim, door trim, corner trim, sealants,lants, weaweather stripping, etc.
10. HVAC system design.
11. Insulation system for pre-engineered metal building (walls and roof).
12. Exterior doors (3).
13. Overhead doors (2).
14. Foundation design.
15. Duct supporting elements.
13 34 19 – 1 RPP-SPEC-60023 Rev.07 2/14/2018 - 2:57 PM 73 of 317
RPP-SPEC-60023, Rev. 7
16. Wall-Mounted Louvers.
17. Certified Material Test Reports.
B. Engineering Certification: The building foundation and building design and analysis shall be stamped by a Professional Engineer licensed in the State of Washington. The stamped work shall include complete calculations for the building, its components, erection drawings and details, and building column reaction loads for foundation design. Calculations shall account for concentrated loads, equipment, and fixtures shown on the drawings and specified herein.
C. Conflicts:
1.I Identification of Conflicts: Should conflicts exist between this FORSpecSpecification, attached drawings, and other referenced documents, they shall be brought to the attention of the Buyer, in writing, prior to proceproceedingoceedinedi with any work. The Buyer shall issue confirming documentationcumemINFORMATONtatitat if needed for clarification. D. Related Sections:s:
1. Section 03 30 00,0 “Concrete.”“ConCon
2. Section 05 53 00, “MetalMetal GraGratings.”
3. Section 06 10 00, “Carpentry.”entry.”
4. Section 09 96 00, “High-Performanceormancermance CCoatings.”
5. Section 31 23 00, “Excavation and FillFill.”.” ONLY E. Building Drawings:
1. H-14-110019, Sh. 2, Rev. 0, “A/AX Retrieval Grading PPlan.”
2. H-14-110022, Sh. 1, Rev. 0, “A/AX Retrieval Generaleralra EElevations.”
3. H-14-110022, Sh. 2, Rev. 0, “A/AX Retrieval General Elevations.”
4. H-14-110022, Sh. 3, Rev. 0, “A/AX Retrieval General Elevations.”
5. H-14-110024, Sh. 1, Rev. 0, “A/AX Infrastructure Civil/Structural Foundation Plan.”
6. H-14-110024, Sh. 2, Rev. 0, “A/AX Retrieval Civil/Structural Conc. Slab Details.”
7. H-14-110024, Sh. 3, Rev. 0, “A/AX Infrastructure Civil/Structural Foundation Details.”
13 34 19 – 2 RPP-SPEC-60023 Rev.07 2/14/2018 - 2:57 PM 74 of 317
RPP-SPEC-60023, Rev. 7
8. H-14-110024, Sh. 4, Rev. 0, “A/AX Retrieval Civil/Structural Sump Details.”
9. H-14-110024, Sh. 5, Rev. 0, “A/AX Retrieval Civil/Structural Details.”
1.2 REFERENCES
Drawings and general provisions of the Contract Statement of Work, including Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
The following documents and others referenced therein, form part of the Contract to the extent designated in this Section. Referenced documents are those current as of the date of this Section unless otherwise indicated.
A. AmericanmericanFOR IInstitute of Steel Construction (AISC)
Specification for Structural Joints Using High- INFORMATONStrength Bolts – August 1, 2014 AISC 360 Specification for Structural Steel Buildings
AISC Steel Design Guideide ServiceabilityS Design Considerations for Low-Rise Series 3 SteelSteSt Buildings
B. American Iron and Steel Instituteitute (AI(A(AISI)S
AISI S100 Northth AmericanAmeric Specification for the Design of Cold-Formedormed SteelSt Structural Members
C. American Society of Civil Engineers (ASCE)CE)E)
ASCE 7 Minimum Design ONLYLoadsLoads forfo Buildings and Other Structures
D. American National Standards Institute (ANSI)/Air Movementement andan Control Association International, Inc. (AMCA)
AMCA 99 Standards Handbook
AMCA Publication 204 Balance Quality and Vibration Levels for Fans
AMCA Standard 210 Laboratory Methods of Testing Fans for Certified Aerodynamic Performance Rating
E. American Welding Society (AWS)
AWS QC1 Standard for AWS Certification of Welding Inspectors
13 34 19 – 3 RPP-SPEC-60023 Rev.07 2/14/2018 - 2:57 PM 75 of 317
RPP-SPEC-60023, Rev. 7
F. American Society of Heating, Refrigeration, and Air Conditioning Engineers (ASHRAE)
Handbook—Fundamentals
ASHRAE Standard 52.2- Method of Testing General Ventilation Air- 2010 Cleaning Devices for Removal Efficiency by Particle Size
ASHRAE Standard 62.1 Ventilation for Acceptable Indoor Air Quality
G. ASTM International (ASTM) ASTMFORM A36A Standard Specification for Carbon Structural Steel ASTMTM A307A30 Standard Specification for Carbon Steel Bolts and Studs, 60 000 PSI Tensile Strength ASTM A3255 INFORMATON Standard Specification for Structural Bolts, Steel, Heat Treated, 120/105 ksi Minimum Tensile Strength
ASTM A490 StandardStaSt Specification for Heat-Treated Steel StructStruStructural Bolts, 150 ksi Minimum Tensile Strength
ASTM A500 Standardtandardandard SpecificationSp for Cold-Formed Welded and Seamlesseamless Carbon Steel Structural Tubing in Rounds and ShapesShaShap
ASTM A529 Standard Specificationecificatiocificati for High-Strength Carbon- Manganese Steelell of oONLYf StructuralStruStruc Quality ASTM A563 Standard Specificationonn for CarbonCarCarb and Alloy Steel Nuts
ASTM A572 Standard Specification for High-Strengthgh S Low- Alloy Columbium-Vanadium Structural Steel
ASTM A653 Standard Specification for Steel Sheet, Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) or Zinc-Iron Alloy-Coated (Galvannealed) by the Hot-Dip Process
ASTM A792 Standard Specification for Steel Sheet, 55 % Aluminum-Zinc Alloy-Coated by the Hot-Dip Process
ASTM A992 Specification for Steel for Structural Shapes for Use in Building Framing
13 34 19 – 4 RPP-SPEC-60023 Rev.07 2/14/2018 - 2:57 PM 76 of 317
RPP-SPEC-60023, Rev. 7
ASTM A1008 Standard Specification for Steel, Sheet, Cold- Rolled, Carbon, Structural, High-Strength Low- Alloy and High-Strength Low-Alloy with Improved Formability, Solution-Hardened, and Bake Hardenable
ASTM C991 Standard Specification for Flexible Fibrous Glass Insulation for Metal Buildings
ASTM E84 Standard Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials
ASTM F436 Standard Specification for Hardened Steel Washers
ASTMFORTM F844F84 Standard Specification for Washers, Steel, Plain (Flat), Unhardened for General Use
ASTM F155455454 Standard Specification for Anchor Bolts, Steel, 36, INFORMATON55, and 105 ksi Yield Strength
ASTM F1852 Standard Specification for “Twist off” Type TTension Control Structural Bolt/Nut/Washer AssAsAssemblies
H. American Welding Society (AWS)AWS)
AWS A2.4 Standarddardard SymbolsSyymb for Welding, Brazing, and Nondestructivetructive EExamination AWS D1.1, 2010 Structural WeldingeldingONLY CodeCodC – Steel AWS D1.3, 2008 Structural Weldingg Code – SheetS Steel
AWS D9.1 Sheet Metal Welding Codeode
I. International Accreditation Service, Inc. (IAS)
Quality Certification Program
J. International Code Council (ICC)
IBC International Building Code
K. Metal Building Manufacturers Association (MBMA)
Metal Building Systems Manual, 2010 Edition
L. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA)
13 34 19 – 5 RPP-SPEC-60023 Rev.07 2/14/2018 - 2:57 PM 77 of 317
RPP-SPEC-60023, Rev. 7
NFPA 70, 2014 National Electrical Code
M. Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractors’ National Association (SMACNA)
HVACMF HVAC Duct Construction Standards Metal and Flexible
N. Steel Door Institute (SDI)
SDI 100 Recommended Specifications, Standard Steel Doors and Frames
O. Underwriters Laboratories Inc. (UL)
ULFOR 580 Tests for Uplift Resistance of Roof Assemblies
P. U.S. DepartmentDepartmenepartmen of Energy (DOE) DOE G 414.1-31 INFORMATON Suspect/Counterfeit Items Guide for Use with 10 CFR 830 Subpart A – Quality Assurance Requirements, and DOE O 414.1C – Quality Assurance
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. See the Contract Statement of Work for tthe submittal process.
B. Proposal Submittals
1. Manufacturer’s descriptive literatureree and tetechnical data.
2. Product Data: For each type of Metal BuildinguildingONLYilding SystemSy component. Include construction details, material descriptions,iptions, diddimensions of individual components and profiles, and finishedheded for theth following:
a. Structural wall panels.
b. Metal roof panels.
c. Metal wall panels.
d. Metal liner panels.
e. Insulation System.
f. Heating, Ventilation and Air Conditioning: Description of proposed approach to HVAC design and proposed equipment.
g. Overhead roll-up doors.
13 34 19 – 6 RPP-SPEC-60023 Rev.07 2/14/2018 - 2:57 PM 78 of 317
RPP-SPEC-60023, Rev. 7
h. Selection Samples: For each finish product specified, provide complete set of color chips representing manufacturer’s full range of available colors and patterns.
3. Certificates
a. Manufacturer: IAS Quality Certification:
i. IAS certificate showing name and address of manufacturer, effective date, and category of certification. (See Paragraph 1.5.A.1.)
b. Erector: IAS Quality Certification:
i. IAS certificate showing name and address of erector, effective date, and category of certification, or, in lieu of IAS certification, documentation of past 5 years’ experience record to include project name, location, date of INFORMATONcompletion, building manufacturer, and contact name and phophone number. (See Paragraph 1.5.A.2.)
c. HVACC ContracContractor:
i. Documentationumentatiomenta of current Associated Air Balance Council (AABC)C) or NationalNatiNatio Environmental Balancing Bureau (NEBB) certificationsertificatio for those engineers/technicians in responsible chargeharge of tthe work under this scope.
C. Approvals Required Prior to Work Submittalsmittals 1. Structural Design Analysis Calculation(s)( ONLY) for theth metal building including design loads and design criteria. Design calculation shall be signed and sealed by a Registered Professional Engineer.r
2. Submit anchor bolt placement plan and column reactionsactions and base plate details in advance of erection drawings.
3. Structural foundation analysis and design calculation, signed and sealed by a Registered Professional Engineer.
4. HVAC system equipment and duct design calculations and drawings bearing the seal and signature of a Registered Professional Engineer responsible for the system design.
5. Shop Drawings:
a. Bear seal and signature of Registered Professional Engineer responsible for system design.
13 34 19 – 7 RPP-SPEC-60023 Rev.07 2/14/2018 - 2:57 PM 79 of 317
RPP-SPEC-60023, Rev. 7
b. Complete erection drawings with identification and assembly of building components indicating: assembly dimensions, locations of structural members, connections, attachments, openings, cambers, and loads wall and roof system dimensions, panel layout, general construction details, anchorages and method of anchorage installation, and include details of edge conditions, joints, panel profiles, corners, trim, flashings, closures and special details, distinguishing between factory- and field-assembled work; framing anchor bolt settings, and locations from datum, indicate welded connections with AWS A2.4 welding symbols, distinguishing between shop and field applications; indicate net weld lengths.
c. Show structural design basis information, and materials FOR specification information. d.d Show wall-mounted items including doors and louvers.
e.AccesAcce Accessory Drawings and installation details: Include details of the INFORMATONfollowinfollowing items:
i. FlashingFlashinFlashi and Trim.
ii. Gutters.utters.ters.
iii. Downspouts.pouts.outs.
iv. Details to be used aroundarou piping penetrations.
v. Louvers, ducting, HVAC eqequipment, duct supporting elements. ONLY f. Door Schedule: For doors and frames.ames.mes. IncInInclude details of reinforcement.
g. Structural foundation drawings and detailss showinshowing reinforcement footing and stem wall details.
6. Material Certification
a. Submit Certified Material Test Reports (CMTRs): covering the chemical and physical properties for the following materials:
i. Structural Steel.
ii. High-strength bolts, including nuts and washers.
iii. Unfinished bolts and nuts.
iv. Weld material.
13 34 19 – 8 RPP-SPEC-60023 Rev.07 2/14/2018 - 2:57 PM 80 of 317
RPP-SPEC-60023, Rev. 7
7. Submit detailed HVAC test and balance procedures, including test conditions for systems to be tested, prior to beginning the work.
8. Balancing and test report following completion of system adjustments including test results, adjustments, and rebalancing procedures.
D. Information Only Submittals
1. Instructions and Maintenance Manuals:
a. Manufacturer’s written instructions for shipping, handling, storage, and protection.
bb. Manufacturer’s erection or installation instructions for building FOR and components. Indicate preparation requirements and proper sequence of installation.
c.M Maintenanceainai Data: for metal panel finishes, to include in INFORMATONmaintemaintmaintenance manual.
1.4 DEFINITIONS
A. Buyer: The party who awards theth contract to the Contractor.
B. Installation Contractor: The partpartyy respresponsible for the labor, equipment, testing, and building erection.
C. Manufacturer: The party responsible for the ccocomplete and integrated pre- engineered metal building system including:ding:ing: lablabolabor, equipment, design, furnishing of components and accessories, fabrication,, examiexaminexamination, testing, and warrant of a complete building system. ONLY D. Primary Structural Framing or Members: Refers too anyy built-up,buil hot-rolled, or cold-form columns or framing systems which transfer their loadsloadloa directly to the structure’s foundation.
E. Secondary Structural Framing or Members: Refers to any cold-form, hot-rolled, or built-up purlins, girts, struts, bracing, or beams which transfer their loads from the cladding to the primary structural framing or members to which they attach.
1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Qualifications
1. Manufacturer’s Qualifications:
a. The Company manufacturing the products specified in this Section shall have a minimum of 5 years documented experience in the manufacture of Metal Building Systems of similar to that specified.
13 34 19 – 9 RPP-SPEC-60023 Rev.07 2/14/2018 - 2:57 PM 81 of 317
RPP-SPEC-60023, Rev. 7
b. As a manufactured product, the design, detailing, and fabrication of the pre-engineered metal building shall be performed by or under the direct supervision of a Registered Professional Engineer in the state of Washington, who is a permanent full-time employee of the manufacturer of the pre-engineered metal building.
c. The metal building systems manufacturer shall be accredited under the International Accreditation Service, (IAS) “Accreditation Criteria for Inspection Programs for Manufacturers of Metal Building Systems (AC472).”
d. Member of the MBMA. 2.FORIn Installation Contractor Qualifications: a.a Acceptable to and approved by manufacturer.
b.A Allll workmenw and their supervisors shall have specialized INFORMATONexperienexperieexperience in the erection of Metal Building Systems similar to thathat specifispecified, for a period of at least 5 years documented, and approvedrovedoved bbyy tthe manufacturer.
c. Erector shallhall emploemploy persons trained for installations of metal buildings.
3. Certificate of design and manufamanufacturect conformance:
a. Metal building system manufactmanufacmanufacturer shall submit written certification prepared and signed bbyy a Professional Engineer, registered to practice in the statetate ofo WWashington verifying that building system design and metallONLY roof systemsy design (including panels, clips, and support system components)componenomponen meet indicated loading requirements and codes of authoritiesuthoritiesthorities hhaving jurisdiction.
b. Certification shall reference specific dead loads, lilive loads, snow loads, wind loads/speeds, tributary area load rereductions (if applicable), concentrated loads, collateral loads, seismic loads, end-use categories, governing code bodies, including year, and load applications.
c. Certificate shall be on metal building system manufacturer’s letterhead.
4. HVAC Contractor
a. Employer of engineers and technicians regularly engaged in testing adjusting and balancing of HVAC equipment and systems.
13 34 19 – 10 RPP-SPEC-60023 Rev.07 2/14/2018 - 2:57 PM 82 of 317
RPP-SPEC-60023, Rev. 7
b. Certification by AABC of NEBB for testing, adjusting, and balancing of HVAC systems.
c. Perform work under supervision of AABC Certified Test and Balance Engineer or NEBB Certified Testing, Balancing and Adjusting Supervisor.
5. Qualification of Welding Personnel and Procedures
a. Personnel and procedures for welding structural steel shall have been qualified in accordance with AWS D1.1 prior to welding. Maintain copy of welding procedure specifications (WPSs), procedure qualification records (PQRs), and welder performance FOR qualification test results at jobsite. b.b Visual welding inspection methods shall be used for verification of wweld quality as outlined by AWS D1.1, Paragraph 6.9, with Visual INFORMATONIInspectionnspe Acceptance Criteria, in Table 6.1. c.Qualificati Qualification of Welding Inspectors: Welding inspectors shall be AWSWSS CertifieCertified Welding Inspectors qualified and certified in accordanceancence with AWS QC1.
6. Materials
a. The manufacturerr shall ensensure that no suspect or counterfeit parts or components are providedrovided in conjunction with this procurement. Suspect/counterfeit itemsms are desdescribed in Appendices 4 and 5 of DOE G 414.1-3.
b. CMTRs in accordance with ParagraphsgraphsONLYraphs 2.2.A.3,2 2.2.A.5, and 2.2.C.4.
1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. See Contract Statement of Work for additional general requirements.ire
B. Protect building components and accessories from corrosion, deformation, and other damage during delivery, storage, and handling.
C. Deliver to project site in manufacturer’s original, unopened containers or bundles, fully identified with product name, manufacturer, type, and grade.
D. Store off the ground (e.g., on wood blocking or pallets) and protect with impervious covering. Protect from rusting and damage or permanent distortion.
E. Protect finish of metal panels during storage, handling, and installation by application of removable plastic film or other suitable material placed between
13 34 19 – 11 RPP-SPEC-60023 Rev.07 2/14/2018 - 2:57 PM 83 of 317
RPP-SPEC-60023, Rev. 7
panels. Do not allow panels to come in contact with other material that would result in scratching, denting, staining, or other damage to the panel finish.
1.7 PERMITS
A. Permits are addressed by TOC work control process.
1.8 SITE CONDITIONS
A. The following site features and adjacent structures shall be considered in the design/construction as appropriate:
1. This Building is approximately 40 ft away from Building 242A-BA and aapproximately 15 ft from the associated diesel storage tank, to the south of the Building, as shown on Drawing H-14-110019, Sheet 1.
2. ElectricalElectrica transformer equipment will be located to the east of the building.uilding.ildingINFORMATON SeeSeS Drawing H-14-110019, Sheet 1. 1.9 SYSTEM DESCRIPTIONTIONION
A. The metal building shallhallll be cleclear span, rigid frame steel structure with tapered columns and roof beams,s, gable rorroof, without interior columns.
B. Minimum Roof Slope: 1 in.in 12 in.in (1:12)(
C. Building Dimensions/Bay Spacing/Eaveg/EaveEave HeHeight: As indicated on the Drawings.
D. The building shall be designed by the manufacturmanufactureranufactu as a complete system. All components of the system shall be suppliedd byy the same manufacturer.
1. Primary Framing System: Primary framingingONLYng shall consistc of transverse rigid frames of rafters and columns with solidlidd webs. The rigid frame shall be fabricated of shop-welded steel plate sections,ns, taperetapertapered columns, and roof beams, complete with necessary splice plates,s, factory drilled for bolted field assembly as specified in this Section.
2. Beam and Post Endwall Frames: Endwall corner posts and endwall roof beams, manufacturer’s standard, as required by design criteria (building will not be expandable).
3. Secondary framing shall consist of purlins, girts, eave struts, flange braces, and sag angles as required by design.
4. Lateral Bracing: manufacturer’s standard to accommodate horizontal loads not resisted by main frame action in the sidewall, endwall, and roof. Cables and/or wire rope bracing shall not be used.
13 34 19 – 12 RPP-SPEC-60023 Rev.07 2/14/2018 - 2:57 PM 84 of 317
RPP-SPEC-60023, Rev. 7
5. Wall System: Preformed steel panels, trim and accessories, with insulation as specified in this Section.
6. Roof Purlins: manufacturer’s standard zee purlins mounted on top of structural frame members.
7. Roof System: Standing-seam roof panels with insulation, as specified in this Section, Paragraph 2.3.
8. Interior liner panels.
9. Soffit panels.
10.A Accessories: Building louvers, overhead doors, walk-in doors, hardware, FORsealsealers, gutters, and downspouts.
1.10 DESIGN REQUIREMENTSQUIREM A. Structural PerformanceINFORMATONormancorman 1. Provide metaletal buildbuilding system capable of withstanding the effects of gravity loads andnd the followingfo loads within the limits and conditions indicated.
2. Size and fabricate wallll and roororoof system free of distortion or defects detrimental to appearancecee or perfoperformance.
B. Building Design Requirements
1. Applicable Building Code: The IBC,C, as amendedam by DOE, the State of Washington, and local agencies. The occococcupancycupancONLYupanc category is IV (seismic design category D) as defined in IBC andd shall beb designed as performance category 2 (PC-2) structure forr safetysafety significantsigs service.
2. Architectural/Code Data:
a. The occupancy of the building as defined in IBC is: F-1, Factory Industrial.
b. Construction Classification: Type IIB, Non-combustible.
c. Required Fire Resistance Ratings: None.
d. Fire Protection: None/Not Required.
e. Fire Extinguishers: Provided by others.
f. Exit Lighting: Provided by others.
13 34 19 – 13 RPP-SPEC-60023 Rev.07 2/14/2018 - 2:57 PM 85 of 317
RPP-SPEC-60023, Rev. 7
3. Fabrication of structural members shall be in accordance with MBMA, and for items not covered therein, AISC 360.
4. Snow Load:
a. Ground Snow Load (Pg): 15 pounds per square foot.
b. Exposure Coefficient (Ce): C.
c. Importance Factor (I): 1.00.
5. Minimum Roof Live Load: 20 pounds per square foot. Live load reduction not permitted.
6.FORBui Building System Dead Load: Shall be the weight of the Metal Building SySSystemstem and as determined by the building system manufacturer.
7. Collateralollateraollater Loads:L The Contractor shall state the allowable collateral loads for rooffINFORMATON purlipurlinpurlins and secondary framing, and primary rigid frames (the weight off ananyy nonon-moving equipment or material, such as ceilings, electrical or mechanmechanical equipment, sprinkler, conduit, etc.).
a. Metal buildinguilding desdedesign shall include the Buyers Pipe/Conduit Support Beamsams as shownshs in Figure 9. See Paragraph 1.10.B.15.
8. Wind Load:
a. IBC/ASCE 7:
i. Basic Wind Speed: 115 milesmilmi per hour (3-second gust).
ii. Exposure Category (Ce): C.ONLY
iii. Project-Specific Importance Factoractorctor (I): 11.0.
iv. Enclosed building.
b. All Members, including secondary roof and wall members, shall be designed for component and cladding net wind pressures as determined by ASCE 7.
i. Secondary roof members shall be designed for a minimum 20 psf net component and cladding uplift pressure.
13 34 19 – 14 RPP-SPEC-60023 Rev.07 2/14/2018 - 2:57 PM 86 of 317
RPP-SPEC-60023, Rev. 7
9. Earthquake Load:
a. IBC:
i. Occupancy Classification: Category IV
ii. IBC Site Class: C.
iii. Seismic Design Category: D.
iv. Project Specific Importance factor: 1.5 per ASCE 7.
v. Spectral Response Factors:
FOR ! Horizontal: SD1 = 0.192g and SDS = 0.588g
! Vertical: SD1 = 0.098 and SDS = 0.346g 10. LoaddCd Combinations:INFORMATONmbinmbi a. Designesignsign memetametal building system to withstand the most critical effects of loadad factorfactors and load combinations (dead, live, snow, earthquake,ake, windwind, etc.) in accordance with ASCE 7 or IBC.
11. Deflection Criteria:
a. In accordance withh the appliapplicable provisions of the AISC Steel Design Guide Series 3 – Servic Serviceability Design Considerations for Low-Rise Steel Buildings.gs..
b. Applies to primary and secondarydaryary framingfram members, bracing members, roof panels, and wall cladding.ladding.ONLYadding.
12. Drift Provisions:
a. Maximum horizontal deflection, or drift, at thehe roroof level of a structure as measured at the eave in relation to the concrete floor slab, shall be the lesser of 1 in. or H/250 based on a 50-year wind storm.
13. Thermal Effects: Standing Seam roof panels shall be free to move in response to the expansion and contraction forces resulting from a temperature variation. Provide metal panel systems that allow for thermal movements resulting from change in ambient and surface temperatures by preventing buckling, failure of joint seals, failure of connections, and other detrimental effects.
13 34 19 – 15 RPP-SPEC-60023 Rev.07 2/14/2018 - 2:57 PM 87 of 317
RPP-SPEC-60023, Rev. 7
14. Structural Steel Design Standards:
a. All structural steel sections and welded plate members shall be designed in accordance with the AISC Manual of Steel Construction and AWS D1.1.
b. MBMA, Metal Building Systems Manual.
c. AISC 360.
d. Cold-Formed Steel Structural Members: Design in accordance with AISI S100.
ee. Structural System: Design in accordance with specified building FOR Code. (Refer to Building Design Requirements, Paragraph 1.10.B.) 15. Roofoof MountedMoMINFORMATONuntun Supports for Buyers Equipment a.Provide pippipe/conduit support beams as shown on the Drawings (Figuregure 9) fofor support of the Buyers piping, conduit and cable runs.
16. Each beam shalll be designdesigdesigned to support a distributed load of 175 lb/ft.
a. Metal framingggs ssystemsystems attached to purlins in accordance with Building Manufactureracturercturer recommendations,rec where shown on Drawings:
i. B-Line Systems, Inc.;nc.; a ddivdivision of Cooper Industries. ii. Tolco®11, Inc. ONLY iii. Unistrut®12 Corp.; Unistrut InternationalInternatio
b. Repair insulation liner, as required, in accordancecordance with manufacturer’s instructions.
C. Building Anchorage and Foundation Design:
1. The scope for the building foundation design will be by the Contractor. Foundation design will support the building reactions and other loads that may be imposed by the building use developed and provided by the building manufacturer.
2. Foundation shall comply with IBC and ACI 318.
11 Tolco is a registered trademark of Cooper B-Line, Inc., Highland, Illinois. 12 Unistrut is a registered trademark of Unistrut International Corporation, Wayne, Michigan.
13 34 19 – 16 RPP-SPEC-60023 Rev.07 2/14/2018 - 2:57 PM 88 of 317
RPP-SPEC-60023, Rev. 7
D. Anchor Bolts:
1. Provide the design for anchor bolts (including size, length and embedment), which shall be designed to resist all column reactions.
2. The building anchor bolts shall be designed to resist the maximum column reactions resulting from the specified combinations of loadings. The column reactions will be provided by the building manufacturer.
3. Anchor bolts will be supplied by the Contractor and not by the building manufacturer.
4. Anchor bolts/rods shall meet ASTM F1554.
E. ElectricaleFORctrical rerequirements for HVAC Equipment
1.Provide tthe work in accordance with NFPA 70. Electrical material and equipmentuipme t sshall be accepted, certified, listed, labeled, or otherwise determinedINFORMATONined safssafe by a Nationally Recognized Testing Laboratory (NRTL). Materialslss and equequipment manufactured within the scope of standards published byy UnderwritersUnderw Laboratories, Inc., shall conform to those standards and shallhall havhave an applied UL listing mark.
2. Each major load (e.g.,.g.,, each eelectric unit heater, fan, etc.) will be provided with a local disconnectt switch providedp by Buyer. The Buyer will be responsible for providingg conductoconductors and conduit from equipment to disconnect switch. Connectiontionion of buildingbui supply power to disconnect switch will be Buyer. 3. The AREA is electrically unclassified.ed. ONLY 4. Enclosures shall be NEMA 4.
5. Building power to equipment will be 480 VAC/C// 3 ph / 60 Hz.
F. Heating and Ventilation
1. Contractor shall provide the design for building heating, ventilation and air-conditioning. The system shall be a ducted system. The HVAC design shall be such that the total heating and cooling load be divided into two 50% systems to afford some degree of conditioning and ventilation should one unit be taken out of service. Design to preclude accidental excessive negative pressure in the building.
2. Design Criteria:
a. The site meteorological pressure shall be measured at an elevation of 733 ft.
13 34 19 – 17 RPP-SPEC-60023 Rev.07 2/14/2018 - 2:57 PM 89 of 317
RPP-SPEC-60023, Rev. 7
b. For equipment sizing and building heating or cooling load calculations, design conditions for Hanford shall be used, which are:
i. Annual Heating Design Conditions @ 99%
! Temperature 12.6 °F DB
! Dew Point 4.6 °F
! Humidity Ratio 7.2 grains water/lb. dry air
! Mean coincident DB 15.1 °F
FORc.c Annual Cooling Design Conditions @ 2%
ii. Temperature 93.3°F DB INFORMATONii.i. Mean coincident WB 64.1°F iii. Dew Point 53.4°F
d. HVAC equipmenequipment located outdoor shall be designed for the extreme boundingoundingunding ttemperatureste of:
i. Summer:: 115°F
ii. Winter: -25°FF
e. Blowing Dust: Concentrationtionion of 0.1770. g/m3, with wind speeds of 18 m/s at a height of 3 m. Particlerticleicl size will be less than 150 μm in size. ONLY
f. Solar Radiation: Solar radiation environmentronmentnment oof 900 Langleys.
g. Equipment Heat Loads: (Basis: See Attachmenthmentme 1)
i. Electrical equipment heat load: 3,300 watt
ii. Water heater heat load: 26.4 kW
iii. Electric motor heat load: 4,350 watt
iv. Personnel Load: 5 people; 1,500 Btu/hr per person (assume: heavy work load)
13 34 19 – 18 RPP-SPEC-60023 Rev.07 2/14/2018 - 2:57 PM 90 of 317
RPP-SPEC-60023, Rev. 7
3. Indoor Design Conditions
a. Heating Load Calculation:
i. The winter outdoor dry bulb design temperature listed above shall apply.
ii. The indoor design temperature shall be no higher than 70°F for personnel and no less than 60°F to provide adequate equipment protection. The design basis shall be based on personnel comfort.
iii. No credit shall be taken for heat gain from equipment or personnel as equipment may or may not be running, and FOR personnel numbers vary.
b.b C Cooling Load Calculation:
INFORMATONi. The indoor design temperature shall be no less than 78°F and no higher than 104°F to provide adequate equipment protecprotection. The design basis shall be for personnel comfortcomfort.
4. Air System Design
a. The maximum flowow rate shshall be determined based on the loads expected to achieve design coconditions. Ventilation system ductwork system shall be designdesigned by the constant velocity method and pre-balanced through duct sizinsizing; however, ducting shall incorporate manually adjustableable dampersdadONLYmpp into the design. b. Air distribution system shall be designedesignedsigned in accordance with ASHRAE Fundamentals, “Duct Design”igngn” sectisect section.
c. All ductwork and fittings shall be fabricateded in accaccordance with the latest edition of the SMACNA “HVAC Duct CConstruction Standards Metal and Flexible,” and according to the static pressure expected to be encountered in the system. Flexible duct shall not be used for return or exhaust systems.
d. Manufacturer’s standard diffusers, registers, and grills shall be used.
e. Manually adjustable volume dampers shall be provided ahead of flexible ducts serving supply grills, registers, and diffusers.
13 34 19 – 19 RPP-SPEC-60023 Rev.07 2/14/2018 - 2:57 PM 91 of 317
RPP-SPEC-60023, Rev. 7
f. Welding shall be in accordance with AWS D1.1, for structural carbon steel, or AWS D9.1 for stainless and carbon steel sheet metal
5. Control System
a. HVAC system shall be designed and installed using commercially available equipment and techniques to control the temperature, pressure and air quality. All thermostats shall be manually adjustable over the operating range.
6. Piping and Coils
aa. HVAC equipment shall be located outdoors. (See Paragraph 1.10.F.15.) The location of air-conditioning equipment components shall account for piping and equipment pressure drop, anaand equipment clearance and maintenance requirements. Access shallhall be provided for the removal of any coil or other equipment INFORMATONcomponcomponent, in accordance with the manufacturer’s recommendation.ecommenommen
7. Ventilation andd ExhausExhaust
a. Building shallalll be provprovided with fresh ventilation air. Minimum ventilation shallll be in accordanceac with ASHRAE Standard 62.1- 2010 using the Ventilationentilationntilation RRate Procedure.
8. Materials
a. Metallic parts shall be of corrosionrosion resresistant metal, or suitably finished to resist corrosion. ONLY
b. Materials shall be free from defects orr imperimperfeimperfections that my affect performance. The use of rebuilt or refurbishedrbished cocomponents is prohibited for initial construction.
9. Noise Level
a. The mechanical equipment noise emissions at the maximum flow rate condition shall be less than 85 dBA, 8-hour time weighted average or equivalent noise dose when measured by a calibrated noise meter at 1 meter from the source.
10. Maintainability
a. Equipment, instrumentation, and items requiring maintenance shall be accessible for ease of inspection and removal/replacement.
13 34 19 – 20 RPP-SPEC-60023 Rev.07 2/14/2018 - 2:57 PM 92 of 317
RPP-SPEC-60023, Rev. 7
11. Filters
a. Filters for dust removal shall be provided and shall be designed for ease of replacement. Filters shall have a minimum efficiency of 80% in accordance with ASHRAE Standard 52.2.
12. Fans
a. Fans shall be industrial grade and shall be sized to provide the required HVAC system, required by this Specification. Fan shall meet, as a minimum, ANSI/AMCA Publication 204 (Balance and Quality), ANSI/AMCA Standard 210, (Laboratory Methods of Testing Fans for Certified Aerodynamic Performance Rating), and FOR ANSI/AMCA 99 (Standards Handbook). b.b Fan assembly shall be constructed of material that is compatible wwith the interconnected ducting. Machine guards shall be provided INFORMATONttoo proprotect personnel from rotating shafts. 13. Hangers and SuppSupports for HVAC Piping and Ductwork
a. Hangersrs for pipipiping and ductwork shall be designed to accommodateodate the IBC earthquake loads specified in Paragraph 1.10.B.9.
b. Metal framing systems:tems:
i. B-Line Systems,s, Inc.; a ddivision of Cooper Industries. ii. Tolco, Inc. ONLY iii. Unistrut Corp.; Tyco International,rnational,national Ltd.
c. Structural Steel: ASTM A36, steel plates,tes,es, shapeshapshapes, and bars; galvanized.
d. Install lateral bracing and supports to prevent swaying.
14. Louvers
a. Louvers shall be automatic intake dual combination louver damper. Stationary blades with extruded vinyl seals and automatic backdraft blades contained within an aluminum frame. Louver shall include a bird screen and filter rack.
b. Louvers shall be sized and designed to accommodate the design conditions.
13 34 19 – 21 RPP-SPEC-60023 Rev.07 2/14/2018 - 2:57 PM 93 of 317
RPP-SPEC-60023, Rev. 7
c. Louver design and structure shall withstand a minimum wind load of 20 lbs per sq. ft. (equivalent to a 90 mph wind).
d. Paint and prime to match wall panels.
15. Constraints to HVAC Design:
a. The Buyer has performed an electrical lighting analysis and has located light fixtures as shown in the attached drawings. The Contractor shall design and locate the duct system and associated duct support hangers to avoid interference with the lighting.
b. An area for the equipment pad for HVAC equipment has been designated/located as shown on the Drawings. Seller shall identify FOR equipment footprint necessary for anchoring the equipment. Equipment weights (operating) shall be provided to the Buyer for sussubstantiating the pad design by the Seller.
G. Performance RequiremRequirementsINFORMATON
1. Thermal Performanceerformanc
a. Provide insulated mmetal panel assemblies for roof and wall with the following minimumnimum R-Values,R and as required to accommodate building heatingng and venventilation requirements:
i. R-Value Metaltalal Roof PPanel Assemblies: 30.
ii. R-Value Metal Wallall PanePanel Assemblies: 19. iii. R-Value Metal Man-Doors:oo ONLYs: 5. iv. R-Value Metal Roll-up Doors:rs:s: 5.
H. Warranty
1. The manufacturer for the pre-engineered metal building shall be warrant in writing against defects in materials and workmanship, and that after erection is completed, system shall be weather tight. The warranty period shall be 5 years from date of completion erection.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 BUILDING SYSTEM MANUFACTURERS
A. Products manufactured or supplied by the following, and meeting these Specifications may be used on this Project:
1. American Buildings Company, Columbus, GA.
13 34 19 – 22 RPP-SPEC-60023 Rev.07 2/14/2018 - 2:57 PM 94 of 317
RPP-SPEC-60023, Rev. 7
2. Butler Manufacturing Co., Kansas City, MO.
3. Garco Building Systems, West Houston, TX.
4. HCI Steel Buildings, Arlington, WA.
5. Kirby Building Systems, Inc., Columbus, GA.
6. Nucor Building Systems, Waterloo, IN.
2.2 STRUCTURAL STEEL FRAMING
A. Primary Framing 1.FORPriPr Primary Framing: manufacturer’s standard primary-framing system, designdesigdesigned to withstand required loads and specified requirements and that provides the configuration shown on the Drawings. Column and rafter typepe shalshashallINFORMATON bbe tapered. Interior columns are not permitted. 2. All framingming membersmem shall carry an easily visible identifying mark to aid the installationation ContContractor in the erection of the building.
3. The manufacturerrerer shall submits CMTRs that verify that the material strength requirementsentsnts have bbeen met, and chemical requirements are in accordance with the applicable ASTM.
4. Plates, Stiffeners, etc.: All base platplaplates, splice plates, cap plates, and stiffeners shall be factory weldedded into pplace on the structural members and factory drilled/punched for boltedd field assaassembly. 5. All welded shop connections shall be in accordanceaccorda aONLYccord with AWS D1.1. Provide CMTRs for weld materials for primaryrimaryimaryy ffraframing weldments.
6. Hot-rolled shapes and flat bar shall conform too ASTM AA1011, ASTM A992, ASTM A572, or ASTM A529, Grade 55, having a minimum yield strength of 55,000 psi.
7. Round Tube shapes: ASTM A500, Grade B, with minimum yield strength of 42,000 psi.
8. Cold formed shapes: ASTM A1011, Grade 55 or ASTM A653, Grade 55.
9. X-Bracing: ASTM A529, A572, or A36. Do not use wire rope or cable for permanent bracing. Angles: fabricated from structural-steel shapes to match primary framing.
10. All field connections shall be bolted. Bolts shall be ASTM F1852 “twist- off” type tension control bolt, nut, and washer assemblies. Bolts shall conform to ASTM A325.
13 34 19 – 23 RPP-SPEC-60023 Rev.07 2/14/2018 - 2:57 PM 95 of 317
RPP-SPEC-60023, Rev. 7
11. Shop Primer of Structural Steel Framing System:
a. Clean surfaces to be primed of loose mill scale, rust, dirt, oil, grease, and other matter precluding paint bond. Follow, as appropriate, one or more specifications of the Steel Structures Painting Council.
b. Apply one coat of rust inhibitive alkyd zinc chromate, red oxide, or waterborne primer, 1.0 mil dry thickness.
B. Secondary Framing
1. Secondary Framing: Manufacturer’s standard secondary framing, inincluding purlins, girts, eave struts, flange bracing, base members, gable FORanglangles, clips, headers, jambs, and other miscellaneous structural members. Unless otherwise indicated by design, fabricate framing from either cold- formedformed,, sstructural-steel sheet or roll-formed, metallic-coated steel sheet, to complymplypl INFORMATON with the following: a.Roof PurliPurlins, Sidewall, and Endwall Girts: Z-shaped sections of adequatequate size and thickness as determined by the design criteria.
b. Steel for coldcold-formed-form galvanized channel and Z-sections shall be ASTM A1011,11,1, Grade 55 (55,000 psi minimum yield stress), with G60 galvanizedd coatingcoating.
c. Base or Sill Angles: zinc-zinc-coatedcoat (galvanized) steel sheet.
d. Framing for Openings: Channelhannel shapes;sha fabricated from cold- formed, structural-steel sheett or ststrstructural-steelct shapes. Frame head and jamb of door openings andONLYnd headhead, jamb, and sill of other openings.
e. Miscellaneous Structural Members: Manufacturer’snufacturenufactu standard sections fabricated from cold-formed, structural-steelctural-st sheet; built- up steel plates; or zinc-coated (galvanized) steelee sheet; designed to withstand required loads.
C. Bolted Connections
1. Primary Framing: ASTM A325 or ASTM A490 high-strength bolted connections.
2. Secondary Framing: ASTM A307 or ASTM A325.
3. ASTM A563 heavy-hex carbon steel nuts; and ASTM F436 hardened carbon-steel washers.
13 34 19 – 24 RPP-SPEC-60023 Rev.07 2/14/2018 - 2:57 PM 96 of 317
RPP-SPEC-60023, Rev. 7
4. Provide CMTRs for high-strength bolts, including nuts and washers, and CMTRs for unfinished bolts and nuts.
2.3 METAL ROOF AND WALL PANELS
A. Provide roofing, siding, interior metal liner, and soffit sheets formed to the general profile or configuration customarily utilized by the metal building system manufacturer to meet the Specification requirements.
1. Metal Roof System: Standing seam roof panels; manufacturer’s factory- formed standing seam roof panel system designed for mechanical attachment of panels to roof purlins using a concealed clip. Roof system shall meet UL Wind Uplift Classification Rating, UL 580: Class 90. Form papanels from 24 gauge, 50,000 psi minimum yield Galvalume®13 sheet FORsteelsteel, ASTM A792, grade 50, with a color coating. Perimeter trim, start/finstart/finish panels, ridge cover, and transition flashing shall be provided and shallshal be designed to accommodate the roof’s expansion/contraction. Closures,sureur , sealants,sea and fasteners shall be provided as required for a weather-tightINFORMATONr-tight ininstallation.
2. Wall Panels:s:: ManufManufaManufacturer’s standard factory-formed panel system designed for mechanicalechanical attachment of panels to girts using exposed fasteners. Form panelsanels of a minimum of 24-gauge, zinc-coated steel sheets. Panel Profile:e:: PBR, 1 1/4-in. deep ribs which are trapezoidal in shape and are spaced onn 1212-in.-in. ce centers; one piece, extending from sill to eave, with base trim at sill and eave trim. Closures, sealants, and fasteners shall be provided as required for a weweather-tighta installation.
3. Interior Liner Panels: Manufacturer’ser’’s standstandard factory-formed panel system designed for mechanical attachmenthmehm nt of panels to girts using exposed fasteners. Form panels of minimummumONLY of 24-gauge,2 zinc-coated steel sheets, ASTM A653. Finish shall be: shop-appliedshop-app baked enamel finish, to liner panels, and related trim and accessorycessoryessory eleelelements. Apply finish coat on the exposed face and manufacturer’s’s standardstanda wash coat on the reverse face; color shall be manufacturer’s standarddardd white. Liner height shall be 8 ft from finished floor. Provide matching cap trim and trim around walk doors.
4. Soffit Panels: Manufacturer’s standard factory-formed, soffit panel system designed for mechanical attachment of panels using exposed fasteners. Form panels of minimum 26-gauge, zinc-coated steel sheet, ASTM A653.
5. Panel Coatings: Exterior side of roof, soffit, and siding panels shall be finished with an extended life, fluoropolymer coating utilizing
13 Galvalume is a registered trademark of BIEC International, Inc., Vancouver, Washington.
13 34 19 – 25 RPP-SPEC-60023 Rev.07 2/14/2018 - 2:57 PM 97 of 317
RPP-SPEC-60023, Rev. 7
Kynar®14 500/Hylar®15 5000 resin. Reverse side of panels shall receive manufacturer’s standard wash coat. Surfaces shall be properly prepared and primed, then coated and oven-baked to cure. Top coating shall have a dry film thickness of 0.75-0.90 mils on the exterior surface, over 0.2 mils nominal dry film thickness of epoxy type primer over galvanized or Galvalume sheet. The interior surface shall be protected by manufacturer’s standard wash coat system of 0.6 ± 0.05 mils thickness.
B. Flashing, Trim & Closures
1. Flashing and/or trim shall be furnished at eaves, rake, corners, base, framed openings, and wherever necessary to seal against the weather and provide a finished appearance. Coatings shall match associated roofing, FORlinliner and siding panels. C. Sealant,ant,t, SealinSealing Tape, Weather-strips:
1. Concealedncealce d JointJ Sealants: Non-shrinking, non-drying butyl-based sealant specificallycallINFORMATONy formforformulated for factory application in standing seams.
2. Elastomericc Joint SeaSealant: Elastomeric polyurethane, polysulfide, or silicon rubber sealantealant asa recommended by the manufacturer.
3. Tape Sealers: Manufacturer’sufacturerfacturer standard pressure-sensitive, non-corrosive, non-curing butyl tape.
4. Weather strips: Door manufacturer’sfactureracturer’s standard approved products; closed cell neoprene or extruded vinyl.l 2.4 INSULATION AND VAPOR BARRIERS ONLY A. Fiberglass banded blanket or batt insulation system:m:
1. Insulation: ASTM C991, Type 1 fiberglass blanketanket insulinsinsulation.
2. Manufacturer’s standard continuous polyethylene filmlm vvapor retarder liner, white in color.
3. The composite product shall have a fire hazard classification of 25 (maximum) flame spread index and 50 (maximum) smoke developed index, when used in accordance with ASTM E84.
4. Accessories: Include all insulation hangers, sealants, and fasteners as required by the manufacturer for a complete system.
14 Kynar is a registered trademark of Arkema, Inc., Prussia, Pennsylvania. 15 Hylar is a registered trademark of Solvay Solexis, Inc., Thorofare, New Jersey.
13 34 19 – 26 RPP-SPEC-60023 Rev.07 2/14/2018 - 2:57 PM 98 of 317
RPP-SPEC-60023, Rev. 7
5. Manufacturer: Simple Saver System®16, Thermal Design, Madison, NE; or equal.
2.5 ACCESSORIES
A. Metal Personnel Doors, Frames, and Hardware:
1. Provide where shown on the attached Drawings.
2. Insulated metal doors and frames shall comply with IBC, SDI-100, Level 3, extra heavy duty, Model 2 (seamless), minimum 16-gauge faces.
3. Standard 3-ft wide by 7-ft high by 1 3/4-in. thick.
4.FORGla Glazing: Narrow lite glass (N) panel with trim and flexible polycarbonate panel.
5. Manufacturer’sManufactanufac ur standard zinc-coated galvanized steel, and finish painted, with closureosureINFORMATON aat top of doors. 6. Furnish manufacturer’sanufacturanufactu standard hardware: Lockset, strike plate, weather- stripping and thresholdthreshold,reshold kick plate.
7. Doors and frames shall be designedd by their manufacturer to withstand the wind loads specified in paragraparagraph “Wind Loads” in Part 26 (i.e., for ASCE 7, Wind Loads – ComponentsCompone and Cladding).
B. Overhead Coiling (Rollup) Doors:
1. Doors shall be overhead, coiling type,pe,e, with interlocking slats, complete with anchoring and door hardware, guides,uideid ONLYs, hood,hoodhoo and operating mechanisms, and designed for use on openingseningsnings asa indicated and designed to withstand wind loading indicated. Slats shallhall be ccocontinuous length for width of door indicated, without splices. Use grease-greasgrease-sealedsease or self- lubricating bearings for rotating members.
2. Manual Chain Hoist: Provide chain hoist operator with endless steel chain, chain pocket wheel and guard, geared reduction unit, and chain keeper secured to guide.
3. Door Curtain and Hood Material: Galvanized steel.
4. Insulation: Fill slats with manufacturer’s standard thermal insulation complying with maximum flame-spread and smoke-developed indexes of 25 and 50, respectively, in accordance with ASTM E84. Enclose insulation completely within slate faces.
16 Simple Saver System is a registered trademark of Harkins, Daniel J., Port Charlotte, Florida.
13 34 19 – 27 RPP-SPEC-60023 Rev.07 2/14/2018 - 2:57 PM 99 of 317
RPP-SPEC-60023, Rev. 7
5. Locking Devices: Fabricate with side-locking bolts to engage through slots in tracks for locking by padlock (provided by Buyer), located on both left and right jamb sides, operable from coil side.
6. Door-Finish: Manufacturer’s standard Baked-Enamel or Powder-Coated corrosion-resistant finish: Gray color as selected from manufacturer’s full range for both interior curtain slat and exterior curtain slat faces.
7. Accessories:
a. Weather seals: Equip each door with weather-striping gaskets fitted to entire perimeter of door for a weather-tight installation.
bb. Push/Pull Handles: Equip the door with emergency-operated FOR lifting handles on each side of door, finished to match door.
C. Trim: Factory-formedFactory-fof and factory-painted ridge cap, rake trim, simple eave trim, panel side trim,imINFORMATON corncorner trim, door trim, and other trim as necessary. D. Gutter Fascia andnd DownsDownspouts:
1. Material: ASTMTMM A653A653, galvanized steel.
2. Gutter Fascia:
a. Prefinished to matchatchtch wall ppanels.
b. Furnish hangers with factory-appliedfactoryactory-apa paint.
3. Preformed Corner Closures: Furnishshh to mamatch configuration of gable fascia. ONLY 4. Downspouts:
a. Configuration: Nominal 4-in. corrugatedd rectangurectangular box with minimum 11 sq. in. of cross-section area.
b. Factory finish to match wall panels.
E. Miscellaneous: Manufacturer’s standard fasteners, self-tapping screws, metal- backed neoprene washers, weather stripping, sealants, closure strips, gaskets, and other items as required for a complete installation.
2.6 FABRICATION
A. Factory Fabricate: To manufacturer’s written standards, MBMA Low Rise Building Systems Manual, and, for items not covered, AISC Load and Resistance Factor Design Specification for Structural Steel Buildings.
13 34 19 – 28 RPP-SPEC-60023 Rev.07 2/14/2018 - 2:57 PM 100 of 317
RPP-SPEC-60023, Rev. 7
B. Building Parts:
1. Accurate and true to dimension to facilitate building erection and proper fit without cutting, fitting or other field alterations.
2. Mark each piece and part of the assembly to correspond with previously prepared erection drawings, diagrams, and instruction manuals.
3. Fabricate structural framing to produce clean, smooth cuts and bends. Punch holes of proper size, shape, and location. Members shall be free of cracks, tears, ruptures, and sharp edges.
C. Tolerances: Comply with MBMA for fabrication and erection tolerances.
D. Weldedelded CoConnections: In accordance with AWS D1.1.
E. Sheet Steel: WeWelding in accordance with AWS D1.3. PART 3 EXECUTION INFORMATON 3.1 COORDINATION
A. Building will be erectedd around ooperating facilities.
3.2 EXAMINATION
A. Verify concrete foundation, floor slab,ab, mechanicalmechmec and electrical utilities, and placed anchors are in correct positionn and propproperly squared.
B. Proceed with erection only after unsatisfactoryctoryoryy conditionscon have been corrected.
3.3 ERECTION OF STRUCTURAL FRAMING ONLY
A. Erect metal building system according to manufacturer’srerr’s writtwritten erection instructions and erection drawings.
B. Use templates for accurate setting of anchor rods, as required.
C. Provide temporary bracing in accordance with MBMA standards and as required for safe installation.
D. Ream holes requiring enlargement to admit bolts. Burned holes for bolted connections are not permitted without written approval by the Metal Building System manufacturer’s professional engineer.
E. Do not field cut, drill, or alter structural members without written approval from metal building system manufacturer’s professional engineer.
13 34 19 – 29 RPP-SPEC-60023 Rev.07 2/14/2018 - 2:57 PM 101 of 317
RPP-SPEC-60023, Rev. 7
F. Set structural framing accurately in locations and to elevations indicated. Erect building frame true and level with vertical members plumb and bracing properly installed. Maintain structural stability of frame during erection.
G. Align and adjust structural framing before permanently fastening. Before assembly, clean bearing surfaces and other surfaces that will be in permanent contact with framing. Perform necessary adjustments to compensate for discrepancies in elevations and alignment.
1. Level and plumb individual members of structure.
2. Make allowances for difference between temperature at time of erection and mean temperature when structure will be completed and in service.
H. ProvideovideFOR temporarytem guys and bracing where needed for squaring and plumbing, and securingcuring ththe structural framing against loads such as wind loads acting on the exposedd framingframing.
I. Primary FramingINFORMATONng and EndE Walls: Erect framing level, plumb, rigid, secure, and true to line. Levelvel baseplabaseplbaseplates to a true even plane with full bearing to supporting structures.
1. Make field connectionsections usingus high-strength bolts installed according to RCSC for bolt type andnd joint type specified.
J. Secondary Framing: Erect framingng level, plumb,p rigid, secure, and true to line. Field bolt secondary framing to clipspss attached to primary framing as required to satisfy design loads and as shown on Drawings.awings. 1. Locate and space wall girts to suit openingspeningONLYs susuch as doors and windows. 2. Provide supplemental framing at entire perimetererimeterrimeter oof openings, including doors, louvers, fans, and other penetrations of roof anda walls.
K. Framing for Openings: Provide shapes of proper design andnd size to reinforce openings and to carry loads and vibrations imposed, includingng equipment furnished under mechanical and electrical work. Securely attach to structural framing.
L. Erection Tolerances: Maintain erection tolerances of structural framing within those permitted by MBMA.
3.4 ROOF AND WALL PANELS
A. Install all wall and roofing systems in accordance with manufacturer’s instruction and details.
B. Field Cutting of panels by torch is not permitted.
13 34 19 – 30 RPP-SPEC-60023 Rev.07 2/14/2018 - 2:57 PM 102 of 317
RPP-SPEC-60023, Rev. 7
C. Attach panels to structural supports to maintain a weather tight seal while allowing for thermal and structural movement.
1. Install exposed fasteners in true vertical and horizontal alignment.
2. Field seam side laps of standing seam roof panels using electrically- operated seaming machine.
3. Use proper tools to install screw fasteners to compress neoprene washer without damaging washer or stripping metal.
D. Install manufacturer’s standard joint sealants, gaskets, and closure strips as required for weather-tight installation.
E. FieldFORld CuttinCutting and Patching: Perform in a manner not to impair appearance, weathertightness,thertightneertightne or structural capacity of panel system. 3.5 DOORS AND FRAMERAMERAMINFORMATON INIINSTALLATION A. General: Installl doors anand frames plumb, rigid, properly aligned, and securely fastened in place according to manufacturers’ written instructions. Coordinate installation with wall flashingsflaashings and other components. Seal perimeter of each door frame with elastomericmeric sealasealant used for metal wall panels.
B. Adjust hardware and moving parts to functionfu smoothly so that doors operate easily, free of warp, twist, or distortion.tortion. LubricateL bearings and sliding parts as recommended by manufacturer.
3.6 ACCESSORY INSTALLATION A. General: Install accessories with positive anchoragehoh rageONLYage to building and weathertight mounting, and provide for thermal expansion. Coordinateoordinate installation with flashings and other components.
1. Install components required for a complete metal roof panpanel assembly, including trim, copings, ridge closures, seams covers,sf flashings, sealants, gaskets, fillers, closure strips, and similar items.
2. Install components for a complete metal wall panel assembly, including trim, copings, corners, seam covers, flashings, sealants, gaskets, fillers, closure strips, and similar items.
3. Where dissimilar metal surfaces contact each other or corrosive substrates, protect against galvanic action by painting contact surfaces with corrosion-resistant coating, by applying rubberized-asphalt underlayment to each contact surface, or by other permanent separation as recommended by manufacturer.
13 34 19 – 31 RPP-SPEC-60023 Rev.07 2/14/2018 - 2:57 PM 103 of 317
RPP-SPEC-60023, Rev. 7
B. Gutters/Downspouts:
1. Install in accordance with manufacturer’s written installation instructions. Join sections with riveted-and-soldered or lapped-and-sealed joints. Attach gutters to eaves with gutter hangers spaced as required for gutter size, but not more than 36 in. o.c., using manufacturer’s standard fasteners. Provide end closures and seal watertight with sealant. Provide for thermal expansion.
2. Downspouts: Join sections with 1 1/2-in. telescoping joints. Provide fasteners designed to hold downspouts securely 1 in. away from walls; locate fasteners at top and bottom and at approximately 60 in. o.c. in between. Provide elbows at base of downspouts to direct water away from bubuilding. Install splash pads under each downspout.
C. Louvers:ers:rs: LocateLocat and place louver units level, plumb, and at indicated alignment with adjacentacent wowork.w
D. Pipe Flashing: INFORMATONForm flaflflashing around pipe penetrations. Fasten and seal to panel as recommendedd byby manufacturer.manu
3.7 TESTING
A. After installation, perform electricalectrical continuity check and functionally check fans and heaters. Document testingg and susubmitubmb test report.
B. HVAC Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing:ancing: CCollect the following data and include in final report: 1. Title Page: ONLY a. Name of Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing Agency.
b. Address of Testing, Adjusting, and Balancingancing AgAAgency.
c. Telephone and facsimile numbers of Testing, AAdjusting, and Balancing Agency.
d. Project name.
e. Project location.
f. Name of TOC Construction Representative.
g. Project Subcontractor.
h. Project altitude.
i. Report date.
13 34 19 – 32 RPP-SPEC-60023 Rev.07 2/14/2018 - 2:57 PM 104 of 317
RPP-SPEC-60023, Rev. 7
2. Summary Comments:
a. Design versus final performance.
b. Notable characteristics of system.
c. Description of systems operation sequence.
d. Nomenclature used throughout report.
e. Test conditions.
3. Instrument List: FORa.a Instrument. b. Manufacturer.M c.INFORMATONMode Model number. d. Serialerialial number.numnumb
e. Range.
f. Calibration date.ate.
4. Electric Motors:
a. Manufacturer. b. Model/Frame. ONLY c. HP/BHP.
d. Phase, voltage, amperage; nameplate, actual,ctual, no lload.
e. RPM
f. Service factor.
g. Starter size, rating, heater elements.
h. Sheave Make/Size/Bore.
13 34 19 – 33 RPP-SPEC-60023 Rev.07 2/14/2018 - 2:57 PM 105 of 317
RPP-SPEC-60023, Rev. 7
5. V-Belt Drive:
a. Identification/location.
b. Required driven RPM.
c. Driven sheave, diameter and RPM.
d. Belt, size and quantity.
e. Motor sheave diameter and RPM.
f. Center to center distance. 6.FOR CoolingCoC Coil Data: a. I Identification/number. b.INFORMATON Location.Locat c. Service.ervice.vice.
d. Manufacturer.acturer.cturer.
e. Air flow, designsigngn and aactual.
f. Entering air DB temperature,emperaturemperature design and actual.
g. Entering air WB temperature,rature,ture, dedesdesign and actual. h. Leaving air WB temperature,, desigdesidesignONLYn anand actual. i. Leaving air WB temperature, designgn and actacactual.
j. Water flow, design and actual.
k. Water pressure drop, design and actual.
l. Entering water temperature, design and actual.
m. Leaving water temperature, design and actual.
n. Saturated suction temperature, design and actual.
o. Air pressure drop, design and actual.
13 34 19 – 34 RPP-SPEC-60023 Rev.07 2/14/2018 - 2:57 PM 106 of 317
RPP-SPEC-60023, Rev. 7
7. Heating Coil Data:
a. Identification/number.
b. Location.
c. Service.
d. Manufacturer.
e. Air flow, design and actual.
f. Water flow, design and actual. FORg.g Water pressure drop, design and actual. h. EnteringE water temperature, design and actual. i.INFORMATON LeavingLeavinLeav water temperature, design and actual. j. Enteringnteringtering airai temperature, design and actual.
k. Leavingg air temptemperature, design and actual.
l. Air pressure drop, designdesides and actual.
8. Electric Duct Heater:
a. Manufacturer. b. Identification/number. ONLY c. Location.
d. Model number.
e. Design kW.
f. Number of stages and readings.
g. Phase, voltage, amperage.
h. Test voltage (each phase)
i. Test amperage (each phase).
j. Air flow, specified and actual.
k. Temperature rise, specified and actual
13 34 19 – 35 RPP-SPEC-60023 Rev.07 2/14/2018 - 2:57 PM 107 of 317
RPP-SPEC-60023, Rev. 7
9. Air Moving Equipment (e.g., Air Handling Unit, etc.):
a. Location.
b. Manufacturer.
c. Model number.
d. Serial number.
e. Arrangement/Class/Discharge.
f. Air flow, specified and actual. FORg. Return air flow, specified and actual. h.h Outside air flow, specified and actual. i.INFORMATON Total static pressure (total external), specified and actual. j. Inletnlet pressure.pressu
k. Dischargeargege presspressure.
l. Sheave Make/Size/Bore.ke/Size/Bke/Size/
m. Number of Belts/Make/Size./Make/SiMake/Si
n. Fan RPM.
10. Duct
a. System zone/branch. ONLY
b. Duct size.
c. Area.
d. Design velocity.
e. Design air flow.
f. Test velocity.
g. Test air flow.
h. Duct static pressure.
i. Air temperature.
j. Air correction factor.
13 34 19 – 36 RPP-SPEC-60023 Rev.07 2/14/2018 - 2:57 PM 108 of 317
RPP-SPEC-60023, Rev. 7
11. Vibration Test:
a. Location of points:
i. Fan bearing, drive end.
ii. Fan bearing, opposite end.
iii. Motor bearing, center (when applicable).
iv. Motor bearing, drive end.
v. Motor bearing, opposite end. FOR vi. Casing (bottom or top). vvii. Casing (side). 12. Finalall Design DINFORMATONesign DocumentD Package. a. Finalnalal (as(as-built)-bub drawings.
b. Final (as-built)ass-built) cacalculations.
c. Final Test Report.eportport.
13. Normally accepted readings,ngs,gs, velocivelocity and accelerations.
14. Unusual conditions at time of test.est.t. 3.8 REPAIR, CLEANING, AND PAINTING ONLY A. Following erection, remove all unused material, screws,crews, fafasfasteners, and other debris from completed installation. Use caution whenen removiremoremoving metal cuttings from surface of prefinished metal panels.
B. Replace damaged, dented, buckled, or discolored metal panels.el
C. Repair damaged, painted, and galvanized surfaces.
3.9 MANUFACTURER’S SERVICES
A. Provide manufacturer’s representative at Site, for installation assistance, inspection, and certification of proper installation.
END OF SECTION 13 34 19
13 34 19 – 37 RPP-SPEC-60023 Rev.07 2/14/2018 - 2:57 PM 109 of 317
RPP-SPEC-60023, Rev. 7
SECTION 13 34 19 – ATTACHMENT 1
HVAC DESIGN LOADS
13 34 19 – Att. 1–1 RPP-SPEC-60023 Rev.07 2/14/2018 - 2:57 PM 110 of 317
RPP-SPEC-60023, Rev. 7
HVAC Design Loads
Miscellaneous Electrical Loads:
1) 40 hp drive on hot water skids (1 per skid) – 764 Watts 2) 7.5 HP drive on water skid – 267 Watts 3) Heater control cabinet SCR’s (1 per skid, 1.5 Watts/Amp) – 2500 Watts 4) Led lighting fixtures 10.7 Watts/fixture 24 fixtures – 256 watts 5) Miscellaneous power supplies, HMI Panel, equipment contactors, switchgear equipment – 500 Watts FO
END OF ATTACHMENT 1
13 34 19 – Att. 1–2 RPP-SPEC-60023 Rev.07 2/14/2018 - 2:57 PM 111 of 317
RPP-SPEC-60023, Rev. 7
SECTION 13 47 13.13
CATHODIC PROTECTION FOR UNDERGROUND AND SUBMERGED PIPING
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 SCOPE OF WORK
A. This Section includes requirements for materials, installation, and repair to underground cathodic protection systems.
1.2 RELATED DOCUMENTS/CODES AND STANDARDS Drawings andFOR gengegeneral provisions of the contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions andd DivDivisDivision 01 Specification Sections apply to this section.
The following documentsocumentcumen and other referenced therein, form part of the Contract to the extent designated innthnt thisINFORMATONis SecSectSection. Referenced documents are those current as of the date of this Section, unless otherwise indicated.
A. American Society foror TestingTestin and Materials (ASTM)
ASTM B8-11 StandardStandStan Specification for Concentric-Lay-Stranded CopperCoppe Conductors, Hard, Medium-Hard, or Soft
ASTM D1248-12 Standardndardard SpeSpecSpecifications for Polyethylene Plastics Extrusionionon MaterialsMater for Wire and Cable, Type 1, Class A, Categoryategoryy 5,5 Grades E4 & E5 B. Hanford Documents ONLY H-2-94086, Rev. 2 Cathodic Protection DetailsDetails,, Cables,C Boxes & Jumpers
H-14-011500 Tank Farm Cathodic Protectionionon GGeneral Notes & Details
C. NACE International (NACE)
SP0169-2013 Control of External Corrosion on Underground or Submerged Metallic Piping Systems
SP0285-2011 Corrosion Control of Underground Storage Tank Systems by Cathodic ProtectionSP0286-2007 Electrical Isolation of Cathodically Protected Pipelines
13 47 13.13 – 1 RPP-SPEC-60023 Rev.07 2/14/2018 - 2:57 PM 112 of 317
RPP-SPEC-60023, Rev. 7
D. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA)
NFPA 70, 2014 National Electrical Code
E. Underwriters Laboratories (UL)
UL 486C Splicing Wire Connectors
UL 510 Standard for Polyvinyl Chloride, Polyethylene, and Rubber Insulating Tape
1.3 SUBMITTALS Not Used.FOR 1.4 QUALITYY ASSURANCEASSURSSUR
A. The installationllationlation sshall conform to the National Electrical Code, applicable local codes, and StaStandardt ndardINFORMATON PPractices (SP) of NACE, SP0285, SP0286, and SP0169. B. Electrical/Electronicnic ProduProduct Acceptability: Provide labeling and documentation in accordance with thehe StatemStatement of Work and Section 26 05 53, “Identification for Electrical Systems.””
C. Misrepresented Products: Seeee the StatStStatement of Work for required measures to prevent use of misrepresented products.products
1.5 PERMITS
A. Permits are addressed by TOC work controloll procesproceprocess.
1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING ONLY
A. See the Contract Statement of Work for general requirements.irements.ements.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 SUBSTITUTES
A. See the Contract Statement of Work for substitution approvals.
2.2 MATERIALS
A. 3M™17 Scotchkote™17 Electrical coating or equivalent.
B. Test Station
17 3M, Schotch, Scotchcast, Scotchfil, Scotchkote, Skotchlok, and Scotchrap are trademarks of 3M Company, St. Paul, Minnesota.
13 47 13.13 – 2 RPP-SPEC-60023 Rev.07 2/14/2018 - 2:57 PM 113 of 317
RPP-SPEC-60023, Rev. 7
1. Box: Gerome 2007 Box, or equivalent as required, as depicted on H-14-011500.
2. Enclosure as required: Quazite PD1730BA18 Polymer Concrete enclosure or equivalent, as depicted on H-14-011500 and/or installation drawings
C. Anode Junction Boxes:
1. On Electrical Rack: 16” x 16” NEMA 4 Enclosure per H-14-011500.
2. Stand Alone
a. 12” x 16” NEMA 4 Enclosure per H-14-011500 details, OR
b.b Farwest Box per Quote Numbers 18-131-AC and 18-132-AC.
D. Plastic Warning Tape: 1. Plasticticic INFORMATONwarninwarniwarning tape for horizontal runs of buried leads in cable trenches shall bee a minimumminim of 4-mils thick and 6-inches wide inert, yellow, plastic film designedned for prprolonged use underground. The tape shall have the words, “CAUTIONUTIONION CACATHODIC PROTECTION CABLE BELOW,” or similar, clearly visible in rrepeating patterns along its entire length.
2. Plastic warning tape for anodes shall be buried according to H-14-011500.
E. Conductors:
1. Direct buried: High Molecular Weight PoPPolyethylene (HMWPE) Cathodic Protection Cables: 600 Volts, Singlelee CondConduConductor, Stranded Copper cable for direct burial, No. 2-AWG. ConductorctoONLY shall conform to ASTM B8-11. Insulation shall conform to ASTM D1248-128-12. SizeSizSi specified on the Drawings.
2. Conduit run: No. 2-AWG stranded THHN wire.
3. Bonding: Type “CP” wire, No. 4 AWG, or as shown on drawings.
4. Anode header and loop: Type “CP” wire, No. 2 AWG, or as shown on drawings.
F. Anode
1. Canistered Wire Anode: De Nora LIDA®18 Pack canistered wire anode, Model LP 3 X 40H with at least 1.4 amp output or equivalent.
18 LIDA is registered trademark of De Nora Tech, Inc., Chardon, Ohio.
13 47 13.13 – 3 RPP-SPEC-60023 Rev.07 2/14/2018 - 2:57 PM 114 of 317
RPP-SPEC-60023, Rev. 7
G. Conductor Exothermic Welds
1. For New and Old Pipe: Follow manufacturer’s instructions. See H-14-011500 for applicable detail.
a. Exothermic Fusion Weld Molds, Weld Metal, and Conductor Sleeves.
b. Use either of the following “Cadweld®1” weld molds by Erico Products or approved substitute. Weld metal shall be either low emission type recommended by weld mold manufacturer with igniters and filters, or standard type. Base mold on pipe size and conductor size. Maximum weld metal size shall be CA15. Adapter copper sleeves shall be used for #10 AWG and smaller FOR conductors.
cc.L Low emission (EXOLON) type CAHA mold with electric starter, INFORMATONpartart no.n XLB971A1. Mold type suffix based on conductor size. d.StaSt Standardndard typety CAHA mold. Suffix based on conductor size.
e. Connectionsctionstions shshall be made in accordance with UL 486C.
2. Weld Coating
a. Coating for all weldselds shall be a cold-applied, fast-drying mastic consisting of bituminousnous resin and solvents. The minimum percentage of solids shallall be 80 ppercent. Substitute coating materials shall be compatibleible with ccable insulation, pipe coating and environment. Manufacturerurer ofoONLY CoContractor’s choice. b. Ensure manufacturer’s installationn and inspinspection procedures are provided with product. Procedures foror “Cadw“Cadweld” items are contained in Erico Products “Installers and InspectorsInspecsp Guide” (A- 7D-01, 1985).
H. Repair Coating: Sherwin Williams SEAGUARD MP (see Section 09 91 00, “Painting,” for product details)
1. Power tool clean the area per manufacturer’s recommendations before coating application.
2. Brush or roll application is acceptable for repairs.
I. Splice Kit, Conductor:
13 47 13.13 – 4 RPP-SPEC-60023 Rev.07 2/14/2018 - 2:57 PM 115 of 317
RPP-SPEC-60023, Rev. 7
1. Cadweld®19 CASS Type cable splice kit, by Erico Products, or approved substitute. Suffix based on conductor size.
2. Cadweld CATA Type cable splice kit, by Erico Products, or approved substitute. Suffix based on conductor size.
3. Epoxy potting compound for encapsulating electrical wire splices or terminated wires buried underground (for use as required), 3M Company, Scotchcast™17 Multi-Mold Resin Splicing Kit, 85-10, or approved substitute.
J. Tape, Electrical Insulating 1.FOR Scotch™S 17 rubber splicing tape #23 2.Scotch electrical tape #33 a.INFORMATONP Plastic:as UL 510, 3/4-inch wide b. Self-vulcanizing:Selff-vulca UL 510, 3/4-inch wide
K. 3M Scotchkote Electricaltricalcal CoaCoatCoating FD
L. Touch-up compound for PVC ConduitCondCon Coating: Material of Contractor’s choice.
M. Wire marker: Tubular plastic, imprinted or typed with indelible ink, or plastic tag typed with indelible ink, fastened securelycurely to wire with plastic wire tie.
N. Damp and Dry Cloth PART 3 EXECUTION ONLY 3.1 PREPARATION
A. Field Measurements: Scale dimensions on the drawingss show dedesired and approximate location of equipment, actual locations, distances,nces,ce aand levels shall be governed by field conditions.
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. General
1. The Contractor shall furnish all tools, equipment, materials and supplies, and shall perform all labor required to provide complete corrosion control systems in accordance with the requirements of the Contract Documents.
19 Cadweld is a registered trademark of Erico International Corporation, Solon, Ohio.
13 47 13.13 – 5 RPP-SPEC-60023 Rev.07 2/14/2018 - 2:57 PM 116 of 317
RPP-SPEC-60023, Rev. 7
2. Perform work in accordance with NFPA 70, the Specifications, and the Drawings.
3. Use appropriate calibrated special tools when installing devices for which manufacturer recommends special installation tools.
4. Refer to Section 31 23 00, “Excavation and Fill,” for excavation or backfill of soil.
B. Test Station: Install below grade test stations per design.
C. Junction boxes
1.I Install junction boxes according to design. Junction box details located on FORH-1H-H-14-011500.
2. Label boxesboxbo according to design. 3. Conductord ctorINFORMATON labelalabels should indicate where the cables originate from (e.g., A241-CATH-RECT-015,CATH-ATH-RE J 42-5, etc.)
D. Wire pull box (J15-7)7)
1. Install wire pull boxox accordiaccordaccording to design.
E. Conductors
1. Test Stations
a. Wire brush to remove surfaceacee contacontaminants and mechanically grind or file pipe at connectionnlo lolocationcationation to bare metal surface, free of oil and dirt. Note: Enough pipeONLYe surfacesurfac should be prepared to accommodate the corrosion protectiononn producproduproduct to be applied after the connection is complete. Make exothermicthermichermic wweld of conductors to pipe in accordance with approved manufacturer’sufacturer instructions.
b. Where two or more wires are welded to the metallic structure, the minimum spacing between exothermic welds shall be 6 inches.
c. The lead wire end to be welded shall be stripped so that a copper sleeve of suitable size can be fitted over the bare section.
d. After the weld is performed, test the bond by removing the molten slag with a hammer. If the weld comes loose, or is not completely connected, remove previous weld and perform a second weld.
e. Inspect exothermic welds for mechanical integrity in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions. If weld fails, make another weld at least 3 inches from previous weld attempt and inspect.
13 47 13.13 – 6 RPP-SPEC-60023 Rev.07 2/14/2018 - 2:57 PM 117 of 317
RPP-SPEC-60023, Rev. 7
f. Install the cables with sufficient slack so that the cable insulation and conductors will not be damaged due to ground or structure movement. Cables may be secured to the pipe with duct tape or tie wraps during trench activity and backfill operations.
g. Apply approved coatings on all exposed copper wire, connector material, and bared pipe. Overlap approved coating on copper wire insulation on pipe coating or on bared surface a minimum of 1 inch.
h. Use conductors as specified on H-14-011500, Table 1, Test Station Conductors.
i. Repair damaged pipe test conductor wires by cleaning and FOR removing any fraying insulation. Roughen up outer insulation for approximately 4” each side of the defect with utility knife to prpprepare for application of tapes. Using two (2) half-lapped layers off ScScoScotch rubber splicing # 23 tape and two (2) half-lapped layers INFORMATONof Scotch electrical #33 plus tape, start from the center of the defectefectfect to eenensure a double wrap of each layer. Apply 3M Scotchkotechkote EleEElectrical Coating FD over taped repair prior to backfill.
j. Make connectionsctionstions to existinge conductor wires using a Cadweld CASS type connector,nector, Burndy®BuB 20 Type mechanical connector, or appropriately sizedd copper spssplit bolt per manufacturer’s instructions, and encaseasee splice ppoint in a 3M Company, Scotchcast Multi-Mold Resin Splicingingng Kit, MModel 85-10 (or equivalent). Note: ALL buried wire splicesceses mustmus be completely encased in a 3M Company, Scotchcast Multi-Moldltiti-MMoldONLY ResinR Splicing Kit, Model 85-10 (or equivalent) prior to burial.ial.al.
k. New conductor wires shall be sufficientntt length tto extend from the point of installation on the pipeline (or thee severed cable connection), to the new test station.
l. Wires to be direct buried in the ground shall be laid straight without kinks.
m. Identify end of each conductor using specified wire marker with typewritten or imprinted pipe number to which conductor is connected.
n. Newly installed test station(s): Identify the end of each pipe test conductor using specified wiremarker with typewritten or imprinted pipe number to which conductor is connected.
20 Burndy is a registered trademark of Hubbell Incorporated, Shelton, Connecticut.
13 47 13.13 – 7 RPP-SPEC-60023 Rev.07 2/14/2018 - 2:57 PM 118 of 317
RPP-SPEC-60023, Rev. 7
o. Terminate conductors on specified terminals and locations in test station as directed in H-14-011500, Detail 2, and the test station matrices located on the appropriate cathodic protection farm drawings. (Note test station matrices are located on drawings starting with H-14-0315XX).
p. Backfill in accordance with Section 31 23 00, “Excavation and Fill.”
2. Jumpers
a. Wire brush to remove surface containments and mechanically grind or file pipe at connection location to white metal surface, free of oil and dirt. Note: Enough pipe surface should be prepared to FOR accommodate the corrosion protection product to be applied after the connection is complete. Make exothermic weld of conductors tot pipe in accordance with approved manufacturer’s instructions.
b.INFORMATON Where ttwo or more wires are connected to the metallic structure, thehe minimuminimum spacing between the connections shall be 6 inches.
c. The leadadd wire enend to be welded shall be stripped so that a copper sleeve of suitableuitable ssize can be fitted over the bare section.
d. After the weld iss performperformed, test the bond by removing the molten slag with a hammer.er. If the wweld comes loose, or is not completely connected, remove previousrevious wweld and perform a second weld.
e. Inspect exothermic welds for mechanicalmechamech integrity in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions.ons.ns. IIff wweld fails, make another weld at least 3 inches from previous weldeldONLYld attemptattem and inspect.
f. Install the cables with sufficient slackk so that ththe cable insulation and conductors will not be damaged duee to groundgroun or structure movement. Cables may be secured to the pipepe withwi w duct tape or tie wraps during trench activity and backfill operations.
g. Apply approved coatings on all exposed copper wire, connector material, and bared pipe. Overlap approved coating on copper wire insulation on pipe coating or on bared surface a minimum of 1 inch.
h. New conductor wires shall be sufficient length to extend from the points of installation on the pipelines. Splices, if required, shall be made using a Cadweld CASS type connector, Burndy Type mechanical connector, or appropriately sized copper split bolt per manufacturer’s instructions, and encase splice point in a 3M Company, Scotchcast Multi-Mold Resin Splicing Kit, Model 85-10
13 47 13.13 – 8 RPP-SPEC-60023 Rev.07 2/14/2018 - 2:57 PM 119 of 317
RPP-SPEC-60023, Rev. 7
(or equivalent). Note: ALL buried wire splices must be completely encased in a 3M Company, Scotchcast Multi-Mold Resin Splicing Kit, Model 85-10 (or equivalent) prior to burial.
i. Wires buried in the ground shall be laid straight without kinks.
j. Bond per H-2-94086, Details 3 and 5.
3. Anode header, loop, and lead cables
a. Anode header cables located in above ground conduit will be a single cable, i.e., no loop, routed in two directions towards anode junction boxes. Cables will run through wire pull box, and will terminate at anode junction boxes on either end of the conduit rack. FOR Direct buried UHMWPE wires will land in junction boxes, and continue below grade for anode connections. b.INFORMATONIfI dadamaged, repair or replace per drawing H-14-011500. c.Termina Terminate new header at rectifier 241A-CATH-RECT-015 positive outpututputput terminals.termtermi The header loop cables will terminate at final anodee junctionunctio boxes per design. d. Terminatee new negativenegnega return cables at rectifier 241A-CATH- RECT-015 negativeegative outputouo terminal. Use solderless terminal lugs for conductor terminations.erminationrminatio Identify cables using specified wire markers.
F. Existing Anodes 1. Replace existing anodes if damaged orr dedepdepleted.ONLYplete 2. Repair damaged head, leader, or loop cablesles accordingaccord to H-14-011500. 3. If the anode is required to be removed and doesess not neeneed to be replaced, ensure that terminated anode leader cable is fully encapsulatedencapsu in the 85- 14-CP splice kit. G. New Anodes: Install per manufactures instructions and drawing H-14-011500. Run anode lead cable in field as required. Specify anode and lead wire installation locations. Splices to existing leader cable shall be made using a Cadweld CATA type connector per Drawings.
1. Vertical. 2. Horizontal.
13 47 13.13 – 9 RPP-SPEC-60023 Rev.07 2/14/2018 - 2:57 PM 120 of 317
RPP-SPEC-60023, Rev. 7
3.3 FINAL TESTING
A. Construction Acceptance Testing will be directed as required by the cathodic protection Design Authorities (DAs), Rick Nelson or Ryler Adams.
B. Start-Up Testing will be directed as required by the cathodic protection DAs, Rick Nelson or Ryler Adams.
3.4 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Continuity Testing
1. Testing will be directed by the cathodic protection DAs, Rick Nelson or FORRRyler Adams. B. Connectionsnectionsctions
1. Documentocumenocume connection of conductors to new and existing pipe. Include the following:INFORMATONng: a. Bondingnding jumjumper: Identification of each pipe to which connected and generaleneraleral loclocation of jumper and splice connection as applicable.
b. Verificationn that connectionsconco complies with manufacturer’s installation andndd inspectiinspection requirements.
END OF SECTIONONN 13 3 47 13.13
ONLY
13 47 13.13 – 10 RPP-SPEC-60023 Rev.07 2/14/2018 - 2:57 PM 121 of 317
RPP-SPEC-60023, Rev. 7
SECTION 22 15 00
COMPRESSED AIR PIPING
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Material, fabrication, installation, and testing of compressed air service piping inside the Air and Water Service Building.
1.2 RELATED DOCUMENTS, CODES, AND STANDARDS Drawings andFOR gegeneralgen provisions of the Contract Statement of Work, including Division 011 SpecificationSpecificapecifi Sections, apply to this Section.
The following documentsocumentcumen and others referenced therein, form part of the Contract to the extent designated innthnt thisINFORMATONis SecSectSection. Referenced documents are those current as of the date of this Section unless otherwise indicated.
A. American National Standardsndard Institute/American Society of Mechanical Engineers (ANSI/ASME)ME)E)
ANSI/ASME B13.1 SchemeSchem for the Identification of Piping Systems
B. American Society of Mechanical Engineersngineers (ASME)
ASME B&PVC, 2013 Boiler andd PressurPressuPressure Vessel Code Section IX Welding andd BBrBrazingONLYazing Qualification ASME B1.20.1 Pipe Threads, Generalral PurposPurpose, Inch
ASME B16.3 Malleable Iron and Threadedded FittinFittings
ASME B16.9 Factory-Made Wrought Buttweldingl Fittings
ASME B16.34 Valves -Flanged, Threaded, and Welding End
ASME B31.9, 2014 Building Services Piping
C. American Society for Nondestructive Testing (ASNT)
ASNT SNT-TC-1A Personnel Qualifications and Certification in Nondestructive Testing
22 15 00 – 1 RPP-SPEC-60023 Rev.07 2/14/2018 - 2:57 PM 122 of 317
RPP-SPEC-60023, Rev. 7
D. ASTM International (ASTM)
ASTM A182 Standard Specification for Forged or Rolled Alloy and Stainless Steel Pipe Flanges, Forged Fittings, and Valves and Parts for High-Temperature Service
ASTM A312 Standard Specification for Seamless, Welded, and Heavily Cold Worked Austenitic Stainless Steel Pipes
ASTM A351 Standard Specification for Castings, Austenitic, for Pressure-Containing Parts E. AmericanFORricanrica Welding Society (AWS) AWSS D1.1,D1.1D1 , 201020 Structural Welding Code AWS D1.6,6, 2007200INFORMATON Structural Welding Code – Stainless AWS QC1 Certification of Welding Inspectors
F. Manufacturer’s Standardizationdardizatiordizatio Society (MSS)
MSS SP-58 Pipe HangersH and Supports – Materials, Design, ManufacManufacture, Selection, Application, and Installationnstallationstallation
MSS SP-97 Integrallyllly ReinfoReinfReinforced Forged Branch Outlet Fittings – Socket Welding,Welding TThreaded and Buttwelding Ends G. Hanford Documents ONLY TFC-ENG-STD-06 Design Loads for Tanknkk Farm FFacilities
TFC-ENG-STD-12 Tank Farm Equipment Identificationentificatio Numbering and Labeling Standard
TFC-ENG-STD-22 Piping, Jumpers, and Valves
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. See the Contract Statement of Work for the submittal process.
B. Approval Required.
1. Welding Procedure Specifications (WPSs) and or Standard Welding Procedure Specifications (SWPSs): Five days before first use submit WPSs and/or SWPSs in accordance with Paragraph 1.4.B.
22 15 00 – 2 RPP-SPEC-60023 Rev.07 2/14/2018 - 2:57 PM 123 of 317
RPP-SPEC-60023, Rev. 7
2. Welding Personnel Qualifications: Five days before start of fabrication submit welder qualification as required by Paragraph 1.4.B.
3. Examination Documentation: Five days before start of fabrication submit documentation in accordance with Paragraph 3.4.A for information/record.
4. Mechanical Cleaning Verification: Submit documentation in accordance with Paragraph 3.3.B for information/record.
5. Weld Examinations: Submit documentation in accordance with Paragraph 3.5.A.
6. Pressure and Leak Testing and Certification: Five days before pressure tetesting submit testing procedure in accordance with Paragraphs 1.4.C and FOR3.4.3.4.B.
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCESSURAN
A. MisrepresenteddINFORMATON ProducProducts: See the Contract Statement of Work for required measures to preventvent use oof misrepresented products.
B. Qualifications
1. Structural Weldingg PersonnePersonPersonnel and Procedures shall be in accordance with Section 05 50 00, “Metaletal FabriFabFabrications.”
2. Welding Personnel and Proceduresoceduresedures fofor Pressure-Retaining Components (along with attachment theretoo and pipepip supports) shall be qualified in accordance with ASME B31.9,Paragraph aragraph 927.6 before welding. Maintain copies of welding procedure, specification,ication,ication anand procedure qualification records at jobsite. ONLY C. Pressure Testing Procedures shall be in accordance with ASMASASME B31.9 and this Specification. Maintain copies of procedures at jobsite.e
D. Personnel performing visual examinations shall be CertifieddW Welding Inspectors (CWIs) who have received certification (current or previous certification) in accordance with AWS QC1.
E. Personnel performing other nondestructive examinations (NDE) shall be certified in accordance with approved procedure, which shall meet the requirements of ASNT SNT-TC-1A. Use Level II or III personnel to interpret results.
F. Examination Procedures: Examination procedures shall be in accordance with ASME B31.9 and this Specification. Maintain copies of procedures at the jobsite.
22 15 00 – 3 RPP-SPEC-60023 Rev.07 2/14/2018 - 2:57 PM 124 of 317
RPP-SPEC-60023, Rev. 7
1.5 PERMITS
A. Permits are addressed by TOC work control process.
1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. See the Contract Statement of Work for general requirements.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 PRODUCT OPTIONS AND SUBSTITUTIONS
A. See the Contract Statement of Work for substitution approvals.
2.2 MATERIALSALS
A. Pipingg and FittiFittinFittings: See details specified on the Drawings and in the individual componentsnts list bbelow. INFORMATON B. Overhead Pipe SupportsSupports: B-Line B3100C (plastic coated standard clevis hangers) or equivalent. Hangerangernger RodRods shall be threaded both ends, or continuous threaded rods of circular crosss section.ection Use adjusting locknuts at upper attachments and hangers. No wire, chain,n, or perfoperfperforated straps are allowed. See location specified in the Drawings. Add ceilinging cross bbeams as necessary.
C. Close nipples are not permitted unless shshown on the Drawings.
D. Pipe Joint Sealant (Lubricant) for Threadedreadedeaded Joints:Jo Use anaerobic acrylic sealer. Henkel Corporation: Loctite®21 5452 orr 567 or eengineering approved equivalent. Clean threads and apply according to manufacturer’sufacturerfacture specification.
E. Valves: Specified in individual components list ONLYsection bbelow, unless otherwise shown on the Drawings.
F. Expansion Anchors: See Section 03 15 00, “Post-Installedled ConcrConcrete Anchor Bolts.” Anchorage must be designed to TFC-ENG-STD-06.6
G. Paint: See Section 09 91 00, “Painting” and as specified on the Drawings.
H. Deleted.
21 Loctite is a registered trademark of Henkel Corporation.
22 15 00 – 4 RPP-SPEC-60023 Rev.07 2/14/2018 - 2:57 PM 125 of 317
RPP-SPEC-60023, Rev. 7
2.3 EQUIPMENT
A. Compressor: Kobelco KNW A00-D/H positive displacement, two-stage rotary screw air compressor capable of delivering 100% oil-free air at 162 ACFM at 125 PSIG. The regulating system shall be a full load/no load type. A single point of connection shall be provided for 480 VAC, 3 phase interface. The single point of connection shall have a disconnecting means that is lockable and will isolate all power to the compressor when opened.
B. Air Receiver Tank: Compressed air tank shall be designed and constructed in accordance with ASME B&PVC, Section VIII, Division I for compressed air storage use. Tank shall have a capacity of 240 gallons, a maximum working pressure of 200 psi at 400°F, and dimensions of 30” outer diameter by 84” length. Exteriorerior ssurface painted with one coat standard shop primer. Manufacturer and partt numbernumber: Manchester Tank – 302428.
C. Pressuree Relief ValveV (PRV) for Receiver Tank: The PRV for the compressed air line and thee 1”1 PRV discharge piping and components are safety significant. PRV shall be a ConsolidatedsolidatedINFORMATON Model 1/2-19110LcF-2-CC-MS-34-MT-FT-GS, with an orifice area of 0.11011010 in², wwith a 1/2” MNPT inlet and a 1” FNPT outlet, with 316 Stainless wteel trim,, and a ratrarated flow of 319 scfm at 150 psig and 60°F. PRV shall be ASME code stampedtampedamped anand set at 150 psig per RPP-CALC-60082, “Air Compressor Pressure Reliefiefef Valve Sizing Calculation.” A code stamp and code data report shall be provided.d All safetysafesaf significant components shall be purchased from an evaluated supplierupplier or commercial grade dedicated prior to installation. Fabricator shall submitmit CMTR’sCMTR for all safety significant materials including weld filler metal except thoseosse suppliedsupplisuppl as GFE.
D. Pressure Indicators: Pressure gauges shall bee StainlessStain Steel, 0 – 300 psi range with a 4 1/2” dial size and with a 1/2” MNPTTbo bobottomONLYttomtom iininlet fitting. Accuracy shall be to ASME B40.1 Grade 1A (1%). Part numbererr shall bbe a Ashcroft 45-1109- SD-04L-0/300#.
E. Temperature Indicator: Thermometer shall be a bi-metal,, StainlesStainless Steel, 3” Dial 50° to 400°F, 1/2” MNPT inlet, 2.5” lower stem. Manufacturerturert and part number: Ashcroft 30-CI-60-L-025 50/400°F
F. Regulator: Air pressure regulator shall be a 2” NPT high flow regulator rated to a maximum pressure rating of 300 psig, able to regulate down to at least 10 psig, and an air flow rate of 1000 SCFM. Manufacturer and part number: Jordan Valve Model MK 60, part number 60200S6/PTS6BB34S6SM. Regulator shall be designed in accordance with ASME B16.34.
22 15 00 – 5 RPP-SPEC-60023 Rev.07 2/14/2018 - 2:57 PM 126 of 317
RPP-SPEC-60023, Rev. 7
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 PREPARATION
A. Surfaces to receive protective coating shall be clean, free of moisture, oil, dirt, scale, rust, and other foreign material.
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Valve Orientation:
1. Install valves as shown on Drawings where clearly illustrated.
2. Where orientation is not well illustrated, locate and orient valve to provide FORaccaccessibility for control and maintenance.
3.Valves shsshall be installed such that they are not used as means of support forr runsINFORMATON ofof pipingp or other components. 4. Ball valveslves shall be installed such that, when open, the handle of the ball valve is inlineline with tthe piping. The handle shall be turned clockwise to close the valve.ve.
B. Identification:
1. Install Stainless Steel tagg for each component in this Specification, bearing the tag number shown in thehe Piping aand Instrumentation Diagram. The tag number shall be 1/4-in. die-stampede-stampedstampe lettering.
2. Piping Identification: Identify pipingngg systemssyste as to fluid carried and direction of flow as specified in ANSI/ASMEI/AONLYME B13.1B and also Attachment 1 of Section 40 05 13, “Processessss PipinPipingPiping.”
C. Piping:
1. Fabricate and install pipe in accordance with ASMEEEB B3B31.9, the Drawings, and this Section.
2. Cut pipe using methods that result in clean, straight cuts.
3. Ream pipe to nominal inside diameter after cutting. Remove burrs from threads before assembly.
4. Make joints in threaded piping systems with joint sealant specified. Apply sealant sparingly to male threads only.
5. Keep piping systems clean. Once fabrication has started, plug or cap ends of piping when installation is not in progress. Cap or plug openings in fabricated pipe spool assemblies until installation in piping system. Leave
22 15 00 – 6 RPP-SPEC-60023 Rev.07 2/14/2018 - 2:57 PM 127 of 317
RPP-SPEC-60023, Rev. 7
ends of spare lines capped or blind flanged when installation has been completed.
6. Alignment: Distortion or cold springing of piping to bring it into alignment for joint assembly that introduces a strain in piping components is prohibited.
7. Pipe supports: Locate and install as shown on the Drawings. Fabricate in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions and Section 05 50 00, “Metal Fabrications,” and with applicable recommended procedures of MSS SP-58.
8. Expansion Anchors: See Section 03 15 00, “Post-Installed Concrete FORAAnchor Bolts.” 9. Deleted.Delete 10. Deleted.leted.tedINFORMATON D. Welding:
1. Weld piping attachmentsattachmenachmen to pressure-retaining components in accordance with ASME B31.9.1.9.19
2. Use of backing rings iss not permitted.perm
3. Complete piping welds beforeforere tietie-in-in welds to fixed items.
4. Weld steel structural elements inn accordanceaccordaaccordan with AWS D1.1 or D1.6. 3.3 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL ONLY A. Testing Preparation
1. Furnish equipment and instruments required to performerform mmechanical cleaning.
B. Cleaning
1. After examination is complete and before pressure testing system, or before connecting system into existing systems, clean piping internal surfaces by mechanical cleaning.
2. Mechanical cleaning: Remove loose dirt, scale, and debris by brushing, wiping, high-pressure water jetting, blowing compressed air, or other mechanical method approved by the TOC Construction Representative until there is no visible dirt, scale, or debris.
22 15 00 – 7 RPP-SPEC-60023 Rev.07 2/14/2018 - 2:57 PM 128 of 317
RPP-SPEC-60023, Rev. 7
a. Remove all water upon completion of high-pressure water jetting or other mechanical cleaning method utilizing water.
b. Use drain taps at low point of piping system to ensure complete drainage and drying. Cap lines or reconnect to system to maintain cleanliness.
3. Provide documented evidence that flushing or mechanical cleaning has been accomplished as specified in this Section.
3.4 FIELD INSPECTIONS AND TESTS
A. Nondestructive Examination (NDE) of Welds
1.FORPer Perform examination for individual pipe sections as listed below in ParagrParagraph 3.5. Acceptance Criteria, unless otherwise noted by design, shall be iin accordance with ASME B31.9.
2. Visual INFORMATONexaminaexamination (VT): Perform in accordance with ASME B31.9, Paragraphph 936.
3. Examination DocumenDocumentation:ocumen
a. Document examinatiexaminaexamination of pressure containment welds for piping systems on weldeldld examexaminexamination and test record. Record weld identification drawings,wings, weweld numbers, welder identification, welding procedure numbers,umbers, wweld filler material, visual examinations, NDEs, andnd notationotation of satisfactory completion of pressure testing in accordanceance with instructions on form. b. Required examinations shall be completedompleteompleONLY and documented before starting leak testing.
c. Weld Examination and Test Record informationformationormation mmay be incorporated on a single format or travelerr for a spspecific work package.
d. Document examination of attachment welds to pressure-retaining components by recording on sketches or Weld Examination and Test Record.
B. Pressure and Leak Testing
1. After completion of mechanical cleaning and NDE, perform leak testing of pipe in accordance with ASME B31.9 and this Section. Use calibrated gages with an accuracy of ± 1 psi.
22 15 00 – 8 RPP-SPEC-60023 Rev.07 2/14/2018 - 2:57 PM 129 of 317
RPP-SPEC-60023, Rev. 7
2. Document testing of each piping system on Pressure Test Certification. Use separate forms to describe and record each piping system. Under “Description,” describe piping system in enough detail for correlation to weld identification drawings, and Drawings, as applicable. For systems tested segmentally, indicate continuity in “Description” to ensure that entire systems have been tested.
3. Pipe joints and connections to be tested shall be visible and accessible during tests.
4. Install one temporary relief valve during testing to protect piping against over-pressurization. Tag each relief valve used to show serial number, inspector, date, and pressure setting.
5.FORInst Install necessary restraining devices, before applying test pressure, to prevenprevent distortion or displacement of piping. Remove temporary restrainrestrainingini devices following testing. 6. Isolate INFORMATONinstruminstruments and other items which could be damaged by test pressures.s.s
7. Visually examineminene pipingpipin joints, fittings, and other potential leak sources, including welds that attacattaattach wear plates, anchors, etc., to piping systems, during testing.
3.5 SCHEDULES A. Schedule of Pipe Weld NDE/Testing ON NDE/NDT Method “Compressed Air”rN” Visual A ONLY Fit Root Pass Cover Pass A Liquid Penetrant Root Pass Cover Pass Magnetic Particle Root Pass Cover Pass Radiographic Completed Weld Ultrasonic Legend: Completed Weld A. All completed welds to have visual Pressure examination by AWS QC1 qualified weld All Joints B inspector in accordance with ASME B31.9, Paragraph 936.4.1. Other B. Pneumatic pressure test all joints.
22 15 00 – 9 RPP-SPEC-60023 Rev.07 2/14/2018 - 2:57 PM 130 of 317
RPP-SPEC-60023, Rev. 7
B. Components List
Compressed Air Max Operating Pressure Test Pressure Max Operating Temp Service (psig) (psig) (∀F) Process Air (PA) 150 225 +10/-0 150 Sizes 3/4 in. and smaller 1 in. and larger Pipe Stainless Steel per ASTM A312, Grade TP304L, seamless Wall Thickness Schedule 80S. Schedule 40S and Schedule 80S (only if indicated as threaded on the Drawings). Nipples Schedule 80S. Schedule 80S. Fittings Stainlessin Steel, ASTM A182 Grade F 304L, Class 3000, socket weld or threaded in FORaccordanceaccordaaccord with ASME B16.11. OR Branch Fittings IntegrallyallyRlly reinreinfreinforced Stainless Steel in accordance with MSS SP-97. O-ring Unions 304L Stainlessinlen INFORMATONIss SteeSteSteel, Socket Weld or Threaded, EPDM o-ring, Class 3000, Manufacturer:er:NF Hart InIndustries. Valves – Gate None. Stainless Steel body ASTM A351, Class 200, OS&Y bonnet, flexible or solid wedge disc, socket weld ends, Powell RM Figure 2490 Valves – Ball Stainless Steel body ASTMM A351 GGr CF8M, Full port, threaded end connections in accordance with ASME B1.20.1,0.1,.1, socketsocke weld ends in accordance with ASME B16.11, Tekfil seat, Flowtek seriesiesesAT 7000. Valves – Check None.TTOSpri Spring-assisted, non-slam, in-line, socket weld, 7507 CWP, ASTM A351 Gr CF8M Body,N 31631 stainless spring, Zelon®22 O-ring,-ring,ring,ONLYO DFT®DFT 22 Inc. Model SCV.
END OF SECTION 22 15 00
22 Zelon and DFT is a registered trademark of DFT, Inc., Exton, Pennsylvania.
22 15 00 – 10 RPP-SPEC-60023 Rev.07 2/14/2018 - 2:57 PM 131 of 317
RPP-SPEC-60023, Rev. 7
SECTION 23 31 01
TANK VENTILATION DUCTING
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 SCOPE OF WORK
A. Section includes waste retrieval tank ventilation ductwork and housing assembly installation, cleaning, inspection, and testing.
1.2 RELATED DOCUMENTS, CODES, AND STANDARDS Drawings andFOR gegengeneral provisions of the Contract Statement of Work, including Division 01 Specificationationon SeSectSections, apply to this Section.
The following documentsocumentcumen and others referenced therein, form part of the Contract to the extent designated innthnt thisINFORMATONis SecSectSection. Referenced documents are those current as of the date of this Section unless otherwise indicated.
A. American Society off MechanMechaniMechanical Engineers (ASME)
ASME AG-1, 2012CodeCod on Nuclear Air and Gas Treatment
B. American Society for Nondestructiveructive TeTesting (ASNT)
ASNT SNT-TC-1A Recommendedmmended Practice No. SNT-TC-1A and ASNT Standardandardndard TToTopical Outlines for Qualification of Nondestructiveuctivective TTeTesting Personnel
C. Hanford Documents ONLY
H-14-109924 241-AX Ventilation Sitete Plan
OSD-T151-00013 Operating Specifications for SinglSinSingle-Shell Waste Storage Tanks
TFC-ENG-STD-07 Ventilation System Design Standard
RPP-CALC-57515 AX-Farm Tank Exhaust System Duct Loss and Performance Curve
RPP-CALC-57516 AG-1 Duct Volume, Pressure Test Criteria Calculation
23 31 01 – 1 RPP-SPEC-60023 Rev.07 2/14/2018 - 2:57 PM 132 of 317
RPP-SPEC-60023, Rev. 7
1.3 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. No variation of duct configuration is permitted except by the approved design documents.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. See the Contract Statement of Work for the submittal process.
B. Approval Required
1. Documented in work package or fabrication document as applicable. 1.5 QUALITYFOR ASSURANCEAS A. Constructnstructuct duducductwork in accordance with design documentation.
1.6 QUALIFICATIONSIONSONS INFORMATON A. Installer: Companympanyy specializingspec in performing work of this section with minimum 3 years’’ ASME AG-1 experience.
1.7 FIELD MEASUREMENTS
A. Verify field measurements priorrior to installation.inins
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 PRODUCT OPTIONS AND SUBSTITUTIONSONSN A. Comply with Contract Statement of Work. ONLY 2.2 DUCT MATERIAL
A. Duct and housing materials must be in accordance withh design doddocumentation.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Install and support ductwork and housing assemblies in accordance with design documents and Contract Statement of Work.
B. During construction, install temporary closures of metal and taped polyethylene over open ductwork and housings to prevent foreign matter from entering ductwork system.
C. Install flexible connection with minimum 1-in. slack immediately adjacent to equipment in ducts associated with fans and motorized equipment.
23 31 01 – 2 RPP-SPEC-60023 Rev.07 2/14/2018 - 2:57 PM 133 of 317
RPP-SPEC-60023, Rev. 7
3.2 CLEANING
A. During system installation, wipe/clean the interior surfaces of all ducts, housings, and components as required to remove dust and debris.
3.3 DUCT LEAKAGE
A. Inspect and test assembled duct and housing systems. Joints that are not testable after field installation (such as riser connections, adapter assemblies between the tank and tank isolation valve) that were tested after fabrication testing do not require testing.
B. Perform visual inspections and leak testing in accordance with ASME AG-1. Test paraparameters are shown in Table 3.3B. Note:te: Do notno disassemble Inlet Assembly or Ductwork after testing is complete. If the assemblieassemblies are disassembled for any reason, they must be retested. Table 3.3B: Ventilationatioat INFORMATONINn DuctworkDu Test Parameters for POR1268 and POR1279 Component Testt NFDescriptiDescription Test Parameter Exhaust Ductwork Pressureuree FODecay TTest of Entire System, Leak Rate 18 scfm (max)1,8,9 Assembly with Exhausterauster Pressure Decaycayay Test of Entire System, Leak Rate 15 scfm (max)2,8,9 Without ExhausterusterRM Pressure Decay Test,est,t, Leak RRate for Moisture 0.327 scfm (max)3 Separator Only MA Pressure Decay Test, LeakeakakAT Rate fofor Individual Duct See RPP-CALC-57516 Components4 Pressure Decay Test, Leak PressureessureTOssure -40.0 ± 1 in wg.5 Tank Air Inlet Assembly Pressure Decay Test, Leak RateON 3.7 scfm (max)6 (w/o Vacuum Controller) Pressure Decay Test, Leak PressureN -3 + 1 in wg.7 1Based on Table SA-B-1310, ASME AG-1, (0.6% times flow rate or 3000300 scfm).scfm 2Based on Table SA-B-1310, ASME AG-1, (0.5% times flow rate or 30003000ONLY0 scfm).scfm 3Based on RPP-CALC-57516, Table 1. 4Any combination of the duct sections can be tested at the same time as longg as the tottotatotal leak rate from all sections does not exceed 15 scfm. 5Based on 125% of maximum fan pressure, see VI-50645. 6Based on Table SA-B-1310, ASME AG-1, (0.5% times flow rate or 745 scfm), see RPPRPP-CALC-57515.-C 7Based on 125% of -2.4 in. w.g. Limit in OSD-T151-00013. 8Tests using POR126 require valve AX241-VTP-V-005 to be shut prior to execution of test. 9Tests using POR127 require valve AX241-VTP-V-001 to be shut prior to execution of test.
C. Remake any leaking joints and repeat test. Record results on a new data sheet.
END OF SECTION 23 31 01
23 31 01 – 3 RPP-SPEC-60023 Rev.07 2/14/2018 - 2:57 PM 134 of 317
RPP-SPEC-60023, Rev. 7
SECTION 23 31 13
AIR COMPRESSOR METAL DUCTS
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 SCOPE OF WORK
A. Section includes ventilation ductwork and duct sealing for the exhaust cooling air of the Air and Water Service Building 241-A-285 air compressor unit.
1.2 RELATED DOCUMENTS / CODES AND STANDARDS Drawings andFOR gengegeneral provisions of the contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions andd DivisionDivDivis 01 Specification Sections apply to this Section.
The following documentsocumentcumen and others referenced therein, form part of the Contract to the extent designated innthnt thisINFORMATONis SecSectSection. Referenced documents are those current as of the date of this Section unless otherwise indicated.
A. American Society foror TestingTestin and Materials (ASTM)
ASTM A36 StandardStandStan Specification for Carbon Structural Steel
ASTM A90Standard TTest Method for Weight [Mass] of Coatingatingng on IroIrIron and Steel Articles with Zinc or Zinc-AlloyAlloyloyy CoatingsCoaCoat
ASTM A653 Standard Specificationecificatiocificati for Steel Sheet, Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) orrZi ZZinc-Ironnc-Iro Alloy-Coated (Galvannealed) byyONLY the HotHot-Dip Process
B. American Welding Society (AWS)
AWS D1.1, 2010 Structural Welding Code – Steeltee
AWS D1.3, 2008 Structural Welding Code-Sheet Steel
AWS D9.1 Sheet Metal Welding Code
C. Manufacturer’s Standardization Society of the Valve and Fitting Industry (MSS)
MSS SP-58 Pipe Hangers and Supports – Materials, Design, Manufacture, Selection, Application, and Installation
MSS SP-69 Pipe Hangers and Supports – Selection and Application
23 31 13 – 1 RPP-SPEC-60023 Rev.07 2/14/2018 - 2:57 PM 135 of 317
RPP-SPEC-60023, Rev. 7
D. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA)
NFPA 90A Standard for the Installation of Air-Conditioning and Ventilating Systems
E. Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractors National Association (SMACNA)
SMACNA 1520 Round Industrial Duct Construction Standards
SMACNA 1922 Rectangular Industrial Duct Construction Standards
HVAC Duct Construction Standards – Metal and Flexible
F. UnderwritersFORderwrite Laboratories (UL)
UL 181A1A Closure Systems for Use with Rigid Air Ducts 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCERAINFORMATONNCE A. Construct ductworkorkrk in accaccoaccordance with SMACNA – HVAC Duct Construction Standards – Metal andnd FlexibFlexiblFlexible, and NFPA 90A.
1.4 FIELD MEASUREMENTS
A. Verify field measurements priororr to fabrication.fabric
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 DUCT MATERIALS
A. Galvanized Steel Ducts: ASTM A653 galvanizededONLYd steel sheet,s lock-forming quality, having G90 zinc coating in conformance with ASTM A90.
B. Fasteners: Rivets, bolts, or sheet metal screws.
C. Structural Steel Members: ASTM A36 steel.
2.2 WALL LOUVER
A. The exhaust louver shall be of corrosion resistant metal, or suitably finished to resist corrosion.
B. Size, and location shall be as shown on drawings.
23 31 13 – 2 RPP-SPEC-60023 Rev.07 2/14/2018 - 2:57 PM 136 of 317
RPP-SPEC-60023, Rev. 7
2.3 DUCTWORK FABRICATION
A. Fabricate ductwork, duct access doors, and support in accordance with SMACNA HVAC Duct Construction Standards – Metal and Flexible. Furnish duct material, gages, reinforcing, and sealing for design pressure class indicated.
B. Construct T’s, bends, and elbows with minimum radius 1 1/2 times centerline duct width.
C. Provide, at minimum, rectangular 45 degree entry fittings for rectangular ducts.
D. Duct sizes noted are inside clear dimensions. No variation of duct configuration or sizes other than those of equivalent or lower loss coefficient is permitted except by writtenritte permission from the Buyer’s Technical Representative. Round ducts installedFORtalled in place of rectangular ducts shall be sized in accordance with ASHRAE table off equivaequivalent rectangular and round ducts.
E. Increase ductuctct sizesizs e gradually,grg not exceeding 15 degree divergence wherever possible. Do notINFORMATON exceeexceed 30-degree divergence upstream of equipment. Do not exceed 45-degreeee convergconvergence downstream of equipment.
2.4 HANGERS AND SUPPORTSTSS
A. Install hangers and supportsts for ductducting as necessary.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Verify sizes of equipment connection beforeree fabricatingfabrifabric transitions. ONLY 3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Install, seal, and support ductwork in accordance withh SMACNSMACNA HVAC Duct Construction Standards-Metal and Flexible.
B. During construction, install temporary closures of metal or taped polyethylene on open ductwork to prevent construction dust from entering ductwork system.
C. Use double nuts and lock washers on threaded rod supports.
D. Locate ducts with sufficient space around equipment to allow normal operating and maintenance activities.
E. Repair damaged galvanized ductwork surfaces (welds, scratches, etc.) by applying minimum 2 coats of a zinc base paint.
F. Install wall louver as shown on drawings and according to manufacturer’s instructions.
23 31 13 – 3 RPP-SPEC-60023 Rev.07 2/14/2018 - 2:57 PM 137 of 317
RPP-SPEC-60023, Rev. 7
3.3 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. No variation of duct configuration or sizes is permitted except by written permission from engineering.
B. The ductwork provided per this Specification shall interface with the HVAC Systems procured via the design drawings.
C. Any proposed changes to existing equipment to facilitate installation of the ductwork shall be discussed with and approved by the Owner prior to proceeding.
D. All indoor supply ductwork shall be flanged in spool piece sizes, as determined by installation contractor, to accommodate field obstructions and installation limitations.FORatio E. No weldinglding is allowed within the facility or to existing structures within the facility.. All ductworkducduct and supports shall accommodate this requirement in the design. INFORMATON F. As much as fieldd conditioconditions allow, slope all horizontal duct runs away from the air compressor unit.t Slope shalls be a minimum of 1/16” per foot.
3.4 DUCTWORK PRESSURE CLASSIFICATIONLASSIFIASSIF
A. Construct ducting for a minimummum presspressure classification of 1.5 in. w.g.
3.5 DUCT SEALING
A. Seal duct seams and joints in accordancee to the duduct pressure classification as described in SMACNA HVAC Duct Constructiontructionruction Standards-Metal and Flexible. ONLY B. Seal joints between duct sections and duct seamss with welwwelds, gaskets, mastic adhesives, mastic plus embedded fabric systems, orr tape.
1. Sealants, Mastics and Tapes: Conform to UL 181A.1A. ProvProvide products bearing appropriate UL 181A markings.
2. Do not use sealing products not bearing UL approval markings.
C. Do not use pressure-sensitive sealant on ducts with a pressure class of 1 in. w.g. or greater.
END OF SECTION 23 31 13
23 31 13 – 4 RPP-SPEC-60023 Rev.07 2/14/2018 - 2:57 PM 138 of 317
RPP-SPEC-60023, Rev. 7
SECTION 26 05 19
LOW VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CONDUCTORS AND CABLES
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY OF WORK
A. Building wire (600V).
B. TC cable (2000V and 600V). C. WireFOR andan cable connectors. D. Insulatingulating taptatape and tubing.
E. Wire pullinglinging lublubrlubricant.
1.2 REFERENCES INFORMATON
Drawings and general provisionsvisionsisions of tthe contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specificationpecificatioecificatio Sections apply to this Section.
The following documents and othersrss referenreferencreferenced therein, form part of the Contract to the extent designated in this Section. Referencederenced documentsdo are those current as of the date of this Section unless otherwise indicated.d
A. American Standards for Testing and materialsaterialserials (A(ASTM)
ASTM B3 Standard Specificationificatfica ion ffor Soft or Annealed Copper Wire ONLY
ASTM D3005 Standard Specificationn for Low-TemperatureLowo Resistant Vinyl Chloride Plastic Pressure-SensitivePr Electrical Insulating Tape
B. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA)
NFPA 70, 2014 National Electrical Code (NEC)
C. Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers (IEEE)
IEEE 422 IEEE Guide for the Design and Installation of Cable Systems in Power Generating Stations
IEEE 1210 Standard Tests for Determining Compatibility of Cable-Pulling Lubricants with Wire and Cable
26 05 19 – 1 RPP-SPEC-60023 Rev.07 2/14/2018 - 2:57 PM 139 of 317
RPP-SPEC-60023, Rev. 7
D. Underwriters Laboratories (UL)
UL 44 Thermoset-Insulated Wires and Cables
UL 83 Thermoplastic-Insulated Wires and Cables
UL 486A-486B Wire Connectors
UL 486C Splicing Wire Connectors
UL 486D Sealed Wire Connector Systems
UL 510 Polyvinyl Chloride Polyethylene and Rubber FOR Insulating Tape UL1277 77 Standard for Electrical Power and Control Tray Cables with Optional Optical-Fiber Members 1.3 SUBMITTALS INFORMATON A. See the Contract StatementStatemen of Work for the submittal process.
B. Approval Required
1. Documented in workk package or fabrication document as applicable.
2. Deleted.
C. Approval Not Required 1. Deleted. ONLY 1.4 DEFINITIONS
Not used.
1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Comply with the NEC for components and installation.
B. Provide products that are listed and labeled by a Nationally Recognized Testing Laboratory (NRTL) for the application and environment in which installed.
1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING
A. Deliver, store, protect, and handle products according to manufacturer’s instructions.
26 05 19 – 2 RPP-SPEC-60023 Rev.07 2/14/2018 - 2:57 PM 140 of 317
RPP-SPEC-60023, Rev. 7
1.7 PERMITS
A. Permits are addressed by TOC work control process.
1.8 SITE CONDITIONS
Not used.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 PRODUCT OPTIONS AND SUBSTITUTIONS
Refer to the Contract Statement of Work.
2.2 WIRE
A. Providedee NRTL-listedNRTL building wire as shown on the Drawings with the following characteristics:istics:stics: INFORMATON 1. Description:ption: SinSingle conductor 600V, 90°C insulated wire.
2. Conductor:
a. 98% conductivity,uctivityctivity, annealed,a uncoated copper (per ASTM B3) solid or strandedded as spespspecified in Part 3 of this Section.
3. Insulation: The followinggt types,ypes, ratedrat 600V:
a. Unless otherwise indicatedtedd on ththe Drawings: 1 AWG and smaller, Type THHN/THWN-2 per UL 83.
b. 1/0 AWG and larger, Type XHHWWONLY per ULU 44.
B. Multi-conductor portable power cables shall be 600VV rated for extra hard usage Type G or W per NEC Article 400 Table 400.4, Note 4 and shall be rated for sun light, damp, and wet locations and contain a green insulatededde equipment-groundingequ conductor.
C. Multi-conductor portable control cables shall be 600V extra hard usage such as Type SOW per NEC Article 400 Table 400.4, Note 4 and be rated for sun light, damp, and wet locations and contain a green insulated equipment-grounding conductor.
D. Signal cables shall be 600V Type SOOW per NEC Article 400 Table 400.4, Note 4 and be rated for sun light and wet locations and contain a braid shield or drain wire.
E. Heat trace cable shall be the self-regulating type as shown on the drawings.
26 05 19 – 3 RPP-SPEC-60023 Rev.07 2/14/2018 - 2:57 PM 141 of 317
RPP-SPEC-60023, Rev. 7
F. Color code conductors as follows:
1. Use colored insulation for color coding conductors 6 AWG and smaller.
2. Use water and oil resistant colored plastic adhesive tape, 3/4 in. minimum width, for color coding conductor 4 AWG and larger. Manufacturer: 3M “Scotch 35”
3. Provide black conductor insulation where colored tape is used for color coding.
4. Use the following color codes for AC power system conductors:
Conductor Color Codes FORF System RVoVoltage: 480Y/277V 208Y/120V 120/240V Conductor:uctor:to Phase A:INFORMATONINNNF Red Black Black Phase B:FFOY Yellow Purple Brown Phase C: BlueBl Brown --- Grounded White/GrayWhite/Gr White/Gray White/Gray (Neutral): RM Equipment GreeneenMA Green Green Grounding: AAT Isolated ---TO------Ground: ON Switched: PurplePink N Blue 5. Use the following color codes for DC popowerONLYwer ssystemysy conductors: Positive: Red Negative: Black
6. Provide color code for control conductors as indicateded oon equipment or control system manufacturer’s drawings.
2.3 TC-ER CABLE
A. Provide tray cable (Type TC-ER) that complies with UL 1277, the NEC, and this Section.
B. TC-ER cable shall be rated 90°C, minimum of 600V insulation rating, UL listed, sunlight and weather resistant, rated for direct burial and rated for variable frequency drive (VFD) use where specified on the drawings. TC cable rated for VFD use shall have a 2,000V insulation rating.
26 05 19 – 4 RPP-SPEC-60023 Rev.07 2/14/2018 - 2:57 PM 142 of 317
RPP-SPEC-60023, Rev. 7
C. Provide TC-ER cables with quantities and sizes (minimum 12 AWG) of conductors as indicated on the Drawings.
D. Provide TC-ER cable rated for VFD as shown on the Drawings.
E. TC-ER cable manufacturer: General Cable or equal.
2.4 CABLE PROTECTORS
A. Cable Protectors: Where cables require protection from vehicle or pedestrian traffic, use a cable protector such as Yellow Jacket®23, Bumblebee®23, or Cable Guard®23. Cable Guard or other engineering approved protection shall be used at vehicle and crane crossings.
2.5 WIRING FORCONNECTORSCONNECONN
A. For splicesices and ttaps on copper wire, sizes 8 AWG and smaller, use Pressure type, or spring ttypeyppe rarrateded for use with copper conductors with insulating caps or covers rated for 600VVINFORMATONand 101105°C that are NRTL-listed to UL 486C. Thomas and Betts Corporation “Sta-Kon®taa-Kon®24,” 3M Company “Scotchlok™17,” or approved substitute, where requiredequired by the NEC.
B. For splices and taps on copper wiwire, sizes 6 AWG through 1 AWG, use the following materials:
1. Tin-plated copper split-boltboltolt conneconnectors that meet the requirements in UL 486A-486B; provide withithh matchingmatchi 600V snap-on insulating cover. Manufacturer: FCI Burndy “TypeTyTypee KSAKSA” with “Type SC” insulating cover. 2. Multi-tap connectors that meet the requirementsiremenONLYementst of UL 486A-486B that have two or more range-taking mechanicalal lugs and matching 600V insulated cover. Manufacturers: Burndy ‘POLYTAP”OLYTAPOLYTA or “UNITAP,” Ilsco “Type PCT,” Blackburn “AMT.”
C. For copper wire, sizes 1/0 AWG and larger, use UL 486A-486B86 listed circumferential or hexagonal crimp compression terminals, splices, or adapters.
1. Provide compression terminals and splices made from electro-tin plated seamless copper tubing and marked with wire size, die index/color code, and number/locations of crimps. Manufacturers: FCI Burndy Types “YA,” “YA-L,” “YA-L-NT,” “YS,” and “YC-C.” Thomas & Betts “Color-Keyed.”
23 Yellow Jacket, Bumblebee, Cable Guard are registered trademarks of Peterson Systems International, Inc. 24 Sta-Kon is a registered trademark of Thomas and Betts Corporation.
26 05 19 – 5 RPP-SPEC-60023 Rev.07 2/14/2018 - 2:57 PM 143 of 317
RPP-SPEC-60023, Rev. 7
2. Provide straight and offset compression adapters made from electro-tin plated aluminum, NRTL listed for use on copper conductors, and marked with wire size, die index / color code, and number / locations of crimps. Each adapter shall include a 600V, 90°C rated insulating cover. Manufacturer: FCI Burndy Types “AYP” and “AYPO.”
3. Range-taking, die-less, or indenter-applied terminals are not acceptable for control wiring. Use nylon insulated crimp-on terminals with insulation grip that meet the requirements of UL 486A-486B. Manufacturer: 3M “Scotchlok MNG,” Thomas & Betts “Sta-Kon.”
4. Use ring tongue terminals for nutted studs. 5.FORU Use flanged fork terminals for barrier terminal blocks. D. Insulation-piercingationio -pier type connectors are not acceptable for power or control wiring.
2.6 INSULATING TAPEEINFORMATON AND TUBING
A. For making re-enterableerable tapetape-insulated splices and connections, provide varnished cambric electrical insulatingulatingating taptape made of cotton cambric fabric that is oil primed and coated with electricalal insulatininsulating varnish. Manufacturer: 3M “Scotch 2510” (no adhesive) and “Scotch 25202520”520” (pre(pr (pressure-sensitive adhesive).
B. Insulate taped splices and connectionsctions usinusing ethylene propylene rubber (EPR) tape that meets the requirements of UL 510 aand is rated for 90°C continuous operation and 130°C short-term overloadoadd servicservservice. Manufacturer: 3M “Scotch 130C.”
C. For the outer covering of tape-insulated splices andONLYnd cconnectionsono use vinyl plastic tape that meets the requirements of UL 510 and hasas the folfollfollowing characteristics:
1. 8.5 mil minimum thickness.
2. ASTM D3005, Rated 600V and 105°C, suitable for indoornd and outdoor applications.
3. Retains flexibility, adhesion, and applicable at temperature ranges from 0 through 100°F without loss of physical or electrical properties.
4. Resistant to abrasion, moisture, alkalis, acid, corrosion, and sunlight.
5. Manufacturer: 3M “Scotch Super 88.”
26 05 19 – 6 RPP-SPEC-60023 Rev.07 2/14/2018 - 2:57 PM 144 of 317
RPP-SPEC-60023, Rev. 7
D. Provide heat shrinkable tubing that meets the requirements of UL 486D and has the following characteristics:
1. Rated 600V.
2. Factory applied adhesive/sealant.
3. Split resistant.
4. Manufacturer: 3M “ITCSN.”
E. Use motor lead splicing kits to insulate and seal connections to leads for motors rated 480V and less. Manufacturer: 3M “5300 Series.”
2.7 WIRE PULLINGULLINGULLINFOR LUBRICANT
A. Providee NRTL-listedNRTL-l- wire pulling lubricant that is compatible with the conductor insulationn or jackjacjacket,et has a maximum coefficient of dynamic friction of 0.25, and leaves no flammableINFORMATONmable rresidue. For cold weather installations, provide wire pulling lubricant suitableblele for conconduit temperature.
B. Compatibility with conductoronductorducto insulation shall be determined in accordance with IEEE 1210.
C. Manufacturer:
1. For conduit temperature aboveboveve freezing:freez American Polywater Corporation, “Polywater®25”“ “LubricantLubrica J.”
2. For conduit temperature below freezing:ezing:zing: AAmerican Polywater Corporation, “Polywater” “Lubricant WJWWJ.”ONLY PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Verify interior of building has been protected from weather.
B. Verify that work of other trades likely to damage wire and cable is completed.
C. Verify raceway installation is complete and supported.
D. Verify that field measurements are as shown on Drawings.
25 Polywater is a registered trademark of American Polywater Corporation.
26 05 19 – 7 RPP-SPEC-60023 Rev.07 2/14/2018 - 2:57 PM 145 of 317
RPP-SPEC-60023, Rev. 7
E. Wire and cable routing shown on Drawings is approximate unless dimensioned.
1. Route wire and cable as required meeting project conditions.
2. Where cable routing is not shown, and destination only is indicated, determine exact routing and lengths required to meet field conditions.
3.2 PREPARATION
A. Examine raceways and building finishes that are to receive wires and cables for compliance with installation tolerances and other conditions. Do not proceed with installation until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. B. SwabFORb racewayrarac before installing wire. C. Do not handle or pull cables that are colder than +15°F. Store cold cables for at least 244 hours in a heated building prior to installation. 3.3 WIRE INSTALLATIONATINFORMATONION A. Install wire accordingding to, ththe NEC, the requirements in this Section.
B. Do not bend cables installedtalledalled in racewaysrra to less than manufacturer’s recommended bending radii.diidi . LayLay ccables in raceways in straight, parallel lines, and avoid crossing.
1. Use lubricant recommendeded bbyy wire or cable manufacturer, or wire- pulling compound specified whenhen pullpullinpulling wire and cable through conduit.
2. Do not install or handle wires with thermoplasticthermophermo insulation or jacket when ambient temperature is 15°F or lower. ONLY 3. Identify conductors, by wire numbers shownwn on the Drawings,D with wiremarkers. Attach wiremarkers at terminationon pointspoint within 2-in. of wire terminations. Marker nomenclature shall bee visible wwithout moving wires or markers.
C. Do not damage conductor, insulation, or jacket by excessive installation pulling tension or sidewall bearing pressure.
1. No tension monitoring devices are required where hand pull techniques are used.
2. Calculate expected cable pulling tension and sidewall bearing pressures for each set of conductors being pulled into a conduit run where any of the following combinations of bends and raceway length is exceeded between accessible pull points:
26 05 19 – 8 RPP-SPEC-60023 Rev.07 2/14/2018 - 2:57 PM 146 of 317
RPP-SPEC-60023, Rev. 7
a. 4 equivalent 90-degree bends and 10 ft of raceway.
b. 3 equivalent 90-degree bends and 40 ft of raceway.
c. 2 equivalent 90-degree bends and 80 ft of raceway.
d. 1 equivalent 90-degree bend and 150 ft of raceway.
e. Straight pull with more than 250 ft of raceway.
3. For cable pulling tension and sidewall bearing pressure calculations use formulas and factors described in IEEE 422.
4. Obtain recommended maximum conductor or cable pulling tension and FORsidesidewall bearing pressure values from the manufacturer, or use the fofollowingllowlow maximum allowable values: a.INFORMATONM Maximumax sidewall bearing pressure: 500 lb/ft. b.Maximum tension, pulling directly on conductor: 0.008 lb/cmil
c. Maximummumum tentenstension, pulling on basket grip over insulation jacket: 2000 lb, not to exceedex 0.008 lb/cmil of conductor.
5. Use a tension measuringring devidevicdevice to monitor pulling force on each pull of conductors where a pullinging winch is used.
a. Record the maximum measuredmeasure pulling tension for each monitored cable pull.
b. Place the recorded cable pullingngg tension tensionnsion for each monitored cable pull and the corresponding calculatedONLYated allowalloallowable pulling tension in the work package or fabrication document.cument.ment.
6. Deleted.
7. Deleted.
D. Use solid or stranded copper conductors not smaller than 12 AWG for outlets and lighting branch circuits. Do not “through-pull” conductors at boxes, fittings, or cabinets where a change of raceway alignment occurs.
3.4 TYPE TC CABLE INSTALLATION
A. Install TC cables according to the NEC and requirements in this Section.
B. Install and support Type TC cables as required in Article 336 of the NEC.
26 05 19 – 9 RPP-SPEC-60023 Rev.07 2/14/2018 - 2:57 PM 147 of 317
RPP-SPEC-60023, Rev. 7
3.5 CONNECTOR INSTALLATION
A. Install conductors in terminals, splices, adapters, and connectors in accordance with the manufacturer’s instructions. Have the manufacturer’s installation instructions available at the construction site.
B. Make splices, taps, and terminations to carry full ampacity of conductors with no perceptible temperature rise above the conductor temperature.
C. Do not nick conductors when removing insulation.
D. Do not cut conductor strands to fit into connectors, splices, adapters, or terminals.
E. Makee coconnections using clean connection surfaces. Wire brush conductors immediatelymediatelFOR before installing lugs, terminals, splices, or adapters.
F. Connectct conductconducconductors 1/0 AWG and larger using compression terminals at the locations describeddescribdescri ed below. Compression terminals shall be installed where there is adequate wirereINFORMATON bendibending space to accommodate compression terminals. Select compression terminalsrminalsminals susuitable for the conductor sizes, materials, and termination point configurations.ns. Install compression terminals using the manufacturer’s recommended dies andnd minimumminimu 12-ton force compression tools.
1. Circuit breakers withth frame ssize greater than 100 amperes that are NRTL listed for with compressionssion termterminals.
2. Safety switches and fused switcheswitches ratedr more than 100 amperes.
3. Transformers; refer to Section 266 22 13, “Low Voltage Distribution Transformers.” ONLY 4. Switchboards, panelboards, motor controll centers, and similar service and distribution equipment.
5. Utilization equipment connections that are NRTLL listed fofor with compression terminals.
G. For conductors sized 1/0 AWG and larger, and where compression lugs cannot be installed, connect using mechanical lugs, in the locations or conditions described below.
1. Connection points not NRTL-listed for either compression terminals or compression adapters.
2. Where there is insufficient wire bending space to accommodate either compression terminals or compression adapters.
26 05 19 – 10 RPP-SPEC-60023 Rev.07 2/14/2018 - 2:57 PM 148 of 317
RPP-SPEC-60023, Rev. 7
H. Connect outlets and components to wiring and to ground as indicated and instructed by manufacturer. Tighten connectors and terminals, including screws and bolts, according to equipment manufacturer’s published torque-tightening values for equipment connectors.
3.6 INSULATING TAPE AND TUBING INSTALLATION
A. Install insulating tape and tubing in accordance with the manufacturer’s instructions. Have the manufacturer’s installation instructions available at the construction site.
B. Insulate splices and taps of irregular shapes with manufactured insulating covers or insulating tape built up to not less than 150% of insulation rating of conductor.
1.App Apply varnished cambric tape over connections where re-entry is likely, such aas motor lead connections.
2. Usee rubrubbrubberer iinsulating tape in half-lapped layers to develop the basic insulationINFORMATONon over splices and taps.
3. Use vinyl plastic tapetap in half-lapped layers to provide the outer protective covering over splicesplices andan taps.
C. Insulate cylinder shaped splicesplicesces and taps, connector barrels and adapter barrels using heat shrinkable insulatingng tubing,tubing insulating covers manufactured for the connector, or tape insulation as described above.
3.7 IDENTIFICATION
A. Identify wire and cable under provisions off Section Section 262 05 53, “Identification for Electrical Systems.” ONLY B. Identify each conductor with its circuit number or otherther designationdesigdesi indicated on Drawings.
C. Apply color coding tape on conductors at each termination, splsplice, junction, and pull box.
3.8 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Observe conductors and cables during the installation process.
1. Reject and replace entire reels, rolls, or boxes containing conductors or cables with material or manufacturing defects.
2. Reject and replace cable or conductor segments that have been kinked, dented, or otherwise damaged during handling or installation.
B. Deleted.
26 05 19 – 11 RPP-SPEC-60023 Rev.07 2/14/2018 - 2:57 PM 149 of 317
RPP-SPEC-60023, Rev. 7
C. Perform the following inspections:
1. Inspect conductors and cables for:
a. Freedom from material defect or physical damage.
b. Correct conductor size, material, and insulation type.
c. Correct color coding and identification.
2. Inspect connections for:
a. Correct connector size and type according to the Specifications. FORb.b Deleted. D. Performm the follfollowing tests: 1. Beforeorere INFORMATONconnectingconnecconne conductors to equipment, use a megohmmeter in a 1-minutete test to verifyv the insulation integrity of each service conductor and feederr conductconductoconductor with respect to ground and other conductors in the same raceway.y.
a. Use 1000VDCVDC to tetest conductors rated 600V and 2000V, and 500VDC for conductorconductoconductors rated 300V or less.
b. Insulation test valuesues shall beb in accordance with the following:
i. Conductors with 300V insulationinsin rating and insulation resistances over 25 megohmmegohms are acceptable.
ii. Conductors with 600V insulationsulationONLYulation rrating and insulation resistances over 100 megohmsms are accacacceptable.
iii. Conductors with 2000V insulationn rating aand insulation resistances over 500 megohms are acceptable.cceptcce
c. Conductors with insulation resistances less than indicated above shall be investigated.
2. Prior to connecting conductors to equipment, test continuity to ensure proper circuit is identified to facilitate correct connection of each power circuit conductor and each control circuit conductor.
3. Test the equipment and wiring for continuity and unintentional grounds, and verify proper phase sequence and voltage at equipment served before attempt is made to operate equipment.
26 05 19 – 12 RPP-SPEC-60023 Rev.07 2/14/2018 - 2:57 PM 150 of 317
RPP-SPEC-60023, Rev. 7
4. Perform insulation (megger) test on electric heat trace cable at installation before and after insulation is installed per manufacturer’s instructions.
5. Measure and record in the work package or fabrication document the tightness of not less than 10% of each size and type of mechanical or bolted connection using a calibrated torque wrench or torque screwdriver. Additionally, verify proper crimping method, as applicable.
a. Compare measured torque with torque recommended by the connector manufacturer or as shown in Attachment 1, “Recommended Tightening Torque per UL 486A-486B.”
b. If any connection is found to be less than 90% of the recommended torque, notify the Buyer’s Technical Representative and re-torque FOR all bolted connections on the Project.
E. Removee and replrepreplace defective, incorrect, or improperly installed conductors and connectors.. ReRRe-inspectINFORMATONinsp and re-test replacement conductors and connectors. F. Place test and inspectionnspection rrecords in the work package or fabrication document.
G. Verify inspections andd tests requiredreq by other sections are completed before conductors may be energized.gized.
END OF SECTIONIONON 26 050 19
ONLY
26 05 19 – 13 RPP-SPEC-60023 Rev.07 2/14/2018 - 2:57 PM 151 of 317
RPP-SPEC-60023, Rev. 7
SECTION 26 05 19 – ATTACHMENT 1
RECOMMENDED TIGHTENING TORQUE PER UL 486A-486B
Table 21 – Tightening torque for screws Tightening Torque, N•m (lbf-in) Conductor Size installed in Slotted Head No. 10 and Larger* Hexagonal Head – External Drive Connector Slot Width – 1.2mm Slot Width – Over 1.2mm Socket Wrench (.047 in) or Less and (.047 in) or Slot Length – AWG or Split-Bolt Other mm2 Slot Length – 6.4mm Over 6.4mm (1/4 in.) or kcmil Connectors Connectors (1/4 in.) or less less 30 – 10 .05 – 5.3 2.3 (20) 4.0 (35) 9.0 (80) 8.5 (75) 8 8.4 2.8 (25) 4.5 (40) 9.0 (80) 8.5 (75) 6 – 4 13.2 – 21.2 4.0 (35) 5.1 (45) 18.6 (165) 12.4 (110) 3 26.7 4.0 (35) 5.6 (50) 31.1 (275) 16.9 (150) 2 33.66FORFFO 4.5 (40) 5.6 (50) 31.1 (275) 16.9 (150) 1 42.4OOR - 5.6 (50) 31.1 (275) 16.9 (150) 1/0 – 2/0 53.5 – 67.4 - 5.6 (50) 43.5 (385) 20.3 (180) 3/0 – 4/0 85.0 – 107.2R - 5.6 (50) 56.5 (500) 28.2 (250) 250 – 350 127 – 177 - 5.6 (50) 73.4 (650) 36.7 (325) 400 203INFORMATOIN - 5.6 (50) 93.2 (825) 36.7 (325) 500 253 -NF 5.6 (50) 93.2 (825) 42.4 (375) 600 – 750 304 – 380 -FFO 5.6 (50) 113.0 (1000) 42.4 (375) 800 – 1000 406 – 508 - 5.6 (50) 124.3 (1100) 56.5 (500) 1250 – 2000 635 – 1000 -OR - 124.3 (1100) 67.8 (600) * For values of slot width or length not correspondingng to those specified,s select the largest torque value associated with the conductor size. Slot width is the nominal design value. Slot length sshall be measured at the bottom of the slot.
Table 22 – Tightening torque for slotted head screwsrews smasmallerma than No. 10 intended for use with 8 AWG (8.4 mm2 ) or smaller conductors TONTO Tightening Torque, N•m (lbf-in)bffON-in)in Slot Length of Screw* Slot Width of Screw Slot Width of Screwcrewew 1.2mm Smaller than 1.2mm mm inch (.047 in.) and larger**rger**er** (.047 in.) Less than ONLYOON Less than 4 0.79 (7) 1.0 (9) 5/32 N 4 5/32 0.79 (7) 1.4 (12) 4.8 3/16 0.79 (7) 1.4 (12) 5.6 7/32 0.79 (7) 1.4 (12) 6.4 1/4 1.0 (9) 1.4 (12) 7.1 9/32 - 1.7 (15) Above 7.1 Above 9/32 - 2.3 (20) * For slot lengths of intermediate values, select torques pertaining to next shorter slot length. Also see Table 21 for screws with multiple tightening means. Slot length shall be measured at the bottom of the slot. ** Slot width is the nominal design value
26 05 19 – Att. 1–1 RPP-SPEC-60023 Rev.07 2/14/2018 - 2:57 PM 152 of 317
RPP-SPEC-60023, Rev. 7
Table 23 – Tightening torque for screws with recessed allen or square drives
Socket Width Across Flats* Tightening Torque, N•m mm inch (lbf-in) 3.2 1/8 5.1 (45) 4.0 5/32 11.3 (100) 4.8 3/16 13.6 (120) 5.6 7/32 16.9 (150) 6.4 1/4 25.4 (225) 7.9 5/16 33.9 (300) 9.5 3/8 45.2 (400) 12.7 1/2 56.6 (500) 14.3 9/16 67.8 (600) * See Table 21 for screws with multiple tightening means FOR
INFORMATONENDENE OF ATTACHMENT 1
ONLY
26 05 19 – Att. 1–2 RPP-SPEC-60023 Rev.07 2/14/2018 - 2:57 PM 153 of 317
RPP-SPEC-60023, Rev. 7
SECTION 26 05 26
GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 SCOPE OF WORK
A. Connection to Main Grounding Electrode System.
B. Circuit and System Grounding. C. EnclosureFORsu and Equipment Grounding System. 1.2 RELATEDD DOCUMENTSDOCU / CODES AND STANDARDS
Drawings and generaleneralneral pprprovisions of the contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Divisionvisiis INFORMATONon 01 SpecificationS Sections apply to this Section. The following documentsts and otheothothers referenced therein, form part of the Contract to the extent designated in this Section.ction.on. RReReferenced documents are those current as of the date of this Section unless otherwisesee indicateindicatindicated.
A. American Standards for Testingting and MMaterials (ASTM)
ASTM B8 Standardndard SpeSpecification for Concentric-Lay Stranded Copperr ConductConducConductors
B. Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineersineers (IE(I(IEEE)
IEEE 81 Guide for MeasuringingONLYng Earth Resistivity, Ground Impedance and Earthh Surface Potentials of a Grounding System
IEEE 142 Recommended Practice for GrounGroGrounding of Industrial and Commercial Power Systems
IEEE 837 IEEE Standard for Qualifying Permanent Connections used in Substation Grounding
C. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA)
NFPA 70, 2014 National Electrical Code (NEC)
26 05 26 – 1 RPP-SPEC-60023 Rev.07 2/14/2018 - 2:57 PM 154 of 317
RPP-SPEC-60023, Rev. 7
D. Underwriters Laboratories (UL)
UL 467 Grounding and Bonding Equipment
UL 486A-486B Wire Connectors and Soldering Lugs for Use with Copper Conductors
UL 486C Splicing Wire Connectors
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. See the Contract Statement of Work for the submittal process. B. ApprovalFORova Required 1.DocumDocu Documented in work package or fabrication document as applicable.
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCEURAN INFORMATON A. Comply with thehe NEC forfof components and installation.
B. Verify products thatt aree listedliste and labeled by a Nationally Recognized Testing Laboratory (NRTL) forr the applicationapplappli and environment in which installed.
1.5 RECEIVING, STORING, AND PROTECPROTECTINGROTEC
A. Receive, store, protect, and handlee products according to manufacturer’s instructions.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 PRODUCT OPTIONS AND SUBSTITUTIONS ONLY
A. Alternate products may be accepted; in accordance with the requirementsre of the Contract Statement of Work.
2.2 GROUNDING ELECTRODE CONDUCTOR
A. Provide bare stranded, soft temper copper cable that conforms to ASTM B8.
B. Provide ground electrode conductor for separately derived systems and equipment in the Tank Farm and bond to nearest tank riser.
2.3 EQUIPMENT GROUNDING CONDUCTORS
A. Provide NRTL-listed THHN/THWN insulated copper wire.
B. Use solid or stranded grounding conductors 12 AWG and smaller where not subject to vibration or repeated flexing.
26 05 26 – 2 RPP-SPEC-60023 Rev.07 2/14/2018 - 2:57 PM 155 of 317
RPP-SPEC-60023, Rev. 7
C. Use stranded grounding conductors for 10 AWG and larger.
D. Use stranded grounding conductors where subject to vibration or repeated flexing.
E. Color code grounding conductors as follows:
1. Equipment ground:
a. Conductors 6 AWG and smaller: Green colored insulation.
b. Conductors 4 AWG and larger: Green colored insulation or black colored insulation with 3/4 in. wide band of water and oil-resistant green plastic adhesive tape.
2.4 GROUNDDFOR PLPLATESATA
A. Providee ground pplates designed for flush mounting in concrete structures. B. Furnish copperpep INFORMATON alloalloyy ccastings with four 1/2 in. x 13 in. threaded holes at 1.75 in. x 1.75 in. NEMA spacing and a welding stud or compression connection suitable for 2 AWGWGG to 250 kcmil copper conductor.
C. Manufacturer: Burndy “YGF.”“YGF.”
2.5 CONDUIT GROUNDING BUSHINGSINGS
A. Provide NRTL-listed, galvanized malleablealleable iron, 150°C rated insulated throat grounding bushings with lay-in type ground cablecac lugs.
B. Manufacturers: O-Z/Gedney Type “BLG.””
2.6 EXOTHERMIC WELD GROUNDING CONNECTIONSIONSONLYONS
A. Provide molds and welding material for making exothermichermicermic wewweld connections.
B. In interior locations and in vaults, use low smoke emissionn tytypeype welding material.
C. Match mold and weld material-to-material types, shapes, and sizes to be joined.
D. Manufacturer: ERICO Cadweld.
2.7 COMPRESSION GROUNDING CONNECTIONS
A. Provide wrought copper connectors, terminals, taps, and splices for making irreversible compression grounding connections.
B. Furnish NRTL-listed grounding connectors that are suitable for direct burial and have been tested successfully according to the requirements of IEEE 837.
26 05 26 – 3 RPP-SPEC-60023 Rev.07 2/14/2018 - 2:57 PM 156 of 317
RPP-SPEC-60023, Rev. 7
C. Provide connector manufacturer’s hydraulic compression tools and dies that match the connectors.
D. Match connector and die size to material shapes and conductor sizes to be joined.
E. Use two-hole heavy-duty compression lugs for bolted connections to ground bars, ground plates, and equipment ground pads.
F. Manufacturer: Burndy “Hyground®26.”
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. VerifyFORrifyy thatth work of other trades likely to damage grounding and bonding material has beenen comcompleted.comp B. Verify thatat fieldINFORMATON measurementsme are as shown on Drawings. C. Grounding cablele routing shown on Drawings is approximate unless dimensioned.
1. Install and routeoutee cablcable as required meeting project conditions.
2. Where cable routingng is not sshown, and destination only is indicated, determine exact locations,tions, routrourouting, and lengths required to meet project conditions.
3.2 PREPARATION
A. Examine equipment and building finishes thathat are to receive grounding and bonding material for compliance with installationationtion tolertolerances and other conditions. Do not proceed with installation until unsatisfactorytoryONLYoryy condconconditions have been corrected.
3.3 GENERAL
A. Comply with the requirements of the NEC, this Section, and the Drawings.
B. Install grounding and bonding material according to manufacturer’s instructions. Have the manufacturer’s installation instructions available at the construction site.
C. Use the following connection methods unless otherwise specified or indicated on the Drawings. Use compression or bolted grounding connection methods in the Tank Farm areas:
1. Use exothermic weld grounding connections for underground or concealed connections of dissimilar materials.
26 Hyground is a registered trademark of Hubbell Incorporated, Shelton, Connecticut.
26 05 26 – 4 RPP-SPEC-60023 Rev.07 2/14/2018 - 2:57 PM 157 of 317
RPP-SPEC-60023, Rev. 7
2. Use exothermic weld or compression grounding connections for underground or concealed connections of like materials.
3. Use exothermic weld, compression, or bolted grounding connections for accessible connections.
4. Make bolted connections using bolts, nuts, flat washers, and toothed lock washers suitable for the connector and the installation environment; acceptable materials include high strength silicon bronze and 18-8 alloy stainless steel.
5. Make irreversible bolted connections using 18-8 alloy stainless steel tamper-resistant bolts and tamper-resistant nuts along with flat washers, aand toothed lock washers. Tamper-resistant nuts and bolts must resist FORlooseloosloosening with common tools; acceptable tamper-resistant fasteners include penta-head, break-away, and oval designs.
D. Tighten groundingoundun ng aand bonding connectors and terminals, including screws and bolts, in accordancedanceINFORMATON wiwwith manufacturer’s published torque tightening values for connectors and bolts.lts. WhWhere manufacturer’s torquing requirements are not indicated, tighten connectionsonnection to comply with torque tightening values specified in Section 26 05 19, “LowLow VoltageVolta Electrical Power Conductors and Cables,” Attachment 1, “Recommendedendednded TighteningTig Torque per UL 486A-486B.” Use a calibrated torque wrench.
E. Use hydraulic compression tools to provide the correct circumferential pressure for compression connectors. Followw connectoconnector manufacturer’s installation instructions and use tools and dies recommendedmmendedmmende by the manufacturer of the connectors. Provide embossing die code or other sstandard method to make a visible indication that a connector has been adeadequatelydequqONLYuately compressed. F. Install exothermic welds in accordance with manufacturer’sufacturerfacturer s instructions and recommendations. Welds that are puffed up or that showhowow convconvex surfaces indicating improper cleaning are not acceptable.
G. Make connections in such a manner as to minimize possibility of galvanic action or electrolysis. Select connectors, connection hardware, conductors, and connection methods so metals in direct contact will be galvanically compatible.
1. Use electroplated or hot-tin-coated materials to assure high conductivity and make contact points closer in order of galvanic series.
2. Make connections with clean bare metal at points of contact.
3. Make aluminum to steel connections with stainless steel separators and mechanical clamps.
26 05 26 – 5 RPP-SPEC-60023 Rev.07 2/14/2018 - 2:57 PM 158 of 317
RPP-SPEC-60023, Rev. 7
4. Make aluminum to galvanized steel connections with tin-plated copper jumpers and mechanical clamps.
5. Coat and seal connections involving dissimilar metals with inert material to prevent future penetration of moisture to contact surfaces.
3.4 MAIN GROUNDING ELECTRODE SYSTEM
A. Install in accordance with the NEC and the Drawings.
B. Concrete encased ground electrode and ground plates are provide in accordance with Specifications below and Drawings.
1.I Install a concrete-encased main grounding electrode in the lower part of the perimeterp strip footing or grade beam to form a complete and continucontinuous loop around the structure. Encase the electrode with at least 2 in. of ccoconcrete from the bottom of the foundation or footing. Use one of thee follofollowingolloINFORMATONwingwin materials for the electrode: a.Bare or zinczin galvanized or other electrically conductive coated steelel reinforcingreinforc bars, minimum 1/2-in. diameter. Bond reinforcingrcinging rods together using steel wire ties or other effective means.
b. Bare #2 copperr conductoconductconductor. Space cable from the bottom and sides of the grade beamm so it hashas at least 2 in. of concrete coverage. Bond to the rebar in one placeplace.
c. Perform NEC inspection of main groundinggrg electrode prior to pouring concrete. ONLY C. Install ground plates flush with the concrete slab. LLocateocate gground plates adjacent to switchboard. Bond ground electrode to ground plateslates withwit #2 AWG pigtail using UL-listed compression fittings.
D. Bond building perimeter structural steel column to the main grgrounding electrode via ground plates and ground cables sized as indicated on the Drawings.
3.5 CIRCUIT AND SYSTEM GROUNDING
A. Connect the service entrance equipment ground bus to the ground plate; use ground cable as indicated on the Drawings, or not smaller than the grounding electrode conductor required by the NEC and not smaller than 4 AWG.
B. In the service entrance equipment, connect the neutral bus to the ground bus using a bonding jumper not smaller than the grounding electrode conductor required by the NEC; do not use a bonding screw for this purpose. Make no other neutral-to- ground connections on the load side of the service entrance disconnect.
26 05 26 – 6 RPP-SPEC-60023 Rev.07 2/14/2018 - 2:57 PM 159 of 317
RPP-SPEC-60023, Rev. 7
C. Separately Derived Systems:
1. Connect ground bus of first disconnecting means for separately derived systems (e.g., dry type transformers) to the nearest ground plate (preferred) or building structural steel column; use grounding conductor sized as shown on the Drawings or as required by the NEC.
2. At the first system overcurrent device or disconnecting means, connect the neutral bus to the ground bus using a bonding jumper sized as required by the NEC. For systems in the Tank Farm, provide grounding electrode conductor to nearest tank riser. Sized grounding electrode conductor in accordance with the NEC and use UL Listed pipe grounding clamp or to an existing ground tap on riser with the approval of the TOC Construction FORReRRepresentative. 3.6 ENCLOSUREREE AND EEQUIPMENT GROUNDING
A. Provide permanentrmanm ent aand effective equipment, enclosure, and raceway grounding in accordance withthINFORMATON NEC rrequirements, and as further specified or shown on the Drawings.
B. Provide an equipmentt ground bbar, separate from any neutral bar, in all switchgear, switchboards, panelboards,ds,s, transformers,transfo motor control centers, starters, disconnect switches, cabinets,ets,s, etc., fofor grounding the enclosure and for connecting other equipment and raceway ground conductors.coc Make connections to the ground bar using mechanical lugss or compressioncompr lugs.
C. Make connections and couplings on metallicetallicallic coconconduit systems wrench tight. D. Grounding Bushings: ONLY 1. Install grounding bushings on metallic conduitnduit contcontaining circuits rated 480 VAC or 100 amperes and higher.
2. Install grounding bushings on metallic conduits enteringntering eenclosures through concentric, eccentric, or oversize knockouts.
3. Install grounding bushings on metallic conduits that terminate to a metallic enclosure without effective electrical connection such as locknuts or threaded bushings.
4. Bond conduit grounding bushing lug to the equipment ground bar or ground lug in switchboard, panelboards, transformers, starters, disconnect switches, cabinets, etc. Size bonding jumpers in accordance with the NEC.
E. Provide an insulated equipment grounding conductor for each feeder and branch circuit.
26 05 26 – 7 RPP-SPEC-60023 Rev.07 2/14/2018 - 2:57 PM 160 of 317
RPP-SPEC-60023, Rev. 7
1. Install the grounding conductor within the common conduit or raceway with the related phase and neutral conductors and connect to the grounding terminal or grounding bus in each box or cabinet.
2. Size equipment ground conductor in accordance with the NEC or as shown on the Drawings.
F. In each 15 or 20 ampere branch circuit outlet box and junction box, install a green colored washer head grounding screw with a 12 AWG equipment grounding conductor pigtail.
G. Connect receptacle grounding terminals to the equipment ground system using minimum 12 AWG equipment grounding conductor. Do not use a “self- grounding”FORundin receptacle strap as the only equipment grounding path. 3.7 FIELD QUALITYALITYLITY CCONTROL
A. General: PerforPerformrfo m oon-site verification, certification, and acceptance testing of the grounding installationINFORMATONallation during construction if required by the design media.
B. Notify the TOC Constructiononstructio Representative ten working days in advance of the expected completion off a groungrounding system installation specified in Part C. Verification and testing can be schscheduled in parts or by area depending on the system and construction schedule.hedule.edule.
C. Before work is concealed, verify and certicertify that the following grounding installations have been made correctly:ctlytly:
1. The building grounding electrodees ssystem.ystem. This includes the bonding of the structural steel columns and bondingding ONLYooff otother metallic systems. 2. Ground plates and grounding bars.
3. All other underground grounding installations.
D. Acceptance Testing: Perform acceptance testing for building/transformerng/t area grounding electrode system and place test results in work package or fabrication document. Tests may be witnessed by designated representatives.
1. Perform ground-impedance measurements using the “fall-of-potential” method in accordance with IEEE 81. Use instrumentation specifically designed for ground impedance testing. Provide sufficient spacing of test electrodes so that the plotted curves flatten in the 62% area of the distance between the item under test and the current electrode. When sufficient spacing of electrodes is impractical for the “fall-of-potential” method, perform ground-impedance measurements using either the “intersecting curves method” or the “slope method,” referenced in IEEE 81. Investigate and correct ground resistances that exceed the following values:
26 05 26 – 8 RPP-SPEC-60023 Rev.07 2/14/2018 - 2:57 PM 161 of 317
RPP-SPEC-60023, Rev. 7
a. Service rated more than 50 kVA but less than 2500 kVA: 5 ohms.
2. Test equipment ground resistances for the following items. Measure resistance between the equipment item and the Electrode Ground Plate. Use the “two-point method” of IEEE 81. Investigate and correct equipment ground resistances that exceed 0.5 ohm.
a. Switchboards
E. Prepare test reports of the ground resistance at each test location. Include observations of weather and other phenomena that may affect test results. Describe any measures taken to improve test results. Place reports in work package or fabrication document.
END OF SECTION 26 05 26 INFORMATON
ONLY
26 05 26 – 9 RPP-SPEC-60023 Rev.07 2/14/2018 - 2:57 PM 162 of 317
RPP-SPEC-60023, Rev. 7
SECTION 26 05 29
HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 SCOPE OF WORK
A. Furnish and install, hangers, supports, anchors, concrete bases, and other positive fastenings for non-structural electrical components such that gravity loads are safely transferred to the structure. 1.2 RELATEDFOR DOCUMENTSDO / CODES AND STANDARDS Drawings and genergenerageneral provisions of the contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions andd DivisionDivisio 01 Specification Sections apply to this Section. The following documentsummINFORMATONnts andan others referenced therein, form part of the Contract to the extent designated in thishisis SectionSection. Referenced documents are those current as of the date of this Section unless otherwiseerwise iinindicated.
A. American Society for Testing anand Materials (ASTM)
ASTM A307 StandardStanda Specification for Carbon Steel Bolts and Studs,tuds, 60,00060,0 PSI Tensile Strength
B. Code of Federal Regulations (CFR)
Title 29 Labor Part 1910 OccupationalallS Safety SONLYafety anda Health Standards C. Federal Specification (FS)
FS WW-H-171E Hangers and Supports, Pipepe
D. International Code Council (ICC)
IBC International Building Code
E. Manufacturers’ Standardization Society (MSS)
MSS SP-58 Pipe Hangers and Supports – Materials, Design, Manufacture, Selection, Application, and Installation
MSS SP-69 Pipe Hangers and Supports – Selection and Application
26 05 29 – 1 RPP-SPEC-60023 Rev.07 2/14/2018 - 2:57 PM 163 of 317
RPP-SPEC-60023, Rev. 7
F. Metal Framing Manufacturers Association (MFMA)
MFMA-4 Metal Framing Standards Publication
MFMA-102 Guidelines for the Use of Metal Framing
MFMA-103 Guidelines for the Use of Metal Framing
G. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA)
NFPA 70, 2014 National Electrical Code (NEC)
H. Underwriters Laboratories (UL) ULFOR 486A-486B486A Wire Connectors 1.3 SUBMITTALSLS A. See the Contractntratr INFORMATONt StatStaStatement of Work for the submittal process. B. Approval Requirededd
1. Documented inn work pacpackage or fabrication document as applicable.
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Furnish and install hangers and supportsupports thatth conform to the drawings and requirements of the following codes and stanstandards:
1. NEC.
B. Where a Nationally Recognized Testing LaboratorytoryONLYory (NR(NRTL) has requirements for such products, provide products that are NRTL listedsted and llalabeled for the application, installation condition, and the environmentent in whiwhich installed.
1.5 RECEIVING, STORING AND PROTECTING
A. Receive, store, protect, and handle products according to manufacturer’s instructions.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 SUBSTITUTIONS
A. Alternate products may be accepted; in accordance with the requirements of the Contract Statement of Work
26 05 29 – 2 RPP-SPEC-60023 Rev.07 2/14/2018 - 2:57 PM 164 of 317
RPP-SPEC-60023, Rev. 7
2.2 COATINGS AND MATERIALS
A. Furnish products for use indoors protected with zinc coating or with treatment of equivalent corrosion resistance using approved alternative treatment, finish, or inherent material characteristic.
B. Furnish products for use outdoors or in damp or corrosive indoor locations with hot-dip galvanized coating or with treatment of equivalent corrosion resistance using approved alternative treatment, finish, or material such as stainless steel with inherent corrosion resistant characteristics.
2.3 RACEWAY SUPPORTING DEVICES A. FurnishFORish ssupports as described below for the installation of raceway systems. B. Use pressedessed ststeel, single bolt hangers to support individual RGS, IMC, or EMT conduitstss from ththrthreaded rods or beam clamps. Manufacturer: Steel City “6H Series.” INFORMATON C. Use malleable ironron conduconduit clamps to secure individual RGS, IMC, or EMT conduit runs across,s, parallelparallel, or perpendicular to beams, channels, and angle supports. Manufacturer:rer:r: Steel City “RC, EC, and PC Series.”
D. Support multiple parallel horizontalrizontal conduits with trapeze hangers fabricated from framing channel materials specifiedecified belbebelow.
2.4 HANGER RODS
A. Furnish mild steel rods that conform to ASTM A307.A3A B. Furnish rods that are threaded on both ends, threadedhreh ONLYaded ono one end, or continuous threaded with UNC (coarse) thread pitch.
2.5 FASTENERS
A. Post-Installed Concrete Anchors:
1. Furnish post-installed concrete anchors as shown on the Drawings.
2. Each post-installed anchor shall have an ICC-ES evaluation report stating that the product is compliant with the current edition of the IBC and the intended conditions of use.
3. For applications in outdoor, damp, or corrosive locations, furnish stainless steel post-installed anchors.
4. Furnish post-installed expansion, adhesive, and undercut anchors specified in the Contract Statement of Work
26 05 29 – 3 RPP-SPEC-60023 Rev.07 2/14/2018 - 2:57 PM 165 of 317
RPP-SPEC-60023, Rev. 7
5. Powder-actuated threaded studs: Use zinc-plated carbon steel or stainless steel suitable for the intended service:
a. 1/4-20 threaded stud: Manufacturer: Hilti X-W6.
b. 3/8-16 threaded stud: Manufacturer: Hilti W10.
6. Concrete and masonry screw anchors: Heat-treated carbon steel. Manufacturer: Simpson Strong-Tie “Titen HD.”
B. Beam Clamps: NRTL-listed, or compliant with Federal Specification WW-H-171E, or compliant with MSS SP-69 and SP-58. 2.6 FRAMINGFOR CHCHANNEL SYSTEMS A. Furnishnishh UU-channel-cha framing systems that conform to MFMA-4 and are fabricated using minimum 12-gage steel. B. Furnish fittingssINFORMATON and acaccessories that mate and match with U-channel and are of the same manufacturer.facturer.acturer.
C. Manufacturers: B-Line.ine.e.
2.7 FABRICATED SUPPORTING DEVICESDEVICEIC
A. Furnish shop- or field-fabricatedd supports or manufactured supports assembled from U-channel components.
B. Furnish steel brackets fabricated from angles,ngles, chachchannels, and other standard structural shapes. Connect with welds andd machinmachine bolts to form rigid supports.
PART 3 EXECUTION ONLY
3.1 GENERAL
A. Install hangers and supports according to the NEC, the requirementsuiremuir in this Section, and specific supporting requirements in other Sections and drawings.
B. Conform to manufacturer’s instructions and recommendations for selection and installation of hangers and supports.
C. Do not use wire or perforated strap for permanent supports.
D. Install flexible sections in electrical conduits and raceways where they cross expansion joints. Do not support conduits, boxes, raceways, etc., from ceiling suspension wires.
E. Use appropriate, calibrated, special tools when installing devices for which special installation tools are recommended by the manufacturer.
26 05 29 – 4 RPP-SPEC-60023 Rev.07 2/14/2018 - 2:57 PM 166 of 317
RPP-SPEC-60023, Rev. 7
3.2 EXAMINATION
A. Examine surfaces to receive hangers and supports for compliance with installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of the system. Do not proceed with installation until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.3 FASTENERS
A. Post-installed concrete expansion anchors: Install in accordance with Section 03 15 00, “Post-Installed Concrete Anchor Bolts,” and the product’s ICC-ES report conditions of use.
B. Use beam clamps or machine bolts, nuts, and washers for fastening to metal.
1.FORWh When clamping is impractical, obtain approval from the TOC ConstrConstruction Representative before drilling, punching, cutting, or welding to buildinbuildibuilding structural steel members for support attachments.
C. Fasten equipmentINFORMATONent to concreteco or masonry with expansion anchors.
D. The use of lead-cinchnch drop iin anchors is not allowed.
E. Torque threaded fastenersers as recommendedrecorec by the manufacturer’s instructions.
3.4 RACEWAY SUPPORTS
A. Install individual and multiple (trapeze)peze)eze) racraceraceway hangers and riser clamps as necessary to support raceways. Provideidede U-bolts,U-boltbo clamps, attachments, and other hardware necessary for hanger assembly and for securings hanger rods and conduits. ONLY B. Support three or more parallel runs of horizontall racewaracewayraceways together on trapeze hangers.
C. Support individual horizontal raceways by separate pipe hangers.hangers
3.5 BOXES AND CABINETS
A. Support sheet metal boxes directly from the building structure, or by approved brackets or bar hangers, as shown on the Drawings or as required. Where bar hangers are used, attach the bar to structure on opposite sides of the box.
B. In open overhead spaces, cast boxes threaded to raceways need not be supported separately except where used for fixture support.
C. Install surface-mounted cabinets and panelboards as shown on the Drawings or as required.
26 05 29 – 5 RPP-SPEC-60023 Rev.07 2/14/2018 - 2:57 PM 167 of 317
RPP-SPEC-60023, Rev. 7
3.6 FRAMING CHANNEL SYSTEMS
A. Select and install framing channel systems in accordance with MFMA-103.
B. Use framing channel to support electrical equipment that is mounted free of walls.
C. Use framing channel to support equipment mounted on walls that do not have sufficient strength to resist pull-out or wallowing out of equipment mounting bolts.
3.7 HANGER RODS
A. Use minimum 3/8-in. diameter threaded rod; use larger diameter rod as indicated on thee DDrawings, in other Sections, or in the supported equipment manufacturer’s installationtallation instructions.
INFORMATONENEEND OF SECTION 26 05 29
ONLY
26 05 29 – 6 RPP-SPEC-60023 Rev.07 2/14/2018 - 2:57 PM 168 of 317
RPP-SPEC-60023, Rev. 7
SECTION 26 05 33
RACEWAYS AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 SCOPE OF WORK
A. Conduits and fittings.
B. Outlet boxes and handholes. C. PullFOR andnd junction boxes. D. Wireway.reway.
1.2 RELATED DOCUMENTSCUME / CODES AND STANDARDS
Drawings and generalINFORMATON provisionprovisions of the contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 SpecSpecifSpecification Sections apply to this Section.
The following documents and others refrereferenced therein, form part of the Contract to the extent designated in this Section. ReferencedReferenReferenc documents are those current as of the date of this Section unless otherwise indicated.icated.cated.
A. Hanford Documents
TFC-ENG-STD-15 Raceway SSystemsysy temsems Standard B. National Electrical Manufacturers Associationonn (N(NEMA)ONLYEMA NEMA C80.1 Electrical Rigid Steelel ConduiConduConduit (ERSC)
NEMA C80.3 Steel Electrical Metallic Tubing (E(EMT)
NEMA FB1 Fittings, Cast Metal Boxes, andd Conduit Bodies for Conduit and Cable Assemblies
NEMA ICS 4 Industrial Control and Systems Terminal Blocks
NEMA ICS 6 Enclosures for Industrial Controls and Systems
NEMA RN 1 PVC Externally Coated Galvanized Rigid Steel Conduit and Intermediate Metal Conduit
NEMA OS 1 Sheet-Steel Outlet Boxes, Device Boxes, Covers, and Box Supports
26 05 33 – 1 RPP-SPEC-60023 Rev.07 2/14/2018 - 2:57 PM 169 of 317
RPP-SPEC-60023, Rev. 7
NEMA OS 3 Selection and Installation Guidelines for Electrical Outlet Boxes
NEMA TC 2 Electrical Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) Tubing and Conduit
NEMA TC 3 PVC Fittings for Use with Rigid PVC Conduit and Tubing
NEMA TC 6 and 8 Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) Plastic Utilities Duct for Underground Installations
NEMA TC 7 Smooth wall Coilable Electrical Polyethylene FOR Conduit NEMAMAA TC 9 Fitting for Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) Plastic Utilities Duct for Underground Installation
C. National Fire ProtectionProtectioINFORMATON Association (NFPA)
NFPA 70, 2014 National Electrical Code (NEC)
D. Society of Cable Telecommunicationsommunicaommunic Engineers (SCTE)
SCTE 77 SpecificationSpecifica for Underground Enclosure Integrity
E. Underwriters Laboratories (UL)
Electrical AppliancApplianAppliance and Utilization Equipment Directory
Electrical ConstructionctionONLYtion MaMatMaterials Directory
UL 1 Flexible Metal Electricalall ConduConduiConduit
UL 6 Rigid Metal Electrical Conduituit
UL 50 Enclosures for Electrical Equipment, Non- Environmental Considerations
UL 360 Liquid-Tight Flexible Steel Conduit, Electrical
UL 467 Grounding and bonding Equipment
UL 498 Attachment Plugs and Receptacles
UL 508A, 2014 Industrial Control Panels
26 05 33 – 2 RPP-SPEC-60023 Rev.07 2/14/2018 - 2:57 PM 170 of 317
RPP-SPEC-60023, Rev. 7
UL 510 Polyvinyl Chloride Polyethylene and Rubber Insulating Tape
UL 514A Metallic Outlet Boxes
UL 514B Fittings for Conduit and Outlet Boxes
UL 514C Non-Metallic Fittings for Conduit and Outlet Boxes
UL 651 Schedule 40 and 80 Rigid PVC Conduit
UL 651A Schedule 40 and 80 High Density Polyethene (HDPE) Conduit
ULFOR797 Electrical Metallic Tubing
1.3 SUBMITTALSLS A. See the Contracttratr INFORMATONct StaStateStatement of Work for the submittal process. B. Approval Requirededd
Not Used.
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Comply with the NEC for componentsnents and installation.
B. Rigid steel conduit. Verify the following:ng:g:
1. Each length is marked with manufacturer’sturerurer’s namname, UL label, and “Rigid Metal Conduit” or “Rigid Steel Conduit.””ONLY
C. Conduit fittings/metallic outlet boxes/terminal boxess (rigid, staststainless steel). Verify the following:
1. Check one lot or container and verify each item has, att a minimum, the UL symbol and that the shipping label or the container for which the items are shipped contains the manufacturers name, the UL listing, and the type of items shipped. If the item is not marked with the UL symbol or manufacturer’s name, visually inspect the shipping carton of the item to ensure it is in accordance with the UL and manufacturer’s published data.
2. Check one lot or container and verify item size is in accordance with product description.
3. Verify external coating for each item is uniform (rigid steel only) and no damage exists.
26 05 33 – 3 RPP-SPEC-60023 Rev.07 2/14/2018 - 2:57 PM 171 of 317
RPP-SPEC-60023, Rev. 7
4. Verify material used is ferrous metal (rigid or malleable iron only) by performing magnetic test.
D. Provide products that are listed and labeled by a Nationally Recognized Testing Laboratory (NRTL) for the application, installation condition, and the environment in which installed.
E. Cabinets containing assembled control systems shall be designed, constructed, and listed or labeled to the UL 508A Standard, as applicable.
1.5 RECEIVING, STORING, AND PROTECTING
A. Receive, store, protect, and handle products according to manufacturer’s instructions.FORucti PART 2 PRODUCTSCTSTS 2.1 PRODUCT OPTIONSTIONSTIONINFORMATON AAND SUBSTITUTIONS A. Alternate productsuctcts mayy beb accepted; in accordance with the requirements of the Contract Statementnt of Work.Work
2.2 COATINGS
A. Provide products with zinc coatingoating or wwith treatment of equivalent corrosion resistance using approved alternativenativeative treatreatment, finish, or inherent material characteristic that is suitable for thee environenvironmenvironment in which the product will be installed and used.
2.3 RIGID METAL CONDUIT (RMC) AND FITTINGSINGS ONLY A. Furnish RMC that meets the requirements of ULL6 6 andNEN NEMA C80.1.
B. Furnish zinc-plated, threaded, malleable iron fittings andnd condconduconduit bodies that meet the requirements of UL 514B and NEMA FB1.
2.4 PLASTIC-COATED STEEL CONDUIT AND FITTINGS
A. Furnish polyvinyl chloride (PVC) exterior coated, urethane interior coated, RMC that meets the requirements of NEMA RN 1.
B. Use factory-fabricated elbows.
C. Furnish 40 mils PVC exterior coated, urethane interior coated, zinc-plated, threaded, malleable iron fittings and conduit bodies meeting the requirements of UL 514B.
26 05 33 – 4 RPP-SPEC-60023 Rev.07 2/14/2018 - 2:57 PM 172 of 317
RPP-SPEC-60023, Rev. 7
2.5 RIGID NON-METALLIC CONDUIT (RNC) AND FITTINGS
A. Furnish RNC that conforms to UL 651, UL 651A, NEMA TC 2, NEMA TC 3, NEMA TC 6 & 8, and NEMA TC 7.
B. Furnish non-metallic, solvent-welded socket fittings that meet the requirements of UL 651, NEMA TC 3, and NEMA TC 9.
2.6 ELECTRICAL METALLIC TUBING (EMT) AND FITTINGS
A. Furnish galvanized EMT that conforms to UL 797 and NEMA C80.3.
B. Furnish compression type fittings that meet the requirements of UL 514B and NEMAFORA FB1. Furnish insulated throat connectors. 2.7 FLEXIBLEE METALMETA CONDUIT AND FITTINGS
A. Furnish galvanizedalvanizalvani ed steel flexible metal conduit that meets the requirements of UL 1. INFORMATON B. Furnish zinc-platededd malleabmalleable iron fittings that meet the requirements of UL 514B and NEMA FB1. Furnishurnishish ininsuinsulated throat connectors.
2.8 LIQUID-TIGHT FLEXIBLE METAL CONDUITC AND FITTINGS
A. Furnish liquid-tight flexible metaltal conduiconduit that meets the requirements of UL 360.
B. Furnish zinc-plated malleable iron orr zinczinc-plated-platpla steel liquid-tight fittings that meet the requirements of UL 514B and NEMA FB1.F Furnish insulated throat connectors.
C. Furnish galvanized steel flexible metal conduit thatONLYhat meetsmeet the requirements of UL 1 and the NEC.
2.9 INSULATING BUSHINGS
A. Provide NRTL listed insulating bushings with 105°C rated insulation.
B. Manufacturer: O-Z/Gedney, Type IB.
2.10 GROUNDING BUSHINGS
A. Provide NRTL listed, galvanized malleable iron, 150°C rated insulated throat grounding bushings with lay-in type ground cable lugs.
B. Manufacturer: O-Z/Gedney, Type BLG.
26 05 33 – 5 RPP-SPEC-60023 Rev.07 2/14/2018 - 2:57 PM 173 of 317
RPP-SPEC-60023, Rev. 7
2.11 EXPANSION FITTINGS
A. Furnish NRTL listed expansion fittings with hot dipped galvanized malleable iron body, factory-installed packing and a bonding jumper.
B. Manufacturer: O-Z/Gedney, Type AX, TX, or EXE with Type BJ bonding jumper.
C. Lubricant and Sealant
1. Lubricant and Sealant for Conduit Thread: Conductive compound providing anti-seize and corrosion protection. Thomas and Betts Corporation “KOPR-SHIELD®27,” or approved substitute.
2.12 PROTECTIONFORTION TTAPE AND CONDUIT SEALANT
A. Furnishh pressurepressure-sensitive, 10 mil thick. PVC based tape for corrosion protection of metal conduitonduitonduiINFORMATON anand fittings. Manufacturer: 3M, Type 50. B. Furnish plastic insulatingnsulating tape that complies with UL 510.
C. Furnish electrical color-codinglor--coding tape that complies with UL 510.
D. Furnish sealing compoundd for conduit:conducon “Sealex®28” by Porcelain Products Company or “Duct Seal®29”by y GardnGardGardner-Bender.
2.13 RACEWAY MEASURING TAPE
A. Furnish raceway measuring tape with permanentlyermanenrmanent printed measurements in 1-ft increments and minimum 1200 lb average breakingbreakin strength.
2.14 WIREWAY ONLY
A. Provide NRTL listed, wireway with covers, elbows, tees,ees,es, hangers,hangehang and fittings required for a complete system. Wireway shall be rated for environmentenvir to be installed.
2.15 OUTLET BOXES
A. Provide outlet boxes selected for specific installations using the guidance in NEMA OS 3 and the requirements of this Section.
B. Exterior Mounted Enclosures (terminal boxes) shall be: NEMA ICS 6, NEMA Type 4 unless shown otherwise on the Drawings.
27 KOPR-SHIELD is a registered trademark of Jet-Lube, Inc., Houston, Texas. 28 Sealex is a registered trademark of Porcelain Products Company. 29 Duct Seal is a registered trademark of Gardner-Bender, Inc.
26 05 33 – 6 RPP-SPEC-60023 Rev.07 2/14/2018 - 2:57 PM 174 of 317
RPP-SPEC-60023, Rev. 7
C. For dry locations provide galvanized steel outlet boxes that comply with UL 514A.
1. For luminaire outlets use 4 in. x 1 1/2-in. deep (min.) boxes with fixture stud attachment as required to support luminaires.
2. For surface outlet boxes in EMT raceway systems, use 4 in. x 2 1/8-in. deep square boxes. Provide deeper boxes or multiple gang boxes as required to fit devices. Provide square surface covers that match the installed device and have not less than two holes for securing the device to the cover.
D. For damp or wet locations and for surface-mounted RMC or IMC raceway systems,ems, provide outlet boxes that comply with UL 498, UL 514A, UL 514B, and NEMAEMAFORMA FB1FB1.
1. For lightinglightilight fixture outlets use 4 in. x 2 1/16-in. deep (min.) round cast malleablelleabeaINFORMATONe iroiriron boxes with threaded hubs. 2. For surfaceace wallwall-mounted-m outlets, use 4 11/16 square, 2 11/16-in. deep cast malleableble iron bobboxes with threaded hubs. Provide multiple gang boxes as requiredreded to fit ddevices. Provide gasketed cast malleable iron or cast copper-free aluminumuminum covers that match the installed device and have not less than two holesleses for sesecsecuring the device to the cover.
E. For all entries into NEMA ICS 6,, TyTypeype 4 eenclosures: Type CGB for exposed cable, and Myers type watertight fittingstings or sesealing-type locknuts for conduits.
2.16 PULL AND JUNCTION BOXES
A. Metallic boxes (junction boxes) shall be NEMAA ONLYICS 6, TType 3R, 16 or 14 gage steel.
B. For dry locations in clean, non-contamination environments,mentsmen ,use useu galvanized sheet steel pull and junction boxes that comply with UL 50 Typepee 1 and the NEC as to size and construction. Use boxes not less than 4-in. square x 1 1/2-in. deep with screw-secured covers. Provide larger boxes as required by the number and size of conduits and conductors.
C. For dry locations in dusty environments, use galvanized steel pull and junction boxes that comply with UL 50 Type 12 and the NEC as to size and construction. Use boxes not less than 6-in. square x 4-in. deep with gasketed covers. Provide larger boxes as required by the number and size of conduits and conductors.
D. For damp or wet, non-corrosive locations, in conduit runs up to 3/4 in. trade size, provide 4 11/16-in. square, 2 11/16-in. deep (min.) cast malleable iron pull and junction boxes with threaded hubs and gasketed cast malleable iron or cast copper-free aluminum covers.
26 05 33 – 7 RPP-SPEC-60023 Rev.07 2/14/2018 - 2:57 PM 175 of 317
RPP-SPEC-60023, Rev. 7
E. For damp or wet, non-corrosive locations, in conduit runs 1 in. trade size and larger, provide galvanized sheet-steel pull and junction boxes and covers that comply with UL 50 Type 3R.
F. For damp or wet, non-corrosive locations that are subject to hose-directed water, provide pull and junction boxes and covers that comply with UL 50 Type 4.
G. For in-ground, non-metallic, open-bottom handholes, provide products that are NRTL-listed to SCTE 77.
1. Material: Polymer concrete.
2. Minimum SCTE 77 load rating:
FORa. Located in sidewalks: Tier 8.
b.b L Located in driveways, parking lots, and off-roadway locations: INFORMATONTTierer 22. 3. Size: AsAs shown ono drawings.
4. Cover: Non-skidskidid covecovcover with stainless steel cover bolts.
5. Identification: Permanentrmanentmanent mmark or logo on cover prominently identifying the function of the enclosureclosure in accordance with NEC requirements.
6. Manufacturer: Quazite®300 “Style“Style PCPPC, PG, or PT.” or as shown on drawings.
H. Provide connection points for equipment groundingroundingoundin conductors in each box.
I. For all entries into NEMA ICS 6, Type 3R enclosures:osures:ONLYsures: TTyType CGB for exposed cable, and Myers type watertight fittings or sealing-typetyype lockloclocknuts for conduits.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine surfaces to receive raceways and boxes for compliance with installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of the raceway system. Do not proceed with installation until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2 PREPARATION
A. Scale dimensions on the Drawings show desired and approximate locations of equipment. Actual locations, distances, and levels shall be governed by field conditions.
30 Quazite is a registered trademark of Hubbell Incorporated, Orange, Connecticut.
26 05 33 – 8 RPP-SPEC-60023 Rev.07 2/14/2018 - 2:57 PM 176 of 317
RPP-SPEC-60023, Rev. 7
3.3 GENERAL
A. Perform work in accordance with NFPA 70, the Specifications, and the Drawings. Fasten equipment to structural members or metal supports attached to structure or to concrete surfaces
B. Install complete systems of raceways and boxes for wiring systems.
C. Install raceways and boxes according to the NEC, the manufacturer’s instructions, and requirements in this Section.
D. Raceway termination points and box locations shown on the Drawings are in approximate locations unless dimensioned.
E. RacewaycewayFORy routingro is shown on the Drawings in approximate locations unless dimensioned.ensioned.sioned. Coordinate routing with structure and with work of other trades. Route as requiredrequire for a complete wiring system.
F. Ground and bondbondINFORMATON racewaysrace and boxes as required in Section 26 05 26, “Grounding andd Bonding for Electrical Systems.”
G. Support raceways andd boxes in accordance with the requirements the National Electrical Code, Sectionn 26 05 29229, “Hangers and Supports for Electrical Systems.”
H. Identify raceways and boxes as requiredrequire in Section 26 05 53, “Identification for Electrical Systems.”
I. Arrange raceway and boxes to maintainainin headroomheadrheadro and present neat appearance.
J. Install knockout closures in unused openingsgs in boboxes or raceways. ONLY 3.4 CONDUIT INSTALLATION
A. For low-voltage wiring systems (less than 1000 volts) use condconduit materials according to the NEC and the following:
1. Outdoors – in Tank Farm:
a. Direct buried: Use plastic-coated RMC, minimum 1” diameter. Install with 12-in. minimum cover from top of conduit to finished grade for in-farm traffic areas or a minimum depth of 6 in. in non- traffic areas.
2. Outdoors – exposed: Use RMC.
3. Outdoors – concealed: Use RMC for concealed outdoor work. Do not use bare RMC or IMC in direct contact with earth.
26 05 33 – 9 RPP-SPEC-60023 Rev.07 2/14/2018 - 2:57 PM 177 of 317
RPP-SPEC-60023, Rev. 7
4. Outdoors – underground not in Tank Farm:
a. Direct buried: Use plastic-coated RMC or RNC Schedule 40 or 80 listed and marked for direct burial, 18-in. minimum cover from top of conduit to finished grade.
b. All 90º Bends shall be PVC coated RMC or tape wrapped RMC.
5. Indoors – exposed outside of designated electrical rooms or telecommunications rooms:
a. Exposed to severe physical damage during or after installation: Use RMC.
FORb. Not exposed to deteriorating agents and not subject to severe physical damage during or after installation: Use RMC or EMT. 6. IndoorsdoorsINFORMATON –coc concealed: a.Within coconcrete floors: Use RMC or RNC type EB.
b. Direct-buriedt-burieduried uunder building floor slabs on grade: PVC-coated rigid or RNC ttypeypeyp DB or EB. Locate top of conduits not less than 0 in. below the bottombottobott of the concrete slab
7. Connection to vibrating equipmenequipment (including hydraulic, pneumatic, or electric solenoid or motor-drivendrivenriven equeqequipment) – Use a minimum of 24 in.; maximum length as determinededd byy the NEC:N
a. Outdoors: Use liquidtight flexiblelexibleexible metalm conduit. ONLY b. Wet, damp, or corrosive indoor locations:ocations:cations Use liquidtight flexible metal conduit.
c. Dry indoor locations: Use flexible metal conduit.
B. For medium-voltage wiring systems (1 kV or greater but less than 100 kV) use conduit materials in accordance with Section 26 10 00, “Medium Voltage Electrical Distribution.”
C. Use 3/4-in. above ground or larger conduit to enclose multiple conductors larger than 12 AWG.
D. Install conduits with a minimum of bends in the shortest practical distance considering the type of building construction and obstructions.
E. Use specified fitting for conduit except that threaded hubs and sealing type locknuts shall be used outdoors and locations where moisture is present. Use couplings where required. Do not use running threads.
26 05 33 – 10 RPP-SPEC-60023 Rev.07 2/14/2018 - 2:57 PM 178 of 317
RPP-SPEC-60023, Rev. 7
F. Use conduit hubs to fasten conduit to boxes in damp and wet locations.
G. Use galvanized steel locknuts and insulated bushings for attachment to enclosures, except threaded hubs or sealing type locknuts shall be used outdoors or where moisture is present. Use watertight fittings for entries into NEMA 4 enclosures. Use sealing locknuts into bottoms of NEMA 4 or 3R enclosures.
H. Install insulating bushings or connectors with an insulated throat to protect conductors or cables at conduit terminations.
I. Stub-Up Connections:
1. Extend conduits through concrete floor for connection to freestanding eequipment with an adjustable top or coupling threaded inside for plugs, FORand set flush with the finished floor or equipment pad.
2.Extend cocconductors to equipment with rigid steel conduit; flexible metal conduitnduituitINFORMATON maym be used 6 in. above the floor. 3. Where equipmentquipment connections are not made under this Subcontract, install threaded insertnsertsert plugs set flush with the floor.
J. Join nonmetallic conduitt using cecement as recommended by manufacturer. Wipe nonmetallic conduits dry andndd clean bbefore joining. Apply full even coat of cement to entire area inserted in fitting.fitting Allow joint to cure for 20 minutes, minimum.
K. Install plastic-coated RMC and fittingss accordinaccording to the NEC and manufacturer’s instructions. Use only fittings approved for use withwiw that material. Patch all nicks and scrapes in PVC coating after installing conduiconduconduits.ONLYts. L. Make elbows, offsets, and bends uniform and symmetrical.mmetricalmetric Bend conduit with approved bending devices.
M. Do not use RNC 90 degree elbows larger than 2 in. trade size; useus plastic-coated RMC, tape-wrapped RMC.
N. Maintain the following minimum clearances between conduit and surfaces with temperatures exceeding 104°F (40°C):
1. 6 in. at perpendicular crossings.
2. 12 in. between parallel runs.
O. Cut ends square, ream, and remove burrs. Conduit shall be clean, dry, and free of debris. Immediately after installation, plug or cap exposed ends with standard accessories until wires are installed.
26 05 33 – 11 RPP-SPEC-60023 Rev.07 2/14/2018 - 2:57 PM 179 of 317
RPP-SPEC-60023, Rev. 7
P. Avoid moisture traps in conduit system; provide junction boxes with drain fitting at low points in conduit system.
Q. Install corrosion protection tape on metal conduits and fittings in contact with soil using half-lapped wrappings.
R. Install grounding bushings at the following locations:
1. At every entry to enclosures on metallic conduits containing circuits rated 100 amperes and higher.
2. On metallic conduits entering enclosures through concentric, eccentric, or oversize knockouts.
3.FOROn metallic conduits that terminate to a metallic enclosure without effectiveffective electrical connection such as locknuts or threaded bushings.
S. Install conduitnduit mmeasuringeasea tape in empty raceways. Leave not less than 12 in. of slack at each endINFORMATONnd of ththe tape. Secure each end of tape.
3.5 FIRESTOPPING
A. Install an NRTL approvedved firestopfirestofirest system at each electrical penetration in a fire- rated wall, floor, or partition.on..
B. At least two days prior to firestoppingoppingpping insinstallation, notify TOC Construction Representative so that arrangementsts can be mmade for inspection during installation.
3.6 OUTLET BOX INSTALLATION ONLY A. Install outlet boxes with centers at the following heights uunless noted otherwise on the Drawings:
1. Receptacle, telephone and data outlets: a. 48-in. above finished floor unless otherwise noted. b. Outside 18-in. above grade, unless otherwise noted. 2. Light switches: Center 48-in. above finished floor and within 6 in. of door frame. 3. Thermostats: Center 60-in. above finished floor.
B. Where the Drawings show outlets as adjacent, align outlet boxes with each other and group them symmetrically. C. Orient boxes to accommodate wiring devices oriented as specified in Section 26 27 26, “Wiring Devices.”
26 05 33 – 12 RPP-SPEC-60023 Rev.07 2/14/2018 - 2:57 PM 180 of 317
RPP-SPEC-60023, Rev. 7
D. Install a multi-gang box where more than one device is mounted together. Do not use sectional type boxes. E. Install adjustable steel channel fasteners for hung ceiling outlet box. F. Do not fasten boxes to ceiling support wires or other piping systems. G. Support boxes independently of conduit. H. Install a blank cover plate on each outlet box in which no device is installed.
3.7 PULL AND JUNCTION BOX INSTALLATION
A. Install pull and junction boxes as shown on the Drawings and as required for splices,FORces, tataps, wire pulling, and compliance with regulatory requirements. B. Installll pull boxesbox as required to comply with limits on conduit bends and distance betweenn pull pointspoipo in the CONDUIT INSTALLATION article of this Section.
C. Install indoor pullINFORMATON and junctionj boxes in accessible locations. Position boxes so covers can be removed.moved. PPlace boxes to maintain headroom.
3.8 WIREWAY INSTALLATIONON
A. Install wireways at locationsns indicatedindicate on the Drawings.
B. Mount plumb and level.
3.9 CLEANING
A. Clean interior of boxes to remove dust, debris,brris, and oother material. ONLY B. Repair damage to galvanized finishes with zinc-richrichich paintpain recommended by manufacturer.
C. Repair damage to paint finishes with matching touch-up coating rrecommended by the manufacturer.
3.10 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. For conduits, junction boxes, associated fittings and supports, verify appropriate torque values are in accordance with manufacturer’s recommendations.
B. Provide final protection and maintain conditions to ensure that coatings and finishes are without damage or deterioration at final inspection.
END OF SECTION 26 05 33
26 05 33 – 13 RPP-SPEC-60023 Rev.07 2/14/2018 - 2:57 PM 181 of 317
RPP-SPEC-60023, Rev. 7
SECTION 26 05 53
IDENTIFICATION FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 SCOPE OF WORK
A. Component identification tags.
B. Equipment nameplates. C. WireFOR markers.m D. Voltageltage markers.markmar
E. Warning signs.
F. Working spaceeINFORMATON labelslabels..
G. Underground warningng tape.
H. Arc Flash labels.
I. Conduit labels.
1.2 RELATED DOCUMENTS / CODES ANDND STANDARDSSTAN
Drawings and general provisions of the contract, includingincludin General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sectionsapply ONLY too tthis Section. The following documents and others referenced therein, form part of the Contract to the extent designated in this Section. Referenced documents aree those cucurrent as of the date of this Section unless otherwise indicated.
A. American National Standards Institute (ANSI)
ANSI Z535.1 Safety Color Code
ANSI Z535.2 Environmental and Facility Safety Signs
ANSI Z535.3 Criteria for Safety Symbols and Labels
ANSI Z535.4 Product Safety Signs and Labels
ANSI Z535.5 Safety Tags and Barricade Tapes (for Temporary Hazards)
26 05 53 – 1 RPP-SPEC-60023 Rev.07 2/14/2018 - 2:57 PM 182 of 317
RPP-SPEC-60023, Rev. 7
B. Code of Federal Regulations (CFR)
29 CFR 1910.145 Danger and Caution Specifications
C. International Standards Organization (ISO)
ISO 3864 Graphical Symbols Package
D. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA)
NFPA 70, 2014 National Electrical Code (NEC)
NFPA 70E Standard for Electrical Safety in the Workplace E. UnderwritersFORderwritederwri Laboratories (UL) UL 9699 Marking and Labeling Systems F. WashingtonnR RRiverINFORMATONver PrPProtection Solutions, LLC TFC-ENG-STD-01201212 Tank Farm Equipment Identification Numbering and Labeling Standard
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. See the Contract Statement of Work forfo the submittal process.
B. Approval Required
Not used.
1.4 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS ONLY
A. Conform to requirements of the NEC, NFPA 70E, andnd 29 CFCCFR 1910.145.
B. Conform to applicable requirements of ANSI Z535.1, Z535.2,35.2, Z535.3,Z5 Z535.4, and Z535.5.
1.5 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate identification names, abbreviations, colors, and other features with requirements in the Subcontract Documents, Shop Drawings, and manufacturer’s wiring diagrams, with those required by codes, standards, and 29 CFR 1910.145. Use consistent designations throughout Project
B. Deleted.
26 05 53 – 2 RPP-SPEC-60023 Rev.07 2/14/2018 - 2:57 PM 183 of 317
RPP-SPEC-60023, Rev. 7
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 PRODUCT OPTIONS AND SUBSTITUTIONS
A. Alternate products may be accepted; as identified in the SOW.
2.2 COMPONENT IDENTIFICATION TAGS
A. Furnish component identification tags as specified and scheduled on the Drawings.
B. Provide tags made of materials shown on the drawings. 2.3 EQUIPMENTFORNT NAMEPLATES A. Furnishnishh equiequipequipment nameplates at each switchboard, disconnect switches, distributionution panepanpanel, transformer, and variable frequency drive (VFD) as specified on the Drawings.awingsawingINFORMATON B. Equipment nameplates:meplates: Laminated plastic, as shown on Drawings. Engraved nomenclature sharprp and cleclear. Engraved manufacturer’s standard nameplates may be used if equal in qualityualityityy and legibility.
C. Post conductor color code on each ppanelboard, switchboard, switchgear assembly, motor control center. Use type-written,pe-writtenwritt adhesive-backed labels.
D. Coordinate equipment nameplate schedulehedule wwith equipment numbering scheme provided by TOC Construction Representative.esentativesentative
2.4 WIRE MARKERS
A. Provide wire markers for power circuit wires. ONLY
B. Furnish split sleeve or heat-shrinkable sleeve, wire markers.arkers.rkers
C. Locate a wire marker on each conductor at each switchboard,rd,rd didisconnect switches, terminal box, distribution panel, transformer, VFD, and each load connection.
D. Provide typewritten lettering on wire markers for as-built branch circuit or feeder circuit number.
E. Manufacturer: LEM Products, Inc., Brady, Panduit.
2.5 VOLTAGE MARKERS
A. Furnish voltage markers for each switchboard, disconnect switches, terminal box, distribution panel, transformer, VFD, and cabinets.
26 05 53 – 3 RPP-SPEC-60023 Rev.07 2/14/2018 - 2:57 PM 184 of 317
RPP-SPEC-60023, Rev. 7
B. Provide flexible pressure sensitive vinyl markers with minimum 1-in. x 4-in. orange background and black letters.
C. Provide voltage markers with lettering indicating the highest voltage present:
1. 480Y/277 and 480 V system: 480 V.
D. Manufacturer: Electromark, LEM Products, Inc.
2.6 WARNING SIGNS
A. Furnish warning signs for each switchboard, disconnect switches, terminal box, distribution panel, transformer, VFD, and cabinets.
B. UseeFOR warninwarning signs that conform to ANSI Z535.4 and 29 CFR 1910.145.
C. Providee minimumminimu 2-in. x 4-in. warning signs. D. Provide warningrnin ngINFORMATON signssig with format and lettering as follows: 1. Signal word:rd: DANGDANDANGER
2. Signal word panelnel color: red with safety alert symbol.
3. Word message: Keep Out! Hazardous voltage insidenside Will shock, burn, or causeauseuse death.deatdeath
4. Safety symbol: ISO 3864 “lightningng bolt” i in yellow triangle.
E. Materials: ONLY
1. Use flexible, pressure sensitive, polyester basee with polyesterpopol overlaminate.
F. Manufacturer: Seton Name Plate Co., Safety Label Solutions, Hazard Communication Systems, Electromark.
2.7 WORKING SPACE LABELS
A. Provide labels indicating required working clearance at electrical equipment that is likely to require examination, adjustment, servicing, or maintenance while energized.
B. Material:
1. Use polyester label stock that is NRTL-recognized to UL 969 and has a high-adhesion adhesive back.
26 05 53 – 4 RPP-SPEC-60023 Rev.07 2/14/2018 - 2:57 PM 185 of 317
RPP-SPEC-60023, Rev. 7
2. Use printing ribbon recommended by the label stock manufacturer.
3. Use a suitable thermal transfer process label-printing machine to generate labels and enter the application-specific information.
4. Outdoor labels shall be suitable for a high-UV environment.
C. Minimum dimensions: 3 1/2 x 1 1/4 in.
D. Use the following label design: NOTICE FORFKeepKee area in front of this electrical equipmentequipmquip clear for #-#/# feet. OSHA-NECOSHASHAR -N regulations.
1. Signal INFORMATONword: ““NOTICE”N in 24-point minimum white italic letters on safety blueue panel.
2. Word message:e: 16-point161 -poin minimum black or safety blue letters on white background.
a. Word message for 151 tto 600 Volt equipment with exposed live parts on one side of the workingwor space and no live or grounded parts on the other sidedee of the wworking space: “Keep area in front of this electrical equipmentnt clear fofor 3 ft. OSHA-NEC regulations.”
b. Word message for 151 to 6000 VolVolt equ equipment with exposed live parts on one side of the working spaceONLYpace andan grounded parts on the other side of the working space: “KeepKeep area in front of this electrical equipment clear for 3 1/2 ft. OSHAOSHA-NEC- regulations.”
c. Word message for 151 to 600 Volt equipmententnt wwitwith exposed live parts on both sides of the working space: “Keep area in front of this electrical equipment clear for 4 ft. OSHA-NEC regulations.”
d. Word message for 0 to150 Volt equipment with exposed live parts on one side of the working space and live or grounded parts on the other side of the working space: “Keep area in front of this electrical equipment clear for 3 ft. OSHA-NEC regulations.”
E. Manufacturer: Brother, Seton, Brady
26 05 53 – 5 RPP-SPEC-60023 Rev.07 2/14/2018 - 2:57 PM 186 of 317
RPP-SPEC-60023, Rev. 7
2.8 UNDERGROUND WARNING TAPE
A. Furnish underground warning tape for underground cables, conduits and duct banks.
B. Use 6-in. wide, 0.004-in. thick, polyethylene detectable underground warning tape black lettering and the following background colors:
1. Electric: Red
C. Provide lettering that indicates the type service buried below.
1. Electric: “CAUTION ELECTRIC LINE BURIED BELOW”
D. Manufacturer:anufactu Utility Safeguard, LLC, Detectable Terra Tape, Reef Industries, Inc. 2.9 ARC FLASH LABELSABELSABELINFORMATON A. Install arc flashh labels on electrical equipment as required by NEC.
2.10 CONDUIT LABELING
A. Conduit metal tags shall bee affixed to all numbered conduit. Conduit numbers are shown on Drawings.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine surfaces to receive identification productsroducdu ts forfo compliance with installation tolerances and other conditions affectingctingONLYing perperfperformance of the identification products. Do not proceed with installationllation untununtil unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2 INSTALLATION – GENERAL
A. Where identification is to be applied to surfaces that require finish, install identification after completion of finish work.
B. Install labels where indicated and at locations for best convenience of viewing without interference with operation and maintenance of equipment.
C. Coordinate installation of identifying devices with location of access panels and doors.
D. Install electrical identification products only when ambient temperature and humidity conditions for adhesive are within range recommended by manufacturer.
26 05 53 – 6 RPP-SPEC-60023 Rev.07 2/14/2018 - 2:57 PM 187 of 317
RPP-SPEC-60023, Rev. 7
E. Clean surface where electrical identification product is to be placed.
F. Use manufacturer’s recommended adhesive for engraved tags and nameplates.
G. Place electrical identification products centered and parallel to equipment lines.
3.3 COMPONENT IDENTIFICATION TAGS
A. Install component identification tag as indicated on the Drawings on the front of each piece of electrical equipment including switchboards, MCCs, distribution panels, transformers, and VFDs.
B. Position tags so they can be read from floor or ground.
3.4 EQUIPMENTENFORT NNAMEPLATES
A. Install equipmenequipment nameplate or nameplates as indicated on the Drawings on the front of eachach piepiecee of electrical equipment including switchboards, MCCs, distribution panels,INFORMATONnels, trattransformers, and VFDs. B. Position nameplatesteses so they can be read from floor or ground.
3.5 WIRE MARKERS
A. Install wire markers on powerer conduconductconductors at each appearance in locations such as switchboards, MCCs, distributionon panels,panels transformers, and VFDs, and load connections.
B. Position markers so they can be read fromomm the frontfrofr of the enclosure. 3.6 VOLTAGE MARKERS ONLY A. Install voltage markers at the following locations and positioposition markers so they can be read from floor or ground:
1. Front of each free-standing low-voltage switchboardrdds secsection.
2. Front of each switchboard, MCC, distribution panel, transformer, and VFD.
3. Cover of each pull box containing low-voltage conductors.
3.7 WARNING SIGNS
A. Install warning signs at the following locations and position signs so they can be read from floor or ground:
1. Front of each switchboard disconnect switches, terminal box, distribution panel, transformer, VFD, pull boxes, and cabinets.
26 05 53 – 7 RPP-SPEC-60023 Rev.07 2/14/2018 - 2:57 PM 188 of 317
RPP-SPEC-60023, Rev. 7
3.8 WORKING SPACE LABELS
A. Install working space labels in front of switchboards, MCCs, distribution panels, transformers, and VFDs.
B. Any other equipment likely to require examination, adjustment, servicing, or maintenance while energized.
3.9 UNDERGROUND WARNING TAPE
A. Install underground warning tape in trench above underground conduit.
FOR END OF SECTION 26 05 53
INFORMATON
ONLY
26 05 53 – 8 RPP-SPEC-60023 Rev.07 2/14/2018 - 2:57 PM 189 of 317
RPP-SPEC-60023, Rev. 7
SECTION 26 10 00
MEDIUM VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL DISTRIBUTION
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 SCOPE OF WORK
A. This Section includes requirements for material and installation of equipment for the 13.8 kV medium voltage systems.
1.2 RELATED DOCUMENTS / CODES AND STANDARDS Drawings andFOR gegengeneral provisions of the contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions andd DivDivisDivision 01 Specification Sections apply to this Section.
The following documentsocumentcumen and others referenced therein, form part of the Contract to the extent designated innthnt thisINFORMATONs SecSectSection. Referenced documents are those current as of the date of this Section unless otherwise indicated.
A. Association of Edisonon IIlluminatinglluminllumi Companies (AEIC)
AEIC C56 SpecificationSpeciSpec for Ethylene Propylene Rubber InsulateInsulatInsulated Shielded Power Cables Rated for 5kV throughhrough 69k6969kV
B. American National Standards Institutetee (ANSI)(ANSI
ANSI C2, 2012 National Electricalectricaltrical SSafety Code (NESC)
ANSI C37.47 High Voltage Current-LimitingrentONLYen -Limim Type Distribution Class Fuses and Fusee DisconnectDisconn Switches
C. ASTM International (ASTM)
ASTM B502 Standard Specification for Aluminum-Clad Steel Core Wire for Aluminum Conductors, Aluminum- Clad Steel Reinforced
ASTM B549 Standard Specification for Concentric-Lay-Stranded Aluminum Conductors, Aluminum-Clad Steel Reinforced (ACSR/AW)
ASTM D1535 Method for Specifying Color by Munsell System
26 10 00 – 1 RPP-SPEC-60023 Rev.07 2/14/2018 - 2:57 PM 190 of 317
RPP-SPEC-60023, Rev. 7
D. American Wood Protection Association (AWPA)
AWPA C7 Western red cedar, northern white cedar and Alaska yellow cedar poles – preservative treatment of incised pole butts by the thermal process (no s/s document
AWPA P Standard for field cuts, creosote for brush or spray treatment
E. Factory Mutual (FM)
FM 3990 Less or Nonflammable Liquid-Insulated FOR Transformers F. Federalerall SpecifSpecification (FS)
TT-S-00230C30C AAMDMD 2 Sealing Compound: Elastomeric Type, Single INFORMATONComponent (for Caulking, Sealing and Glazing in Buildings and Other Structures)
G. Institute of Electrical andnd ElectElectronics Engineers (IEEE)
C57.12.00 GeneralGenerGen Requirements for Liquid-Immersed DistributDistribution, Power and Regulating Transformers
H. Insulated Cable Engineers Associationationon (I(ICEA)CEACE
ICEA S-68-516 Ethylene-PropylenePropylenelen Insulated Wire & Cable for the Transmissionn & DistDisDistribution ONLY ICEA S-93-639 5-46kV Shielded Powerower CaCCable for Use in the Transmission and Distributionstributiontribution of Electric Energy
I. National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA)
NEMA RN 1 PVC Externally Coated Galvanized Rigid Steel Conduit and Intermediate Metal Conduit
NEMA C80.1 Electrical Rigid Steel Conduit (ERSC)
NEMA ICS 6 Enclosures for Industrial Controls and Systems
NEMA TC 2 Electrical Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) Conduit
NEMA TC 3 Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) Fittings for Use with Rigid PVC Conduti and Tubing
26 10 00 – 2 RPP-SPEC-60023 Rev.07 2/14/2018 - 2:57 PM 191 of 317
RPP-SPEC-60023, Rev. 7
NEMA TC 6 & 8 Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) Plastics Utilities Duct for Underground Installations
NEMA TC 7 Smoothwall Coilable Electrical Polyethylene Conduit
NEMA TC 9 Fittings for Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) Plastic Utilities Duct for Underground Installation
NEMA WC 74 5-46kV Shielded Power Cable for Use in the Transmission and Distribution of Electric Energy
J. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA)
NFPAFORPA 70 70,, 22014 National Electrical Code (NEC)
K. Underwriterswriters LabLaLaboratories (UL) UL 6INFORMATON Rigid Steel Conduit UL 508A, 2014 Industrial Control Panels
UL 514B Conduit,Co Tubing and able Fittings
UL 514C StandardStanda for Nonmetallic Outlet Boxes, Flush- Device Boxes,Box and Covers
UL 651 Standardrdd for SchSchedule 40, 80 Type EB and A Rigid PVC Conduitduit and FittingsF
UL 651A Schedule 40 andndd8 80 80 High Density Polyethelene (HDPE) Conduit ONLY
UL 1072 Medium-Voltage Powerr Cables
L. Hanford Documents
TFC-ENG-STD-15 Raceway System Standard
TFC-PRJ-P-C-02 NEC Compliance Inspection
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. See the Contract Statement of Work for the submittal process.
B. Approval Required
1. Shop Drawings: Submit Shop Drawings for each enclosure, including dimensioned plans and elevations and component lists. Include front and
26 10 00 – 3 RPP-SPEC-60023 Rev.07 2/14/2018 - 2:57 PM 192 of 317
RPP-SPEC-60023, Rev. 7
side views of enclosure showing overall dimensions, enclosure type, enclosure finish, unit locations, and conduit entrances. Include the following:
a. Configuration and current ratings of equipment.
b. Short-circuit current rating of equipment.
c. Rated Voltage and BIL.
d. Features, characteristics, ratings, and factory settings of individual protective devices and auxiliary components.
2.P Project Record Documents: Submit project record documents to include FORspecspecified certifications and all field test reports.
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCESSURAN A. Inspections: TTheINFORMATONhe electeleelectrical installation shall meet the requirements of the NEC, as administered byy the NEC electrical inspector and the MSA Electrical Utilities Group for the NESCSC portionportion.
B. Electrical Product Acceptability:eptability: Electrical equipment shall be listed or labeled by a Nationally Recognizededd TestinTesting Laboratory (NRTL), such as UL, when a category exists.
Note: NRTLs are listed on the Occupationalccupationaupation Safety and Health Administration web site at http://www.osha.gov/dts/otpca/nrtl/index.html#nrtlsotpca/nrtl/itpca/nrtlO . 1. It is the Contractor’s responsibility too ensureensurensu the listing is appropriate for the equipment specified. For equipmentent ONLYwithouwithout a listing or label by a NRTL, it shall be the Contractor’s responsibilitynsibilitysibilityy toto obtain a listing or label. Any component, equipment, assembly,y, or systesyssystem without a NRTL listing or label shall be subject to the approval of the NENNEC electrical inspector.
2. The Seller shall arrange for a WRPS Hanford NEC inspection to occur at Seller’s facility prior to shipping any assembly not covered in whole by a NRTL listing or label.
3. Cabinets containing assembled control systems shall be designed, constructed, and listed or labeled to the UL 508A Standard, as applicable.
C. Obtain EIPs (Electrical Installation Permit) (Form A-6005-707) prior to performing any electrical installation or modification. See TFC-PRJ-P-C-02, NEC Compliance Inspection.
26 10 00 – 4 RPP-SPEC-60023 Rev.07 2/14/2018 - 2:57 PM 193 of 317
RPP-SPEC-60023, Rev. 7
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 PRODUCT OPTIONS AND SUBSTITUTIONS
A. Alternate products may be substituted if approved by the TOC Construction Representative.
B. Materials
1. Solderless terminals for insulated aerial conductors: circumferential compression type: Burndy Corporation HYLUG Type YA for copper conductors and Type YA-A for aluminum conductors. C. Conduit:FORuit 1.Rigid Steel NEMA C80.1 and UL 6.
2. Conduitonduit andnd Conduit Fittings Plastic, Rigid NEMA TC 9, UL 514B, UL 514C,14C,INFORMATON UL 651, UL 651A. 3. Type DBPVC RNCRN EPC 40 (Schedule 40) & EPC 80 (Schedule 80) NEMA TC 6 & 8, UL 514B, UL 514C, UL 651, UL 651A.
4. Type HDPE RNC EPEC NENNEMA TC 7, UL 514B, UL 514C, UL 651, UL 651A.
D. PVC coating on rigid steel conduit:t: NEMA RN 1, Type A-40, factory applied.
E. Wood Poles: ANSI 05.1, western red cedar,edar,dar, or DouglasD fir cut from live timber. Pole shall be butt-treated by manufacture inn accordanceaccord with AWPA C7, using AWPA P preservatives. Each pole shall be giveniveveONLYn singlsingsingle top cut at 30-degree angle with normal to axis of pole and at right angleglele to sweswsweep. Gains shall be cut so roof will be at right angles to the line and sweep of the polpopole will be in line. Roofs and gains shall be brush treated by manufacturee with spspecspecified preservative. Each gain shall fit crossarm tightly. Bolt holes shall not be more than 1/16 in. oversize.
F. Crossarms: Straight-grained Douglas fir, free from twists to within 0.1 in. per foot of length, with bends and twists in only one direction. Apply preservatives to crossarms in accordance with AWPA C25, with retention of 8 pounds per cubic foot.
G. Line Conductors: #4 ACSR (Swanate) in accordance with ASTM B-230, ASTM B-502, and ASTM B-549.
H. Pole line materials: See Attachment A, “Hanford Electrical Utilities Distribution Guide Specifications & Standard Details.”
26 10 00 – 5 RPP-SPEC-60023 Rev.07 2/14/2018 - 2:57 PM 194 of 317
RPP-SPEC-60023, Rev. 7
I. Load Break Elbows: 15 kV Cooper Power Systems 500-10 Series.
J. The cables specified on Drawings as 15 kV shall be single-conductor, shielded, solid-dielectric type rated for 105°C normal operation. The cables shall be listed by UL as Type MV-150 and have a 15,000-V rating. All cables shall be “sunlight resistant.”
K. The conductor shall be stranded copper, sized in accordance with the drawings. The insulation level shall be 133% of rated voltage with a minimum thickness of 220 mils per requirements of ICEA S-68-516, UL 1072, and AEIC C56.
L. The cables shall conform to the following:
1.C Cables shall be suitable for use in wet and dry locations, underground duct FORsysystems.st
2.ConductoConduct Conductors shall be Class B Compact Copper, per ICEA S-68-516, Part 2 andd ULINFORMATON 1072.07 3. Each conductornductor shalls be covered with an extruded semi-conducting polymeric material applieda over the surface of the conductor that is compatible withithh the insinsulation.
4. The insulation appliediedd over tththe extruded strand screen shall be high- quality ethylene propyleneyllene blendedblendblen and compounded within the cable manufacturer’s facilities under optoptimum conditions of cleanliness.
5. The type of insulation shieldingng – coppercoppe tape shielding: each conductor shall have a bare 5-mil minimum thick copcopper shielding tape helically applied over the insulation shield withithth a mminimumnim 25% overlap of the tape width. ONLY
6. Wire pulling compound: Electro Compoundd Company Compa “Y-er Eas,” or American Polywater Corporation “Polywater.”
M. Tape
1. Plastic insulating tape: 3M Company “Scotch No. 33+;”
2. Conduit protection tape: 3M Company “Scotchrap™17 No. 50;” and
3. Silicon rubber termination tape: 3M Company “Scotch No. 70.”
N. Insulating putty: 3M Company “Scotchfil™17,” General Electric Company No. 8389, or Kearney Company “Airseal.”
O. Provide medium voltage equipment as shown on the Drawings. Transformers are provided by others.
26 10 00 – 6 RPP-SPEC-60023 Rev.07 2/14/2018 - 2:57 PM 195 of 317
RPP-SPEC-60023, Rev. 7
P. Provide Load Break Elbows complete with inserts, on the transformer primary connection: 15 kV, 200A load break connector, Cooper 500-10 series.
Q. Lightning arrestors for transformer: Metal oxide, elbow shaped, with metal oxide varistor, rated at 18 kV (15.3 MCOV), in premolded insulating elbow designed for use with the RTE 200 A 8.3/14.4 kV loadbreak bushings that are on the transformer.
R. Lightning arresters: Pole mounted, distributed valve type, rated at 18 kV (15.3 MCOV)
S. Provide cable terminations rated at 15 kV, heat shrink type with anti-tracking for shielded cable, Raychem HVT Series as shown on the Drawings.
2.2 DELIVERY,RY,FOR STORAGE,STO AND HANDLING
A. Cable inspection:nspection Upon delivery to the worksite, inspect cable and reels for shipping damagdamagemagINFORMATON susuch as the following: 1. Marks causedaused bbyy iimproper lifting equipment or techniques;
2. Breaks or cutss inn outer covering;
3. Damaged jacket or insulationinsulatiinsulation;
4. Reel damage from mishandling;andling;ndling; aand
5. Damaged or missing high voltagetageage cablcable and seals.
B. Cable testing: Upon installation at the worksite,rksite,ksite, ppeperform direct current (dc) over – potential tests on new cable. The specificsificifi ONLYs of hohhow to perform the tests will be provided by the MSA Electrical Utilities Group.up.
C. Cable Reel Storage
1. Store reels with flanges resting on hard surface or palletalletal to prevent sinking into the ground;
2. Reel flanges shall not touch cable on other reels;
3. Do not store reels on sides. Store with reel axis horizontal; and
4. Cap or tape cable ends to prevent entrance of moisture.
26 10 00 – 7 RPP-SPEC-60023 Rev.07 2/14/2018 - 2:57 PM 196 of 317
RPP-SPEC-60023, Rev. 7
D. Cable Reel Handling
1. Slings and forklifts shall not contact cable or protective covering;
2. Use spreader bars when lifting reels with bar and sling; and
3. Do not drop reels.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. General 1.FOR PerformPe work in accordance with TFC-ENG-STD-15, the NEC, and ANSIANS C2.
2. Installnstallstall productsprpro as shown on the drawings, specifications and per the manufacturer’suf INFORMATONcturer recommendation for the pad mounted transformer. Use appropriateriate calibrcalibcalibrated special tools when installing devices for which special installationstallationtallation toolst are recommended by manufacturers.
3. Conduit excavationtion and backfillb shall be as specified on the Drawings and Division 31.
4. Watthour/VAR meters: Before ininstallation, have meters electrically calibrated by the MSA Electricalctricalrical UtUtiUtilities Group. All meter wiring to the current transformers will be byy the MSMSA Electrical Utilities Group.
5. Provide all necessary final field adjustmentsjustmentustmen for a complete installation
B. Setting Poles ONLY
1. Excavate holes large enough to admit tampingg bar arounarouaround pole at butt. Do not use explosives to excavate holes.
2. Use backfill materials that can be solidly compacted by hand tamping in 6 in. lifts. Compact surplus earth around pole in cone 1 ft high above grade. Add additional backfill where backfill has settled, and tamp before completion of work.
3. Minimum pole depth is 10% of pole height, plus 2’-0”, i.e., set 40-ft poles 6 ft, 0 in. in earth. Measure depth from lowest side, on moderately sloping ground and from point 2 ft, 6 in. from center of pole toward low side on steep slopes, cuts, embankments, or where soil is likely to be washed away from pole.
26 10 00 – 8 RPP-SPEC-60023 Rev.07 2/14/2018 - 2:57 PM 197 of 317
RPP-SPEC-60023, Rev. 7
4. Set poles plumb and in line, except that corners and other strain points that are guyed shall have butts displaced to keep tops in line where feasible. At such locations, rake against strain shall be approximately 3 in. for each 10 ft of height.
5. Backfill holes created by removal of poles and other underground structures to finish grade and solidly compact by hand tamping. Where backfill has settled, place additional backfill and tamp before completion of work.
C. Crossarms
1. Mount at right angles to axis of poles or as shown on the drawings.
2.FORBolt Bolts shall be of sufficient length for full-thread engagement of nut, but not proprotrude through poles or arms in excess of 2 in. Bolt ends shall not be cut off.offof Use square washers with each through-bolt and double-arming boltt to INFORMATONpprotectrotec pole and crossarms. D. Guys and Anchorsors
1. Install anchorss to bear againsta undisturbed earth. Tamp backfill around anchors entire depthepth of hole.hol Provide temporary guying required during stringing of conductors.tors.ors. RemRemove at completion of work.
2. Set guy rods in earth in lineine with ststrand and install at least 6 in. above grade.
E. Insulators: Tighten pin insulators on pin threads anand adjust top groove so it is parallel with line. Secure hold nuts with palnuts.lnuts.ONLY F. Aerial Conductors
1. Clearances shall be maintained for cables and conductorconductoconductors in accordance with the Drawings, and ANSI C2.
2. String conductors from rotating reels and do not drag along ground nor permit conductors to lie where they may be run over by vehicles. Pull conductors through stringing sheaves or stringing blocks hung on messenger cable, but do not pull around sharp corners. Inspect conductors as they leave reels and cut out weak or damaged sections and splice ends. Do not make splices in adjacent spans, dead end spans, or within 4 ft of support. Install conductors to proper stringing tensions in accordance with manufacturer’s recommendations.
26 10 00 – 9 RPP-SPEC-60023 Rev.07 2/14/2018 - 2:57 PM 198 of 317
RPP-SPEC-60023, Rev. 7
3. Make splices under tension mechanically, and electrically secure by compression fittings. Do not use self-gripping or automatic-tension splicing sleeves. Make taps between primary wires, jumpers, etc., with mechanical connectors.
4. Install hot-line stirrups on existing conductors where new feeder taps are made.
5. Sag conductors in accordance with ANSI C2 for medium loading district.
G. Aerial Equipment Grounding
1. Ground fused switches and lightning arresters in accordance with the FORDDrawings. Bond together pole line hardware separated by less than 2 in. 2.GroundGroun systems: Use stranded copper conductors for ground conductors installed in earth. Use solid copper conductors above grade. Make joints connectingnnectiect ng ccopper and galvanized steel above grade and in dry location. ConnectionsctionsINFORMATON maym be made with ground rod clamps or exothermic welds.
H. Conduits
1. Use galvanized rigid steel unless specified otherwise on the drawings.
2. Use PVC conduit in contactontact wiwwith earth. Install in accordance with manufacturer’s recommendations.endationsndations
3. Install concealed conduits as directed withw PVC-coated rigid steel elbows with bend radii as long as possible.le.e. 4. Make elbows, offsets, and bends uniformormmONLY and symmetrical.sy Bend conduit with approved bending devices.
5. Cut conduit ends square, ream, and remove burrs.rrs. CondConConduit shall be clean, dry, and free of debris. Immediately after installation,ation, plugplu or cap exposed ends with standard accessories until wires are installed.ed
6. Use one hole clamp equipped with clampbacks or framing strut with clamps to secure conduits as shown on drawings.
7. Set up joints in conduit installed exposed to weather, with high temperature, anti-seize, conduit thread lubricant and sealant.
8. Install exposed conduit stubbing up, straight and plumb, lined up, and uniformly spaced.
26 10 00 – 10 RPP-SPEC-60023 Rev.07 2/14/2018 - 2:57 PM 199 of 317
RPP-SPEC-60023, Rev. 7
9. Install warning tape for underground conduit as shown on the drawings and with materials specified in Section 26 05 53, “Identification for Electrical Systems.”
I. Cable Pulling and Terminations
1. Use lubricant recommended by cable manufacturer, or wire-pulling compound specified, when pulling wire and cable through conduit.
2. Do not install or handle wires with thermoplastic insulation or jacket when ambient temperature is 15°F or below.
3. Make terminations with solderless connectors. Use connectors in FORaaccordance with the manufacturer’s instructions. 4. FollowFollo manufacturer’s instructions and directions for stress cones, and cable termterterminations. Final terminations to power source will be performed by MissiMissMissionINFORMATONon SSupport Alliance Electric Utilities. 5. Ground pad mounmounted transformers to ground grid with 4/0 cable.
3.2 FIELD QUALITY CONTROLROOL
A. Testing
1. Furnish equipment and instrumentsnstrumentnstrumen required to perform testing.
2. Use instruments which bear calibrationalibration stamps showing dates of calibration and expiration dates off stamps.stamp Calibration and accuracy of instruments shall be certified by an indepenindepeindependent testing laboratory having standards traceable to the National Institutetitti uteONLYte of SStandards and Technology. 3. Test the equipment and wiring for continuityy and ununinunintentional grounds, and verify proper phase sequence and voltage at equipmequipment served before attempt is made to operate equipment. Notify the NEC electricalel inspector and the Mission Support Alliance Electrical UtilitiessGr Group before start of tests. Record the results.
4. Reconnect devices disconnected during testing
B. Acceptance testing: After installation, and prior to energizing, coordinate with MSA Electrical Utilities to perform tests on cable to verify installation acceptability.
26 10 00 – 11 RPP-SPEC-60023 Rev.07 2/14/2018 - 2:57 PM 200 of 317
RPP-SPEC-60023, Rev. 7
C. Verification Points
1. Provide 24-hour notice and hold for release by MSA Electrical Utilities Group.
2. Prior to energizing, perform NEC inspection.
D. Deleted.
END OF SECTION 26 10 00 FOR
INFORMATON
ONLY
26 10 00 – 12 RPP-SPEC-60023 Rev.07 2/14/2018 - 2:57 PM 201 of 317
RPP-SPEC-60023, Rev. 7
SECTION 26 22 13
LOW VOLTAGE DISTRIBUTION TRANSFORMERS
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 SCOPE OF WORK
A. General-purpose dry-type low-voltage transformers
1.2 RELATED DOCUMENTS / CODES AND STANDARDS
Drawings andd ggeneral provisions of the contract, including General and Supplementary ConditionssFOR and DiDDivision 01 Specification Sections apply to this Section. The followingg documendocuments and others referenced therein, form part of the Contract to the extent designatedd in thithis Section. Referenced documents are those current as of the date of this Section unlessss INFORMATONotherwisetherw indicated. A. National Electricalall ManufaManufManufacturers Association (NEMA)
NEMA TP 1Gu Guide for Determining Energy Efficiency for DistrDistDistribution Transformers
NEMA TP 2Standard TTest Method for Measuring the Energy Consumptionnsumptiumption of Distribution Transformers
NEMA TP 3 Standard foror the LLaLabeling of Distribution Transformerr EfficieEfficienEfficiency
B. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA) ONLY
NFPA 70, 2014 National Electrical Codedee (NEC)
C. Underwriters Laboratories (UL)
Electrical Appliance and Utilization Equipment Directory
UL 486A-486B Wire Connectors
UL 1561 Dry-Type General Purpose and Power Transformers
26 22 13 – 1 RPP-SPEC-60023 Rev.07 2/14/2018 - 2:57 PM 202 of 317
RPP-SPEC-60023, Rev. 7
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit the following in accordance with the provisions of the Contract Statement of Work and the Project submittal procedures.
Not Used.
B. Submit the following for WRPS review/approval:
Not Used.
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. ComplyFORply with the NEC for components and installation. B. Providevidee productsproduprod that are listed and labeled by a Nationally Recognized Testing Laboratoryatorytoryy (NRTL)(NRT(NR for the application, installation condition, and the environmentent inINFORMATON wwhichh installed. C. Provide productscts that complyco with the following industry standards:
1. NEMA TP 1.
2. NEMA TP 2.
3. NEMA TP 3.
4. UL 1561.
1.5 RECEIVING, STORING AND PROTECTINGG
A. Receive, store, protect, and handle products accordingordingONLYrding to manufacturer’s instructions.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 PRODUCT OPTIONS AND SUBSTITUTIONS
A. Alternate products may be accepted in accordance with the requirements of the Contract Statement of Work
2.2 GENERAL
A. Transformers shall be NRTL listed to UL 1561 and shall be tested and labeled according to NEMA TP 1, NEMA TP 2, and NEMA TP 3.
B. The efficiency of each transformer shall be NEMA TP 1 Class I when tested in accordance with NEMA TP 2. Transformer efficiency shall be indicated on a label that conforms to NEMA TP 3.
26 22 13 – 2 RPP-SPEC-60023 Rev.07 2/14/2018 - 2:57 PM 203 of 317
RPP-SPEC-60023, Rev. 7
C. Transformer coils may be aluminum or copper with continuous wound construction and shall be impregnated with non-hygroscopic, thermosetting varnish. Terminations shall be brazed or welded to the coil conductor.
D. Transformer cores shall be constructed of a high grade, non-aging silicon steel with high magnetic permeability and low hysteresis and eddy current losses. Magnetic flux densities shall be kept well below the saturation point.
2.3 GENERAL-PURPOSE DRY-TYPE TRANSFORMERS
A. The core and coil shall be bolted to the base of the enclosure, isolated by means of rubber vibration-absorbing mounts. There shall be no metal-to-metal contact between the core and the enclosure. Sound isolation systems requiring the completeplete removal of all fastening devices will not be acceptable.
B. The corere of the transformer shall be visibly grounded to the enclosure by a flexible groundingroundigrounding conductor sized following applicable UL and NEC Standards.
C. The transformererINFORMATON enclosureenclo shall be ventilated and shall be fabricated of a heavy gauge, sheet steelel construconstruction. The entire enclosure shall be finished using a process consisting of degreasdegreadegreasing, cleaning and phosphatizing followed by electrostatic depositionn of polypolymery polyester powder and baking cycle to provide a uniform coating of all edgesdges and surfaces. The coating shall be UL recognized for outdoor use. The coatingngg colocolorr shshall be light or medium grey.
D. Transformers shall be suitable forr rack or floorf mounting. Provide mounting accessories required for installation.
E. Provide weather shields for transformers installed outdoors.
F. Provide transformer manufacturer’s transformer ONLYlug kits with compression type equipment lugs and hardware for connecting conductorsductors to transformer terminals.
G. Provide factory assembled and tested, energy-efficient,, general-purpose,generageneral-p air cooled, two-winding, dry-type transformers with voltage and kVAkV ratings as indicated on the Drawings.
H. General-purpose transformers 15 kVA and larger shall be 150°C temperature rise above 40°C ambient. The maximum temperature of the top of the enclosure shall not exceed 50°C rise above a 40°C ambient.
I. Transformers 15 kVA and larger shall have a minimum of two 2.5 percent full capacity above normal and four 2.5 percent full capacity below normal primary taps.
J. Manufacturers:
1. Square D Class 7400 Type “EE.”
26 22 13 – 3 RPP-SPEC-60023 Rev.07 2/14/2018 - 2:57 PM 204 of 317
RPP-SPEC-60023, Rev. 7
2. Eaton/Cutler-Hammer “DS-3”and “DT-3.”
2.4 MINI-POWER ZONE
A. Provide mini-power zone, 480-120/240V, single phase transformer and 120/240V, panelboard in a weather-resistant enclosure. Minipower zone shall be UL listed, surface mounted and sized as shown on the Drawings. Branch and secondary main circuit breakers shall be provided as shown on the panel schedule. Locking mechanisms permanently affixed to the panel board to prevent casual operation of breakers shall be provided.
B. General-purpose transformers 15 kVA and larger shall be 150°C temperature rise above 40°C ambient.
C. Mini-powerFORni-power zone units shall have a minimum of two 2.5 percent full capacity beloww normal primary taps. D. Manufacturers:urers:ers:INFORMATON 1. Square D, Class 74407 “MiniPower Zone”
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 EXISTING WORK
A. Disconnect and remove abandonedned dry-typedry-ty transformers as shown on design media.
B. Maintain access to existing dry-type transformersnsformerssforme and other installations that are to remain active. ONLY 3.2 EXAMINATION
A. Examine surfaces to receive transformers for compliancence with iinstallation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance off the contcontrol system. Do not proceed with installation until unsatisfactory conditions havhhave been corrected.
3.3 INSTALLATION
A. Install dry-type transformers where indicated on the Drawings and according to manufacturer’s instructions. Manufacturer’s installation instructions shall be available at the construction site.
B. Arrange equipment to provide adequate spacing for access, replacement, and for cooling air circulation. Locate the front and rear of each ventilated transformer at least 6 in. from the wall or any obstruction to allow proper air circulation.
C. Make conduit connections to transformer enclosure only at locations designated by the manufacturer’s installation instructions.
26 22 13 – 4 RPP-SPEC-60023 Rev.07 2/14/2018 - 2:57 PM 205 of 317
RPP-SPEC-60023, Rev. 7
D. Connect conductors to transformer terminals using transformer manufacturer’s lug kits. Tighten electrical connectors and terminals according to manufacturer’s published torque-tightening values. Where manufacturer’s torque values are not furnished, use those specified Section 26 05 19, “Low Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and Cables,” Attachment 1, “Recommended Tightening Torque per UL 486A-486B.”
E. Bond transformers and ground systems served by transformers according to Section 26 05 26, “Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems.”
F. Identify transformers and install warning signs according to Section 26 05 53, “Identification for Electrical Systems.”
3.4 FIELD QUALITYALI CONTROL
A. Clean,n, inspect, test, adjust, and energize transformers in accordance with manufacturer’scturer’s ininstructions.
1. InspectINFORMATON each tratransformer for physical damage, proper connection and grounding,ng, and proproper anchorage.
2. Place records off inspectinspections, tests, and adjustments in the work package or fabrication document.ment.
B. Coordinate inspections and testssts with ththose required by other Sections.
C. After completing installation, cleaning,ning,ng, and ttesting, touch-up scratches and mars on finish to match original finish.
D. Measure primary and secondary voltages andnd phasephaspha e rotation,r and make preliminary tap adjustments. After normal operatingatingONLYting loadsloloa have been energized adjust taps to provide the following voltage at pointsints of useuse; record voltages and tap settings.
System Nominal Voltage Minimum Load VoltageoltageltageY 480Y/277 460Y/265 208Y/120 200Y/115 120/240 115/230
END OF SECTION 26 22 13
26 22 13 – 5 RPP-SPEC-60023 Rev.07 2/14/2018 - 2:57 PM 206 of 317
RPP-SPEC-60023, Rev. 7
SECTION 26 24 13
SWITCHBOARDS
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 SCOPE OF WORK
A. Section covers installation of floor-mounted deadfront low-voltage switchboards which consist of an enclosure, circuit breakers, instruments and metering equipment, monitoring equipment or control equipment, with associated interconnections and supporting structures. Uses on Project include:
1. MainMaM Switchboard and Distribution Switchboard – are shown on the DrawiDrawings and provided by RPP-SPEC-60125. 1.2 RELATED DOCUMENTSCUMEINFORMATONNTN / CODES AND STANDARDS Drawings and general provisionsprovision of the contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 SpecifiSpecification Sections apply to this section.
The following documents and others referefreferenced therein, form part of the Contract to the extent designated in this section. ReferencReferenReferenced documents are those current as of the date of this section unless otherwise indicated.cated.
A. Factory Mutual (FM) Research Corporationorporationporation
Approval Guide B. Hanford Documents ONLY RPP-CALC-60221 Electrical Power Distributionstributiontribution Study for A/AX Retrieval Infrastructure
RPP-CALC-60222 Electrical Power Distributionn StudyStudS for A/AX Retrieval Water Building
RPP-SPEC-60125 Procurement Specification for A/AX Retrieval Project Switchboards
C. Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers (IEEE)
IEEE 100 The Authoritative Dictionary of IEEE Standards Terms
D. National Electrical Manufacturer’s Association (NEMA)
NEMA PB 2 Deadfront Distribution Switchboards
26 24 13 – 1 RPP-SPEC-60023 Rev.07 2/14/2018 - 2:57 PM 207 of 317
RPP-SPEC-60023, Rev. 7
NEMA PB 2.1 Proper Handling, Installation, Operation and Maintenance of Deadfront Switchboards Rated 600 Volts or Less
E. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA)
7 NFPA 0 National Electrical Code (NEC)
F. Underwriters Laboratories (UL)
UL 67 Panelboards
UL 486A-486B Wire Connectors
1.3 DEFINITIONSFORIONS
A. Unless otherwiseotherwis specified or indicated, electrical and electronics terms used in this Sectionon areINFORMATON asa defined in IEEE 100. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCENCE
A. Comply with the NECEC for componentscocom and installation.
B. Provide products that are listed andan labeled by a Nationally Recognized Testing Laboratory (NRTL) for the application,applicationapplicatio installation condition, and the environment in which installed.
1.5 RECEIVING, STORING AND PROTECTINGTING
A. Receive, inspect, handle, and store switchboard(s)board(s)oard(s) according to the following:
1. Manufacturer’s written instructions. ONLY
1.6 SERVICE CONDITIONS
A. Conform to NEMA PB 2 service conditions during and afterterer inst iinstallation of switchboards.
1.7 FIELD MEASUREMENTS
A. Verify field measurements against manufacturer’s shop drawings prior to fabrication.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
A. Switchboards are provided by Procurement Specification RPP-SPEC-60125.
26 24 13 – 2 RPP-SPEC-60023 Rev.07 2/14/2018 - 2:57 PM 208 of 317
RPP-SPEC-60023, Rev. 7
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine surfaces to receive switchboard(s) for compliance with installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of the product. Do not proceed with installation until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Install switchboard(s) where indicated on the Drawings and according to manufacturer’s instructions, NEMA PB-2, and the NEC. Have the manufacturer’s installation instructions available at the construction site.
B. RemovemoveFOR temtemporary lifting eyes, channels, brackets, and temporary blocking of movingingg parts ffrom switchboard enclosure and components.
C. Ground andnd bondbond switchboardssws as required in Section 26 05 26, “Grounding and Bonding for EElectricallectricalINFORMATON Systems.”
D. Install conduits as required in Section 26 05 33, “Raceways and Boxes for Electrical Systems.”
1. Terminate conduitss in the swsswitchboard section containing the corresponding device.
2. Install plugged couplings setett flush wwith the top of the concrete pad. After switchboard is set in place, extendtend conduitscondcon to 1 1/4-in. above the pad and terminate with insulated groundingng bushingbushinbushings. E. Install conductors as required in Section 26 05515 19,ONLY9, ““LowLow Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and Cables.”
1. Train conductors neatly in groups; bundle and secure asa recommended by manufacturer to withstand fault current.
2. Use compression type lugs to connect all service, feeder, and branch circuit cables greater than 100 amperes.
3. Tighten electrical connectors and terminals, including bus bar and grounding connections, according to the manufacturer’s published torque-tightening values. Where manufacturer’s torque values are not indicated, use those specified in UL 486A-486B.
3.3 IDENTIFICATION
A. Identify switchboard and install warning signs and arc-flash warning labels as required in Section 26 05 53, “Identification for Electrical Systems.”
26 24 13 – 3 RPP-SPEC-60023 Rev.07 2/14/2018 - 2:57 PM 209 of 317
RPP-SPEC-60023, Rev. 7
3.4 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Clean, inspect, test, and energize switchboards in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions.
B. Verify that circuit breakers are in the proper locations and that setting of solid state trip devices and current sensor taps match values scheduled on the Drawings.
C. Exercise each circuit breaker three times to verify smooth mechanical operation.
D. Verify proper torque of accessible bus connections and mechanical fasteners after installing switchboard.
E. CoordinateFORordinate inspections and tests with those required by other Sections in this Specification.cificationication.
F. After completingmpletingmpletin ininstallation, cleaning, and testing, touch-up scratches and mars on finish to matchatchINFORMATON origoriginal finish.
G. Perform field adjustmentsustmentsstments ofo the protective devices as required to place the equipment in final operatingperatingrating condition.co The settings shall be in accordance with the approved short-circuituit studystudy,, pprotective device evaluation study and protective device coordination studies, RPPRPP-CALC-60221-CA and RPP-CALC-60222.
H. Necessary field settings of devices,ces,es, adjustadjustments, and minor modifications to equipment to accomplish conformanceancence with an approved short circuit and protective device coordination study shallhall be cacarried out by the Contractor at no additional cost to the owner. 3.5 MANUFACTURER’S FIELD SERVICE ONLY A. Provide the services of a factory trained representativeiveve from tthe manufacturer to inspect and certify the installation and to oversee energizinggizing andan testing as directed by TOC Engineering Representative.
B. Manufacturer’s representative shall certify in writing that the equipment has been installed, adjusted, and tested in accordance with the manufacturer’s recommendations.
END OF SECTION 26 24 13
26 24 13 – 4 RPP-SPEC-60023 Rev.07 2/14/2018 - 2:57 PM 210 of 317
RPP-SPEC-60023, Rev. 7
SECTION 26 24 16
PANELBOARDS
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 SCOPE OF WORK
A. Panelboards for feeder and branch circuit loads.
1.2 RELATED DOCUMENTS / CODES AND STANDARDS
Drawings andd ggeneral provisions of the contract, including General and Supplementary ConditionssFOR and DiDDivision 01 Specification Sections apply to this Section. The followingg documendocuments and others referenced therein, form part of the Contract to the extent designatedd in thithis Section. Referenced documents are those current as of the date of this Section unlessss INFORMATONotherwisetherw indicated. A. International Organizationanization for Standardization (ISO)
ISO 9001Qu Quality management systems – Requirements
B. National Electrical Manufacturer’scturerturer’s AsAAssociation (NEMA)
NEMA AB 3 Moldedlded Case Circuit Breakers and their Application
NEMA PB 1 Panelboardsardsds
NEMA PB 1.1 General Instructionsctiontions for Proper Installation, Operation, and MaintenanceaintenancONLYintenan of Panelboards Rated 600 volts or less
NEMA PB 2 Deadfront Distribution Switchboardswitchboar
C. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA)
NFPA 70, 2014 National electrical Code (NEC)
D. Underwriters Laboratories (UL)
UL 50 Enclosures for Electrical Equipment, Non- Environmental Considerations
UL 67 Panelboards
UL 489 Molded Case Circuit Breakers
26 24 16 – 1 RPP-SPEC-60023 Rev.07 2/14/2018 - 2:57 PM 211 of 317
RPP-SPEC-60023, Rev. 7
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. See the Contract Statement of Work for the submittal process.
B. Approval Required.
Not Used.
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Comply with the NEC for components and installation.
B. Furnish products that are listed and labeled by a Nationally Recognized Testing Laboratoryratorat (NRTL) for the application, installation condition, and the environmentvironmevironmFOR in which installed.
C. Complylyy with NEMANE PB 1, NEMA PB 1.1, and NEMA AB 3. D. Comply withhUh ULINFORMATONL 67,67 UL 50, and UL 489. 1.5 RECEIVING, STORINGNGG AANDND PPROTECTING
A. Receive, inspect, handle,le,e, and stostore panelboards according to manufacturer’s instructions.
1.6 EXTRA MATERIALS
A. Furnish spare keys of each type for panelboardpanelboar cabinet locks.
B. Deleted.
PART 2 PRODUCTS ONLY
2.1 PRODUCT OPTIONS AND SUBSTITUTIONS
A. Alternate products may be accepted in accordance with thee requirementsrequrequi of the Contract Statement of Work.
2.2 DISTRIBUTION PANELBOARDS
A. Furnish panelboards as indicated on the Drawings and specified in this Section.
B. Panelboards shall be UL 67 listed and shall conform to NEMA PB1.
C. Furnish panelboard cabinets for surface mounting as indicted on the Drawings.
1. Furnish enclosures as indicated below:
a. Outdoor – NEMA 3R: rated raintight minimum.
26 24 16 – 2 RPP-SPEC-60023 Rev.07 2/14/2018 - 2:57 PM 212 of 317
RPP-SPEC-60023, Rev. 7
b. Indoor – NEMA 12: Dust tight.
2. Cabinets shall be not less than 20-in. wide.
3. Furnish steel cabinets constructed according to UL 50 requirements.
4. NEMA 12, and 4 boxes shall have end walls welded and sealed.
D. Furnish trim fronts that meet the strength and rigidity requirements of UL 50.
1. Each panelboard trim front shall include a door.
2. Fronts shall have ANSI 49 medium gray enamel electro-deposited over FORcleaned, phosphatized steel. 3.FurnisFurn Furnish a panelboard circuit directory card in a metal frame mounted inside theth panelboard door. The directory card shall include spaces for circuitrcuit nunnumbersmbm and sufficient spaces to allow each circuit to be described in sufficientfff INFORMATONcient dedetail to be distinguished from all others. a. Furnishrnish cylindricalcylin tumbler type locks for doors. Furnish sliding vault lockscks wiwwitht 3-point latching for enclosures more than 48-in. high. Keyeyy all lockloc assemblies alike. Furnish two keys with each lock plus sparespares as rerequired in the Extra Materials paragraph above.
E. Equip panelboards with mounting brackets,rackets bbus connections, and necessary appurtenances, for the future installationion of circuitcirccir breakers in the “spaces” scheduled on the Drawings. F. Furnish panelboards having NRTL-listed shortrtt ccircuitONLYircuitrcuit ccurrent ratings not less than the available fault current indicated on the Drawings.ings.ngs.
G. Furnish thermal-magnetic circuit breakers that meet thehee requiremrequirrequirements of UL 489 and NEMA AB 3.
1. Furnish circuit breakers of the type, rating, and features as indicated on the Drawings.
2. Do not use tandem circuit breakers.
3. Furnish multi-pole breakers with a common trip.
4. Furnish bolt-on type circuit breakers or circuit breakers that connect to the panel bus through positive gripping connector jaws and are secured by an independent mechanical locking device.
26 24 16 – 3 RPP-SPEC-60023 Rev.07 2/14/2018 - 2:57 PM 213 of 317
RPP-SPEC-60023, Rev. 7
5. Furnish UL Class A ground fault interrupter circuit breakers or UL Class B equipment protection circuit breakers where scheduled on Drawings.
6. Furnish circuit breakers with provisions for connecting the size and number of conductors indicated on the Drawings. Refer to Section 26 05 19, “Low Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and Cables,” for conductor connection requirements.
H. Furnish a permanently-installed handle lock-off device for each circuit breaker.
1. Furnish handle lock-off device that will accept a 1/4-in. padlock shackle.
2. SecurelyS attach the device to the circuit breaker case; the attachment shall FORnot ddepending on a friction fit or the presence of the panelboard front for the hanhandle lock-off device to remain in place and be functional. I. Manufacturers:urers:ers:INFORMATON 1. Eaton:
a. 480 V andnd 480Y480Y/277 V: “PRL3a” and “PRL4”
b. 208Y/120 V and 120/24012012 V: “PRL1a” and “PRL2a”
2. Square D:
a. 480 V and 480Y/277 V: “NF”“NF” anda “I-LINE”
b. 208Y/120 V and 120/240 V: “NQ”“NQ” and “I-Line”
PART 3 EXECUTION ONLY
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine surfaces to receive panelboards for compliance withith ininstallation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance. Do not proceed with installation until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Install panelboards where indicated on the Drawings and according to manufacturer’s instructions, NEMA PB 1.1, and the NEC. Have the manufacturer’s installation instructions available at the construction site.
B. Furnish supports in accordance with the requirements of Section 26 05 29, “Hangers and Supports for Electrical Systems.”
26 24 16 – 4 RPP-SPEC-60023 Rev.07 2/14/2018 - 2:57 PM 214 of 317
RPP-SPEC-60023, Rev. 7
C. Position panelboards so the top circuit breaker handle is not more than 6 ft – 7 in. above the surface of the working space in front of the panelboard.
D. Ground and bond panelboards as required in Section 26 05 26, “Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems.”
3.3 IDENTIFICATION
A. Furnish typed circuit directories for each branch circuit panelboard.
1. Install a plastic-laminated copy of the panel schedule drawing on the inner side of the panelboard door.
B. Identifyifyy panelboards and install warning signs and arc-flash warning labels as requiredFORuired in Section 26 05 53, “Identification for Electrical Systems.”
3.4 FIELD QUALITYLITY COCONTROL A. Clean, inspect,tINFORMATON test, anand energize panelboards in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions. Exercisexercise eaeach circuit breaker three times to verify smooth mechanical operation.tion.ion.
B. Coordinate inspections and tests wwith those required by other Sections.
C. After completing installation,, cleaningcleaning, and testing, touch-up scratches and mars on finish to match original finish.h
END OF SECTION 26 24 16 ONLY
26 24 16 – 5 RPP-SPEC-60023 Rev.07 2/14/2018 - 2:57 PM 215 of 317
RPP-SPEC-60023, Rev. 7
SECTION 26 27 26
WIRING DEVICES
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 SCOPE OF WORK
A. Receptacles.
B. Snap switches. C. WallFOR plates.plapl 1.2 RELATEDD DOCUMENTSDOCU / CODES AND STANDARDS
Drawings and generaleneralneral pprprovisions of the contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Divisionvisiis INFORMATONon 01 SSpecification Sections apply to this Section. The following documentsts and otheothothers referenced therein, form part of the Contract to the extent designated in this Section.ction.on. RReReferenced documents are those current as of the date of this Section unless otherwisesee indicateindicatindicated.
A. Federal Specifications (FS)
FS W-C-596 G/GEN Connector,nnector, EElectrical, Power, General Specification for
FS W-P-455A Plate, Wall, ElectricalElectricaElectric
FS W-S-896 Switches, Toggle (ToggleONLYToggle anda Lock), Flush Mounted (General SpecificatiSpecification)
B. International Organization for Standardization (ISO)
ISO 9001 Quality Management Systems -- Requirements
C. National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA)
NEMA WD 1 General Requirements for Wiring Devices
NEMA WD 6 Wiring Devices—Dimensional Specifications
D. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA)
NFPA 70, 2014 National Electrical Code (NEC)
26 27 26 – 1 RPP-SPEC-60023 Rev.07 2/14/2018 - 2:57 PM 216 of 317
RPP-SPEC-60023, Rev. 7
E. Underwriters Laboratories (UL)
UL 20 General Use Snap Switches
UL 498 Electrical Attachment Plugs and Receptacles
UL 943 Ground Fault Circuit Interrupters
UL 1492 Solid-State Dimming Controls
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. See the Contract Statement of Work for the submittal process. B. ApprovalFORproval RRequired Not Used.sed. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCERAINFORMATONNCE A. Comply with the NEC.
B. Furnish products listedd and labelabeled by a Nationally Recognized Testing Laboratory (NRTL) for thehee application,applicapplica installation condition, and the environments in which installed.alled.lled.
1.5 RECEIVING, STORING, AND PROTECTINGTECTING
A. Receive, store, protect, and handle productsductsucts accaccoaccording to manufacturer’s instructions.
PART 2 PRODUCTS ONLY
2.1 PRODUCT OPTIONS AND SUBSTITUTIONS
A. Alternate products may be accepted in accordance with thee requirementsrequrequi of the Contract Statement of Work.
2.2 RECEPTACLES
A. Provide back and side wired, screw pressure terminal, straight-blade, and locking type, receptacles as indicated on the drawings. Receptacles shall meet the performance and design requirements of Federal Specification W-C-596G/GEN and UL 498. Receptacle configurations shall be in accordance with NEMA WD 6.
B. For 120 volt receptacles connected to individual branch circuits provide straight- blade NEMA 5-20R, 20 amperes, 125 volts, grounding duplex receptacles.
26 27 26 – 2 RPP-SPEC-60023 Rev.07 2/14/2018 - 2:57 PM 217 of 317
RPP-SPEC-60023, Rev. 7
Receptacle mounting strap, ground terminal, and ground contacts shall be formed from one piece of brass alloy. Manufacturer: Hubbell “HBL5362” or equal.
C. For GFCI receptacles connected to individual branch circuits provide straight- blade NEMA 5-20R, 20 amperes, 125 volts, grounding, “feed through” type, self- testing GFCI, duplex receptacle that meet the requirements of UL 943. Provide units that can be installed in a 2 3/4-in. deep outlet box without an adapter. Manufacturer: Hubbell “GFR5362ST” or equal.
D. Provide straight-blade and twist lock receptacles for special applications as indicated on the Drawings.
E. Provide 480 VAC, 3 wire, 4 pole, receptacles, amperage as shown on drawings. Manufacturer:FORufac Crouse Hinds. 2.3 SNAP SWITCHESTCHESCHES
A. Provide singlenglegle ppole,ole, double pole, three-way, four-way and illuminated handle snap switches INFORMATONas indicaindicated on the Drawings.
B. Switches shall be rated 20 amamperes, 120-277 volts AC, back and side wired, screw pressure terminal, quietiett ttytypeype AAC switch with yoke grounding screw. Switches shall meet the performancence and dedesign requirements of UL 20 and Federal Specification WS896.
C. Manufacturer: Hubbell “HBL1220”20” series series.
2.4 WALL PLATES
A. For surface mounted interior receptacles andd switches,switswitche furnish galvanized steel 4-in. square raised surface covers. Receptacles installedONLYnstalle in raised covers shall be secured by more than one screw. Manufacturer: RACO “8“800” series.
B. For GFCI receptacles in damp or wet locations providee weatherpweatheweatherproof, in use covers. Manufacturer: Hubbell “WP26E”
C. Provide single, multi-gang, and combination type wall plates that mate and match with corresponding wiring devices.
D. Use metal plate-securing screws to match plate finish.
E. Terminal Blocks
1. Terminal Blocks shall meet the requirements of UL 1059 or NEMA ICS 4.
26 27 26 – 3 RPP-SPEC-60023 Rev.07 2/14/2018 - 2:57 PM 218 of 317
RPP-SPEC-60023, Rev. 7
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 PREPARATION
A. Verify outlet boxes are installed at proper locations and heights.
B. Verify branch circuit wiring installation is completed, tested, and ready for connection to wiring devices.
C. Clean debris from outlet boxes before installing devices.
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Installl pproducts following manufacturer’s instructions. Have the manufacturer’s installationFORtallationtallatio instructions available at the construction site.
B. Install devices pplumb, level, and secure. C. Except as otherwisetheh INFORMATONrwise indicatedin on the Drawings, mount devices with long dimension vertical,ical, and ggrounding point of receptacles on top. Group adjacent switches and receptaclesptacles underun single, multi-gang wall plates.
D. Do not use the duplex/split-wiresplit-wire break-off tabs in receptacles as circuit conductors for connecting downstreamm devicesdevicedevices.
E. Install galvanized steel plates onn outlet boboxes and junction boxes on surface mounted outlets.
3.3 GROUNDING
A. Connect wiring device grounding terminal to brabrbranchnch ccicircuit equipment grounding conductor. ONLY
3.4 IDENTIFICATION
A. Identify wiring devices with circuit number as required in SectionSectioSe 26 05 53, “Identification for Electrical Systems.”
3.5 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Inspect each wiring device for defects before installing.
B. Operate each operable device with circuit energized; verify proper operation.
C. Test 20 ampere receptacles for proper polarity and ground continuity using an NRTL listed test device that impresses a momentary current of at least 15 amperes on the branch circuit conductors and equipment grounding path.
26 27 26 – 4 RPP-SPEC-60023 Rev.07 2/14/2018 - 2:57 PM 219 of 317
RPP-SPEC-60023, Rev. 7
D. Test ground-fault circuit interrupter receptacle operation according to manufacturer recommendations.
E. Replace damaged or defective wiring devices.
3.6 CLEANING AND ADJUSTING
A. Clean devices and wall plates. Replace stained or damaged wall plates or devices.
B. Adjust devices and wall plates to be flush and level.
FOR END OF SECTION 26 27 26
INFORMATON
ONLY
26 27 26 – 5 RPP-SPEC-60023 Rev.07 2/14/2018 - 2:57 PM 220 of 317
RPP-SPEC-60023, Rev. 7
SECTION 26 28 16
ENCLOSED SWITCHES AND CIRCUIT BREAKERS
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 SCOPE OF WORK
A. Safety switches.
B. Fuses. 1.2 RELATEDFOR DOCUMENTSD / CODES AND STANDARDS Drawings and generagenergeneral provisions of the contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions andndd DivisionDivisio 01 Specification Sections apply to this Section. The following documentsumemINFORMATONnts andan others referenced therein, form part of the Contract to the extent designated in thishis SectionSection. Referenced documents are those current as of the date of this Section unless otherwiseherwiseerwise iinindicated. A. National Electrical ManufacturersnufacturernufactureRM Association (NEMA) NEMA FU 1Low VoVVoltage Cartridge Fuses
NEMA KS 1 Enclosedclosed and Miscellaneous Distribution Equipmentment SwitSwitches (600 Volts Maximum)
NEMA WD 1 General Requirementsquiremen for Wiring Devices
B. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA) ONLY
NFPA 70, 2014 National Electrical Codede (NEC(NEC))
C. Underwriters Laboratories (UL)
UL 50 Enclosures for Electrical Equipment
UL 248 Low-Voltage Fuses
UL 486A-486B Wire Connectors
26 28 16 – 1 RPP-SPEC-60023 Rev.07 2/14/2018 - 2:57 PM 221 of 317
RPP-SPEC-60023, Rev. 7
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. See the Contract Statement of Work for the submittal process.
B. Approval Required
Not Used.
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Comply with the NEC for components and installation.
B. Provide safety switches that are listed and labeled by a Nationally Recognized Testingng Laboratory (NRTL) for the application, installation condition, and the environmentvironmevironmFOR in which installed.
C. Complylyy with theth following standards as applicable: 1. NEMAMAINFORMATON KS 1.1 2. UL 50.
3. NEMA FU 1.
4. UL 248.
1.5 RECEIVING, STORING AND PROTECTINGECTING
A. Receive, inspect, handle, and store safetyety switches,switch enclosed circuit breakers, and fuses according to the manufacturer’s writtentten instrinstructions.
1.6 EXTRA MATERIALS ONLY
A. Provide one spray can of touch-up paint that matchess finish of switches.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 PRODUCT OPTIONS AND SUBSTITUTIONS
A. Alternate products may be accepted; follow the guidelines set forth in the Contract Statement of Work.
2.2 SAFETY SWITCHES
A. Provide NRTL-listed, NEMA Type 1, 3R, 3R/12 or 4 Heavy Duty safety switches with ratings and number of poles as indicated on the Drawings or as required by the NEC suitable for the environment into which it is being installed.
B. Each safety switch shall have an equipment ground bar.
26 28 16 – 2 RPP-SPEC-60023 Rev.07 2/14/2018 - 2:57 PM 222 of 317
RPP-SPEC-60023, Rev. 7
C. Each safety switch shall have provisions for padlocking in the OFF position.
D. Manufacturer: Square D “Class 3110” or Cutler Hammer “DH” Series.
2.3 FUSES
A. Provide NEMA FU 1 and UL 248 fuses with type, voltage, and current ratings as indicated on drawings.
B. Manufacturer: Cooper/Bussmann or Mersen/Ferraz Shawmut.
PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATIONFORTI A. Installall safetsafetyy switches and fuses where indicated on the Drawings, according to manufacturer’sacturer’s instructions, and the NEC. B. Ground and bobbondINFORMATONnd sasafsafety switches as required in Section 26 05 26, “Grounding and Bonding for Electricalectrical SySSystems.”
C. Install conduits as requiredequiredired iin Section 26 05 33, “Raceways and Boxes for Electrical Systems.”
D. Install conductors as requiredd in SectioSectSection 26 05 19, “Low Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and Cables.”
1. Tighten electrical connectors and termitermterminals to the manufacturer’s published torque-tightening values.ues.es. 3.2 IDENTIFICATION ONLY A. Identify safety switches and install warning signs and arc-flasharc-fla warning labels as required in Section 26 05 53, “Identification for Electricaltricalical SSystems.”ysst
B. Mark floor in front of safety switches to show NEC requirededd workingwo space according to Section 26 05 53, “Identification for Electrical Systems.”
3.3 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Clean interior and exterior of safety switches.
B. Verify that ratings of fuses and safety switches match values indicated on the Drawings.
C. Verify proper torque of accessible bus connections and mechanical fasteners after installing safety switches, document in work package or fabrication document. After completing installation, cleaning, and testing, touch-up scratches and mars on finish to match original finish.
26 28 16 – 3 RPP-SPEC-60023 Rev.07 2/14/2018 - 2:57 PM 223 of 317
RPP-SPEC-60023, Rev. 7
END OF SECTION 26 28 16
FOR
INFORMATON
ONLY
26 28 16 – 4 RPP-SPEC-60023 Rev.07 2/14/2018 - 2:57 PM 224 of 317
RPP-SPEC-60023, Rev. 7
SECTION 26 51 00
INTERIOR LIGHTING
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 SCOPE OF WORK
A. Interior luminaires and accessories.
1.2 RELATED DOCUMENTS / CODES AND STANDARDS
Drawings andd ggeneral provisions of the contract, including General and Supplementary ConditionssFOR and DiDDivision 01 Specification Sections apply to this Section. The followingg documendocuments and others referenced therein, form part of the Contract to the extent designatedd in thisthi Section. Referenced documents are those current as of the date of this Section unlessss INFORMATONotherwisetherw indicated. A. International Codedee CouncCounciCouncil
IBCIntIn International Building Code (IBC)
B. National Electrical Contractorsors AssocAssoAssociation (NECA)/Illuminating Engineering Society of North America (IESNA)NA)
NECA/IESNA 500 Recommendedmmended PPractice for Installing Indoor Commercialcialal LightingLightih Systems (ANSI)
NECA/IESNA 502 Recommendedd PraPracticectice for Installing Industrial Lighting Systems ONLY(ANSI)ANSI)
C. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA)
NFPA 70, 2014 National Electrical Code (NEC)EC)C)
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. See the Contract Statement of Work for the submittal process.
B. Approval Required.
Not Used.
26 51 00 – 1 RPP-SPEC-60023 Rev.07 2/14/2018 - 2:57 PM 225 of 317
RPP-SPEC-60023, Rev. 7
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Comply with the NEC and the IBC for components and installation.
B. Provide luminaires listed and labeled by a Nationally Recognized Testing Laboratory (NRTL) for the application, installation condition, and the environments in which installed.
C. Use manufacturers that are experienced in manufacturing luminaires, lamps and ballasts similar to those indicated for this Project and have a record of successful in-service performance.
D. Coordinate luminaires, mounting hardware and trim with the ceiling system.
1.5 DEFINITIONSFORIONS
A. Luminaire:aire: A lumluluminaire is a complete lighting unit and parts required to distribute the light, and coconnectionINFORMATONne of the lighting unit to the power supply. 1. Averagee Life: TheTh time after which 50 percent will have failed and 50 percent willll have sursurvived under specified operating and starting condition.
2. Total harmonic distortiontortion (T((THD): The root mean square (RMS) of all the harmonic componentss divided byb the fundamental current.
1.6 SERVICE CONDITIONS
A. Luminaires, shall perform satisfactorily in the follfofollowing service conditions: 1. Ambient temperature limits: 32 to 104°F4°F°FONLY unlessunles indicated otherwise for specific products in Part 2.
1.7 RECEIVING, STORING AND PROTECTING
A. Receive, store, protect, and handle products according to thehee folfollowing NECA National Electrical Installation Standards:
1. NECA/IESNA 500.
2. NECA/IESNA 502.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 PRODUCT OPTIONS AND SUBSTITUTIONS
A. Refer to the Contract Statement of Work.
26 51 00 – 2 RPP-SPEC-60023 Rev.07 2/14/2018 - 2:57 PM 226 of 317
RPP-SPEC-60023, Rev. 7
2.2 INTERIOR LUMINAIRES
A. Furnish interior luminaires that comply with requirements specified below, indicated on the Drawings, and as required to meet conditions of installation.
B. Metal parts shall be free from burrs and sharp corners and edges.
C. Metal components shall be formed and supported to prevent sagging and warping.
D. Steel parts shall be finished with manufacturer’s standard finish applied over a corrosion-resistant primer. Finish shall be free from runs, streaks, stains or defects.
E. Doorss anand frames shall be smooth operating and free from light leakage under operatingeratingFOR cconditions.
2.3 LUMINAIREE ACCESSORIESACCES A. Provide supports,rts,INFORMATON moummounting brackets, frames, and other accessories required for luminaire installation.llalation.
B. Furnish hangers as specifiedpecifiedcified bbelow and as required by conditions of installation:
1. Stem hangers shalll be mademad of steel tubing with swivel ball hanger fitting and ceiling canopy. Finish theth same as the luminaire.
2. Rod hangers shall be made of 1/41/4-in.-in threaded zinc-plated steel rod.
PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION ONLY A. Install interior lighting system in accordance with the NEC, manufacturer’s installation instructions and approved shop drawings.
B. Have the manufacturer’s installation instructions available at the Project site.
C. Mounting heights specified or indicated on the Drawings are to the bottom of the luminaire for ceiling-mounted fixtures and to the center of the luminaire for wall- mounted fixtures.
3.2 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Make electrical connections, clean interiors and exteriors of luminaires, install lamps, energize and test luminaires, inspect interior lighting system, and deliver spare parts in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions.
END OF SECTION 26 51 00
26 51 00 – 3 RPP-SPEC-60023 Rev.07 2/14/2018 - 2:57 PM 227 of 317
RPP-SPEC-60023, Rev. 7
SECTION 26 56 00
EXTERIOR LIGHTING
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 SCOPE OF WORK
A. Exterior luminaires and accessories.
B. Grounding. C. ConduitFORuit and wiring. D. Lightinghting contconcontrols.
E. Wood lightingghtinghting ppopoles
1.2 RELATED DOCUMENTSMENTSINFORMATON / CODES AND STANDARDS
Drawings and general provisionsvisionsisions of tthe contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specificationpecificatioecificatio Sections apply to this Section.
The following documents and othersrss referenreferencreferenced therein, form part of the Contract to the extent designated in this Section. Referencederenced dodocuments are those current as of the date of this Section unless otherwise indicated.d
A. American National Standards Institute (ANSI)ANSI) ANSI 05.1 Wood Pole – SpecificationsSpecipecONLYficati and Dimensions B. American Society of Civil Engineers (ASCE)
ASCE 7 Minimum Design Loads for BuildingsBuildi and Other Structures
C. ASTM International (ASTM)
ASTM A123/A123M Standard Specification for Zinc (Hot-Dip Galvanized) Coatings on Iron and Steel Products
D. American Wood Protection Association (AWPA)
AWPA C7 Western red cedar, northern white cedar and Alaska yellow cedar poles – preservative treatment of incised pole butts by the thermal process (no s/s document
26 56 00 – 1 RPP-SPEC-60023 Rev.07 2/14/2018 - 2:57 PM 228 of 317
RPP-SPEC-60023, Rev. 7
AWPA P Standard for field cuts, creosote for brush or spray treatment
E. Illuminating Engineering Society of North America (IESNA)
Lighting Handbook
F. International Code Council
International Building Code
G. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA) NFPAFORA 7 70, 2014 National Electrical Code (NEC) H. Underwritersderwriterswriter Laboratories (UL)
UL 1598 Luminaires INFORMATON 1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. See the Contract Statementatementment ofo Work for the submittal process.
B. Approval Not Required.
Not Used.
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Comply with the following codes and standards:ndards:
1. NEC for components and installation. ONLY
2. International Building Code.
3. ASCE-7.
B. Provide luminaires listed and labeled by a Nationally Recognized Testing Laboratory (NRTL) for the application, installation condition, and the environments in which installed.
C. Use manufacturers that are experienced in manufacturing, luminaires, lamps, similar to those indicated for this Project and have a record of successful in- service performance.
26 56 00 – 2 RPP-SPEC-60023 Rev.07 2/14/2018 - 2:57 PM 229 of 317
RPP-SPEC-60023, Rev. 7
1.5 SERVICE CONDITIONS
A. International Building Code and ASCE 7 design wind conditions:
1. Exposure Category: C
2. Basic Wind Speed: 90 mph (3-second gust at 33-ft above ground, mean recurrence interval of 50 years)
3. Importance Factor: 1.15
B. Ambient temperatures, °C (°F) 1.FOR -25°F to 115°F 1.6 DEFINITIONSONSNS
A. Unless otherwisetherwiseherwis specified or indicated, terms used in this Section are as defined in the NECor INFORMATONthehe IEIESIESNA Lighting Handbook. 1.7 RECEIVING, STORINGNGG AND PROTECTINGP
A. Receive, inspect, handle,le,e, and stostore products according to the manufacturer’s written instructions.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 PRODUCT OPTIONS AND SUBSTITUTIONSTIONSIONS
A. Alternate products may be accepted; in accordancecordancecordanc with the requirements of the Contract Statement of Work. ONLY 2.2 FINISHES
A. Furnish luminaires and accessories with finishes as schedulededuled thaththat are resistant to fading, chalking, and other changes due to aging and exposuresureur to heat and ultraviolet light. Acceptable finishes for metals are:
1. Hot-dipped galvanized steel: ASTM A123/A123M.
2. Brushed natural aluminum.
3. Anodized aluminum: AAMA 611, Class I.
4. Powder coated aluminum: Fluorocarbon polymer powder coating per AAMA 2605, over chrome phosphate conversion coated aluminum.
5. Powder coated steel: Fluorocarbon polymer powder coating per AAMA 2605 over zinc phosphate conversion coated shot-blasted steel.
26 56 00 – 3 RPP-SPEC-60023 Rev.07 2/14/2018 - 2:57 PM 230 of 317
RPP-SPEC-60023, Rev. 7
B. Reject luminaires and accessories with finish having runs, streaks, stains, and defects.
C. Replace luminaires and accessories showing evidence of yellowing, fading, chalking, and other changes indicating failure during warranty period.
D. Use stainless steel for exposed hardware.
2.3 WOOD POLES
A. Wood Poles: ANSI 05.1, western red cedar, or Douglas fir cut from live timber. Pole shall be butt-treated by manufacture in accordance with AWPA C7, using AWPA P preservatives. Each pole shall be given single top cut at 30 degree angle with normnormal to axis of pole and at right angle to sweep. Gains shall be cut so roof willFORl be at rightrigri angles to the line and sweep of the pole will be in line. Roofs and gainss shallhall be bbrush treated by manufacture with specified preservative. Each gain shallall fit crossarmcroscro tightly. Bolt holes shall not be more than 1/16 in. oversize.
2.4 EXTERIOR LUMINAIRESNAIRESINFORMATON – GENERAL
A. Furnish exterior luminairesminaires that comply with requirements specified on the Drawings.
B. Luminaires shall be NRTL-listedlistedisted as conforming to UL 1598.
C. Luminaire photometric characteristicsristics shallsha be based on IESNA-approved methods for photometric measurementsmentsents perfperfoperformed by a recognized photometric laboratory. D. Luminaire housing shall be primarily metal. ONLY 1. Metal parts shall be free from burrs and sharpharp corncorners and edges.
2. Sheet metal components shall be fabricated fromomm corrosion-resistantcorrosicorro aluminum, formed and supported to prevent sagginging and wwarping.
3. Exposed fasteners shall be stainless steel.
E. Provide lenses, fabricated from materials that are UV stabilized to be resistant to yellowing and other changes due to aging or exposure to heat and ultraviolet radiation.
F. Doors shall have resilient gaskets that are heat-resistant and aging-resistant to seal and cushion lens and refractor.
2.5 LIGHTING CONTROL EQUIPMENT
A. Furnish photoelectric relays or timers to control exterior lighting as indicated on the Drawings.
26 56 00 – 4 RPP-SPEC-60023 Rev.07 2/14/2018 - 2:57 PM 231 of 317
RPP-SPEC-60023, Rev. 7
B. Furnish a “HAND-OFF-AUTO” control switch and enclosure to facilitate testing of the lighting system.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine areas, spaces, and surfaces to receive exterior luminaires and poles for compliance with installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of the product. Do not proceed with installation until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. InstallFORtall prodproducts in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions and approved drawings.wings.gs
B. Locations of lumluminairesinain and poles shown on the Drawings are diagrammatic. Coordinate luminaireminaireminairINFORMATON locations with building finishes and building structure. Obtain approvall for locatlocation changes through TOC Construction Representative.
C. Set luminaires plumb,b, square, llevel and secure.
D. Install surface mounted luminairesminaires ddirectly to exterior wall, building structural steel, or an outlet box which iss supportsupported from structure.
E. Install luminaires in accordance withithh manumanufmanufacturer’s instructions.
3.3 GROUNDING A. Install grounding for exterior lighting using matematmaterialserialsONLYrials aand methods specified in Section 26 05 26, “Grounding and Bonding for Electricallectrica Systems.”
3.4 LIGHTING CONTROL SYSTEM
A. Install exterior lighting control system components in accordancerdancrd with the manufacturers’ instructions. Have installation instructions available at the construction site.
B. Install a HAND-OFF-AUTO selector switch in the control system to allow for testing of luminaires.
C. Provide separate control of exterior lighting system as follows:
1. Safety, security, and pedestrian walkway: “ON” at dusk, “OFF” at dawn.
26 56 00 – 5 RPP-SPEC-60023 Rev.07 2/14/2018 - 2:57 PM 232 of 317
RPP-SPEC-60023, Rev. 7
3.5 RACEWAYS AND BOXES
A. Install conduit system for exterior lighting using materials and methods specified in Section 26 05 33, “Raceways and Boxes for Electrical Systems.”
3.6 BUILDING WIRE
A. Install wiring for exterior lighting using materials and methods specified in Section 26 05 19, “Low Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and Cables.”
3.7 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Inspect each installed lighting unit for damage. Replace damaged luminaires and components.FORpone B. Verifyifyy proper voltage at equipment served. C. Test installedalllled luminaireslumluINFORMATONmin for proper operation. 1. Providee instrumeinstruments to make and record test results.
2. Replace or repairepairir malfunctioningmamalf luminaires and components then re-test.
3. Repeat procedure until all luminaireslu operate properly.
D. Replace inoperative luminaires.
3.8 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING
A. Clean each luminaire inside and out, includinguding plaplastics and glassware. Use methods and materials recommended by manufacturer.nufacufaONLYturer B. Aim adjustable luminaires to provide required lightht intensitiintensitintensities as indicated on the Drawings or as directed by the TOC Construction Representative.epresentatiresentat
C. Adjust exterior lighting controls to obtain the following performanceerformrfo unless otherwise indicated on the Drawings or directed by the TOC Construction Representative:
1. “ON” at sunset “OFF” sunrise.
END OF SECTION 26 56 00
26 56 00 – 6 RPP-SPEC-60023 Rev.07 2/14/2018 - 2:57 PM 233 of 317
RPP-SPEC-60023, Rev. 7
SECTION 31 23 00
EXCAVATION AND FILL
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY OF WORK
A. Section Includes:
1. Preparing subgrades for slabs-on-grade pavements. 2.FOR Excavating and backfilling for buildings and structures. 3. DrainageDrainDrai course for concrete slabs-on-grade.
1.2 RELATED DOCUMENTS,CUME CODES, AND STANDARDS
Drawings and generalINFORMATON provisionprovisions of the Contract Statement of Work, including Division 01 Specificationn SectionSectionsSections, apply to this Section.
The following documents and others refrereferenced therein, form part of the Contract to the extent designated in this Section. ReferencReferenReferenced documents are those current as of the date of this Section unless otherwise indicated.icated.cated.
A. ASTM International (ASTM)
ASTM D653 Standard TerminolTerminoTerminology Relating to Soil, Rock, and Contained FFluidsluids
ASTM D1557 Test Method for LaboratorLaboratoryONLYaborator Compaction Characteristics of Soiloil Using MModified Effort
ASTM D2922 Test Methods for Density of Soil aand Soil-Aggregate in Place by NucleaNuclearuc Methods (Shallow Depth)
ASTM D4491 Test Methods for Water Permeability of Geotextiles by Permittivity
ASTM D4632 Test Method for Grab Breaking Load and Elongation of Geotextiles
ASTM D6938 Standard Test Method for In-Place Density and Water Content of Soil and Soil-Aggregate by Nuclear Methods (Shallow Depth)
31 23 00 – 1 RPP-SPEC-60023 Rev.07 2/14/2018 - 2:57 PM 234 of 317
RPP-SPEC-60023, Rev. 7
B. Code of Federal Regulations (CFR)
29 CFR 1926 Safety and Health Regulations for Construction
C. Hanford Documents
TFC-ENG-STD-06 Design Loads for Tank Farm Facilities TFC-ESHQ-S-STD-30 Implementation of DOE-0344, Excavating, Trenching, and Shoring D. Washington State Department of Transportation (WSDOT)
WSDOT M41-10 Standard Specifications for Road, Bridge, and Municipal Construction, Section 9-03.9, Aggregates FOR for Ballast and Crushed Surfacing
1.3 DEFINITIONSNS A. Backfill: Soilili INFORMATONmateriamatermaterial used to fill an excavation. 1. Initial Backfill:ckfill:kfill: BackfillBac placed beside and over pipe in a trench, including haunches to supportpport sidessid of pipe.
2. Final Backfill: Backfillckfill placplplaced over initial backfill to fill a trench.
B. Bedding Course: Aggregate layeryer placed over the excavated subgrade in a trench before laying pipe.
C. Borrow Material: Material from requirededd excavexcavaexcavations or from designated borrow areas on or near site.
D. Completed Course: A course or layer that is readyONLYdy for nextnexn layer or next phase of Work.
E. Drainage Course: Aggregate layer supporting the slab-on-graden-graderade that also minimized upward capillary flow of pore water.
F. Fill: Soil materials used to raise existing grades.
G. Lift: Loose (un-compacted) layer of material.
H. Prepared Ground Surface: Ground surface after completion of required demolition, clearing and grubbing, scalping of sod, stripping of topsoil, excavation to grade, and subgrade preparation.
I. Selected backfill material: Materials available on-site that WRPS Construction Engineer determines to be suitable for specific use.
31 23 00 – 2 RPP-SPEC-60023 Rev.07 2/14/2018 - 2:57 PM 235 of 317
RPP-SPEC-60023, Rev. 7
J. Structures: Buildings, footings, foundations, retaining walls, slabs, curbs, or other man-made stationary features constructed above or below the ground surface.
K. Structural Fill: Fill materials as required under structures, pavements, and other facilities.
L. Utilities: On-site underground pipes, conduits, ducts, and cables, as well as underground services within buildings.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. See the Contract Statement of Work for submittal procedures. B. ApprovalFORova Required 1.Qualif Qualifications for Soils Technician (field inspector).
2. Shoringhoring PlanPla (if required): Design of shoring shall be sealed by a professionalINFORMATONional enengineer registered in the State of Washington. C. Approval Not Requiredquired
1. Competent person:on: BeforeBeforBefo excavation and in writing, submit identity of individual designatedted CompComCompetent Person as defined in 29 CFR 1926.650 and as required by thee approvedapprove safety and health program.
1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Provide survey control to avoid unauthorizedorizedrized over-excavation.ovove
B. Deliverable Documentation: The following docudocumentsocumentsment and records, required by this Section, shall be delivered to Construction DocumenDocumentONLYocumen Control. Document ParagrapharagraphLY
Backfill Permit 1.6.A
Excavation Permit 1.6.B
In-Place Density Tests 3.13.C
Soil Compaction Test Report 3.12.C
Utility Location Marker Verification 3.12.D
31 23 00 – 3 RPP-SPEC-60023 Rev.07 2/14/2018 - 2:57 PM 236 of 317
RPP-SPEC-60023, Rev. 7
1.6 PERMITS
A. Permits are addressed by TOC work control process.
B. Deleted. 1. Deleted. 2. Deleted.
1.7 SITE CONDITIONS
A. Do not place backfill or fill on frozen ground.
B. Materialerial excavated during inclement weather shall not be used as fill or backfill untilFORil after mmaterial drains and dries sufficiently for proper compaction.
C. Do not place backfillbacba or fill on frozen ground.
PART 2 PRODUCTS INFORMATON
2.1 MATERIALS
A. Use materials free of frozenozen particparticles, lumps, organic matter, and trash for backfill and fill, bedding, and stabilization.lization.zation
B. Satisfactory Soils: Soil Classificationcation GroupsGro GW, GP, GM, SW, SP, and SM according to ASTM D2487, or a combinationombinationmbination of these groups; free of rock or gravel larger than 3 in. in any dimension,on, debrisdebris, waste, frozen materials, vegetation, and other deleterious matter. C. Unsatisfactory Soils: Soil Classification GroupssONLY GC, SC,SCS CL, ML, OL, CH, MH, OH, and PT according to ASTM D2487, or a combinationmbination of these groups.
1. Unsatisfactory soils also include satisfactory soilsoils not mammaintained within two percent of optimum moisture content at time of compcompaction.
D. Base Course: Top course conforming to WSDOT M41-10, Section 9-03.9(3), Crushed Surfacing Base Course.
E. Backfill and Fill: Obtain from excavation or locations designated by the Company.
1. Backfill within the Tank Farm using excavation (in-situ) material or 5/8 minus crushed rock. 2. Use of any other imported material will require TOC Construction Representative’s approval. 3. Controlled Density Fill (CDF): See Section 03 30 00, “Concrete.”
31 23 00 – 4 RPP-SPEC-60023 Rev.07 2/14/2018 - 2:57 PM 237 of 317
RPP-SPEC-60023, Rev. 7
F. Bedding for Underground Piping, Tubing, Conduit, and Utility Lines: Sand as defined in ASTM D653 or excavated sandy material having less than 20% gravel particles. Gravel particles shall have a maximum dimension of 1/2 in.
G. Location Marker: 3-in. wide, detectable plastic tape imprinted with warning such as “CAUTION – BURIED INSTALLATION BELOW” at maximum 4-ft intervals. “Terra Tape Sentry Line 620” with “Terra Clips,” both by Reef Industries, or approved substitute.
H. Geotextile Filter Fabric: Polypropylene, non-woven geotextile with grab tensile strength (ASTM D4632) of 90 lb/ft and water flow rate (ASTM D4491) of 150 gallons per minute per square foot. US Fabric Type US 90NW or similar.
I. Slopee Stabilization:Sta Ballast in accordance with WSDOT M 41-10, Section 9-03.9(1)FOR3.9(1) or 9-03.9(2).
J. General StabilizaStabilizStabilization: Crushed rock with maximum fragment size of 3/4 in.
PART 3 EXECUTION INFORMATON
3.1 PREPARATION
A. Protect structures, utilitiesies sidewasidewalks, and other facilities from damage caused by settlement, lateral movement,ent,t, undermining,underm washout, and other hazards created by earth moving.
B. Protect and maintain erosion and sedimentationedimentatidimentat controls during earth moving operations.
C. Protect subgrades and foundation soils fromm freezifreezfreezingng temperature and frost. Remove temporary protection before placing subsequentbsequenONLYseque materials. 3.2 EXCAVATION
A. Excavation work shall comply with TFC-ESHQ-S-STD-30.30.30
B. Excavation shall be defined to mean any hand digging or machine digging below original grade. These requirements constitute the need for an “Excavation Permit” (Form A-7400-373). If an excavation permit is not required, this section does not apply.
C. Notify TOC Construction Representative before excavation.
D. Locate and expose underground utilities using subsurface scanning and hand tools, or other methods if approved by the TOC Construction Representative.
E. If cultural properties (e.g., bones and artifacts) are encountered, stop excavation and notify the Company. Obtain approval before resuming excavation.
31 23 00 – 5 RPP-SPEC-60023 Rev.07 2/14/2018 - 2:57 PM 238 of 317
RPP-SPEC-60023, Rev. 7
F. If unexpected debris is encountered, stop excavation and notify the TOC Construction Representative. Obtain approval before resuming excavation.
G. Excavation of contaminated soil will be administered in accordance with contractor procedures and programs.
H. Excavate earth and establish protective systems in accordance with the approved safety and health program.
3.3 EXCAVATION FOR STRUCTURES
A. Excavate to indicated elevations and dimensions within a tolerance of plus or minus 2 in. If applicable, extend excavations a sufficient distance from structures for placinglacin and removing concrete formwork, for installing services and other construction,nstructionFOR and for inspections. Trim to neat lines where concrete is to be depositedsitedted agaiagainagainst earth.
1. Excavationscavatiavat ons for Footings and Foundations: Minimize disturbance to bottomINFORMATON of excaexcavation. Some over-excavation will likely be needed. Excavationionon shall bbe trimmed out with crushed rock fill and compacted before placingingng foundafoundfoundations.
2. Make excavationn bottom ccompact, level, true and free of loose material. Correct over-excavationationion byy extendingexe concrete down to undisturbed earth at time of concrete placementcementement oro by placing and compacting structural backfill and fill.
B. In-Situ Soils
1. If not contaminated, salvage excavatedted soisosoil fofor use as backfill and fill material. ONLY
2. Using nuclear density gauge, conduct in-placece densitdensity tests or use existing testing laboratory reports (proctors) if backfill and compactioncompacom is to be completed via approved control procedure. Recordd resultresults for use as standard density during backfill compaction. (See Paragraphar 3.12.)
3. Dispose of contaminated and excess soil in accordance with Construction Waste Management Plan.
4. If stabilization is required because of excavation, finish subgrade 3 in. below elevations shown on Drawings.
31 23 00 – 6 RPP-SPEC-60023 Rev.07 2/14/2018 - 2:57 PM 239 of 317
RPP-SPEC-60023, Rev. 7
3.4 CONTOURS AND ELEVATIONS
A. Excavation for Hose-in-Hose Transfer Line (HIHTL):
1. Excavate deep enough to allow laying HIHTL at line and grade shown on Drawings. Two inches of compacted bedding is required under HIHTL. Correct over-excavation by placing and compacting backfill and fill. Pare holes in trench bottoms for pipe couplings so pipe will bear full length of pipe barrel or pipe section.
2. The TOC Construction Representative or designee must review the trench for compliance with design requirements prior to backfilling.
B. Excavationvativat for Conduit Trenches: Excavate to contours and elevations shown on Drawings.awings.FOR
C. Excavationtion for CommonC Earthwork: Excavate as needed for general purpose, or as shown on Drawings.DrINFORMATONwin D. Trench bottoms.. ExcavatExcavate and shape trench bottoms to be uniform and even. Remove projectingg stones anand sharp objects along trench subgrade. Allow for pipe or conduit beddingngg as indiindicated.
1. Excavate trenches forr HIHTHIHHIHTL installation 2-in. deeper than elevation required to allow for bedding cocourse. Over excavation for conduit bedding is not required iff soil is frefree of projecting stones and sharp objects.
E. In-Situ Soils 1. Salvage excavated soil for use as backfillfif lONLY and ffilfill material. 2. Using nuclear density gauge, conduct in-placece densitdensity tests or use existing testing laboratory reports (proctors) if backfill and compcomcompaction is to be completed via approved control procedure. Recordrd resultresults for use as standard density during backfill compaction. (See Paragraphara 3.7.)
3. Dispose of contaminated and excess soil in accordance with Construction Waste Management Plan.
4. If stabilization is required because of excavation, finish subgrade 3-in. below elevations shown on Drawings.
F. Shoring
1. If conditions require shoring, a Shoring Plan shall be submitted to WRPS for approval. Reference TFC-ESHQ-S-STD-30 for responsibilities and implementation requirements.
31 23 00 – 7 RPP-SPEC-60023 Rev.07 2/14/2018 - 2:57 PM 240 of 317
RPP-SPEC-60023, Rev. 7
2. Design of shoring shall be in accordance with TFC-ENG-STD-06, Section 3.7.
3.5 SUBGRADE INSPECTION
A. Proof-roll subgrade below the building slab and pavements to identify soft pockets and areas of excess yielding. Do not proof-roll when subgrade is wet or saturated.
B. Reconstruct subgrades damaged by freezing temperatures, frost, rain, accumulated water, or construction activities, as directed by WRPS Construction Engineer.
C. Test or inspectin subgrade materials as required for compaction requirements as applicable.plicable.FOR
3.6 STORAGE OFF SOIL MMATERIALS
A. Stockpile excavatedINFORMATONvated mmaterial that is suitable for use as fill or backfill until material is needed.deded.
B. Stockpile borrow soill materialmaterials and excavated soil materials without intermixing. Place, grade, and shape stockpiles to drain surface water.
C. Do not stockpile excavated soiloil materiamaterials adjacent to trenches and other excavations, unless excavation sideide slopesslopes and excavation support systems are designed, constructed, and maintainedneded for stostockpile loads.
D. Do not stockpile excavated materials nearar or over existing facilities, adjacent property, if weight of stockpiled material couldould indininduceONLYduc excessive settlement. 3.7 BACKFILL AND FILL PREPARATION
A. The subcontractor shall prepare a Backfill Permit (Seee AttachmAttachment 1) and obtain approval from the TOC Construction Representative prioror to comcommencing backfill.
B. Remove debris and organic material from area to be backfilled or filled.
C. Do not backfill by sluicing or flooding unless written approval is obtained from TOC Construction Representative.
D. Allow concrete to cure before placing backfill against concrete.
E. Keep placement surfaces free of water, debris, and foreign material during placement and compaction of fill and backfill materials.
F. Do not place fill or backfill, if fill or backfill material is frozen or if surface upon which fill or backfill is to be placed is frozen.
31 23 00 – 8 RPP-SPEC-60023 Rev.07 2/14/2018 - 2:57 PM 241 of 317
RPP-SPEC-60023, Rev. 7
3.8 BACKFILL AND FILL
A. The subcontractor shall prepare a Backfill Permit (See Attachment 1) and obtain approval from the TOC Construction Representative prior to commencing backfill.
B. Perform backfilling and filling in accordance with an approved soil/gravel compaction procedure (for example Attachment 2 or Attachment 3).
C. Place specified common or native backfill in even, loose layers not more than 8-in. deep if using Attachment 2, or not more than 6-in. deep if using Attachment 3, in a manner that avoids segregation, and compact each lift to specified densities prior to placing succeeding lifts. Slope lifts only where necessaryssary to conform to final grades or as necessary to keep placement surfaces drainedFORined of wwater.
D. Performm initial bbackfilling and filling in presence of TOC Construction Representative/Engineeringativev INFORMATON/ ngi Representative. E. Obtain test resultslts (as appapplicable) and adjust compaction method, if required.
F. Obtain TOC Constructionctionio RepresentativeRepr approval before proceeding with backfilling and filling.
3.9 CONTROLLED DENSITY FILL
A. The subcontractor shall prepare a Backfillackfill PePermit (See Attachment 1) and obtain approval from the TOC Construction RepresentRepresentative prior to commencing backfill. B. The Controlled Density Fill (CDF) shall be placededONLYd in a uuniform manner that will prevent voids or segregation of the bedding and fifillingilling matmaterials. If required, the CDF shall be consolidated with internal vibrators.
C. The CDF shall not be subjected to load and shall remain undisturundisturbed by construction activities for a minimum of 24 hours after placement.em
3.10 BACKFILL AND FILL – FOUNDATIONS AND SLABS
A. The subcontractor shall prepare a Backfill Permit (See Attachment 1) and obtain approval from the TOC Construction Representative prior to commencing backfill.
B. Under Structures: Within influence area beneath structures, slabs, curbs, backfill with structural fill, unless otherwise indicated by design. A minimum of 6 in. of granular fill is required immediately below concrete footings, slabs and other concrete structures.
31 23 00 – 9 RPP-SPEC-60023 Rev.07 2/14/2018 - 2:57 PM 242 of 317
RPP-SPEC-60023, Rev. 7
C. Place loose layers of specified structural backfill and fill evenly up sides of wall to avoid unbalanced loading. Limit each layer that is 24-in. below finish grade to 8-in. depth. Limit each layer in top 24 in. to 4-in. depth.
D. Compact each layer uniformly to 95% of maximum density as determined by specified compaction tests in Paragraph 3.12.
3.11 FINISH GRADING AND STABILIZATION
A. Grade each area disturbed by work to blend into existing contours. Slope area to drain away from structures. Comply with compaction requirements and grade to cross sections, lines, and elevations indicated.
B. Rakee eaceach area to remove surface cobbles larger than 6 in. Dispose of excess materialFORterial andan debris as directed by the Company.
C. Stabilizeze area withwiw minimum of 1-in. and maximum of a 3-in. course of specified stabilizationon mamaterial.INFORMATONeri D. After finish gradingding and sstabilization, remove surface markers and flags.
3.12 FIELD INSPECTIONS ANDND TESTTESTS
A. Testing Agency: Contractoror shall enengage a qualified geotechnical/soils engineering testing agency to perform ttests and inspections.
B. Allow testing agency to inspect andd test ssubgradesubgub and each fill or backfill lift. Proceed with subsequent earth movingg onlonlyy aftafafter test results for previously complete work comply with requirements.ts.s. C. Compaction Testing (not required if using Attachmenttact ONLYhment 2, “Procedure for Backfill and Compaction of Existing Soils within Tank Farms”arms” oro Attachment 3, “Procedure for Backfill and Compaction of 5/8 Minusnusus CrushCrusheCrushed Rock”)
1. Test compacted backfill and fill at the following intervalsintervals.ntervals
a. Backfill and fill: one test of each layer, each layer shall not exceed 8in.
2. Perform compaction testing in accordance with the following standards. Provide report required by each standard.
a. Compaction control: ASTM D1557.
i. In-place density: ASTM D6938. Each layer shall be as dense as the existing soil density (Paragraph 3.1.H.2) and compacted uniformly to 95% of maximum density as established by compaction tests (per ASTM D1557).
31 23 00 – 10 RPP-SPEC-60023 Rev.07 2/14/2018 - 2:57 PM 243 of 317
RPP-SPEC-60023, Rev. 7
ii. Prior to completion of backfill, perform random surveillance to verify buried utility marker tape has been installed and record results.
D. Buried Pipe and Utility Location Marker Verification
1. Prior to completion of backfill, perform random surveillance to verify buried utility marker tape has been installed and record results.
END OF SECTION 31 23 00 FOR
INFORMATON
ONLY
31 23 00 – 11 RPP-SPEC-60023 Rev.07 2/14/2018 - 2:57 PM 244 of 317
RPP-SPEC-60023, Rev. 7
SECTION 31 23 00 – ATTACHMENT 1
BACKFILL PERMIT FORM
Key to Backfill Permit Form
Item # Description
1 Permit No. – Sequential number, developed by the Project; i.e., “5-0001.” 2 Self-explanatory. 3 Project title. 4 ExampleExampExam – “22337 Release 5.” 5 Describescribe locationl of the backfill; i.e. “Conduit run 001, between Handhole-005ndhole-00 and Handhole-006.” 6 Enter thehee aapplicableINFORMATONpplicabpplica drawings that show the backfill location. 7 Enter any othertherher referereference documents. 8 Discipline Foremanman signasignsignature, signifying that their work in the excavation to be backfilled is complete.mplete. “N/A” will be entered if given discipline is not applicable to the specifiedifiedfied bacbackbackfill area. 9 Quality Signature, signifyinging that allaal the quality requirements for the backfill area have been met prior to backfill anand backfill may commence. 10 Field Work Supervisor signature,, signifysignifyingin that the all contract requirements for the backfill area have been met andnd backbackfibackfill may commence. 11 Enter backfill requirements, typically constructiononstruconstru tion specification reference. 12 “Construction Representative,” this signatureeONLY would bbe from the Construction Group, signifying that they agree that all of the requirementsrequiremequirem for the backfill area have been met and permission to proceed withthh backfilbackfill is granted. 13 Date that “Construction Representative” signed off thee form. 14 Date that the applicable discipline foreman, Quality and Field Work Supervisor signed the form.
31 23 00 – Att. 1–1 RPP-SPEC-60023 Rev.07 2/14/2018 - 2:57 PM 245 of 317
RPP-SPEC-60023, Rev. 7
(1) No.: BACKFILL PERMIT
(2) Project or Work Package No.: (3) Title: (4) Contract No.:
(5) Description of Backfill Work FORF Approvals (14) Date OR (8) Electrical R (8)( PipiPiping ININFONFO (8) CarpentryarpentryFORMATONFORFO OR (6) Drawings: (8) Concrete RRM (8) Layout AT (8) Other ON (7) Reference (8) Other ONLYO (9) Quality NL
(10) FWS Y
(11) Backfill Requirements Authorization to Proceed by
(12) WRPS Construction Representative (13) Date END OF ATTACHMENT 1
31 23 00 – Att. 1–2 RPP-SPEC-60023 Rev.07 2/14/2018 - 2:57 PM 246 of 317
RPP-SPEC-60023, Rev. 7
SECTION 31 23 00 – ATTACHMENT 2
PROCEDURE FOR BACKFILL AND COMPACTION OF EXISTING SOILS WITHIN TANK FARMS
PURPOSE This procedure identifies a process for placement and compaction of soil backfill by a controlled method. This procedure also defines the degree of compactive effort required to produce acceptable in-place densities as an alternative to performing density tests with a nuclear density gauge.
SCOPE This procedure definesFORfines tththe requirements for placement and compaction of soil backfill including inspection methodsdss to verifverify the acceptability of the compacted backfill within Tank Farm areas defined on project drawings.awings.wings. TThe compaction details in this were taken from Fluor Federal Services Job Bulletin No.o.. JB-RPP-041,JB-RPR Rev. 1, which has been accepted standard practice in the Tank Farms. INFORMATON In-place testing of compacted backfillackfillckfill ininclincluding sand bedding by use of the nuclear density gauge is not required for this procedure.dure.re. RanRaRandom periodic visual observation and monitoring of the backfill operation and compactive effort shashall be the basis for acceptance.
PROCEDURE Compaction of backfill within the Tank Farms shallshall be controlledc by adherence to this procedure and defined compactive effort within established variablesariables aas defined below. Determination of maximum standard density, from testing laboratory reportseportsorts (pro(proctors) or in situ values obtained from nuclear gauge testing of undisturbed ground is not covered byb this procedure.
Only materials as defined by the project specifications will be usedONLYsed for backfill. Keep materials free of frozen particles, lumps, organic matter, and debris. Ensurere that the area to be backfilled is not frozen and the backfill material does not contain frozen material.rial.
If sand is encountered during excavation perform the following for installationllationlation aand compaction. A. Excavate to proper installation depth. Use trench box if necessary. B. Install pipe on stone free earth. Rake native soil or sand bed if required. C. Cover pipe with 6” of 5/8” minus top course material.
Backfilling by means of sluicing or flooding with water is not permitted.
Backfill material shall be placed in loose uniform lifts not to exceed 8 in. in depth.
If needed, water shall be added and mixed with the backfill material before it is compacted to achieve optimum moisture content.
Optimum moisture content shall be approximately 8.5% and may vary as much as plus or minus 2.5% depending on different soil types and gradations. The addition of water to cohesive soil
31 23 00 – Att. 2-1 RPP-SPEC-60023 Rev.07 2/14/2018 - 2:57 PM 247 of 317
RPP-SPEC-60023, Rev. 7
types shall be such that the material is easily compactable by mechanical manipulation as defined in this procedure.
Backfill shall be brought up in layers. Each layer shall be compacted full width and length by use of either pneumatic or gas powered compaction equipment such as a Wacker®31, model BS-600 manufactured by Wacker Corporation or equivalent. Alternatively, a pneumatic “Pogo Stick” such as that manufactured by Jet Equipment or equivalent may be used. The use of “Pogo Stick” compaction equipment shall be limited to use in small confined areas such as that found in and around pipes and conduits and small excavations. Alternative compaction equipment may be used if acceptable to the TOC Construction Representative. All equipment used shall be in good working order capable of performing to manufacturer’s standards.
The compactive effort for each layer of backfill shall be as follows:
! If a WackererFOR or equivalentequivequi is used, a minimum of three complete passes shall be made. ! If a “Pogo Stick”ickck” ty typeype device is used, a minimum of eight complete passes is made. One complete pass shall be defidefdefinednedne as full rotation over the area being compacted. As a minimum, a rotation shall beINFORMATONonce ovover and once back across the area being compacted. The rate of equipment travel shall be approximatelypproximatproximat 15 lineal feet per minute.
Water shall be added as necessary betweenetweenween individualin passes to maintain the moisture content within the optimum range.
Bring up backfill material evenly on each sidede of walls,wall structures, and pipeline in order to avoid damaging or displacing them by unbalanced loading.ading. ObtainOb written approval from the Tank Operations Contractor, Washington River Protectionsionsons SolutSolutions, LLC, for variations from this process that may result in uneven load distribution.
If backfill material is to be placed against or on top of newlywlly pouredpourpou ed concrete, ensure that the concrete curing period has been achieved and concrete designn strengthONLYtrengthrength achieved as required by ACI 301. Backfill material shall not be placed against foundationon walls bbefore the curing period is completed, unless written approval from the design engineer is obtainedbtained on the Backfill Permit.
INSPECTION Control of backfill placement, optimum moisture content, and compactive effort shall be accomplished by visual surveillance. Surveillances shall be performed by a trained and qualified soils technician.
Personnel performing oversight and surveillance of the backfill operations shall possess a thorough working knowledge of earthwork and soils relative to material types and classification, excavation methods and procedures, material gradation, fill and backfill operations, compaction equipment and methods and moisture control. Oversight personnel shall have received training to perform visual surveillances of backfill operations.
31 Wacker is a registered trademark of Wacker Neuson Production Americas, LLC, Menomonee Falls, Wisconsin.
31 23 00 – Att. 2-2 RPP-SPEC-60023 Rev.07 2/14/2018 - 2:57 PM 248 of 317
RPP-SPEC-60023, Rev. 7
Verification that soil moisture content is within the specified range shall be accomplished by visual and physical examination of the wetted material. Cohesive soil containing the correct optimum moisture content shall exhibit no evidence of saturation yet shall have enough moisture to maintain shape when deformed. Physical examination of soil cohesion and plasticity shall be the basis for determining proper moisture content.
The oversight person shall visually observe the backfill and compaction operation to verify adherence to this procedure. Type of compaction equipment, use of equipment, depth of lifts, number of passes and rate of travel shall be observed. Surveillances shall be documented on surveillance reports.
The frequency of surveillances for backfill operations shall as a minimum be at the beginning of backfilling for a project or job and at least daily thereafter while work is in progress.
INFORMATONEEND OF ATTACHMENT 2
ONLY
31 23 00 – Att. 2-3 RPP-SPEC-60023 Rev.07 2/14/2018 - 2:57 PM 249 of 317
RPP-SPEC-60023, Rev. 7
SECTION 31 23 00 – ATTACHMENT 3
PROCEDURE FOR BACKFILL AND COMPACTION OF 5/8 MINUS CRUSHED ROCK
PURPOSE This procedure identifies a process for placement and compaction of 5/8 minus crushed rock backfill by a controlled method. This procedure also defines the degree of compactive effort required to produce acceptable in-place densities as an alternative to performing density tests with a nuclear density gauge.
SCOPE This procedure definesFORfines the requirements for placement and compaction of 5/8 minus crushed rock backfill includingingg inspecinspection methods to verify the acceptability of the compacted backfill within Tank Farm areass defineddefine on project drawings. The compaction details in this were taken from American Electric testestt plplanINFORMATONn 5454891-006-TP-001. In-place testing of compacted backfillackfillckfill by use of the nuclear density gauge is not required for this procedure. Random periodic visualal observaobservation and monitoring of the backfill operation and compactive effort shall be the basis fororr acceptaacceptance.
PROCEDURE Compaction of 5/8 minus crushed rock backfilll shall be controlledc by adherence to this procedure and defined compactive effort within establishedstablishedablishe variables as defined below.
Keep materials free of frozen particles, lumps, organic matter, anand debris. Ensure that the area to be backfilled is not frozen and the backfill material does notot contconcontainONLYin frozen material. Backfilling by means of sluicing or flooding with water is not permitted.ermitted.
Backfill material shall be placed in loose uniform lifts not to exceed 6 in. in depdepth.
If needed, water shall be added and mixed with the backfill material before it is compacted to achieve optimum moisture content.
Optimum moisture content shall be approximately 9.5 percent and may vary as much as plus or minus 1.5 percent. The addition of water shall be such that the material is easily compactable by mechanical manipulation as defined in this procedure.
Backfill shall be brought up in layers. Each layer shall be compacted full width and length by use of a Wacker, model BS 50-2 or model WP 1550 AW manufactured by Wacker Corporation or equivalent. All equipment used shall be in good working order capable of performing to manufacturer’s standards.
The compactive effort for each layer of backfill shall be as follows:
31 23 00 – Att. 3-1 RPP-SPEC-60023 Rev.07 2/14/2018 - 2:57 PM 250 of 317
RPP-SPEC-60023, Rev. 7
If a Wacker BS 50-2 or equivalent is used, a minimum of 4 complete passes shall be made. If a Wacker WP 1550 or equivalent is used, a minimum of 2 complete passes shall be made.
One complete pass shall be defined as full rotation over the area being compacted. As a minimum, a rotation shall be once over and once back across the area being compacted. The rate of equipment travel shall be approximately 15 lineal feet per minute.
Water shall be added as necessary between individual passes to maintain the moisture content within the optimum range.
Bring up backfill material evenly on each side of walls, structures, and pipeline in order to avoid damaging or displacing them by unbalanced loading. Obtain written approval from the TOC Construction Representative for variations from this process that may result in uneven load distribution. FOR If backfill material is to be placedplac against or on top of newly poured concrete, ensure that the concrete curing period hasas been achieved and concrete design strength achieved as required by ACI 301. Backfill materialls shallhallINFORMATON notno be placed against foundation walls before the curing period is completed, unless written approvalpproval frfrom the design engineer is obtained on the Backfill Permit.
INSPECTION Control of backfill placement, optimum moistureoistureisture contentcocon and compactive effort shall be accomplished by visual surveillance. Surveillanceslancesances shshashall be performed by a trained and qualified soils technician.
Personnel performing oversight and surveillance of thee backfill operations shall possess a thorough working knowledge of earthwork and soils relativetiveve to mmaterial types and classification, excavation methods and procedures, material gradation, fill and backfbackfill operations, compaction equipment and methods, and moisture control. Oversight personnelonnelONLYnnel shashalshall have received training to perform visual surveillances of backfill operations.
Verification that soil moisture content is within the specified range shalll be accoaccomplished by visual and physical examination of the wetted material.
The oversight person shall visually observe the backfill and compaction operation to verify adherence to this procedure. Type of compaction equipment, use of equipment, depth of lifts, number of passes, and rate of travel shall be observed. Surveillances shall be documented on surveillance reports.
The frequency of surveillances for backfill operations shall as a minimum be at the beginning of backfilling for a project or job and at least daily thereafter while work is in progress.
END OF ATTACHMENT 3
31 23 00 – Att. 3-2 RPP-SPEC-60023 Rev.07 2/14/2018 - 2:57 PM 251 of 317
RPP-SPEC-60023, Rev. 7
SECTION 33 10 00
WATER UTILITIES
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Material, fabrication, installation, and testing of below grade piping from the raw water main line to the backflow preventer in the Air and Water Service Building and of sewer piping to tie into the existing chemical drain line. 1.2 RELATEDFOR DOCUMENTS,DO CODES, AND STANDARDS Drawings and genergenerageneral provisions of the Contract Statement of Work, including Division 01 Specificationon SectionSectioSections, apply to this Section. The following documentsummINFORMATONnts andan others referenced therein form part of Contract to the extent designated in thishisis SectionSection. Referenced documents are those current as of the date of this Section unless otherwiseerwise iinindicated.
A. American Society of MechanicalMechanica Engineers (ASME)
ASME B16.11 Forged Fittings,F Socket-Welding and Threaded
ASME B16.5 Pipee Flanges and Flanged Fittings NPS 1/2 through NPS 244 Metric/ Inch Standard
ASME B31.9, 2014 Building Servicesrvicesvices PiP Piping
ASME B40.1 Gauges: Pressure IndicatingONLYndicatin Dial Type — Elastic Element
ASME B&PVC, 2013 Boiler and Pressure Vesselel Code
Section VIII Rules for Construction of Pressure Vessels
Section IX Qualification Standard for Welding and Brazing Procedures, Welders, Brazers, and Welding and Brazing Operations
B. American Society for Nondestructive Testing (ASNT)
ASNT SNT-TC-1A Personnel Qualifications and Certification in Nondestructive Testing
33 10 00 – 1 RPP-SPEC-60023 Rev.07 2/14/2018 - 2:57 PM 252 of 317
RPP-SPEC-60023, Rev. 7
C. American Society of Safety Engineers®32 (ASSE®32)
ASSE 1013 Reduced Pressure Principle Backflow Preventers and Reduced Pressure Principle Fire Protection Backflow Preventers
D. ASTM International (ASTM)
ASTM A53 Standard Specification for Pipe, Steel, Black and Hot-Dipped, Zinc-Coated, Welded and Seamless
ASTM A193 Standard Specification for Alloy-Steel and Stainless Steel Bolting
ASTMFORTM A194A1 Standard Specification for Carbon and Alloy Steel Nuts for Bolts for High Pressure
ASTM A865865 Standard Specification for Threaded Couplings, INFORMATONSteel, Black or Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) Welded or Seamless, for use in Steel Pipe Joints
ASTM A536 Standard Specification for Ductile Iron Castings
ASTM A234 StandardStandaStan Specification for Piping Fittings of Wrought Carbon Steel and Alloy Steel for Moderate andndd High TeTemperature Service
ASTM C547 Standardrdd SpecificationSpecifSpecific for Mineral Fiber Pipe Insulation ASTM C552 Specifications for ONLYCellularCellulaCellul Glass Block and Pipe Thermal Insulation
ASTM D2321 Standard Practice for Undergroundndergrounndergrou Installation of Thermoplastic Pipe for Sewerswers and Other Gravity Flow Applications
ASTM D2661 Standard Specification for Acrylonitrile-Butadiene- Styrene (ABS) Schedule 40 Plastic Drain, Waste, and Vent Pipe and Fittings
32 ASSE is a registered trademark of American Society of Safety Engineers, Des Plaines, Illinois.
33 10 00 – 2 RPP-SPEC-60023 Rev.07 2/14/2018 - 2:57 PM 253 of 317
RPP-SPEC-60023, Rev. 7
E. American Water Works Association (AWWA)
AWWA C104 Cement-Mortar Lining for Ductile-Iron Pipe and Fitting for Water
AWWA C110 Ductile-Iron and Gray-Iron Fittings, 3 in. Through 48 in., for Water and Other Liquids
AWWA C111 Rubber-Gasket Joints for Ductile-Iron Pressure Pipe and Fittings
AWWA C151 American National Standard for Ductile-Iron Pipe, Centrifugally Cast, for Water
AWWAWWAFOR C153C Ductile-Iron Compact Fittings for Water Service
AWWAA C223 Fabricated Steel and Stainless Steel Tapping INFORMATONSleeves AWWA C509 Resilient-Seated Gate Valves for Water-Supply Service
AWWA C511 Reduced-PressureRe Principle Backflow Prevention AssemAsseAssembly
AWWA C600 Standardtandardandard forfo Installation of Ductile-Iron Water Mainsnss and ThTheTheir Appurtenances
AWWA C800 Undergroundund ServiceServicServ Line Valves and Fittings AWWA M14 Recommended PracticePraPr ONLYctice forf Backflow Prevention and Cross-Connectiontionion ConContControl
F. AWWA Pacific Northwest Section
Cross-Connection Control Manualanuaan Accepted Procedures and Practices
G. International Association of Plumbing and Mechanical Officials (IAPMO)
UPC Uniform Plumbing Code (UPC)
H. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA)
NFPA 24 Standard for the Installation of Private Fire Service Mains and Their Appurtenances
I. University of Southern California Foundation for Cross-Connection Control and Hydraulic Research
33 10 00 – 3 RPP-SPEC-60023 Rev.07 2/14/2018 - 2:57 PM 254 of 317
RPP-SPEC-60023, Rev. 7
Manual of Cross-Connection Control
J. Washington Administrative Code (WAC)
WAC 246-290 Cross Connection Control
K. American Society for Nondestructive Testing (ASNT)
ASNT SNT-TC-1A Personnel Qualifications and Certification in Nondestructive Testing
L. American Welding Society (AWS) AWSFOR QC1Q Certification of Welding Inspectors 1.3 SUBMITTALSALSLS
A. See the Contractontrac Statement of Work for the submittal process. INFORMATON B. Approval Requireduired
1. Gauges: Afterter testintesting submit for approval vendor information showing that gauges usedd in testintesting are calibrated and capable of measuring at least 1.5 times test pressure,sure, but nno more than 4 times test pressure.
2. Flushing: After testing submit for approval verification showing that the flushing operations were performedformed for a sufficient time to ensure thorough cleaning.
3. Mainline: After testing submit for approvalpprova verification showing that the mainline is capable of sustaining a 2000 psp psii load for 2 hours or at 50 psi in excess of the maximum static pressure. MeasureONLY lleakage in accordance with NFPA 24, Article 8.9 for undergroundd piping.
4. Welding Procedure Specifications and or Standardrd WeldiWelding Procedure Specifications: Five days before first use or start offff fabrfabrication, submit each in accordance with Paragraph 1.4.B.
5. Welding Personnel Qualifications: Five days before start of fabrication, submit welder qualification as required by Paragraph 1.4.B.
6. Examination Documentation: Five days before start of fabrication submit documentation in accordance with Paragraph 3.4.A.4 for information/record.
7. Weld Examinations as required by Paragraph 3.4.A.
33 10 00 – 4 RPP-SPEC-60023 Rev.07 2/14/2018 - 2:57 PM 255 of 317
RPP-SPEC-60023, Rev. 7
C. Approval Not Required
1. Filter Vendor information: Submit two copies: Dimensional drawings; Specifications; Installation, Operation, and Maintenance Instructions; Spare Parts List.
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Misrepresented Products: See the Contract Statement of Work for required measures to prevent use of misrepresented products.
B. Qualifications
1. Contractor’sC Material and Test Certificate for Aboveground and UndUnderground Piping in accordance with Paragraph 3.4.B.3.
2.QualificaQualific Qualification of Inspectors: A certified independent testing agency shall performrformINFORMATON allll rrequired inspections and testing. 3. Personnelnelel performingperform visual examinations shall be Certified Welding Inspectors (CWIs) wwho have received certification (current or previous certification) in accordaaccordance with AWS QC1.
4. Personnel performinging otheother nnondestructive examinations (NDE) shall be certified in accordancee with appapproved procedure, which shall meet the requirements of ASNT SNT-TC-1A.SNTNT-TC-1 Use Level II or III personnel to interpret results.
5. Examination Procedures: Examinationnation proprocedures shall be in accordance with ASME B31.9 and this Specification.cation.ation. MaMaintain copies of procedures at the jobsite. ONLY 6. Pressure Testing Procedures: Pressure testingngg proceduresproceduproce shall be in accordance with ASME B31.9 and this Specification.cation. MMaintain copies of procedures at jobsite.
1.5 PERMITS
A. Permits are addressed by TOC work control process.
1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. See the Contract Statement of Work for general requirements.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 PRODUCT OPTIONS AND SUBSTITUTIONS
A. See the Contract Statement of Work for substitution approvals.
33 10 00 – 5 RPP-SPEC-60023 Rev.07 2/14/2018 - 2:57 PM 256 of 317
RPP-SPEC-60023, Rev. 7
2.2 MATERIALS
A. Sewer Pipe and Fittings: Materials shall be ABS plastic sewer pipe conforming to the requirements of ASTM D2661.
B. Raw Water Pipe and Fittings Below Grade
1. Ductile Iron Pipe: AWWA C151, Class 150.
a. Joints: Push-on joints, AWWA C111 rubber gaskets.
b. Fittings: AWWA C110, Ductile-Iron or Gray-Iron, Class 250 or AWWA C153, Ductile-Iron Compact Fittings, Class 250 or FOR XTRA FLEX®33 restrained joint high-deflection fittings. c.c Pipe and Fittings: Cement-mortar lining in accordance with AAWWA C104. 2. GalvanizedINFORMATONized SteSSteel Pipe and Fittings: ASTM A53, type E or S, galvanized, standardd weight, SSchedule 40.
a. Joints:s: ThreaThreadThreaded.
b. Fittings: ASTM A86AA865, threaded and galvanized
C. Valves
1. Gate Valves over 2 in.: AWWAWAA C509C509, Underwriters Laboratories (UL) listed or FM approved, Class 250,0, non-non-risingrisri stem, open left, mechanical joint inlet and outlet with mechanicalcalal joint unassembled accessories or Mueller AquaGrip®34 System. ONLY D. Tapping Sleeve: AWWA C223, fabricated steel, suitableuitabletable for PVC, steel, ductile iron, and cast iron pipe, outlet flange size and sleeve O.D. to susuit piping system.
E. Valve Boxes: Cast-iron with top section and cover with letteringteringer “WATER” stamped on the cover, bottom section with base of size to fit over valve, barrel approximately 5 in. in diameter, adjustable cast-iron extension of length required.
F. Gaskets: Gaskets containing asbestos are not permitted.
G. Tracer Wire: #10 AWG THHN/THWN, yellow, solid copper.
33 XTRA FLEX is a registered trademark of United States Pipe and Foundry Company, LLC, Birmingham, Alabama. 34 AquaGrip is a trademark of Mueller International, LLC, Atlanta, Georgia.
33 10 00 – 6 RPP-SPEC-60023 Rev.07 2/14/2018 - 2:57 PM 257 of 317
RPP-SPEC-60023, Rev. 7
H. Flanges, Unions, and Couplings
1. Copper Tubing: AWWA C800.
2. Dielectric: Watts Series 3003.
3. Mechanical or Push-On Type Pipe, and Fittings Below Grade.
a. UL listed or FM approved.
b. Megalug®35 malleable iron retainer/restraint gland with epoxy or bituminous outside coating and 1/2-in. minimum diameter asphalt coated tie rods.
FORc.c For PVC, use a compression connection and restraint system, Mueller AquaGrip System. I. Raw Waterer PipeINFORMATON anand Fittings from the Inlet to the Backflow Preventor
ONLY
35 Megalug is a trademark of EBAA Iron Inc., Eastland, Texas.
33 10 00 – 7 RPP-SPEC-60023 Rev.07 2/14/2018 - 2:57 PM 258 of 317
RPP-SPEC-60023, Rev. 7
Design Pressure Hydrostatic Test Design Temp Service (psig) Pressure (psig) (°F) Inlet to Backflow Preventor 150 225 +10/-0 140 Sizes 3/4 in. & smaller 1 in. & larger Pipe Stainless Steel per ASTM A312, Grade TP304L, seamless Wall Thickness Schedule 80S. Schedule 40S. Fittings Stainless Steel, ASTM A182 Grade F 304L, Stainless Steel, ASTM A182 Grade F 304L, Class Class 3000, socket weld or threaded in 3000, socket weld in accordance with ASME B16.11. accordance with ASME B16.11. Branch Fittings Integrally reinforced in accordance with MSS SP-97. Unions Stainless Steel, ASTM A182 Grade F 304L, Stainless Steel, ASTM A182 Grade F 304L, Class Class 3000, threaded or socket welded in 3000, socket weld in accordance with ASME B16.11. accordance with ASME B16.11. Flanges None. ASTM A182, Grade F 304L, CL 150, forged, raised face or flat face, slip-on or weld neck in accordance OR with ASME B16.5. Bore to match pipe ID. Bolting None.R ASTM A193, Grade B8 CL 2, alloy steel studs, and ASTM A194, Grade 8F, heavy hex nuts. Gaskets None.INFORMATONI For raised face: aramid fibers with EPDM binder, 1/8-in. thick, Garlock®36 Blueguard, Style 3700.
OR For flat face flanges: EPDM, 1/16-in. thick, Garlock Series 8314. Ball Valves Stainless Steel body ASTM A3511 Gr CF8M,CF8M Stainless Steel body ASTM A351 Gr CF8M, Full port, (2 way) Full port, threaded end connections in socket weld ends in accordance with ASME B16.11, accordance with ASME B1.20.1, sockett weldwATeld TekfilT seat, Flowtek series 7000 (V-009 & V-010). ends in accordance with ASME B16.11, TekfilekfilfilTTO seat, Flowtek series 7000 (V-004 & V-014). Gate Valves See associated Drawings. ON
J. Pipe Casing ONLY 1. Raw Water: AWWA C151, Class 150, Ductiletileile Iron PPipe
a. Spacers: Calpico Inc., Model M-Series Casingasing InInsulators or equivalent.
b. End Seals: Calpico Inc., Model W End Seals or equivalent.
K. Pipe Insulation: Cellular glass block or mineral fiber preformed insulation in accordance with ASTM C547 or ASTM C552. Foamglas®37 by Pittsburgh Corning Corporation.
L. Threaded Pipe Joint Sealant: Permabond®38 MH052 or approved substitute.
36 Garlock is a registered trademark of Garlock Sealing Technologies LLC, Palmyra, New York. 37 Foamglas is a registered trademark of Pittsburgh Corning Corporation, Pittsburgh, Pennsylvania. 38 Permabond is a registered trademark of Loxeal srl, Cesano Maderno, Italy.
33 10 00 – 8 RPP-SPEC-60023 Rev.07 2/14/2018 - 2:57 PM 259 of 317
RPP-SPEC-60023, Rev. 7
M. Solder: Lead-free type.
N. Raw Water Filters: Filter Specialists, Inc. Liquid Bag Filters, Model FSPN-250 #6-3” Flange, Dwg. 1901747. 316 Stainless Steel, hinged lid, 150-lb raised face flanges, ASME Section VIII Division 1 stamped, 150 psi @ 250°F, 800 micron, polypropylene filter bags. Contact: Gary Schulz, Control Factors – Portland, Inc., 503-669-1185.
O. Reduced Pressure Zone Backflow Preventer: The Reduced Pressure Backflow Prevention Assembly shall be ASSE Listed 1013 and AWWA Compliant C511 and supplied with Clow R/W Model 2640 (FxF) – full port OS&Y gate valves. The main body and access cover shall be epoxy coated ductile iron (ASTM A536 Grade 4), the seat ring and check valve shall be NORYL™39, the stem shall be StainlessFORnless Steel (ASTM A276) and the seat disc elastomers shall be EPDM. The internalsernals shashall be series 300 Stainless Steel. The checks and the relief valve shall be accessiblecessibleessible fofor maintenance without removing the device from the line. The Reducedd PressurPressurePressu Backflow Prevention Assembly shall be a ZURN WILKINS®®40 INFORMATONModelMode 375. The Reduced Pressure Backflow assembly shall be fully assembledd at the factoryfa and shipped for field installation. Products shall be listed on the Departmentartmentrtment oof Health Approved Assemblies List with the Washington State Departmentepartmentartmen of Health.
P. Water Inlet Pressure Controltrolrol Valve:ValvValve The Pressure Reducing Control Valve with Low Flow By-Pass shall be a pilot operatedopeop diaphragm valve designed to automatically reduce a fluctuatinging higher upstream pressure to a constant lower downstream pressure regardless off varyingvarying flow rates. Assembly shall be a globe style with all internal cast componentstss CF8M ((316) Stainless Steel with a 250 psi rating. The valve shall be Watts ACV Model 3” either LFF115-74 or LFM115-74, 150# flanged raised-face, EPDMDM sealseaseal, with low flow by-pass. ONLY Q. Five-valve Block and Bleed Manifold: Valve manifoldanifoldnifold ffofor differential pressure transmitter across the filter canisters shall be a 5 valvealveve with 2 test ports, a vent valve, and 2 equalize valves (as shown in Fig. 1). Unititt shall beb Stainless Steel with hard seats and 1/2” FPT inlet and outlet ports in the configuconfiguration shown in the diagram to the right. Assembly part number shall be a PGIP International M-578-SCT/HTAS.
39 NORYL is a trademark of Sabic Global Technologies B.V., Netherlands. 40 ZURN WILKINS is a registered trademark of Zurco, Inc., Wilmington, Delaware.
33 10 00 – 9 RPP-SPEC-60023 Rev.07 2/14/2018 - 2:57 PM 260 of 317
RPP-SPEC-60023, Rev. 7
Figure 1
R. Differential Pressure Transmitter: Pressure transmitter for the filters shall be a 4-20mAmA with communication, Stainless Steel wetted parts, 1/2” FPT process connections,nnectionnnectio and a 5 to 500 kPa range. Part number shall be a Yokogawa®41 EJA110E-JHS4GA110E0E-JH 912DN/FF1.
S. Pressure Indicators:Indicatondicat Pressure gauges shall be Stainless Steel, 0 – 300 psi range, and a 4 1/2”” d dialINFORMATONl size with 1/2” MPT bottom inlet fitting. Accuracy shall be to ASME B40.1 Grade 1A (1%). Part number shall be a Ashcroft™42 45-1109-SD- 04L-0/300#.
T. Thermal Expansion (Pulsationulsation DDampeners): Thermal Expansion units shall be Hydropads®43 as manufacturedctured by FLEXICRAFT, and shall consist of a diaphragm-type Stainless Steeleel bellowbellobellows unit enclosed by the outer shell. Bellows shall be exposed internally to linenee pressurpressure and all material in contact with line fluid shall be Stainless Steel. Unit shallhall havhave sufficient volume between bellows and other shell to limit pulsation to valuesalues notenotnoted on drawings. Unit shall have a nominal gas capacity as noted on the P&ID.&ID.ID. Unit shall be pre-charged with nitrogen gas to the values as noted on the P&ID.&ID. AAssAssembly shall be either model 21 (100 in³) (socket weld inlet) or part nunumberONLYmber 323320500 (32 in³) (threaded inlet).
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 PREPARATION
A. Surfaces to receive protective coating shall be clean, free of moisture, oil, dirt, scale, rust, and other foreign material.
B. All underground utility locations shall be identified by means of marking tape. Place tape in backfill directly above the utility line at approximately 12-in. below grade.
41 Yokogawa is a registered trademark of Yokogawa Electric Corporation, Tokyo, Japan. 42 Ashcroft is a trademark of Ashcroft Inc., Stratford, Connecticut. 43 Hydropads is a registered trademark of Güntner GmbH & Co., Germany.
33 10 00 – 10 RPP-SPEC-60023 Rev.07 2/14/2018 - 2:57 PM 261 of 317
RPP-SPEC-60023, Rev. 7
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Raw Water Pipe and Fittings
1. Install pipe and pipe accessories in accordance with AWWA C600 (Ductile Iron), ASTM A234 (Steel), manufacturer’s instructions, NFPA 24, UPC, the drawings, and this Section.
2. Install thrust restraint at all bends, tees, plugs, and caps in accordance with NFPA 24, Article 8-6. If concrete thrust blocks are used, size in accordance with details shown on the contract drawings.
3. Fabricate and install Stainless Steel welded pipe and fittings and ccomponents in accordance with ASME B31.9, the Drawings, and this FORSecSection.
4.Make joinjojoints in threaded piping system with specified joint sealant. Apply sealantalantantINFORMATON tot mammale threads only. 5. Coat buriedried carboncarbo steel accessories, such as tie-rods and clamps, with 16.0 mils off BitumasticBitumas in one or two coats (10-24 hours between coats). Allow 8 hourss for BitumBitumastic to dry before backfilling.
6. Painting and Markings:ngs:gs: See SectionS 09 91 00, “Painting,” for preparation and painting.
B. Valve Orientation
1. Install valves as shown on Drawingsingsngs where clearly illustrated. 2. Where orientation is not well illustrated,edd ONLYlocateocate aand orient valve to provide accessibility for control and maintenance.
3. Valves shall be installed such that they are not used as mmeans of support for runs of piping or other components.
C. Sewer Drain Piping
1. Slope line 1/8 in. per ft (minimum) or as specified on drawings.
2. Install ABS or PVC pipeline in accordance with ASTM D2321 and the drawings. In-line service testing of sewer pipe is permitted.
D. Reduced Pressure Zone Backflow Preventer
1. Install in accordance with WAC 246-290 recognized cross-connection control manual installation specifications including but not limited to the specifications found in “Cross Connection Control Manual, Accepted
33 10 00 – 11 RPP-SPEC-60023 Rev.07 2/14/2018 - 2:57 PM 262 of 317
RPP-SPEC-60023, Rev. 7
Procedures and Practices,” “Manual of Cross-Connection Control” or AWWA M14.
E. Flanged Joints
1. Install flanges in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions.
2. Clean joint surfaces of the pipe, fittings and valves being joined.
3. Align flange of pipe, fitting, or valve to be installed with flange of receiving pipe, fitting, or valve.
4. Support pipe, fittings, and valves being joined so that flanges are properly FORaaligned. 5.Lubric Lubricate bolts/studs and nuts prior to installation of bolts and nuts.
6. Cleanleanean gagasketke of sand, dirt, and other foreign matter. Inspect gasket for damage/defects.e/defecte/defeINFORMATON F. Pipe supports: Fabricateabricatebricate anand install as shown on the Drawings, in accordance with manufacturer’s instructioinstructions,struct Section 05 50 00, “Metal Fabrications,” and applicable recommendeded proceduprocedprocedures of MSS SP-58.
G. Weld Identification
1. Prepare weld identificationn drawingsdrawingdrawings, isometric or spool, using existing project Drawings as applicablee which sshow relative positions of pressure- containing welds and attachmentt welds tot pressure-retaining components. 2. Assign weld numbers to pressure containingtainai ONLYingng wwewelds and attachment welds to pressure-retaining components as made.de.e. RecoRecord weld number on weld identification drawings as welds are made.
3. Do not reuse weld numbers. If a weld is completelytelytely replareplaced, assign a new number.
3.3 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Flushing/Testing Preparation
1. Furnish equipment and instruments required to perform mechanical cleaning.
2. Obtain direction for disposal of flushing water from TOC Construction Representative. See the Contract Statement of Work.
33 10 00 – 12 RPP-SPEC-60023 Rev.07 2/14/2018 - 2:57 PM 263 of 317
RPP-SPEC-60023, Rev. 7
B. Raw Water Line Flushing
1. Flush raw water in accordance with NFPA 24, as applicable, for below ground piping.
a. The underground pipe trench shall be partially backfilled between joints before testing to prevent movement of pipe.
b. Notify Project Engineer at least five working days before flushing of piping system for witnessing flush. Flushing to verify that new lines are clean and acceptable.
c. Flush piping with water for five minutes minimum, and until effluent is clean and contains no visible particulate matter. FOR Flushing pressure shall not exceed maximum operating pressure specified for the system. Flushing water supply shall have sussufficient capacity to produce a full pipe (largest pipe size) flush.
d.INFORMATON DocumentDocumeDocum flushing of each piping system on NFPA Form “Contractor’sContracto Material and Test Certificate for Aboveground and Undergrounddergrounderground Piping,” in accordance with NFPA 24, as applicable, and submitbmitmit in accordanceac with Paragraph 1.3.
3.4 FIELD INSPECTIONS AND TESTSESTSSTS
A. Nondestructive Examination (NDE)DE) of WeWelds
1. Perform examination for individualidual pipe sections. Acceptance Criteria, unless otherwise noted by design,, shall be in accordance with ASME B31.9. ONLY 2. Perform visual examination (VT) on all completedompleted welds in accordance with ASME B31.9, Paragraph 936.
3. Perform random examination of piping support weldselds in aaccordance with Section 05 50 00, “Metal Fabrications.”
4. Examination Documentation
a. Document examination of pressure containment welds for piping systems on weld examination and test record. Record weld identification drawings, weld numbers, welder identification, welding procedure numbers, weld filler material, visual examinations and notation of satisfactory completion of pressure testing in accordance with instructions on form.
b. Required examinations shall be completed and documented before starting leak testing.
33 10 00 – 13 RPP-SPEC-60023 Rev.07 2/14/2018 - 2:57 PM 264 of 317
RPP-SPEC-60023, Rev. 7
c. Weld Examination and Test Record information may be incorporated on a single format or traveler for a specific work package.
d. Document examination of attachment welds to pressure-retaining components by recording on sketches or Weld Examination and Test Record.
5. Final closure welds that cannot be isolated for testing shall be examined in-process.
B. Raw Water Line Testing 1.FORF Furnish instruments, facilities, and labor required to conduct tests. 2.Test gagauges shall be calibrated and capable of measuring at least 1.5 times test pressprespressure, but no more than 4 times test pressure.
3. DocumentmentINFORMATONent leakleak/pressure testing of each piping system on NFPA Form “Contractor’sctor’s MatMaterial and Test Certificate for Aboveground or Undergroundnd PipingPiping,” in accordance with NFPA 24, as applicable, and submit in accordanceordancedance withw 1.3.
4. Perform tests after linesnes have been flushed and before joints have been backfilled for undergroundound pipinpipipiping.
5. Remove all air from piping and adequatelyadequ restrain pipe prior to hydrostatic test for undergroundnd piping. The last thrust block poured shall have cured a minimum of 7 days prior to tetest. 6. Test mainline at 200 psi for two hours orONLY at 50 ppsi in excess of the maximum static pressure and measure leakageakagekage of raraw water lines in accordance with NFPA 24, Article 8.9, for undergroundndergrounndergro piping. Service test trailer piping less than 3 in., use full mainlinene pressurpresspressure for at least 30 minutes with no visible leaks or loss of test water. Repair any unsatisfactory joints and retest.
7. Install a temporary relief valve during pressure test. Relief valve shall have a discharge capacity of at least 125 percent of the pressurizing device and be set to not more than 110 percent of the test pressure. Demonstrate proper operation of relief valve before relief valve is attached to system for leak test and whenever there is cause to question operating accuracy of valve.
C. Sewer Line Testing
1. Before connecting to existing manhole, perform leak testing of pipe in accordance with the Uniform Plumbing Code. Document test results.
33 10 00 – 14 RPP-SPEC-60023 Rev.07 2/14/2018 - 2:57 PM 265 of 317
RPP-SPEC-60023, Rev. 7
D. For Reduced Pressure Zone Backflow Preventer, verify and document the following characteristics by visual inspection:
1. Device is installed in its proper orientation.
2. Device has been installed in accordance with the manufacturer’s instructions.
END OF SECTION 33 10 00
FOR
INFORMATON
ONLY
33 10 00 – 15 RPP-SPEC-60023 Rev.07 2/14/2018 - 2:57 PM 266 of 317
RPP-SPEC-60023, Rev. 7
SECTION 40 05 13
PROCESS PIPING
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Material, fabrication, installation, and testing of inside water piping beginning after the backflow preventer and of outdoor below and above grade water piping from the Air and Water Service Building to the Tank Farm Process Piping manifolds.
1.2 RELATEDD DOCUMENTS,DOC CODES, AND STANDARDS
Drawings and general pprovisions of the Contract Statement of Work, including Division 01 Specification SectionSectioSections,INFORMATONs, apply to this Section. The following documentsents and otoothers referenced therein form part of Contract to the extent designated in this Section. RReferenced documents are those current as of the date of this Section unless otherwisewisee iindicated.ndicdi
A. American National Standardsards InstInstituInstitute (ANSI)
ANSI/ASME A13.1 Schemecheme forfo the Identification of Piping Systems
B. American Society of Mechanical Engineersgineersineers (A(ASME)
ASME B&PVC, 2013 Boiler and Pressureessure VVessel Code Section IX Qualificationonn SStandardtandartanda for Welding and Brazing Procedures, Welders,ONLYelders, BBrBrazers, and Welding and Brazing Operationsonss
ASME B16.9 Factory-Made Wrought Buttweldinguttweldin Fittings
ASME B16.11 Forged Steel Fittings, Socket-Welding and Threaded
ASME B31.9, 2014 Building Service Piping
C. American Society for Nondestructive Testing (ASNT)
ASNT SNT-TC-1A Personnel Qualifications and Certification in Nondestructive Testing
40 05 13 – 1 RPP-SPEC-60023 Rev.07 2/14/2018 - 2:57 PM 267 of 317
RPP-SPEC-60023, Rev. 7
D. ASTM International (ASTM)
ASTM A182 Standard Specification for Forged or Rolled Alloy and Stainless Steel Pipe Flanges
ASTM A194 Carbon and Alloy Steel Nuts for Bolts for High- Pressure and High-Temperature Service
ASTM A276 Standard Specification for Stainless Steel Bars and Shapes
ASTM A312 Standard Specification for Seamless, Welded, and Heavily Cold Worked Austenitic Stainless Steel FOR Pipes ASTMTM A351A35 Standard Specification for Castings, Austenitic, for Pressure-Containing Parts ASTM A4033 INFORMATON Wrought Austenitic Stainless Steel Piping Fittings E. American Weldingngg Societyy (AWS)
AWS D1.1, 2010 StructuralStrSt Welding Code – Steel
AWS D1.3, 2008 StructuralStructurStructu Welding Code – Sheet Steel
AWS D1.6, 2007 Structuralucturalural WeldingWe Code – Stainless Steel
AWS QC1 Certificationtionon of WeldingWWe Inspectors F. Manufacturer’s Standardization Society (MSS)SS)S) ONLY MSS SP-58 Pipe Hangers and Supportsupports – Materials, Design, Manufacture, Selection,n, ApplicaApplication, and Installation MSS SP-69 Pipe Hangers and Supports – SelectionS and Application MSS SP-97 Integrally Reinforced Forged Branch Outlet Fittings – Socket Welding, Threaded and Buttwelding Ends
G. Hanford Documents
TFC-ENG-STD-06 Design Loads for Tank Farm Facilities TFC-ENG-STD-12 Tank Farm Equipment Identification Numbering and Labeling Standard TFC-ENG-STD-22 Piping, Jumpers, and Valves
40 05 13 – 2 RPP-SPEC-60023 Rev.07 2/14/2018 - 2:57 PM 268 of 317
RPP-SPEC-60023, Rev. 7
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. See the Contract Statement of Work for the submittal process.
B. Approval Required
1. Welding Procedure Specifications and or Standard Welding Procedure Specifications: Five days before first use or start of fabrication, submit each in accordance with Paragraph 1.4.B.
2. Welding Personnel Qualifications: Five days before start of fabrication, submit welder qualification as required by Paragraph 1.4.B.
3.E Examination Documentation: Five days before start of fabrication submit FORdocudocumentation in accordance with Paragraph 3.4.A.4 for informinforinformation/record.
4. Mechanicalechaniechan al Cleaning Verification: Submit documentation in accordance with PParagrapharagraphINFORMATON 3.3.B for information/record.
5. Weld Examinationsminations as required by Paragraph 3.5.A.
6. Pressure and Leakak TestingTestin and Certification: Five days before pressure testing, submit testinging procedureprocproced in accordance with Paragraphs 1.4.C and 3.4.B.
C. Approval Not Required
1. O&M manuals for equipment. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE ONLY A. Misrepresented Products: See Contract Statement off Work ffor required measures to prevent use of misrepresented products.
B. Qualifications of Structural Welding Personnel and Procedures.ures.ur
1. Personnel and procedures for welding structural steel shall be in accordance with Section 05 50 00, “Metal Fabrications.”
2. Qualification of Examination Personnel: Maintain copies of examination personnel certifications and written examination performance procedures at jobsite.
a. Personnel performing visual examinations shall be Certified Welding Inspectors (CWIs) who have received certification (current or previous certification) in accordance with AWS QC1.
40 05 13 – 3 RPP-SPEC-60023 Rev.07 2/14/2018 - 2:57 PM 269 of 317
RPP-SPEC-60023, Rev. 7
b. Personnel performing other nondestructive examinations (NDE) shall be certified in accordance with approved procedure, which shall meet the requirements of ASNT SNT-TC-1A. Use Level II or III personnel to interpret results.
C. Qualification of Pressure Boundary Welders
1. For low-pressure systems, personnel and procedures for welding pressure- retaining components, along with attachments hereto, shall be qualified in accordance with ASME Section IX, except as modified by ASME B31.9, Chapter V, Section 927.6.
D. Examination Procedures: Examination procedures shall be in accordance with AWSS D1.1,D1 AWS D1.3, AWS D1.6, ASME Sec V as applicable, and this Specification.ecificatioFOR Maintain copies of examination procedures at jobsite.
1. QualificationQualificaQualific of Nondestructive Examination (NDE) personnel:
a.INFORMATONVisual wweld examinations shall be performed and appropriate documentadocumentation prepared by CWIs who have received certification in accordanceccordance with AWS QC1. Certified Associate Welding Inspectionstionsons (CAWIs),(CA certified in accordance with above standard, may performormm examinationsexam when under immediate direction of CWIs.
b. Personnel performingming other NDE of welds shall be certified in accordance with writtenttenten practipractice, which shall meet requirements of ASNT SNT-TC-1A. Usese LLevelevelvel III or III personnel to interpret test results.
2. Welding-related examination documentationONLYtionion shallshal be signed or stamped by individuals performing examinations.
E. Pressure and Leak Testing Procedures: Pressure testingg procedurproceduprocedures shall be in accordance with ASME B31.9 and this Specification. Maintainintainntain copies of procedures at jobsite.
1.5 PERMITS
A. Permits are addressed by TOC work control process.
1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. See Contract Statement of Work for general requirements.
40 05 13 – 4 RPP-SPEC-60023 Rev.07 2/14/2018 - 2:57 PM 270 of 317
RPP-SPEC-60023, Rev. 7
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 SUBSTITUTES
A. See Contract Statement of Work for substitution approvals.
2.2 MATERIALS
A. Piping and Fittings: See details specified on the Drawings and Components List section below.
B. Pipe Supports: See details specified on the Drawings and in Section 05 50 00 “Metal Fabrications.” U-bolts to be Stainless Steel or plastic coated.
C. PipepeFORe Joint SealantS (Lubricant) for Threaded Joints. Use anaerobic acrylic sealer. Henkelkell Corporation:Corpo Loctite 5452 or 567 or engineering approved equivalent. Clean threadshreads anand apply according to manufacturer’s specification. D. Pipe covering INFORMATONprotprotectionectec saddle: B-Line B3160 and B3162, Stainless Steel, plain. Diameter to matchatchtch pipe ddiameter and insulation thickness as specified in Section 40 42 00, “Processs Piping anand Equipment Insulation.”
E. Protective Coating forabove and below grade Stainless Steel Piping: Exterior epoxy protection system, SEAGUARDSEAGUASEAGU MP, 5-6 mil thick, per Section 09 91 00, “Painting,” and per manufacturer’surer’s instinstructions.
F. Valves: Specified in the Componentsentsnts ListList sectionse below, unless otherwise shown on the Drawings.
G. Hoses: UFBX1 T316L hose, with series 300000 SS bbrbraid, and with T304L Schedule 40S pipe ends for socket welding. Lengths, reducers,eduducers,ONLYcers, aanand 90° long and short radius elbows, as shown on the Drawings, and withinithin the sspecifications of B31.9. Each hose description in the Bill of Materials on thee DrawingDrawinDrawings is described in order of hose assembly. All lengths shall be ±1/4” of the indicaindicindicated dimension on the Drawings. Hose braid collars shall be 3/4” long for 1”” hose aand 1” long for 1.5”, 2”, and 3” hose. Long and short radius elbows shall beea according to ASME B16.9 dimensions. Pipe end dimensions called out on the Drawings are intentionally long. Field verify dimensions, and cut to length during installation as required. Follow all manufacturers’ specifications, especially the minimum live length for vibration, minimum static bend radius, and maximum offset.
H. Pipe Flanges and Gaskets: Specified in the Components List section below.
I. Heat Tracing: As shown on the Drawings and per Section 40 41 00, “Process Piping and Equipment Heat Tracing.”
J. Pipe Insulation System: See Section 40 42 00, “Process Piping and Equipment Insulation.”
40 05 13 – 5 RPP-SPEC-60023 Rev.07 2/14/2018 - 2:57 PM 271 of 317
RPP-SPEC-60023, Rev. 7
K. Cathodic Protection: See Section 13 47 13.13, “Cathodic Protection for Underground and Submerged Piping.”
L. Buried Pipe Marker Tape: See Section 31 23 00, “Excavation and Fill.”
M. Penetration Sealants: RTV Silicone.
N. Anchors:
1. Concrete Anchor Blocks: See Section 03 30 00, “Concrete.”
2. Expansion Anchors: See Section 03 15 00, “Post-Installed Concrete Anchor Bolts.”
3.FOR AnchorageAnc must be designed to TFC-ENG-STD-06.
2.3 EQUIPMENTT A. Thermal Expansionpap nsionINFORMATON (P(Pulsation Dampeners): Thermal Expansion units shall be Hydropads as manufacturedmanufactu by FLEXICRAFT, and shall consist of a diaphragm- type Stainless Steelel bellows unit enclosed by the outer shell. Bellows shall be exposed internally too linene pressurepres and all material in contact with line fluid shall be Stainless Steel. Unitt shall havhahave sufficient volume between bellows and other shell to limit pulsation to values notennoted on drawings. Unit shall have a nominal gas capacity as noted on the P&ID. UnitUn shall be pre-charged with nitrogen gas to the values as noted on the P&ID. AssembAssembly shall be either model 22 (200 in³) (socket weld inlet), model 21 (100 in³)n³) (sock (socket weld inlet), or part number 320500 (32 in³) (threaded inlet).
B. Pressure Indicators: Pressure gauges shall be StainlessStainStainle Steel, 0 – 300 psi range, and a 4 1/2” dial size with 1/2” MPT bottom inletletONLYt fittinfittingfitting. Accuracy shall be to ASME B40.1 Grade 1A (1%). Part number shall be a AshcroftAsh 45-1109-SD-04L- 0/300#.
C. Flow Orifice: Flow orifices for outside building accessoryy lines shalls be a 2” O-ring union with orifice insert sized to approximately 5/8 in.,n Class 3000, socket weld and Stainless Steel. Hart Industries, p/n O-3333-8-E-304L. Orifice shall be sized for the flow specified on the P&ID and adjusted accordingly.
D. Leak detector elements as indicated in the Drawings.
2.4 FABRICATION
A. General
1. Verify measurements, including field measurements, before fabrication. Provide miscellaneous bolts and anchors, supports, braces, and connections necessary for completion of metal fabrications. Cut,
40 05 13 – 6 RPP-SPEC-60023 Rev.07 2/14/2018 - 2:57 PM 272 of 317
RPP-SPEC-60023, Rev. 7
reinforce, drill, and tap metal fabrications shown to receive finish hardware and similar items. Weld or bolt connections as shown on the Drawings.
2. Perform welding of steel connections in accordance with AWS D1.1, sheet steel in accordance with AWS D1.3, and Stainless Steel in accordance with AWS D1.6 and ASME B31.9.
B. Miscellaneous Steel Items: Supply required clips, frames, equipment supports, and other fabrications not shown on the Drawings. Fabricate parts from standard structural sections or shapes, to sizes required. Wherever miscellaneous parts are exposed, grind edges, corners, and rough cuts smooth and free of snags. Shop paint parts except those to be embedded in concrete, or those that require other specificFORcific fifinishes.f C. Finishesheses
1. Primemee feferrousrouro metal (except Stainless Steel pipe) in accordance with SectionnINFORMATON 09 91 00,0 “Painting.” Do not coat members to be embedded in concrete, surfacesurfaces and edges to be field welded, or items to be galvanized. Shop paint maymay extendexten into embedded areas where impractical to remove.
2. Stainless Steel pipingpinging shall not come in contact with galvanized surfaces.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 PREPARATION
A. Surfaces to receive protective coating shallall be cleaclean, free of moisture, oil, dirt, scale, rust, and other foreign material. ONLY B. Prepare setting drawings, diagrams, templates, andnd instructinstructions for installation of anchorages, such as concrete inserts, anchor bolts, andnd miscelmiscmiscellaneous items having integral anchors, to be embedded in concrete. CoordinateCoordin with TOC Construction Representative for delivery of items to Site.
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. General
1. Fabricate and install pipe and fittings and components in accordance with ASME B31.9, the Drawings, and this Section.
40 05 13 – 7 RPP-SPEC-60023 Rev.07 2/14/2018 - 2:57 PM 273 of 317
RPP-SPEC-60023, Rev. 7
B. Valve Orientation
1. Install valves as shown on Drawings where clearly illustrated.
2. Where orientation is not well illustrated, locate and orient valve to provide accessibility for control and maintenance.
3. Valves shall be installed such that they are not used as means of support for runs of piping or other components.
4. Ball valves shall be installed such that, when open, the handle of the ball valve is inline with the piping. The handle shall be turned clockwise to close the valve. C. IdentificationFORntificatntifica 1.An idenidentification tag shall be supplied and attached to the equipment, valves,alves,lves, aanand components. 1/4” stamped or engraved characters shall be useddon oonINFORMATON a StaStaiStainless Steel tag. The tag shall include the equipment identificationcation numnumber (EIN) as identified on the P&ID.
2. Piping Identification:ification:ification Identify in-building and above grade piping systems as to fluid carrieded and dirdirection of flow as specified in ANSI/ASME B13.1 and also Attachmententnt 1.
D. Pipe
1. Cut pipe using methods that result in cclean, straight cuts.
2. Ream pipe to nominal inside diametermeter afterafte cutting. Remove burrs before assembly. ONLY 3. Keep piping systems clean. Once fabricationtion has ststarted, plug or cap ends of piping when installation is not in progress.s.. Cap oro plugp openings in fabricated pipe spool assemblies until installationon in pipinpippiping system.
4. Install piping with slope specified on the Drawings.
5. Alignment: Distortion or cold springing of piping to bring it into alignment for joint assembly that introduces a strain in piping components is prohibited.
6. Field verify lengths of make-up spool pipe sections as called out on the Drawings. Cut and weld to fit after all other spools are in place.
E. Make joints in threaded piping systems with joint sealant specified. Apply sealant sparingly to male threads only.
40 05 13 – 8 RPP-SPEC-60023 Rev.07 2/14/2018 - 2:57 PM 274 of 317
RPP-SPEC-60023, Rev. 7
F. Flanged Joints 1. Install flanges in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions. 2. Clean joint surfaces of the pipe, fittings and valves being joined. 3. Align flange of pipe, fitting, or valve to be installed with flange of receiving pipe, fitting, or valve. 4. Support pipe, fittings, and valves being joined so that flanges are properly aligned. 5. Lubricate bolts/studs and nuts prior to installation of bolts and nuts. 6.C Clean gasket of sand, dirt, and other foreign matter. Inspect gasket for FORdamdamage/defects. 7.Install flaflflange isolation kits per manufacturer instructions on every flange adjacentdjacentjacentINFORMATON too a below grade section of piping. 8. All flangenge bolt holeh orientations straddle the centerlines (“two-holed” industry standardtandardandard alignment).al G. Pipe covering protectiononn saddlesaddlessaddles: Pressure boundary weld to pipe in accordance with manufacturer’s instructionsructionsuctions aanand located per drawings. Locate one centered on bottom of pipe for all pipingpinging rollerrolle support locations. Locate one centered on top of pipe for all piping roller support lolocations, except vertical expansion loops as called out on the Drawings. H. Pipe supports: Fabricate and install as shownhown on the Drawings, in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions, Section 05 50 0000, “Metal Fabrications,” and applicable recommended procedures of MSSS SP SP-58.ONLY8. I. Expansion Anchors: See Section 03 15 00, “Post-Installed-Installed Concrete Anchor Bolts.” J. Tools marked for Stainless Steel shall be used on Stainlessss Steel only. Tools previously used on carbon steel shall not be used on Stainlessss Steel. Areas on Stainless Steel pipe that show signs of coming in contact with carbon steel (rust marks or streaks) shall be cleaned of all free iron. K. Below Grade Piping: 1. Trenches: Excavate, backfill, and compact in accordance with Section 31 23 00, “Excavation and Fill.” 2. Install insulation using temporary supports on undisturbed soil, or on backfill placed and compacted in accordance with Section 31 23 00 “Excavation and Fill.” Install below grade insulation system prior to backfilling trench in accordance with Section 40 42 00, “Process Piping and Equipment Insulation.”
40 05 13 – 9 RPP-SPEC-60023 Rev.07 2/14/2018 - 2:57 PM 275 of 317
RPP-SPEC-60023, Rev. 7
3. At piping bends provide cushions for thermal expansion according to Section 40 42 00, Paragraph 2.2.D.
L. Exterior Protective Coating for all Outside Above and Below Grade Piping:
1. Before coating application over joints, perform NDE, flushing, and leak/pressure testing specified in this Section.
2. Protect Stainless Steel pipe, fittings, and pipe covering protection saddles with coating specified above in Paragraph 2.2, “Materials,” in accordance with Section 09 91 00, “Painting,” and manufacturer’s instructions.
3. After installation, examine pipe, joints, and fittings with electrical holiday FORddetector in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions. 4.Repair damage to coating in accordance with manufacturer’s recommerecommrecommendations.
5. Do not INFORMATONinstall insulationi system or backfill until coating has cured in accordancence with mmanufacturer’s recommendations.
M. Welding
1. Weld piping and attachmentsttachmentstachmen to pressure-retaining components in accordance with ASMEME B31.9.B31.
2. Use of backing rings is not permitted.permittedpermitte
3. Complete piping welds before tie-ine-in welweldwelds to fixed items. 4. Weld steel structural elements in accordancerdard ONLYnce withw AWS D1.1 or D1.6. N. Weld Identification
1. Prepare weld identification drawings, isometric or spool, using existing project Drawings as applicable which show relative posippositions of pressure- containing welds and attachment welds to pressure-retaining components.
2. Assign weld numbers to pressure containing welds and attachment welds to pressure-retaining components as made. Record weld number on weld identification drawings as welds are made.
3. Do not reuse weld numbers. If a weld is completely replaced, assign a new number.
4. Show heat/lot numbers on weld identification drawings for materials requiring Certified Material Test Reports (CMTRs).
40 05 13 – 10 RPP-SPEC-60023 Rev.07 2/14/2018 - 2:57 PM 276 of 317
RPP-SPEC-60023, Rev. 7
O. Perform examination, flushing, and leak/pressure testing, and connecting of heat tracing before application of insulation and jacketing over joints and other materials and components.
P. Heat Trace: Install per Section 40 41 00, “Process Piping and Equipment Heat Tracing.”
Q. Piping Insulation System: Install per Section 40 42 00, “Process Piping and Equipment Insulation.”
3.3 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Flushing/Testing Preparation
1.FOR FurnishFurn equipment and instruments required to perform mechanical cleanincleaning.
2. Obtainbtain directiond recre for disposal of flushing water from TOC Construction Representative.INFORMATONentative See the Contract Statement of Work.
B. Cleaning and Flushinghing
1. After examinationon is comcompcomplete and before pressure testing system, or before connecting systemysstem intiinto existing systems, clean piping internal surfaces by mechanicalal cleaning.cleaningcleanin
2. Mechanical cleaning: Removemoveve loosloose dirt, scale, and debris by brushing, wiping, high-pressure water jetting,etting,tting, blblowblowing compressed air, or other mechanical method approved by the TOCTO Construction Representative until there is no visible dirt, scale, orr debridebrisdebris.ONLY a. When high-pressure water jetting or other mmechanical cleaning method utilizing water is used, and leak/pressureeak/pressueak/pres testing will not be performed immediately after cleaning, remove alall water.
b. Use drain taps at low point of piping system to eensure complete drainage and drying. Cap lines or reconnect to system to maintain cleanliness.
3. Provide documented evidence that flushing or mechanical cleaning has been accomplished as specified in this Section.
3.4 FIELD INSPECTIONS AND TESTS
A. Nondestructive Examination (NDE) of Welds
40 05 13 – 11 RPP-SPEC-60023 Rev.07 2/14/2018 - 2:57 PM 277 of 317
RPP-SPEC-60023, Rev. 7
1. Perform examination for individual pipe sections listed below in Paragraph 3.5. Acceptance Criteria, unless otherwise noted by design, shall be in accordance with ASME B31.9.
2. Visual examination (VT): Perform in accordance with ASME B31.9, Paragraph 936.
3. Perform random examination of piping support welds in accordance with Section 05 50 00, “Metal Fabrications.”
4. Examination Documentation
a. Document examination of pressure containment welds for piping systems on weld examination and test record. Record weld identification drawings, weld numbers, welder identification, welding procedure numbers, weld filler material, visual exeexaminations and notation of satisfactory completion of pressure INFORMATONttestingestin in accordance with instructions on form. b. Required examinationse shall be completed and documented before startingtinging leak ttesting.
c. Weld Examinationamination and Test Record information may be incorporatedd on a singsingle format or traveler for a specific work package.
d. Document examinationionon of attachmentatta welds to pressure-retaining components by recordingng on sketchessket or Weld Examination and Test Record.
5. Final closure welds that cannot be isolatededONLYd for tetesting shall be examined in-process.
B. Pressure and Leak Testing
1. After completion of mechanical cleaning and NDE, perperform leak testing of pipe in accordance with ASME B31.9 and this Section. Use calibrated gages with an accuracy of ± 1 psi and with ranges 1-1/2 to 4 times test pressure.
2. Document testing of each piping system on Pressure Test Certification. Use separate forms to describe and record each piping system. Under “Description” describe piping system in enough detail for correlation to weld identification drawings, and Drawings, as applicable. For systems tested segmentally, indicate continuity in “Description” to ensure that entire systems have been tested.
40 05 13 – 12 RPP-SPEC-60023 Rev.07 2/14/2018 - 2:57 PM 278 of 317
RPP-SPEC-60023, Rev. 7
3. Pipe joints and connections to be tested shall be visible and accessible during tests.
4. Install one temporary relief valve during testing to protect piping against over-pressurization. Tag each relief valve used to show serial number, inspector, date, and pressure setting.
5. Install necessary restraining devices, before applying test pressure, to prevent distortion or displacement of piping. Remove temporary restraining devices following testing.
6. Isolate instruments and other items which could be damaged by test pressures.
7.FORVisu Visually examine piping joints, fittings, and other potential leak sources, includiincluding welds that attach wear plates, anchors, etc., to piping systems, during testing.teste
8. CompleteeteINFORMATON testintesting of piping before field application of insulation.
9. Purge air fromrom pipipipingng systems during filling, before applying pressure.
10. Continuously maintainaintain testtes pressure for 10 minutes minimum. Examine joints and connections.ons.ns. PipinPiping system, exclusive of possible localized instances at pump or valve packpacking, shall show no visual evidence of weeping or leaking.
11. Remove water from piping systemstems afterafte testing using low point drains or by applying low air pressure at connectiononnection points and blowing down the lines. ONLY 12. Perform leak/pressure testing in accordancece with ASMEA B31.9, Chapter VI, Section 937, and this Section.
13. Support the final in-service leak test of the whole sysystemstem to the extent directed by the TOC Construction Representative.
3.5 SCHEDULES
A. Schedule of Pipe Weld NDE/Testing
40 05 13 – 13 RPP-SPEC-60023 Rev.07 2/14/2018 - 2:57 PM 279 of 317
RPP-SPEC-60023, Rev. 7
NDE/NDT Method Raw Water Piping Visual A Fit Root Pass Cover Pass A Liquid Penetrant Root Pass Cover Pass Magnetic Particle Root Pass Cover Pass Legend: Radiographic A. All completed welds to have visual Completedple Weld examination by AWS QC1 qualified weld inspector shall be in accordance UltrasonicFORFFOasonic with ASME B31.9, Paragraph 936.4.1 CompletedmpletedOORleted WWeld and fulfill the minimum requirements. Leak/Pressureressure B. Full penetration welds on branch R connections. Completededd JointsJoointsint B, C, D C. Attachment welds to pipe. Other INFORMATONIINN D. Hydrostatic pressure test all joints.
ONLY
40 05 13 – 14 RPP-SPEC-60023 Rev.07 2/14/2018 - 2:57 PM 280 of 317
RPP-SPEC-60023, Rev. 7
B. Components List
Design Pressure Hydrostatic Test Design Temp Service (psig) Pressure (psig) (°F) Inlet and Cold Water Discharge up to Manifold 150 225 +10/-0 140 Piping Cold Water Discharge Piping (Inside – after the Manifold, Below Grade, or 150 225 +10/-0 180 Above Grade Outside) Hot Water Inlet and Recirculation Piping 250 375 +10/-0 140 Hot Water Discharge Piping 250 375 +10/-0 180 (Inside, Below Grade, or Above Grade Outside) Sizes 3/4 in. & smaller 1 in. to 4 in. 6 in & larger Pipe StainlessFORFtainless SteelS per ASTM A312, Grade TP304L, seamless. Pre-fabricated heat-traced and insulated spoolsoolsOs as specifiedspesp on the Drawings. Wall Thickness Scheduledule 80S. Schedule 40S and Schedule 80S (only if indicated as threaded R on the Drawings). Fittings Stainless Steel,ee INFORMATONI ASTM A182 Grade F or ASTM A403 Grade Stainless Steel, ASTM A403 WP304L WP, 304L, Classass 3000, sosocket weld, threaded, or butt weld Class S, full penetration butt weld in in accordance withh ASMEFO BB16.11 or B16.9. accordance with ASME B16.9 Branch Fittings Integrally reinforced StainlessORinless SSteel in accordance with MSS SP-97. O-ring Unions 304L Stainless Steel, SocketketRM Weld oro Threaded, EPDM o- None. ring, Class 3000, Manufacturer:rer:r:MMA HartHar Industries.I Flanges None. ASTMAST A182, Grade F 304L, CL 150 and CL 300, forged, raised fafface, slip-on or weld neck in accordance with ASMETOB16B B16.5. Bore to match pipe ID. Flange Isolation Flange Isolation Gasket Kit, Type F Raisedseded Face, ASMEA B16.5, Aramid fibers with EPDM binder, Kits 1/16 in. thick, Garlock Blueguard, Style 3700,00,0, mmatchatch ppipe size, single washer 1 piece phenolic, Nomex Sleeve (GPT Industries or equivalent). N Bolting None. ASTM A193,3G3 GradeONLYOONrade B8B CL 2, alloy steel studs, and ASTM A194, Grade 8, heavy hexhe nuts. Gaskets None. Aramid fibers withh EPDM bibbinder, 1/16-in. thick, Garlock Blueguard, Style 3700.0 LY Ball Valves (2 Stainless Steel body ASTM A351 None. way) Gr CF8M, Full port, threaded end connections in accordance with ASME B1.20.1, socket weld ends in accordance with ASME B16.11, Tekfil seat, Flowtek series 7000. Globe Valves None. Stainless Steel body ASTM A351, Class 300, OS&Y bonnet, plug type disc, socket weld ends, Powell Figure 2447 (1). Gate Valves See associated Drawings. None. Insulation See Section 40 42 00, “Process Piping and Equipment Insulation” (according to outside location: either Below Grade or Above Grade). Heat Trace On any outside piping whether below or above grade with 5 W/ft Self-Regulating Heat Trace Cable. See Section 40 41 00, “Process Piping and Equipment Heat Tracing.”
END OF SECTION 40 05 13
40 05 13 – 15 RPP-SPEC-60023 Rev.07 2/14/2018 - 2:57 PM 281 of 317
RPP-SPEC-60023, Rev. 7
SECTION 40 05 13 – ATTACHMENT 1
IDENTIFICATION OF PIPING SYSTEMS
1. GENERAL
Identification of piping systems shall be in accordance with the American Standard Scheme for Identification of Piping Systems, ANSI/ASME A13.1, as supplemented herein, and with TFC-ENG-STD-12, “Tank Farm Equipment Identification Numbering and Labeling Standard.”
2. LOCATION
a. Exceptcept as pprovided below, identification shall be located adjacent to outlets, valves,ves, flangeflanges, unions, changes-in-direction, where pipes through walls, floors, or ceilings,ngs, and aalong an uninterrupted length of pipe at maximum intervals of 50 ft. Eachch lineINFORMATON orr branch in shall have a least one identification. b. Where a numbererr of outleoutlets, valves, flanges, unions, or changes of direction make identification at eachach item imimpracticable, they may be spaced at approximate 6-ft intervals, preferably adjacentjacent tto valves.
c. Legend shall be located onn pipe so thatth it can be read easily from operator’s normal viewing position. Labelsbels shall be placed on readily visible lower quadrant of overhead pipes, an on an upperer quadranquadrant of pipes below normal eye level.
3. LEGEND
a. Positive identification of piping system contentntenttent shshashall be by lettered legend giving name of content in full or abbreviated form. LeLLegendsgendsONLYends mmay also be as specified on the Drawings or in other specifications.
b. Abbreviation of words in legend may be used only wherehereere unavoidableunavounav due to space limitations.
c. Legend shall include nominal operating pressure and/or temperature when specified.
d. An arrow indicating direction of flow shall be placed near legend on pipes normally having a flow in 1 direction only. Color and size of arrow shall be consistent with color and size of legend letters.
e. Legend shall be located on or adjacent to classification color band.
40 05 13 – Att. 1-1 RPP-SPEC-60023 Rev.07 2/14/2018 - 2:57 PM 282 of 317
RPP-SPEC-60023, Rev. 7
4. APPROVED LABELS
a. Legend and color classification may be accomplished by use of approved labels that conform to this Standard and are suitable for temperature of surface to which they are applied. Approved labels include the following:
Stock System #4 Pipe Markers www.pipemarker.com
Brimar Industries P.O. Box 467 / 64 Outwater Lane Garfield NJ 07026 Ph: 800-274-6271 FOR Highgh PerformPerforPerformanceOR Pipe Markers www.bradyid.com.bradbradyid.c Brady WORLDWIDERLDRL INFORMATONWID 6555 W. Good Hope Rd Milwaukee, WI 532233223
b. Single-word labels may be combinedcombicomb to form complete legends. Individual-letter labels shall not be combined.ed..
c. Labels shall be installed after paintinginting is ccomplete.
5. CLASSIFICATION COLOR shall conformrmO to ANSI/ASMEAN A13.1 ONLY END OF ATTACHMENT 1
40 05 13 – Att. 1-2 RPP-SPEC-60023 Rev.07 2/14/2018 - 2:57 PM 283 of 317
RPP-SPEC-60023, Rev. 7
SECTION 40 05 22
HOSE-IN-HOSE TRANSFER LINE SYSTEM INSTALLATION
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. The hose-in-hose transfer line (HIHTL) will be located within the 241-AX Tank Farm, 241-AZ Tank Farm, and the intra-farm area between the two tank farms. The HIHTL system will connect the 241-AX waste retrieval equipment to a portable above ground valve box assembly within the 241-AX Tank Farm and from the valve box to designated connections in the 241-AZ tank farm. The furnishedFORnished HHIHTL assemblies will consist of a flexible primary hose installed withinin a seconsecondary encasement hose. The primary hose will be wrapped with heat tape andd the secondarysecosec hose with insulation to prevent significant cooling of the conveyed fluiduidINFORMATON asas it flows through the assembly, minimizing the risk of plugging. 1.2 RELATED DOCUMENTS,ENTS, CODES,CO AND STANDARDS
Drawings and general provisionssionsns of ththe Contract Statement of Work, including Division 01 Specification Sections,ons, apply to this Section.
The following documents and others referencereferenced therein form part of Contract to the extent designated in this Section. Referencedrencedenced docdocuments are those current as of the date of this Section unless otherwise indicated.
A. American Society of Mechanical Engineerseersers (ASM(ASME) ASME B31.3, 2012 Process Piping ONLY B. ASTM International (ASTM)
ASTM D380 Standard Test Methods forr Rubber Hose
C. Hanford Documents
TFC-ENG-STD-21 Hose-in-Hose Transfer Line
RPP-14859 Specification for Hose-in-Hose Transfer Lines
D. Rubber Manufacturers Association (RMA)
RMA IP-2 Hose Handbook, Washington D.C.
E. Washington Administrative Code (WAC)
WAC 173-303 Dangerous Waste Regulations
40 05 22 – 1 RPP-SPEC-60023 Rev.07 2/14/2018 - 2:57 PM 284 of 317
RPP-SPEC-60023, Rev. 7
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. See the Contract Statement of Work for the submittal process.
B. Approval Required
1. Pressure and Leak Testing and Certification: Five days before pressure testing, submit two copies of testing procedure in accordance with Paragraphs 1.4.B and 3.4.A.
C. Approval Not Required
1. Certified Material Test Reports (CMTRs): With delivery, submit two ccopies of legible reports, certified by responsible manufacturer of FORmatmaterials used in fabrication of pipe, fittings, flanges, and weld filler materiamaterimaterial for the individual pipe sections listed below. Reports shall present rerresults of chemical analysis and physical tests specified in ASME, ASTM,STM,M, orr AWSA Codes or Standards as applicable and Standard SpecificationsINFORMATONcations forf production lots and heats of materials. Submit separate reports foror the indindividual pipe sections.
2. Material traceabilityabilitybility shashall be maintained through fabrication for material requiring CMTRs.Rs.s.
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Misrepresented Products: See Contractntractract StatementState of Work for required measures to prevent use of misrepresented products.ucts.
B. Pressure and Leak Testing Procedures: Pressureessuressure tettestingsti procedures shall be in accordance with ASME B31.3 and this Specification.fii ation.ONLYtion. MMaintain copies of procedures at jobsite.
C. Assigned personnel to perform work have reviewed andnd are famfafamiliar with the HIHTL system, associated handling recommendations, andnd the coconnection methods for HIHTL assemblies.
D. Deleted.
1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. See Contract Statement of Work for general requirements. B. Storage of the HIHTL materials shall be in accordance with the following: 1. Hose assembly shall be stored as shipped, on reel, in either vertical or horizontal position.
40 05 22 – 2 RPP-SPEC-60023 Rev.07 2/14/2018 - 2:57 PM 285 of 317
RPP-SPEC-60023, Rev. 7
2. Hose assembly should be stored in its original shipping/packing materials so that plastic wrapping and cardboard covering will provide some protection against possible deteriorating elements. Additionally, if stored outside, the material shall be covered with a tarpaulin or other protective covering. 3. Hose ends shall be kept covered by wrapping in plastic and securing. 4. Exposure to direct and reflected sunlight should be avoided. If the hose is exposed to the sun for a prolonged period, a section of hose should be inspected for deterioration every two years. Inspect hose for any damage to or holes in insulation and inspect fittings for visible damage. 5. Optimum storage area is in a covered area that is cool and dark, and free FORof ddampness and mildew. 6. MaximumMaximu shelf life is 7 years. PART 2 PRODUCTS INFORMATON 2.1 SUBSTITUTES
A. See Contract Statementntt of WorWork for substitution approvals.
2.2 MATERIALS
A. Unless otherwise noted on drawings,ngs, HIHTHIHTL system materials, including the portable valve box, will be Governmentment FurniFurnished Equipment (GFE). 1. The HIHTL is classified as Safetyy Significant.SignificaSignific 2. HIHTLs shall be in accordance with TFC-ENG-STD-21.FCF ONLY-ENG B. Bolt thread lubricant (high stress compound, anti-seize).eize).ize). C. Calibrated torque wrenches. D. Deleted. E. Shielding materials as indicated on Drawings. F. Deleted.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 PREPARATION
A. Examine designated routing for the HIHTL systems and notify TOC Construction Representative in writing of conditions detrimental to proper and timely completion of work. Do not proceed with work until unsatisfactory conditions have been addressed and/or corrected.
40 05 22 – 3 RPP-SPEC-60023 Rev.07 2/14/2018 - 2:57 PM 286 of 317
RPP-SPEC-60023, Rev. 7
B. Assigned personnel to perform work have reviewed and are familiar with the HIHTL system, associated handling recommendations, and the connection methods for HIHTL assemblies.
C. Prepare routing path and tie-in connections for installation of HIHTL assemblies. Coordinate with TOC Construction Representative for delivery of materials to the site.
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Install HIHTL assemblies as shown on the Drawings.
B. Use care in unwrapping plastic and cardboard to avoid damage to hose, fittings, andFOR heat trace. C. If a spindlendle is used to unroll hose, provisions must be in place to slow the reel as it unwindsdss to contcontrcontrol the roll off of the hose.
D. Never pull on HIHTLINFORMATON assemblies by the ends alone. Use a choker strap at some point along the hose lengtlenglength.
E. If temperatures have beeneen belowbelo 32ºF, the hose may be stiff and require warming before installation. Notifyify TOC CConstruction Representative for instructions if warming is required.
F. Leave assembly connections coveredvered and protected until in place to actually connect assembly to equipment.
G. Connect primary hose joints using a qualifiedlified qualityqualqua controlled procedure per manufacturer’s directions. ONLY 1. Primary hose connections are male to femalemale ChemJoint.ChemChe
2. The male and female threads have been treatedd with EvEveEverlube, a dry film lubricant. No additional lubricant or anti-seize materialaterial shsshould be applied.
3. The o-ring should have one white and two yellow dots visible indicating it is the specified material, EPDM.
4. Verify cleanliness, correct o-ring, and then join the hose assembly.
5. Torque for the ChemJoint fitting is 200 ft-lbs or hand tight plus 1 to 1-1/2 notches of the nut. Contact TOC Construction Representative for clarification on turn of the nut torque method from vendor information.
6. Apply set screws and tighten with 1/8-inch Allen wrench to the point that the ChemJoint nut cannot turn.
H. Test primary hose in accordance with Paragraph 3.4.A.
40 05 22 – 4 RPP-SPEC-60023 Rev.07 2/14/2018 - 2:57 PM 287 of 317
RPP-SPEC-60023, Rev. 7
I. Prior to final joining of secondary hose connections, verify heat trace is spliced and/or heat trace lead is clear of the joint and available for termination.
J. Connect secondary hose joints using a qualified quality controlled procedure per manufacturer’s directions.
1. Secondary hose connections will be one of two types. One joint will be flange connector consisting of 6 inch, 150 lb raised face flange that would bolt directly to a mating flange on equipment/valve box. The other joint will be a threaded union end connector consisting of a 6 inch, 150 lb raised face flange that would connect to another hose assembly and/or equipment.
2.M Make both of these connections in accordance with details shown on the FORDrawDrawings.
3.Verify y cleanlinessclec of the visible area of hose and connection.
4. Apply approvedapproveINFORMATON lubricant to flange bolt threads and tighten in sequence that uniformlyformlyormlyy loadsloa the gasket. For connections using raised face flanges with EPDMM gaskets, final torque bolts to 40 ft-lbs.
K. Below Grade HIHTL
1. Trenches: Excavate inn accordanaccordaaccordance with Section 31 23 00, “Excavation and Fill.”
2. Deleted. 3. Deleted. ONLY 4. Backfill and compact in accordance with the drawings.draw
L. Deleted.
1. Deleted.
2. Deleted.
3. Deleted.
4. Deleted.
5. Deleted.
M. Deleted.
40 05 22 – 5 RPP-SPEC-60023 Rev.07 2/14/2018 - 2:57 PM 288 of 317
RPP-SPEC-60023, Rev. 7
3.3 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Notify TOC Construction Representative prior to installation of HIHTL for witnessing of activities by Independent Qualified Registered Professional Engineer (IQRPE), as required by WAC 173-303.
B. Perform visual inspection of encasement hose for damage. Minor cosmetic damage to the insulation is acceptable. If visible damage is present, inspect for potential leak paths and notify TOC Construction Representative. If suspect, remove hose from service and retest.
C. Inspect the HIHTL assembly end connections and ensure they are clean and free of debris.
D. InspectFORpect the hhose assemblies and connections described in Paragraph 3.2. Verify final connectioconnectionsonnectio have been properly assembled and torqued.
E. Refer to Sectionectiontio 40 41 00, “Process Piping and Equipment Heat Tracing,” for heat trace testing requirements.INFORMATONquireme
F. Perform visual inspectionpection of equipment insulation for excessive damage. Minor cosmetic damage to thehee insulationinsulatinsulati is acceptable. Record results.
G. Verify a minimum of 2 inchh of soil coverc is in place above the hose assembly prior to installation of cover plates.lates.
3.4 FIELD INSPECTIONS AND TESTS
A. Pressure and Leak Testing 1. Install one temporary relief valve duringng ONLYtestingesting to protect HIHTL against over-pressurization. Tag each relief valvee used to show serial number, inspector, date, and pressure setting.
2. Joints and connections to be tested shall be visiblee and acaccessible during tests.
3. Isolate instruments and other items which could be damaged by test pressures.
4. Deleted.
5. Deleted.
a. Deleted.
i. Deleted.
ii. Deleted.
40 05 22 – 6 RPP-SPEC-60023 Rev.07 2/14/2018 - 2:57 PM 289 of 317
RPP-SPEC-60023, Rev. 7
b. Deleted.
6. Perform leak test for primary hose connection per TFC-ENG-STD-21.
Note: Leak testing per this section will be performed on components that have already been hydrostatically tested as subassemblies per ASME B31.3.
a. Leak testing of the HIHTL primary hose assembly connections shall be performed by visual observation. The connection leak testing shall be performed with water at the interfacing water system pressure except when (a) there is no waste transfer system valve downstream of the connection; or (b) closing the valve with water flowing causes a flow transient (water hammer) that could FOR damage safety-significant waste transfer system structures, systems, or components (SSCs). For this leak test, the interfacing wwater system pressure is maintained at the connection for at least 100 min.m If there is no valve downstream of the connection or INFORMATONclosing tthe valve causes an unacceptable water hammer, leak testingstingting is aalallowed with water flowing through the connection. This leak test requirrequrequires a minimum water flow of 200 gal through the connectiontionion after flow is established in the line. If leak testing with water is notott practicapracticpractical (i.e., no available water source), leak testing may be performedrmed at thetht beginning of the initial waste transfer through the connection.nection. T This leak test also requires a minimum waste flow of 200 gall througthrough the connection after flow is established in the line.
Leakage observed at the HIHTLIHTLHTL prpriprimary hose assembly connections during the leak teststts shshallONLYhall be eliminated. Subsequent leak testing of HIHTL primary hoseosese assemblyassem connections is not required unless the connection is unmademade and remade.
7. Secondary Hose
a. Perform pneumatic pressure test of the encasement hose at 10 +/- 2 psig. Maintain pressure for 10 minutes. Apply soap bubble solution to ensure no leakage at connections and any other location specified by the TOC Construction Representative. Where isolation of a connection is not possible, perform a final visual examination of the joint configuration/makeup to verify it conforms to the Drawings. Record results. The PRV shall be set at ≤ 50 psig. The secondary hoses have a minimum design pressure of 60 psig (or greater) and therefore a PRV setting of 50 psig does not pose a safety concern.
40 05 22 – 7 RPP-SPEC-60023 Rev.07 2/14/2018 - 2:57 PM 290 of 317
RPP-SPEC-60023, Rev. 7
8. Document testing of each HIHTL system on Pressure Test Certification. Use separate forms to describe and record each system. Under “Description” describe HIHTL system in enough detail for correlation to Drawings, as applicable. For systems tested segmentally, indicate continuity in “Description” to ensure that entire systems have been tested.
END OF SECTION 40 05 22
INFORMATON
ONLY
40 05 22 – 8 RPP-SPEC-60023 Rev.07 2/14/2018 - 2:57 PM 291 of 317
RPP-SPEC-60023, Rev. 7
SECTION 40 24 10
CHEMICAL PIPING
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Material, fabrication, installation, and testing of above and below grade chemical piping, equipment, and fittings for transferring sodium hydroxide (up to 50% solution) and oxalic acid (up to 8%). 1.2 RELATEDFOR DOCUMENTS,DO CODES, AND STANDARDS Drawings and genergenerageneral provisions of the Contract Statement of Work, including Division 01 Specificationpecificatiopecificati Sections, apply to this Section. The following documentsummINFORMATONnts andan others referenced therein form part of Contract to the extent designated in thishisis SectionSection. Referenced documents are those current as of the date of this Section unless otherwiseerwise iinindicated.
A. American National Standardsndards InsInInstitute (ANSI)
ANSI/ASME A13.1 SchemeSchem for the Identification of Piping Systems
B. American Society of Mechanical Engineersngineers (ASME)
ASME B&PVC, 2013 Boiler andd PressurPressuPressure Vessel Code Section V NondestructiveuctivctivONLY ExaminationExa Section IX Qualification Standardtandard fofor Welding and Brazing Procedures,es,, WelderWelders, Brazers, and Welding and Brazingg OperatioOperations
ASME B16.5 Pipe Flanges and Flanged Fittings
ASME B16.9 Factory-Made Wrought Buttwelding Fittings
ASME B31.3, 2012 Process Piping
C. American Society for Nondestructive Testing (ASNT)
ASNT SNT-TC-1A Personnel Qualifications and Certification in Nondestructive Testing
40 24 10 – 1 RPP-SPEC-60023 Rev.07 2/14/2018 - 2:57 PM 292 of 317
RPP-SPEC-60023, Rev. 7
D. ASTM International (ASTM)
ASTM A182 Standard Specification for Forged or Rolled Alloy and Stainless Steel Pipe Flanges
ASTM A193 Standard Specification for Alloy-Steel and Stainless Steel Bolting for High Temperature or High Pressure Service and Other Special Purpose Applications
ASTM A194 Carbon and Alloy Steel Nuts for Bolts for High- Pressure and High-Temperature Service
ASTM A276 Standard Specification for Stainless Steel Bars and FOR Shapes ASTMM A312 Standard Specification for Seamless, Welded, and Heavily Cold Worked Austenitic Stainless Steel INFORMATONPipes ASTM A351 Standard Specification for Castings, Austenitic, for Pressure-Containing Parts
ASTM A403 WroughtWrouWro Austenitic Stainless Steel Piping Fittings
E. American Welding Society (AWS)WS)
AWS D1.1, 2010 Structuralural WeldingWeld Code – Steel
AWS D1.3, 2008 Structural Welding CodeC – Sheet Steel
AWS D1.6, 2007 Structural WeldinggONLY Code – Stainless Steel
AWS QC1 Certification of Weldingng InspectInspecInspectors
F. Manufacturer’s Standardization Society (MSS)
MSS SP-58 Pipe Hangers and Supports – Materials, Design, Manufacture, Selection, Application, and Installation
MSS SP-69 Pipe Hangers and Supports – Selection and Application
MSS-SP-97 Integrally Reinforced Forged Branch Outlet Fittings – Socket Welding, Threaded and Buttwelding Ends
G. Hanford Documents
40 24 10 – 2 RPP-SPEC-60023 Rev.07 2/14/2018 - 2:57 PM 293 of 317
RPP-SPEC-60023, Rev. 7
TFC-ENG-STD-06 Design Loads for Tank Farm Facilities
TFC-ENG-STD-12 Tank Farm Equipment Identification Numbering and Labeling Standard
TFC-ENG-STD-22 Piping, Jumpers, and Valves
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. See the Contract Statement of Work for the submittal process.
B. Approval Required
1. Welding Procedure Specifications and/or Standard Welding Procedure FORSpeSpecifications: Five days before first use or start of fabrication, submit procedprocedures as required by Paragraph 1.4.B.
2.Welding elding PePersonnel Qualifications: Five days before start of fabrication, submiti INFORMATONwelderwelde qualification as required by Paragraph 1.4.B. 3. Examinationon DocumDocumentation: Five days before start of fabrication, submit documentationon in accoraccordancecco with Paragraph 3.4.A.6 for information/record.ord.ord
4. Mechanical Cleaning VerificatiVerificatVerification: Submit documentation in accordance with Paragraph 3.3.B forr informatinformation/record.
5. Weld Examinations as requirededd byy ParaParParagraph 3.5.A.
6. Pressure and Leak Testing and Certification:tificationificatio Five days before pressure testing, submit testing procedure in accordancecorcoONLYdance with Paragraphs 1.4.C and 3.4.B.
C. Approval Not Required
1. O&M manuals for equipment.
2. Vendor information: Before installation, submit the following information.
a. For Filter, submit: Dimensional drawings; Specifications; Installation, Operation, and Maintenance Instructions; Spare Parts List.
b. For Flow Meter, submit: Dimensional drawings; Specifications; Installation, Operation, and Maintenance Instructions; Spare Parts List.
40 24 10 – 3 RPP-SPEC-60023 Rev.07 2/14/2018 - 2:57 PM 294 of 317
RPP-SPEC-60023, Rev. 7
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Misrepresented Products: See Contract Statement of Work for required measures to prevent use of misrepresented products.
B. Qualifications of Structural Welding Personnel and Procedures.
1. Personnel and procedures for welding structural steel shall be in accordance with Section 05 50 00, “Metal Fabrications.”
2. Qualification of Examination Personnel: Maintain copies of examination personnel certifications and written examination performance procedures at jobsite.
FORa. Personnel performing visual examinations shall be Certified Welding Inspectors (CWIs) who have received certification (c((current or previous certification) in accordance with AWS QC1.
b.INFORMATONPersonn Personnel performing other nondestructive examinations (NDEs) shallhall be cecertified in accordance with approved procedure, which shallll meet the requirements of ASNT SNT-TC-1A. Use Level II or III personnelrsonnel to interpret results.
C. Qualification of Pressure Boundaryundaryy Welders
1. For low-pressure systems,s, personnpersonnel and procedures for welding pressure- retaining components, alongg with attaattachments hereto, shall be qualified in accordance with ASME Sectionon IX, excexcept as modified by ASME B31.3, Chapter V, Paragraph 328.2. D. Examination Procedures: Examination proceduresd resONLYes shashall be in accordance with AWS D1.1, AWS D1.3, AWS D1.6, ASME Sectionion V, and ASME B31.3 as applicable, and this Specification. Maintain copies of examinexamexamination procedures at jobsite.
1. Qualification of NDE personnel:
a. Visual weld examinations shall be performed and appropriate documentation prepared by CWIs who have received certification in accordance with AWS QC1. Certified Associate Welding Inspections (CAWIs), certified in accordance with above standard, may perform examinations when under immediate direction of CWIs.
b. Personnel performing other NDE of welds shall be certified in accordance with written practice, which shall meet requirements of ASNT SNT-TC-1A. Use Level II or III personnel to interpret test results.
40 24 10 – 4 RPP-SPEC-60023 Rev.07 2/14/2018 - 2:57 PM 295 of 317
RPP-SPEC-60023, Rev. 7
2. Welding-related examination documentation shall be signed or stamped by individuals performing examinations.
E. Pressure and Leak Testing Procedures: Pressure testing procedures shall be in accordance with ASME B31.3 and this Specification. Maintain copies of procedures at jobsite.
1.5 PERMITS
A. Permits are addressed by TOC work control process.
1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. SeeFOR ConContract Statement of Work for general requirements. PART 2 PRODUCTSUCTSTS 2.1 SUBSTITUTES INFORMATON A. See Contract Statementtatement oof Work for substitution approvals.
2.2 MATERIALS
A. Piping and Fittings: See details spespspecified on the Drawings and in Paragraph 3.5.B, “Components List.”
B. Pipe Supports: Unless otherwise specifiedpecifiedecified ini the details on the Drawings and in Section 05 50 00 “Metal Fabrications,”s,”,” use stastandard components in accordance with MSS SP-69 that satisfy the criteria of MSS SSP-58. U-bolts to be Stainless Steel or plastic coated.
C. Pipe Joint Sealant (Lubricant) for Threaded Joints.ONLYts.s. Use anaerobica acrylic sealer. Henkel Corporation: Loctite 5452 or 567 or engineeringeeringering apappapproved equivalent. Clean threads and apply according to manufacturer’s specificatspecification.pecifica
D. Pipe covering protection saddle: B-Line B3162, Stainless Steel,te plain. Diameter to match pipe diameter and insulation thickness as specified in Section 40 42 00, “Process Piping and Equipment Insulation.”
E. Protective Coating for above and below grade Stainless Steel Piping: Exterior epoxy protection system, SEAGUARD MP, 5-6 mil thick, per Section 09 91 00, “Painting,” and per manufacturer’s instructions.
F. Valves: As shown on the Drawings.
G. Pipe Flanges and Gaskets: Specified on the Drawings and in Paragraph 3.5.B, “Components List.”
40 24 10 – 5 RPP-SPEC-60023 Rev.07 2/14/2018 - 2:57 PM 296 of 317
RPP-SPEC-60023, Rev. 7
H. Heat Tracing: As shown on the Drawings and per Section 40 41 00, “Process Piping and Equipment Heat Tracing.”
I. Pipe Insulation System: See Section 40 42 00, “Process Piping and Equipment Insulation.”
J. Cathodic Protection: See Section 13 47 13.13, “Cathodic Protection for Underground and Submerged Piping.”
K. Flange and Valve Safety Spray Shields: TFE Spra-Gard®44 (Ramco Manufacturing Company, Inc) or equivalent.
L. Buried Pipe Marker Tape: See Section 31 23 00, “Excavation and Fill.”
M. PenetrationnetrationFOR Sealants: RTV Silicone.
N. Anchors:rs: 1. ConcreteINFORMATONte AnchorAnchAn Blocks: See Section 03 30 00, “Concrete.” 2. Expansionn Anchors:Anchors See Section 03 15 00, “Post-Installed Concrete Anchor Bolts.”s.”
3. Anchorage must bee designeddesign to TFC-ENG-STD-06.
2.3 EQUIPMENT
A. As specified on the Drawings.
2.4 FABRICATION
A. General ONLY
1. Verify measurements, including field measurements,ements,ments, bbebefore fabrication. Provide miscellaneous bolts and anchors, supports,rts, braces,braces and connections necessary for completion of metal fabrications.ricatioca Cut, reinforce, drill, and tap metal fabrications shown to receive finish hardware and similar items. Weld or bolt connections as shown on the Drawings.
2. Perform welding of steel connections in accordance with AWS D1.1, sheet steel in accordance with AWS D1.3, and Stainless Steel in accordance with AWS D1.6 and ASME B31.3.
B. Miscellaneous Steel Items: Supply required clips, frames, equipment supports, and other fabrications not shown on the Drawings. Fabricate parts from standard structural sections or shapes, to sizes required. Wherever miscellaneous parts are
44 Spra-Gard is a registered trademark of Ramco Manufacturing Company, Inc., Kenilworth, New Jersey.
40 24 10 – 6 RPP-SPEC-60023 Rev.07 2/14/2018 - 2:57 PM 297 of 317
RPP-SPEC-60023, Rev. 7
exposed, grind edges, corners, and rough cuts smooth and free of snags. Shop paint parts except those to be embedded in concrete, or those that require other specific finishes.
C. Finishes
1. Prime ferrous metal (except Stainless Steel Piping) in accordance with Section 09 91 00, “Painting.” Do not coat members to be embedded in concrete, surfaces and edges to be field welded, or items to be galvanized. Shop paint may extend into embedded areas where impractical to remove.
2. Stainless Steel piping shall not come in contact with galvanized surfaces. PART 3 EXECUTIONFORTIO 3.1 PREPARATIONTIONIO
A. Surfaces too receirecereceiveve protective coating shall be clean, free of moisture, oil, dirt, scale, rust, anddINFORMATON other foforeign material.
B. Prepare setting drawings,awings, didiagrams, templates, and instructions for installation of anchorages, such as concretencrete inserts,in anchor bolts, and miscellaneous items having integral anchors, to be embemembedded in concrete. Coordinate with TOC Construction Representativeve for delidelivery of items to Site.
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. General
1. Fabricate and install pipe, fittings,and nd comcomponentsp in accordance with ASME B31.3, the Drawings and this Section.SecS ONLYtion.ion. B. Valves
1. Install valves orientated as shown on Drawings where clearlycle illustrated.
2. Valves shall be installed such that they are not used as means of support for runs of piping or other components.
3. Ball valves shall be installed such that, when open, the handle of the ball valve is inline with the piping. The handle shall be turned clockwise to close the valve.
C. Identification
1. An identification tag shall be supplied and attached to the equipment, valves, and components. 1/4” stamped or engraved characters shall be used on a Stainless Steel tag. The tag shall include the equipment identification number (EIN) as identified on the P&ID.
40 24 10 – 7 RPP-SPEC-60023 Rev.07 2/14/2018 - 2:57 PM 298 of 317
RPP-SPEC-60023, Rev. 7
2. Piping Identification: Identify above grade piping systems as to fluid carried and direction of flow as specified in ANSI/ASME B13.1 and also Section 40 05 13, “Process Piping,” Attachment 1, “Identification of Piping Systems.”
D. Pipe
1. Cut pipe using methods that result in clean, straight cuts.
2. Ream pipe to nominal inside diameter after cutting. Remove burrs before assembly.
3. Keep piping systems clean. Once fabrication has started, plug or cap ends oof piping when installation is not in progress. Cap or plug openings in FORfabrfabricated pipe spool assemblies until installation in piping system.
4.AlignmenAlignme Alignment: Distortion or cold springing of piping to bring it into alignmentgnmennme t forfo joint assembly that introduces a strain in piping components is prohibited.ibited.ibitedINFORMATON
5. Field verify lengthslengths of make-up spool pipe sections as called out on the Drawings. Cutut and weweld to fit after all other spools are in place.
E. Make joints in threaded pipingpingng ssystemsyste with joint sealant specified. Apply sealant sparingly to male threads only.
F. Flanged Joints
1. Install flanges in accordance withh manufacmanufacturer’s instructions. 2. Clean joint surfaces of the pipe, fittingsgs aandONLYnd valvalvvalves being joined. 3. Align flange of pipe, fitting, or valve to be installednstalled wwith flange of receiving pipe, fitting, or valve.
4. Support pipe, fittings, and valves being joined so thatatt flflanges are properly aligned.
5. Lubricate bolts/studs and nuts prior to installation of bolts and nuts.
6. Clean gasket of sand, dirt, and other foreign matter. Inspect gasket for damage/defects.
7. Install flange isolation kits per manufacturer instructions on every flange adjacent to a below grade section of piping.
8. Field install flange safety spray shields at all temporary hose connections per manufacturer’s instructions.
40 24 10 – 8 RPP-SPEC-60023 Rev.07 2/14/2018 - 2:57 PM 299 of 317
RPP-SPEC-60023, Rev. 7
9. All flange bolt hole orientations straddle the centerlines (“two-holed” industry standard alignment). G. Pipe covering protection saddles: Pressure boundary weld to pipe in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions and located per drawings. Locate one centered on bottom of pipe for all piping roller support locations. Locate one centered on top of pipe for all piping roller support locations, except vertical expansion loops as called out on the Drawings.
H. Pipe supports: Fabricate and install as shown on the Drawings, in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions, Section 05 50 00, “Metal Fabrications,” and applicable recommended procedures of MSS SP-58.
I. Expansionansio Anchors: See Section 03 15 00, “Post-Installed Concrete Anchor Bolts.”FORlts.”
J. Tools marked forfo Stainless Steel shall be used on Stainless Steel only. Tools previously usedsed onn carbon steel shall not be used on Stainless Steel. Areas on Stainless SteelINFORMATON pipe thattha show signs of coming in contact with carbon steel (rust marks or streaks)s) shall be cleaned of all free iron.
K. Below Grade Piping:
1. Trenches: Excavate,e, backfillbackfill, and compact in accordance with Section 31 23 00, “Excavationcavation anda Fill.”
2. Install insulation using temporaryporaryoraryy supportssup on undisturbed soil, or on backfill placed and compactedd in accordaccordance with Section 31 23 00, “Excavation and Fill.” Install belowlow grade insulation system prior to backfilling trench in accordance withh SectionSectiSect on 40 42 00, “Process Piping and Equipment Insulation.” ONLY
3. At piping bends, provide cushions for thermalal expansiexpanexpansion according to Section 40 42 00, “Process Piping and Equipmentent Insulation,”InsuInsulat Paragraph 2.2.D.
L. Exterior Protective Coating for all Outside Above and Below Grade Piping:
1. Before coating application over joints, perform NDE, flushing, and leak/pressure testing specified in this Section.
2. Protect Stainless Steel pipe, fittings, and pipe covering protection saddles with coating specified in Paragraph 2.2, “Materials,” in accordance with Section 09 91 00, “Painting,” and manufacturer’s instructions.
3. After installation, examine pipe, joints, and fittings with electrical holiday detector in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions.
40 24 10 – 9 RPP-SPEC-60023 Rev.07 2/14/2018 - 2:57 PM 300 of 317
RPP-SPEC-60023, Rev. 7
4. Repair damage to coating in accordance with manufacturer’s recommendations.
5. Do not install insulation system or backfill until coating has cured in accordance with manufacturer’s recommendations.
M. Welding
1. Weld piping and attachments to pressure-retaining components in accordance with ASME B31.3.
2. Use of backing rings is not permitted. 3.FORC Complete piping welds before tie-in welds to fixed items. 4.Weld steel structural elements in accordance with AWS D1.1 or D1.6. N. Weld IdentificationntificatintificaINFORMATONn 1. Preparee weld idenidentification drawings, isometric or spool, using existing project Drawingsawings as applicable which show relative positions of pressure- containing weldseldsds and attachmenta welds to pressure-retaining components.
2. Assign weld numbersbersers to prprepressure-containing welds and attachment welds to pressure-retaining componencomponents as made. Record weld number on weld identification drawings ass welds aare made.
3. Do not reuse weld numbers. Iff a weld iis completely replaced, assign a new number. 4. Show heat/lot numbers on weld identificationficationONLYtion ddrawings for materials requiring Certified Material Test Reportss (CMTRs(CMTR(CMTRs).
O. Perform examination, flushing, and leak/pressure testing,ing,ng, and cconnecting of heat tracing before application of insulation and jacketing overer joints and other materials and components.
P. Heat Trace: Install per Section 40 41 00, “Process Piping and Equipment Heat Tracing.”
Q. Piping Insulation System: Install per Section 40 42 00, “Process Piping and Equipment Insulation.”
3.3 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Flushing/Testing Preparation
1. Furnish equipment and instruments required to perform mechanical cleaning.
40 24 10 – 10 RPP-SPEC-60023 Rev.07 2/14/2018 - 2:57 PM 301 of 317
RPP-SPEC-60023, Rev. 7
2. Obtain direction for disposal of flushing water from TOC Construction Representative. See the Contract Statement of Work.
B. Cleaning and Flushing
1. After examination is complete and before pressure testing system, or before connecting system into existing systems, clean piping internal surfaces by mechanical cleaning.
2. Mechanical cleaning: Remove loose dirt, scale, and debris by brushing, wiping, high-pressure water jetting, blowing compressed air, or other mechanical method approved by the TOC Construction Representative until there is no visible dirt, scale, or debris.
FORa. When high-pressure water jetting or other mechanical cleaning method utilizing water is used, and leak/pressure testing will not be pepperformed immediately after cleaning, remove all water.
b.INFORMATON Use dradrain taps at low point of piping system to ensure complete drainage andan drying. Cap lines or reconnect to system to maintain cleanliness.anliness.nliness.
3. Provide documentednted evideevidence that flushing or mechanical cleaning has been accomplished ass specifispecified in this Section.
3.4 FIELD INSPECTIONS AND TESTS
A. Nondestructive Examination (NDE) off Welds
1. Perform examination for individual pipe sessectionscti listed below in Paragraph 3.5. Acceptance Criteria, unlesslessONLYss othotherotherwise noted by design, shall be in accordance with ASME B31.3,, “Norma“Normal Service.”
2. Visual examination (VT): Perform in accordancence with AASME B31.3, Paragraph 341.4.1(a). Acceptance criteria shall bee in accoaccordance with Table 341.3.2.
3. Perform in-process examination in accordance with ASME B31.3, Paragraph 344.7. Liquid penetrant inspection shall be performed in accordance with ASME B&PVC, Section V, Article 7 on root and final weld surfaces when in-process examination is performed.
4. Radiographic examination (RT): Perform in accordance with ASME B&PVC, Section V, Article 2 and ASME B31.3, Paragraph 344.5.2. Acceptance criteria shall be in accordance with ASME B31.3, Table 341.3.2.
40 24 10 – 11 RPP-SPEC-60023 Rev.07 2/14/2018 - 2:57 PM 302 of 317
RPP-SPEC-60023, Rev. 7
a. Identify radiographic film with weld identification number, weld spool identification and project or work order number assigned to work covered by this Section.
b. Prepare radiographic examination reports as follows:
i. List each radiographic exposure location (0-1, 1-2, etc.) individually on radiographic examination report.
ii. Indicate location acceptability or rejectability and note discontinuities whether rejectable or not.
iii. When report includes radiographs of welds that have been repaired, indicate which welds are repair welds and how FOR many times each weld has been repaired.
c.c IfI additional welding is performed on weld area that has already bbeeneen examined radiographically; this area is a repair area. Identify INFORMATONsubsequsubsequent radiographs by “R-1, R-2,” etc.
5. Perform randomndom exaexamination of piping support welds in accordance with Section 05 50 00,0, “Metal“Met Fabrications,” and ASME B31.3, Paragraph 341.4.1.1.1
6. Examination Documentationntation
a. Document examinationtionon of prepressure containment welds for piping systems on weld examinationination anaand test record. Record weld identification drawings, weld numbers,numb welder identification, welding procedure numbers, weld ffillerille material, visual examinations and notation of satisfactoryONLYsfactoryfactory completion of pressure testing in accordance with instructionsions on foform.
b. Required examinations shall be completedted and dodocumented before starting leak testing.
c. Weld Examination and Test Record information may be incorporated on a single format or traveler for a specific work package.
d. Document examination of attachment welds to pressure-retaining components by recording on sketches or Weld Examination and Test Record.
7. Final closure welds that cannot be isolated for testing shall be examined in-process.
40 24 10 – 12 RPP-SPEC-60023 Rev.07 2/14/2018 - 2:57 PM 303 of 317
RPP-SPEC-60023, Rev. 7
8. Spray shield installation verification: Provide documented evidence that spray shields have been installed on all temporary hose connections along the chemical route piping.
B. Pressure and Leak Testing
1. After completion of mechanical cleaning and NDE, perform hydrostatic leak/pressure testing of individual piping sections and of the whole assembly in accordance with ASME B31.3, Chapter VI, Paragraph 345 and this Section. Use calibrated gages with an accuracy of ± 1 psi and with ranges 1-1/2 to 4 times test pressure.
2. Document testing of each piping system on Pressure Test Certification. UUse separate forms to describe and record each piping system. Under FOR“Des“Description,”Des describe piping system in enough detail for correlation to weld ididentification drawings, and Drawings, as applicable. For systems testedested segsesegmentally, indicate continuity in “Description” to ensure that entireiree ssystemsINFORMATONstem have been tested. 3. Pipe weldd joints anand connections to be tested shall be visible and accessible duringuring testtests.
4. Install one temporaryoraryaryy reliefrelie valve during testing to protect piping against over-pressurization. Relief vavvalve shall have a discharge capacity of 125% of capacity of pressurizingzinging device,devidevic and be set to operate at 110% of the maximum of test pressure for hydrostatichydro testing. Tag each relief valve used to show serial number, inspector, date, and pressure setting.
5. Install necessary restraining devices,es, beforebefor applying test pressure, to prevent distortion or displacement off pipinpippiping.ng. RRemove temporary restraining devices following testing. ONLY
6. Isolate instruments and other items which coulduldd be damdamaged by test pressures.
7. Visually examine piping joints, fittings, and other potential leak sources, including welds that attach wear plates, anchors, etc., to piping systems, during testing.
8. Complete testing of piping before field application of insulation.
9. Purge air from piping systems during filling, before applying pressure.
10. Continuously maintain test pressure for 10 minutes minimum. Examine joints and connections in accordance with ASME B31.3. Piping system, exclusive of possible localized instances at pump or valve packing, shall show no visual evidence of weeping or leaking.
40 24 10 – 13 RPP-SPEC-60023 Rev.07 2/14/2018 - 2:57 PM 304 of 317
RPP-SPEC-60023, Rev. 7
11. Remove water from piping systems after testing using low point drains or by applying low air pressure at connection points and blowing down the lines.
12. Where impractical, and as approved by TOC Construction Representative, an in-service leak test may be performed in lieu of a hydrostatic test on final closures as per ASME B31.3 Paragraph 345.1(a).
13. Support the final in-service leak test of the whole system to the extent directed by the TOC Construction Representative.
3.5 SCHEDULES A. ScheduleFORFOdule of Pipe Weld NDE/Testing NDE/NDT/NDTORDT MethodMet Chemical Piping Visual R Fit Root Pass INFORMATOINNNF Cover Pass A Liquid Penetrant FFO OR Legend: Root Pass E A. All final welds for pressure boundary and Cover PassRM E pressure boundary attachments to have a Magnetic Particle visual examination by AWS QC1 MMA qualified weld inspector shall be in Root Pass accordance with ASME B31.3, Cover Pass AT Paragraph 341.4.1(a) and fulfill the Radiographic TONTO minimum requirements. Completed Weld (5%) B ON B. Circumferential butt-welds. C. Full penetration welds on branch Ultrasonic N connections. Completed Weld D.D H Hydrostatic pressure test all joints. Leak/Pressure ONLYE. LiquidLiquLiq penetrant inspection required when in process examination is All Joints B, C, D, F performed.performed Other F. Attachmenttachment welds to pipe.
40 24 10 – 14 RPP-SPEC-60023 Rev.07 2/14/2018 - 2:57 PM 305 of 317
RPP-SPEC-60023, Rev. 7
B. Components List
Design Pressure Hydrostatic Test Design Temp Service (psig) Pressure (psig) (°F) Chemical Piping 200 300 +10/-0 180 (CHEMB) Sizes All Sizes Pipe Stainless Steel per ASTM A312, Grade TP316L, seamless. Pre-fabricated heat-traced and insulated spools as specified on the Drawings. Wall Thickness Schedule 40S. Fittings Stainless steel, ASTM A403, Grade WP, 316L or 316, butt-welding in accordance with ASME B16.9. Flanges ASTMM AA182, Grade F 316L, CL 300, forged, raised face, weld neck in accordance with ASMEFORFOME B16B1 B16.5. Bore to match pipe ID. Flange Isolation Flangenge IsolationIsolatIsolatio Gasket Kit, Type F Raised Face, ASME B16.5, Aramid fibers with EPDM Kits binder, 1/16 in. thick,th Garlock Blueguard, Style 3700, match pipe size, single washer 1 piece phenolic, NomexR SSleeve (GPT Industries or equivalent). Bolting ASTM A193, GradeGINFORMATOIINrade B8B CL 2, alloy steel studs, and ASTM A194, Grade 8, heavy hex nuts. Gaskets Aramid fibers withithNF EPDM binder, 1/16-in. thick, Garlock Blueguard, Style 3700. Valves See associated Drawings.wings.O Insulation See Section 40 42 00, “Processrocessocess PipinPipiPiping and Equipment Insulation” (according to outside location: either Below GradeeRM or Above Grade). Heat Trace – On any Chemical Piping below grade: 5 W/ftW Self-Regulating Heat Trace Cable. Quantity 2 below grade (one on each side of the pipe near thehe bottom)bottom) so as to provide 10 Watts per foot and to provide redundancy and meet the requireduired lengthlengths. See Section 40 41 00, “Process Piping and Equipment Heat Tracing.” TONTO Heat Trace – On any Chemical Piping above grade: 5 W/ft/ft SelfSelf-Regulatingf-RegRe Heat Trace Cable. Quantity 2 above grade (one on each side of the pipe near the bottom). See SectiSectSection 40 41 00, “Process Piping and Equipment Heat Tracing.” ONLYO
END OF SECTION 40 24 10
40 24 10 – 15 RPP-SPEC-60023 Rev.07 2/14/2018 - 2:57 PM 306 of 317
RPP-SPEC-60023, Rev. 7
SECTION 40 41 00
PROCESS PIPING AND EQUIPMENT HEAT TRACING
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 SCOPE OF WORK
A. Installation and testing of above and below grade water and process piping and hoses heat tracing.
1.2 RELATED DOCUMENTS / CODES AND STANDARDS Drawings andFOR gengegeneral provisions of the contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions andd DivDivisDivision 01 Specification Sections apply to this Section.
The following documentsocumentcumen and others referenced therein, form part of the Contract to the extent designated innthnt thisINFORMATONis SecSectSection. Referenced documents are those current as of the date of this Section unless otherwise indicated.
A. American National Standardsndard Institute (ANSI)
ANSI A13.1 SchemeSche for the Identification of Piping Systems
B. National Fire Protection Associationiation (NF(NFPA)
NFPA 70, 2014 Nationalnal ElectriElectrical Code (NEC)
C. Hanford Documents
TFC-ENG-STD-02 Environmental anddONLY SeasonSeasonal Requirements for TOC Systems, Structures,, and ComComponents
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. See the Contract Statement of Work for the submittal process.
B. Approval Required
1. Submit test procedures to be used with acceptance criteria prior to testing.
2. Submit records of inspections, tests, and adjustments described in 3.3.
C. Approval Not Required
1. Catalog Data: With delivery, submit two copies of catalog data for heater cable, thermostat, controls, fittings, indicator lights, and pipe markers.
40 41 00 – 1 RPP-SPEC-60023 Rev.07 2/14/2018 - 2:57 PM 307 of 317
RPP-SPEC-60023, Rev. 7
2. Includes rated capacities, operating characteristics, specialties, and accessories.
3. Operation and Maintenance Data: With delivery, submit two copies of operation and maintenance instructions.
4. Warranty: Manufacturer agreement for replacement of electric heating cable due to failure in materials or workmanship.
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Misrepresented Products: See the Statement of Work or required measures to prevent use of misrepresented products.
B. ProductsoductsFOR shshall be obtained from qualified suppliers, meeting NEC requirements, or bee commercialcommercommer grade items (CGI) meeting acceptance criteria specified in this Section.n.. CommCommeCommercial grade dedication will be performed by Buyer.
1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE,RAGE,INFORMATON ANDA HANDLING
A. See the Contract Statement of Work for general requirements.
B. Receive, store, protect, and handlehandlhand products according to manufacturer’s instructions.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 SUBSTITUTES
A. See the Statement of Work for substitutionn approvapprovals.
2.2 MATERIALS ONLY
A. General
1. Furnish electric heat tracing system(s) as shown on theth DDrawings with all components, controls, and accessories required for a complete and operating system.
2. Self-Regulating, Parallel-Resistance Heating Cable System
3. 5 W/ft Self-Regulating Heat Trace Cable, 120V. Raychem 5BTV1-CT (for truck fill piping on the northwest corner of the 241-A-285 building, and where specified on the drawings).
4. 5 W/ft Self-Regulating Heat Trace Cable, 240V. Raychem 5BTV2-CT.
5. 8 W/ft Self-Regulating Heat Trace Cable, 240V. Raychem 8BTV2-CT.
40 41 00 – 2 RPP-SPEC-60023 Rev.07 2/14/2018 - 2:57 PM 308 of 317
RPP-SPEC-60023, Rev. 7
6. End Seal Kit. Raychem E-150.
7. Power Connection box with Red Indicating Light. Raychem JBM-100-L-A.
8. Splice Kit. Raychem S-150. For all below grade splices.
9. Above Insulation Splice Kit Tee. Raychem T-100. For all above grade splices.
10. Above Insulation End Seal Kit with Light. Raychem E-100-L-A.
11. Glass Tape. Raychem GS-54.
B. PipepeFORe MarkeMarkers: Furnish pipe markers with the words “ELECTRIC TRACED” printedtedd with UUV-stable black ink on a durable yellow background. Meet the requirementsments of tthe ASME (ANSI) A13.1, Scheme for the Identification of Piping Systems andnd alsoals SectionS 40 05 13, “Process Piping” Attachment 1, “IdentificationINFORMATON of PipingPipin Systems.” Provide materials and styles that are suitable for outdoor environments.ironment
C. Piping: See Section 40 05 1313,, “Process Piping,” and Section 40 24 10, “Chemical Piping.”
D. Insulation: See Section 40 42 00, “Proc“Process Piping and Equipment Insulation.”
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 PREPARATION A. Examine surfaces and substrates to receive electricectec ricONLYic heaheating cables for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances andd other conditionsconco affecting performance.
1. Surfaces to receive heat tracing shall be cleaned of all dirtdirt, oil, scale, rust, and other foreign matter, and shall be dry and free off frofrost during installation of heat trace cable.
2. Ensure surfaces and pipe in contact with electric heating cables are free of burrs and sharp protrusions.
B. Heat tracing cabling shall fit within the piping insulation as shown on the Drawings and as described in Section 40 42 00, “Process Piping and Equipment Insulation.”
C. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
40 41 00 – 3 RPP-SPEC-60023 Rev.07 2/14/2018 - 2:57 PM 309 of 317
RPP-SPEC-60023, Rev. 7
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. General
1. Heat trace piping and hoses in accordance with individual pipe sections listed in Paragraph 3.5 of Section 40 05 13, “Process Piping,” Section 40 24 10, “Chemical Piping,” the Drawings, and TFC-ENG-STD-02.
2. Install electric heating cable according to the manufacturer’s instructions, and in accordance with NECA 202.
3. Install electric heating cables after piping has been tested and before FORiinsulation is installed. 4.Wrap rratio for hoses shall be 1.3.
5. Forr hosehoses anaand for pre-fabricated heat-traced and insulated pipe spools 5 ft of extraaINFORMATON heating cable shall extend on each side of every hose or pipe spool. Coil extra heating cables and protect during shipping.
6. During field installationnstallationtallation of pre-fabricated heat-traced and insulated pipe spools, wrap flangesnges on bothbo ends with extra heat trace wire as provided. Trim extra length andndd splice each connection with splice kit strapped to the pipe in close proximitymityy to ththe flanges.
7. Install heater cable to allow easy remremoval on maintenance items such as pumps, valves, strainers, or filters.ters. 8. Waterproof all terminations and electricalctricalONLY cconnections.on 9. Attach heater cable directly to the pipe usingsinging the heheating cable manufacturer’s adhesive backed glass fiber tapeape at 1-ft1- intervals.
10. Connect wiring in accordance with the Drawings and SecSection 26 05 19, “Low Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and Cables.”bles
11. Ground equipment in accordance with the Drawings and Section 26 05 26, “Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems.”
12. Notify Buyer after heat trace cabling has been applied, and prior to backfilling or installing insulation on the piping (with the exception of pre-fabricated heat-traced and insulated pipe spools). Obtain approval from Buyer prior to beginning backfill or covering piping.
13. Perform examination on connection of heat tracing before application of insulation and jacketing over joints and other materials and components.
40 41 00 – 4 RPP-SPEC-60023 Rev.07 2/14/2018 - 2:57 PM 310 of 317
RPP-SPEC-60023, Rev. 7
14. Install insulation over piping or hoses with electric heating cables in accordance with Section 40 42 00, “Process Piping and Equipment Insulation.”
15. Install signs at maximum 20-ft intervals along pipe insulation reading: “ELECTRIC TRACED.” Install labels so they will be visible during normal operations.
3.3 FIELD INSPECTIONS AND TESTS
A. Perform the following tests and inspections:
1. Perform tests after cable installation but before application of insulation or ccovering, with the exception of pre-fabricated heat-traced and insulated FORpipe spools (see next line).
2.Heat Heat-traced-tractra hoses and Pre-fabricated heat-traced and insulated pipe spools shallall beINFORMATON testedeste and show compliance before shipping. 3. Test cableblele for electricalelec continuity and insulation integrity before energizing.
4. Test cables to verifyerifyy rating and power input. Energize and measure voltage and current simultanesimultaneously.imultane
B. Repeat tests for continuity, insulationlationation resiresistance, and input power after applying thermal insulation on pipe mountedd cables.
C. Cables will be considered defective if theyeyy do not pass tests and inspections. D. Prepare test and inspection reports. ONLY E. Remove and replace damaged heat trace cables.
F. Protect installed heat trace cables from damage during constructiononstructi and transportation.
END OF SECTION 40 41 00
40 41 00 – 5 RPP-SPEC-60023 Rev.07 2/14/2018 - 2:57 PM 311 of 317
RPP-SPEC-60023, Rev. 7
SECTION 40 42 00
PROCESS PIPING AND EQUIPMENT INSULATION
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 SCOPE OF WORK
A. Installation of above and below grade insulation and jacketing systems.
1.2 RELATED DOCUMENTS / CODES AND STANDARDS
Drawings andd ggeneral provisions of the contract, including General and Supplementary ConditionssFOR and DiDDivision 01 Specification Sections apply to this Section. The followingg documendocuments and others referenced therein, form part of the Contract to the extent designatedd in thisthi Section. Referenced documents are those current as of the date of this Section unlessss INFORMATONotherwisetherw indicated. A. American Societyy of MechMechanical Engineers (ASME)
ASME NQA-1, 2008 with 2009 Addenda Quality Assurance Requirements for NuclNucNuclear Facility Applications
B. ASTM International (ASTM)
ASTM C534 Standardard SpecificationSpecif for Preformed Flexible Elastomericericic CelluCellular Thermal Insulation in Sheet and Tubularr Form
ASTM C547 Standard SpecificationationONLYtion for Mineral Fiber Pipe Insulation
ASTM C795 Standard Specification forr ThermaThermal Insulation for Use in Contact with Austeniticticic StaStainless Steel
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. See the Contract Statement of Work for the submittal process.
B. Approval Required
1. None.
40 42 00 – 1 RPP-SPEC-60023 Rev.07 2/14/2018 - 2:57 PM 312 of 317
RPP-SPEC-60023, Rev. 7
C. Approval Not Required
1. Certificate of Conformance: With delivery, submit a legible certificate stating that the insulation materials meet the requirements of the Drawings and this Section.
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Misrepresented Products: See the Statement of Work or required measures to prevent use of misrepresented products.
B. Documents and records for the insulation jacket examinations as described in 3.4.B.1 shall be delivered to Construction Document Control in accordance with theFOR Contractont Statement of Work. 1.5 PERMITS A. Permits arere aaddressedddrddINFORMATONess by TOC work control process. 1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE,AGE,GE, ANDAND HANDLING
A. See the Contract Statementtementment of Work for general requirements.
B. Deliver insulation and associatedociated adaadhesives to site in manufacturer’s containers with manufacturer’s stamp orr label cleclearly shown.
C. Protect insulation and associated componentsomponentmponen against dirt, water, and chemical damage.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 SUBSTITUTES ONLY
A. See the Statement of Work for substitution approvals.
2.2 MATERIALS
A. Inside Piping Insulation System:
1. Armaflex NH flexible expanded closed-cell elastomeric thermal insulation in accordance with ASTM C534 Grade 1. Thermal conductivity of 0.27 BTU-in/hr-ft2-°F at 75°F. Insulation thickness shall be in accordance with Table 1.
a. Products that come in contact with Stainless Steel pressurized pipe shall be in accordance with ASTM C795.
2. Outer covering: Fiberglass fabric impregnated with silicone rubber (min temp resistance 500° F), secured with Hook and Loop fasteners or similar
40 42 00 – 2 RPP-SPEC-60023 Rev.07 2/14/2018 - 2:57 PM 313 of 317
RPP-SPEC-60023, Rev. 7
(do not use aluminum wire) according to manufacturer’s specifications. All horizontal joints to be on the bottom.
3. Flashing compound: Non-shrinking, flexible, clear, 94% non-volatile, for service temperatures of -30°F through 250°F, RTV silicone.
B. Pre-fabricated Heat-traced and Insulated Pipe Spools:
1. Armaflex NH flexible expanded closed-cell elastomeric thermal insulation in accordance with ASTM C534 Grade 1. Thermal conductivity of 0.27 BTU-in/hr-ft2-°F at 75°F. Insulation thickness shall be in accordance with Table 1.
aa. Products that come in contact with Stainless Steel pressurized pipe FOR shall be in accordance with ASTM C795.
2.P Pipeipe SpoolSpooSpo Outer covering: Stainless Steel roll jacketing at least 0.016” thickckk withwitw h a 3 mil integrally bonded moisture retarder over the surface for contactINFORMATON with theth insulation (ITW Insulation Systems, or equivalent).
3. Flashing compound:ompound: Non-shrinking, flexible, clear, 94% non-volatile, for service temperaturesraturestures of -30°F through 250°F, RTV silicone.
C. Outside Above Grade Piping,ngg, HosesHoses, and Pipe Spool Field Joints Insulation System:
1. Armaflex NH flexible expandednded closeclosclosed-cell elastomeric thermal insulation in accordance with ASTM C53434 Grade 1. Thermal conductivity of 0.27 BTU-in/hr-ft2-°F at 75°F. Insulationtion thicknessthick shall be in accordance with Table 1. ONLY a. Products that come in contact withh StainlesStainleStainless Steel pressurized pipe shall be in accordance with ASTM C795.795.
2. Armaflex WB water-based latex enamel insulationn coatincoating.
3. Field Piping Outer Covering: Fiberglass fabric impregnated with silicone rubber (min temp resistance 350° F), color to be white, secured with Hook and Loop fasteners or similar (do not use aluminum wire) according to manufacturer’s specifications.
4. Flashing compound: Non-shrinking, flexible, clear, 94% non-volatile, for service temperatures of -30°F through 250°F, RTV silicone.
D. Below Grade Pipe Insulation System:
1. Insulation shall be Foamglas insulation, ASTM C 552, “Specification for Cellular Glass Thermal Insulation,” by Pittsburgh Corning Corporation.
40 42 00 – 3 RPP-SPEC-60023 Rev.07 2/14/2018 - 2:57 PM 314 of 317
RPP-SPEC-60023, Rev. 7
Thermal conductivity of 0.28 BTU-in/hr-ft2-°F at 50°F. Insulation thickness shall be in accordance with Table 1.
a. Products that come in contact with Stainless Steel pressurized pipe shall be in accordance with ASTM C795.
2. The pipe and fittings outer covering insulation jacket shall be PITTWRAP®45 SS jacketing (FI-179A) with sealant PITTSEAL®45 727 (FI-255) by Pittsburgh Corning Corporation.
3. Oversized insulation shall be at least 2” thick, of the same material as described in 2.2.D.1 above, per Pittsburgh Corning Corporation specifications and as detailed on the Drawings.
4.FORSupp Support blocks within oversized insulation shall be procured/fabricated as specifiespecified in Pittsburgh Corning Corporation specifications and as detailed on the DrDrawings.D
2.3 MATERIAL QUALITYITYINFORMATON ASSURANCEASSAS
A. Products shall beobtained frfrom qualified suppliers, or be commercial grade items (CGIs) meeting acceptanceptanceance criteriacrit specified in this Section. Commercial grade dedication will be performedrmed byy BBuyer.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 PREPARATION
A. Surfaces to receive insulation shall be cleanedeaned ofo all dirt, oil, scale, rust, and foreign matter, and shall be dry and free of frost ONLYduringdudurin application of insulation. B. Verify that examination and leak/pressure testingg of line oro pipe spools have been completed, and installation of heat tracing has been cocompleted,mpletemplet as applicable.
C. Verify that insulation is configured to accommodate the heat tractrace as shown on the Drawings.
D. All standing water shall be removed from underground trenches prior to installing insulation.
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. General
45 PITTWRAP and PITTSEAL are registered trademarks of Pittsburgh Corning Corporation, Pittsburgh, Pennsylvania.
40 42 00 – 4 RPP-SPEC-60023 Rev.07 2/14/2018 - 2:57 PM 315 of 317
RPP-SPEC-60023, Rev. 7
1. The adhesives of self-adhesive labels, tape, and marking materials used for temporary marking of Stainless Steel shall contain less than 210 ppm total halogens (free and chemically combined).
2. Warning tape should be applied on piping insulation where piping is equipped with electric heating cables.
B. Cracked or broken insulation shall be replaced or repaired as required in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions. Inspect to be certain there are no openings or pinholes in the jacketing.
C. Apply insulation over welds after weld examination and satisfactory leak testing, and after application of epoxy coating.
D. HeatFORat TracinTracing: Ensure heat trace is installed as specified on the Drawings and per Sectiononn 40 41 00, “Process Piping and Equipment Heat Tracing.”
E. Insulation shallhall be aapplied over the electrical heat tracing and secured using glass fiber reinforceddINFORMATON tape. PPipe insulation shall accommodate the heat trace cable shown on Drawings.ings.
F. Pre-fabricated Heat-tracedracedced and Insulated Pipe Spools for Above Grade Piping Runs as Specified on thee DrawingDrawings
1. Install insulation and roll covericovercovering. Maintain a 6” setback to all flange locations.
2. Fill voids inside pipe covering protectioprotection saddle with insulation.
3. Install Stainless Steel roll jacketingover ininsulationu with minimum overlaps per manufacturer’s instructions.ONLY SeamSeamam to be located on the bottom. Install directly over pipe coveringng protectprotection saddles. Use Stainless Steel banding, installation and spacingcinging per mmanufacturer’s specifications. Also locate banding at both edgeses of everevevery pipe covering protection saddle.
4. Permanently mark all the way around jacketing, with paint or otherwise, the center location of each pipe covering protection saddle that is hidden directly below the roll jacketing.
5. Install two piece Stainless Steel jacketing elbows with minimum overlaps and banding per manufacturer’s instructions.
6. Seal all gaps to be watertight.
G. Above Grade Field Piping Insulation System
40 42 00 – 5 RPP-SPEC-60023 Rev.07 2/14/2018 - 2:57 PM 316 of 317
RPP-SPEC-60023, Rev. 7
1. Install insulation over joints only after NDE and leak/pressure testing of line has been completed. 2. After heat trace and heat trace splice kit installation, and before insulation, all field joints and below grade to above grade transitions are to be wrapped with petrolatum, composite, or wax adhesive sealing tape, installed per manufacturer’s instructions. 3. Insulate valves using removable insulation pads, and any fittings not accommodated with straight jacketed pipe insulation. 4. Coat insulation with Armaflex WB finish per manufacturer’s instructions. 5. Install fiberglass fabric outer coating over Armaflex WB finish. Overlap FORdidistance of the fibergrlass fabric installed over flanged joints or valves shall be at least 2 inches over the edge of the pipe spool Stainless Steel roll jacketingjacketinjacketing. All horizontal joints to be on the bottom. Cut jacketing to fit tightlyghtlyy aroundara heat trace splice kit protrusions. 6. Seal jacketingcketingINFORMATON anand any protrusions with flashing compound so as to be watertight.t H. Hose Insulation Systemm 1. Install Armaflex insulation,sulation,lation, coveredc with silicon impregnated fiberglass fabric. I. Below Grade Piping Insulation Systemstemem 1. Install insulation and jacketing perer the mmamanufacturer’s instructions. Ensure that the all joints and seamss are properlypro sealed. 2. Verify piping is supported, anchored, anddONLY guided as specified in the manufacturer’s instructions and on the Drawings.wings. 3. Backfill insulation in accordance with the manufacturer’sufacturerfacture s instructions and the Drawings. 4. Expansion loops, piping supports, and fill in the bends and expansion loops shall be as specified in the manufacturer’s instructions and on the Drawings. J. Transition from Below Grade to Above Grade Piping Insulation 1. Extend below grade insulation and PITTWRAP jacketing with PITTSEAL a minimum of 4” above grade. 2. Overlap with above grade fiberglass fabric covering down to within 1” of grade.
40 42 00 – 6 RPP-SPEC-60023 Rev.07 2/14/2018 - 2:57 PM 317 of 317
RPP-SPEC-60023, Rev. 7
3.3 INSULATION SCHEDULE
A. Piping and Hose Insulation Schedule:
Table 1. Piping
Minimum (see corresponding Design Required Location Insulation Purpose Section) Temperature Insulation Thickness Incidental Human “Hot Water” Inside 3/8” See Section Contact “Cold Water” Below Grade40 05 13, 1.5” Freeze Protection “Cold Water” Above Grade“Process 1” “Hot WaWater” Below GradePiping,” 1.5” Freeze Protection & Paragraph 3.5 Maintain Process “HotFORFot Water”Water Above Grade 1” O Temperature See Section Chemical Piping Below Grade 1.5” Freeze Protection & R 40 24 10, Maintain Process “Chemical Chemical Pipingg AboveAbA Grade 2” Temperature INFORMATONINN Piping” 3.4 FIELD QUALITY CONTROLTROL
A. Cleaning
1. Mechanical cleaning: Remove loose dirt, scale, and debris by brushing, wiping, or other mechanicalcal methodmetho approved by the Buyer until there is no visible dirt, scale, or debris.ris.is.
B. Examinations 1. Insulation Jacket: Visually examine alll laps,ONLYaps, seams,sesea and field applied coated areas to ensure that these areas are sealed frofrom water entry in accordance with this Specification and productuct data shsheets.
END OF SECTION 40 42 00
END OF SPECIFICATION
40 42 00 – 7